PDF document, Blackboard Learn Instructor Guide Complete Manual

PDF document, Blackboard Learn Instructor Guide Complete Manual
Blackboard Learn™ Instructor Guide for Release 9.1
Publication Date: March 16, 2010
Worldwide Headquarters
International Headquarters
Blackboard Inc.
Blackboard International B.V.
650 Massachusetts Avenue NW
Sixth Floor
Washington, DC 20001-3796
USA
Dam 27 2nd Floor
1012 JS Amsterdam
The Netherlands
+1 800 424 9299 toll free US & Canada
+1 202 463 4860 telephone
+31 20 5206884 (NL) telephone
+1 202 463 4863 fax
+31 20 5206885 (NL) fax
www.blackboard.com
www.blackboard.com
Copyright © 1997-2010. Blackboard, the Blackboard logo, BbWorld, Blackboard Learn,
Blackboard Transact, Blackboard Connect, the Blackboard Outcomes System, Behind the
Blackboard, and Connect-ED are trademarks or registered trademarks of Blackboard Inc. or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. U.S. Patent Numbers: 6,988,138;
7,493,396; 6,816,878.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries. Sun, Solaris, and Java are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered
trademark of Oracle Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat is a
registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Linux is a
registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and/or other countries. Apache is a
trademark of The Apache Software Foundation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macromedia, Authorware and Shockwave are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Real Player and Real Audio Movie
are trademarks of RealNetworks in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat
Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries. Macintosh and QuickTime are registered trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Crystal Reports is a trademark
of Business Objects in the United States and/or other countries. WebEQ is a trademark of Design
Science, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. JSpell is a trademark of The Solution
Café in the United States and/or other countries.
Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective
owners.
No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the written permission of the publisher, Blackboard Inc.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Blackboard Learn™ Instructor Guide for Release 9.1 ............................................. 1
About the Blackboard Learn Instructor Guide .............................................................................................14
How the Guide is Organized .....................................................................................................................14
Guide Conventions ....................................................................................................................................14
Using this Guide ........................................................................................................................................14
Guide Updates ...........................................................................................................................................14
Welcome to Blackboard Learn ......................................................................................................................15
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................15
The Blackboard Environment ................................................................................................................15
Page Header ...........................................................................................................................................15
Control Frame ........................................................................................................................................15
Action Bar .............................................................................................................................................15
Menu Area .............................................................................................................................................15
Edit Mode ON/OFF ...............................................................................................................................16
Tabs .......................................................................................................................................................16
See Also .................................................................................................................................................16
Blackboard Learn Components .................................................................................................................17
Blackboard Learn Components .............................................................................................................17
Courses ......................................................................................................................................................18
Organization Web Sites .........................................................................................................................18
Functions ...............................................................................................................................................18
Course Menu .............................................................................................................................................19
About the Course Menu .........................................................................................................................19
View new Content .................................................................................................................................19
Set up Menu display options .................................................................................................................19
Set up Tool box display .........................................................................................................................20
Map............................................................................................................................................................20
About the Map .......................................................................................................................................20
View the Map from the Course Menu ...................................................................................................20
View the Map from the Performance Dashboard ..................................................................................20
View the Content Map from a Virtual Classroom .................................................................................21
Use the Map as a selection window .......................................................................................................21
Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................21
Find the Control Panel ...........................................................................................................................21
Functions ...............................................................................................................................................21
Course Roles..............................................................................................................................................22
Course Builder .......................................................................................................................................22
Grader ....................................................................................................................................................23
Guest ......................................................................................................................................................23
Instructor ...............................................................................................................................................23
Student ...................................................................................................................................................23
Teaching Assistant.................................................................................................................................24
About Course Groups ................................................................................................................................24
Course Group Tools ..............................................................................................................................24
Working in Blackboard Learn .......................................................................................................................26
In this section.........................................................................................................................................26
About The Notifications Dashboard ..........................................................................................................27
Where Is It? ...........................................................................................................................................27
Who Can Use It? ...................................................................................................................................27
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Turn It On .................................................................................................................................28
Email Notifications ................................................................................................................................28
See Also .................................................................................................................................................28
Rules for the Display or Removal of Notifications in the Notifications Dashboard ..............................29
Using the Notifications Dashboard ........................................................................................................31
Notifications Dashboard ........................................................................................................................33
Control the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard ............................................................................36
Navigation .................................................................................................................................................37
Linking to a Course ...............................................................................................................................38
About the Menu Area ................................................................................................................................38
Menu Area Components ........................................................................................................................38
Editing the Menu Area ..........................................................................................................................38
See Also .................................................................................................................................................39
About Contextual Menus ...........................................................................................................................39
Common Contextual Menu Options ......................................................................................................39
Other Contextual Menu Options ............................................................................................................39
Editing the Paging Options ........................................................................................................................39
Prerequisites and Warnings ...................................................................................................................39
How to Edit Paging Options ..................................................................................................................40
Language Packs .........................................................................................................................................40
About Language Packs ..........................................................................................................................40
Set a Language Pack ..............................................................................................................................40
Course Areas not Impacted by Language Pack Selections ....................................................................40
Edit Mode ..................................................................................................................................................41
Functions ...............................................................................................................................................41
Searching for Users in a Course ................................................................................................................41
User Search Options ..............................................................................................................................41
Working with Text ....................................................................................................................................42
See Also .................................................................................................................................................42
Entering Text .............................................................................................................................................42
Text Box Options ..................................................................................................................................42
File Names .............................................................................................................................................43
Missing Image Detection in the Text Editors ........................................................................................43
Text Editor .................................................................................................................................................44
About the Text Editor ............................................................................................................................44
Compatible Browsers ............................................................................................................................44
Text Editor Features ..............................................................................................................................44
Attaching Files in the Text Editor .........................................................................................................47
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Text Editor .................................................................................................47
Missing Image Detection in the Text Editors ........................................................................................49
Differences Between Text Editor and Text Editor ................................................................................50
Selecting Dates ..........................................................................................................................................50
Setting Availability by Date ..................................................................................................................50
HTML Formatting .....................................................................................................................................50
What is HTML? .....................................................................................................................................50
Paragraph Formatting ............................................................................................................................51
Text Formatting .....................................................................................................................................51
Creating Links with HTML ...................................................................................................................51
Creating HTML with Other Tools .........................................................................................................52
Incorporating HTML Generated with Other Applications ....................................................................52
Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................................................53
Other HTML Resources ........................................................................................................................53
Link to File ................................................................................................................................................53
Fields .....................................................................................................................................................53
Insert Multimedia File ...............................................................................................................................53
Image Fields ..........................................................................................................................................54
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
MPEG or AVI Fields .............................................................................................................................54
QuickTime Fields ..................................................................................................................................55
Audio Fields ..........................................................................................................................................55
Flash or Shockwave Fields ....................................................................................................................56
About Spell Check .....................................................................................................................................56
Word Lists .............................................................................................................................................56
Personal Word List and Cookies ...........................................................................................................57
Using Spell Check .....................................................................................................................................57
Functions ...............................................................................................................................................57
Recognized Errors .................................................................................................................................58
Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ Equation Editor ....................................................................58
MathML Equation Editor ......................................................................................................................58
Functions ...............................................................................................................................................58
Adding and Editing Equations ...................................................................................................................59
Functions ...............................................................................................................................................59
Tip .........................................................................................................................................................59
Content ..........................................................................................................................................................60
Adaptive Release and Reporting ...............................................................................................................61
About Adaptive Release ........................................................................................................................62
Adaptive Release Functions ..................................................................................................................65
Adaptive Release Criteria ......................................................................................................................68
Review Status ........................................................................................................................................74
User Progress .........................................................................................................................................76
About the Performance Dashboard ........................................................................................................77
Statistics Tracking .................................................................................................................................79
Course Files ...............................................................................................................................................80
About Course Files ................................................................................................................................81
Working in Course Files ........................................................................................................................82
Organizing Files and Folders .................................................................................................................85
Course Files Permissions .......................................................................................................................86
Locating Files and Folders ....................................................................................................................87
Viewing Files and Folders in Course Files ............................................................................................88
Linking to Course Files .........................................................................................................................89
Downloading Files and Folders .............................................................................................................91
Course Files and Web Folders (WebDAV) ...........................................................................................92
Course Files and the Content Collection ...............................................................................................94
Mashups.....................................................................................................................................................95
About Mashups ......................................................................................................................................96
Creating a Mashup Item ........................................................................................................................97
Creating a Mashup Item using the Text Editor ......................................................................................99
Learning Modules ....................................................................................................................................100
Learning Modules ................................................................................................................................101
About the Learning Module Table of Contents ...................................................................................102
Adding Folders to a Learning Module .................................................................................................104
Adding Content to a Learning Module ................................................................................................105
Content Areas ..........................................................................................................................................106
Adding a Content Area ........................................................................................................................106
Edit Content Areas ..............................................................................................................................107
Manage Content Areas ........................................................................................................................107
Course Content ........................................................................................................................................107
Content Type Descriptions ..................................................................................................................107
Content Availability ............................................................................................................................108
Content Options ...................................................................................................................................108
Manage Course Menu..............................................................................................................................109
How to Manage the Course Menu .......................................................................................................109
Creating Content Items ............................................................................................................................110
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Create an Item in a Content Area ............................................................................................110
How to Create an Item in Course Files ................................................................................................110
Attach a File to an Item .......................................................................................................................110
How to Embed Image Files .................................................................................................................111
Copy and Move Content ..........................................................................................................................112
About Copy and Move ........................................................................................................................112
Copy Content .......................................................................................................................................112
Move Content ......................................................................................................................................112
Content Folders .......................................................................................................................................113
How to Create a Folder ........................................................................................................................113
Folder Content Availability .................................................................................................................113
Content Modules .....................................................................................................................................113
Look and Feel ......................................................................................................................................114
Module Behavior .................................................................................................................................114
Creating and Editing Modules .................................................................................................................114
How to Create Content Modules .........................................................................................................114
How to Edit Content Modules .............................................................................................................114
Creating and Editing Module Pages ........................................................................................................115
How to Create Module Pages ..............................................................................................................115
How to Edit Module Pages ..................................................................................................................115
How to Customize Module Pages........................................................................................................115
Adding Textbook Information .................................................................................................................115
Textbooks and your Students ..............................................................................................................115
About the Textbook Search .................................................................................................................116
Before you Begin .................................................................................................................................116
How to Add Textbook Information .....................................................................................................116
Manual Entry .......................................................................................................................................116
Syllabus ...................................................................................................................................................117
How to Add a Syllabus ........................................................................................................................117
Use an Existing File .............................................................................................................................117
Create a New Syllabus with Syllabus Builder .....................................................................................117
Designing a Syllabus ...........................................................................................................................118
Syllabus Lessons .................................................................................................................................118
About Lesson Plans .................................................................................................................................119
Curriculum Resources .........................................................................................................................119
Creating Lesson Plans .............................................................................................................................119
Creating a Lesson Plan ........................................................................................................................119
Entering Content Information ..............................................................................................................120
Lesson Plan Sections ...........................................................................................................................120
Adding Multimedia Files .........................................................................................................................120
Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................120
Displaying Image Files ........................................................................................................................120
Displaying Audio Files ........................................................................................................................121
Displaying Video Files ........................................................................................................................121
How to Add a Multimedia File ............................................................................................................121
Creating a Blank Page .............................................................................................................................122
About Blank Pages ..............................................................................................................................122
How to Create a Blank Page from a Folder .........................................................................................122
How to Create Blank Page as Part of the Course Menu ......................................................................122
Adding a URL .........................................................................................................................................122
Add a URL ..........................................................................................................................................122
Course Links............................................................................................................................................123
How to Create a Course Link ..............................................................................................................123
About File Attachments ...........................................................................................................................123
Accepted Characters in File Names .....................................................................................................124
Recognized Content Attachments........................................................................................................124
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Tests ..........................................................................................................................................125
Tests and Surveys ................................................................................................................................125
Assignments ........................................................................................................................................125
Deleting a Deployed Test or Survey from a Content Area Before Attempts are Made .......................126
Deleting a Deployed Test or Survey from a Content Area After Attempts Have Been Made ............126
Delete an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager ....................................................................126
Deploying Tests and Surveys ..................................................................................................................127
About Unavailable Tests .....................................................................................................................127
Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................127
How to Add a Test or Survey to a Content Area .................................................................................127
How to Make a Test or Survey Available............................................................................................127
How to Control the Presentation of a Test or Survey ..........................................................................128
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................129
Creating Assignments ..............................................................................................................................129
How to Create an Assignment .............................................................................................................130
Tools Area ...............................................................................................................................................130
How to Link a Tool to a Content Area ................................................................................................130
Tool Linking ............................................................................................................................................131
How to Link a Tool to a Content Area ................................................................................................131
Using Add Files to Create Rich HTML Content .....................................................................................131
How to Create a File ............................................................................................................................131
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................132
Content Metadata.....................................................................................................................................132
How to Create Course Content Metadata ............................................................................................132
Metadata Options.................................................................................................................................132
The Open Standards Content Player ........................................................................................................133
Using the Content Player in a Course ..................................................................................................133
SCORM, NLN and IMS Packages ......................................................................................................134
Who Creates the Content? ...................................................................................................................134
Managing the Content Types ...............................................................................................................134
Attempt Data .......................................................................................................................................135
Adding SCORM, IMS, and NLN Content ...............................................................................................135
How to Add SCORM Content .............................................................................................................135
How to Add IMS Content ....................................................................................................................136
How to Add NLN Content...................................................................................................................137
Course Tools................................................................................................................................................139
Announcements .......................................................................................................................................139
Creating Announcements ....................................................................................................................140
Editing Announcements ......................................................................................................................140
Deleting Announcements ....................................................................................................................140
About Blackboard Scholar.......................................................................................................................140
Find this Page ......................................................................................................................................140
How to Register with Blackboard Scholar ..........................................................................................140
How to Import External Links into Blackboard Scholar .....................................................................141
See Also ...............................................................................................................................................141
About Blogs .............................................................................................................................................141
See Also ...............................................................................................................................................141
Creating a Blog ....................................................................................................................................142
Creating Blog Posts .............................................................................................................................143
Creating Blog Comments ....................................................................................................................144
Editing and Managing Blogs ...............................................................................................................145
Collaboration Tools .................................................................................................................................147
Collaboration Tools .............................................................................................................................148
Collaboration Sessions ........................................................................................................................150
Create/Edit Collaboration Session .......................................................................................................151
Virtual Classroom ................................................................................................................................152
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Menu Bar for Virtual Classroom .........................................................................................................153
Classroom Tool box ............................................................................................................................154
Whiteboard ..........................................................................................................................................155
Group Browser ....................................................................................................................................157
Course Map .........................................................................................................................................158
Ask Question .......................................................................................................................................159
Question Inbox ....................................................................................................................................160
Chat .....................................................................................................................................................161
Record Menu .......................................................................................................................................162
Session Recordings ..............................................................................................................................163
Recording Properties ...........................................................................................................................164
Contacts ...................................................................................................................................................164
Add or Edit Contacts and Folders ............................................................................................................165
Add or Edit a Contact ..........................................................................................................................165
Fields ...................................................................................................................................................165
Add or Edit a Folder ............................................................................................................................166
Course Calendar ......................................................................................................................................166
Create or Edit a Course Calendar Event ..................................................................................................167
How to Create a Course Event ............................................................................................................167
How to Edit a Course Event ................................................................................................................167
How to Delete a Course Event ............................................................................................................167
Calendar Jump To....................................................................................................................................168
How to Jump To a specific month, week, or day ................................................................................168
Add Portfolios to a Course ......................................................................................................................168
How to Create a New Personal Portfolio .............................................................................................168
How to Create a Template-Based Portfolio .........................................................................................169
See Also ...............................................................................................................................................169
Discussion Board .....................................................................................................................................170
About the Discussion Board ................................................................................................................171
View and Organize Discussion Board Content ...................................................................................173
Creating and Editing Forums ...............................................................................................................180
Archiving Discussion Board Forums and Threads ..............................................................................182
Create a Thread....................................................................................................................................183
Respond to a Discussion Board Post ...................................................................................................184
Subscriptions .......................................................................................................................................185
Grading Discussion Board Participation .............................................................................................186
Peer Review Through the Discussion Board .......................................................................................188
Controlling Discussion Board Content ................................................................................................189
Delegating Discussion Board Administration .....................................................................................191
Incorporating Discussion Board Forums into the Learning Process....................................................192
Discussion Board Statistics .................................................................................................................193
About the Glossary ..................................................................................................................................193
Create Glossary Term ..........................................................................................................................194
Upload Glossary ..................................................................................................................................195
Download Glossary .............................................................................................................................197
About Journals .........................................................................................................................................197
See Also ...............................................................................................................................................197
Creating a Journal ................................................................................................................................198
Creating Journal Entries ......................................................................................................................199
Creating Journal Comments ................................................................................................................200
Editing and Managing Journals ...........................................................................................................201
Messages .................................................................................................................................................202
How to Send a Message.......................................................................................................................202
Rubrics.....................................................................................................................................................202
About Rubrics ......................................................................................................................................202
Create Rubric .......................................................................................................................................203
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Editing the Rubric Grid .......................................................................................................................203
Copying and Editing a Rubric .............................................................................................................203
Applying a Rubric in the Grade Center ...............................................................................................203
About SafeAssign ....................................................................................................................................204
How SafeAssignments Work...............................................................................................................204
Global Reference Database .................................................................................................................205
SafeAssign Originality Reports ...........................................................................................................205
Interpreting SafeAssign Scores............................................................................................................205
Grade Center Integration .....................................................................................................................205
Create a SafeAssignment .....................................................................................................................206
Direct Submit ......................................................................................................................................207
Managing Submissions ........................................................................................................................209
SafeAssign Originality Reports ...........................................................................................................210
Self and Peer Assessment Building Block ...............................................................................................211
Creating a New Assessment ................................................................................................................213
Importing an Assessment.....................................................................................................................215
Exporting an Assessment.....................................................................................................................216
Adding a Question to an Assessment ..................................................................................................217
Adding a Default Question ..................................................................................................................218
Adding Criteria to a Question ..............................................................................................................219
Adding Default Criteria .......................................................................................................................221
Adding a Question from the Library ...................................................................................................222
Previewing the Assessment .................................................................................................................223
Completing an Assessment ..................................................................................................................224
Evaluating an Assessment ...................................................................................................................225
Managing an Assessment ....................................................................................................................226
Rules for Editing Tests ........................................................................................................................229
Editing an Assessment .........................................................................................................................232
Monitoring the Submissions ................................................................................................................234
Monitoring the Evaluations .................................................................................................................236
Viewing the Results .............................................................................................................................238
Send Email ..............................................................................................................................................239
Find this Page ......................................................................................................................................239
How to Send Email ..............................................................................................................................239
Tasks........................................................................................................................................................239
Create or Edit Course Tasks ................................................................................................................240
How to Create a Course Task ..............................................................................................................240
How to Edit a Course Task ..................................................................................................................240
How to Delete a Course Task ..............................................................................................................240
How to Change the Status of a Course Task .......................................................................................240
Tests, Surveys, and Pools ........................................................................................................................242
About Tests..........................................................................................................................................244
Test and Survey Options......................................................................................................................245
About the Test and Survey Canvas ......................................................................................................248
Creating and Editing a Test or Survey .................................................................................................250
Importing Tests, Surveys, and Pools ...................................................................................................251
Deploying Tests and Surveys ..............................................................................................................252
About Test and Survey Status .............................................................................................................255
About Surveys .....................................................................................................................................256
About the Pool Manager ......................................................................................................................257
Creating and Editing Pools ..................................................................................................................259
About Find Questions ..........................................................................................................................261
Reusing Questions ...............................................................................................................................262
Creating and Editing a Random Block ................................................................................................263
Question Sets .......................................................................................................................................265
About Question Settings ......................................................................................................................266
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Question Metadata ....................................................................................................................268
Uploading Questions ...........................................................................................................................270
Calculated Formula Questions .............................................................................................................273
Calculated Numeric Answer Questions ...............................................................................................275
Either/Or Questions .............................................................................................................................276
File Response Questions ......................................................................................................................277
File Response Questions ......................................................................................................................278
Fill In Multiple Blanks Questions .......................................................................................................279
Fill in the Blank Questions ..................................................................................................................280
Hot Spot Questions ..............................................................................................................................281
Jumbled Sentence Questions ...............................................................................................................283
Matching Questions .............................................................................................................................284
Multiple Answer Questions .................................................................................................................285
Multiple Choice Questions ..................................................................................................................286
Opinion Scale/Likert Questions ...........................................................................................................287
Ordering Questions ..............................................................................................................................288
Quiz Bowl Questions ...........................................................................................................................289
Short Answer Questions ......................................................................................................................290
True/False Questions ...........................................................................................................................291
About Wikis ............................................................................................................................................291
Course Wikis .......................................................................................................................................291
Group Wikis ........................................................................................................................................291
Create Wiki..........................................................................................................................................292
Create Wiki Page .................................................................................................................................292
Edit Wiki Content ................................................................................................................................292
Link to other Wiki Pages .....................................................................................................................293
Comments ............................................................................................................................................293
Participation Summary ........................................................................................................................293
Grading ................................................................................................................................................293
Customization ..............................................................................................................................................294
Enrollment Options .................................................................................................................................294
Find this Page ......................................................................................................................................294
Select Enrollment Options ...................................................................................................................294
Guest and Observer Access .....................................................................................................................294
Find this Page ......................................................................................................................................295
Allow Guest Access ............................................................................................................................295
Allow Observer Access .......................................................................................................................295
Properties .................................................................................................................................................295
Find this Page ......................................................................................................................................295
Name and Description .........................................................................................................................295
Classification .......................................................................................................................................295
Set Availability ....................................................................................................................................295
Set Course Duration ............................................................................................................................296
Categorize Course ...............................................................................................................................296
Select Language Pack ..........................................................................................................................296
Course Files .........................................................................................................................................296
Course Style ............................................................................................................................................297
Style Options .......................................................................................................................................297
Managing Tools .......................................................................................................................................297
Functions .............................................................................................................................................297
Filter Display .......................................................................................................................................298
Building Blocks ...................................................................................................................................298
Packages and Utilities..................................................................................................................................299
Bulk Delete ..............................................................................................................................................299
Check Course Links ................................................................................................................................300
Enabling Check Course Links .............................................................................................................300
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course areas checked by Check Course Links ....................................................................................300
When to use Check Course Links ........................................................................................................300
Steps to use Check Course Links ........................................................................................................301
Course Copy ............................................................................................................................................301
Select Copy Type ................................................................................................................................301
Select Copy Options ............................................................................................................................302
Behavior of Copied Materials ..............................................................................................................302
Resolving Course Items .......................................................................................................................304
Course Cartridge Content ....................................................................................................................304
Export/ Archive Course ...........................................................................................................................304
Export a Course ...................................................................................................................................305
Archive a Course .................................................................................................................................305
Download the Course Package ............................................................................................................305
View Basic or Detailed Log ................................................................................................................305
Import Course Cartridge ..........................................................................................................................305
How to Import a Course Cartridge ......................................................................................................306
Copy Protection ...................................................................................................................................306
Download a Course Cartridge .............................................................................................................306
How Students access Course Cartridges ..............................................................................................306
Cartridge functionality .........................................................................................................................307
Import Package and View Logs ...............................................................................................................307
How to Import a Package ....................................................................................................................307
View Logs ...........................................................................................................................................308
Move Files to Course Files ......................................................................................................................308
About Chalk Titles ..................................................................................................................................308
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................309
Privacy Settings ...................................................................................................................................309
Manage Chalk Titles................................................................................................................................309
Find this Page ......................................................................................................................................309
Fields ...................................................................................................................................................310
Users and Groups ........................................................................................................................................311
Users ....................................................................................................................................................311
Groups .................................................................................................................................................311
Users Page ...............................................................................................................................................311
Enroll Users .........................................................................................................................................311
Other Functions ...................................................................................................................................311
Create a User .......................................................................................................................................312
Find Users to Enroll.............................................................................................................................312
Batch Enroll .........................................................................................................................................312
Creating Groups.......................................................................................................................................313
About Self-Enroll ................................................................................................................................313
About Manual Enroll ...........................................................................................................................313
About Random Enroll ..........................................................................................................................314
How to Create a Single Group .............................................................................................................314
How to Create a Group Set ..................................................................................................................314
Editing Groups ........................................................................................................................................315
Group Settings .........................................................................................................................................315
About Course Group Tools......................................................................................................................315
Grade Center................................................................................................................................................318
Grade Center Features and Navigation ....................................................................................................319
Grade Center Features .........................................................................................................................320
Exploring the Grade Center .................................................................................................................323
Grade Details Page ..............................................................................................................................326
Customizing the Grade Center ............................................................................................................328
Sharing Grade Center Data ..................................................................................................................334
Setting Up the Grade Center ....................................................................................................................336
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grading Schemas .................................................................................................................................337
Categories ............................................................................................................................................340
Grading Periods ...................................................................................................................................342
About Grade Center Columns .............................................................................................................345
Adding Columns ..................................................................................................................................347
Editing Grade Center Columns ............................................................................................................349
Adding Students to the Grade Center ..................................................................................................351
About Smart Views .................................................................................................................................353
Tasks associated with Smart Views .....................................................................................................353
About Favorites ...................................................................................................................................353
How to Create a Smart View ...............................................................................................................354
About the Formula Editor ....................................................................................................................354
How to Edit a Smart View ...................................................................................................................354
How to Delete a Smart View ...............................................................................................................355
How to View a Smart View as the Main Grade Center View .............................................................355
Creating a Custom Smart View ...........................................................................................................356
Using the Grade Center ...........................................................................................................................359
Entering Grades ...................................................................................................................................360
Adding Comments to a Grade Entry ...................................................................................................363
About Changing Grades ......................................................................................................................364
Grade History ......................................................................................................................................365
Deleting and Reverting Grades ............................................................................................................367
Exempting Grades ...............................................................................................................................368
Uploading or Downloading Grade Center Items/ Working Offline ....................................................369
Calculating Grades ..............................................................................................................................372
Column Types and Functions ..............................................................................................................373
Creating Average Grade Columns .......................................................................................................375
Creating Weighted Grade Columns .....................................................................................................378
Creating Total Points Columns ............................................................................................................383
Creating Minimum/Maximum Columns .............................................................................................386
Working with Grade Center Reports ...................................................................................................389
Viewing Grade Center Statistics ..........................................................................................................391
Sending Email from the Grade Center .................................................................................................394
Saving and Reusing Grade Center Data and Settings ..............................................................................395
Downloading Grade Center Data.........................................................................................................396
Archiving and Copying Courses..........................................................................................................398
About the Early Warning System ................................................................................................................400
Important Information about the Early Warning System ........................................................................400
Early Warning System and the Grade Center ..........................................................................................400
Early Warning System and the Performance Dashboard .........................................................................400
See Also ...................................................................................................................................................400
Managing Early Warning System Rules ..................................................................................................401
Add Rule..............................................................................................................................................401
Edit Rule ..............................................................................................................................................401
Remove Rule .......................................................................................................................................401
Refresh Rules ......................................................................................................................................402
See Also ...............................................................................................................................................402
Reviewing Alerts and Notifying Users ....................................................................................................402
Viewing Alerts ....................................................................................................................................402
Sending Email .....................................................................................................................................402
Viewing the Notification Log ..............................................................................................................403
See Also ...............................................................................................................................................403
Organizing and Managing Content ..............................................................................................................404
About organizing and managing content .............................................................................................404
In this section.......................................................................................................................................404
Organize Content in Folders ....................................................................................................................404
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Organizing Content...................................................................................................................404
Private content space and Public content space ...................................................................................405
Creating a private folder ......................................................................................................................405
Creating a Public folder .......................................................................................................................405
Organize Folder Permissions ...................................................................................................................405
Organizing Folders ..............................................................................................................................405
Sharing Folders ....................................................................................................................................406
Sharing files .........................................................................................................................................406
Overwrite Option on Folders ...............................................................................................................406
Tools for Sharing and Finding Content ...................................................................................................406
About Tools for sharing and finding content .......................................................................................406
Find Folder ..........................................................................................................................................407
Search ..................................................................................................................................................407
Go To Location....................................................................................................................................407
Bookmarks...........................................................................................................................................407
Workflow Activities ............................................................................................................................407
Passes ..................................................................................................................................................407
Portfolios .............................................................................................................................................408
Organize Course Folders .........................................................................................................................408
About course folders............................................................................................................................408
Storing single Course content ..............................................................................................................408
Folder examples...................................................................................................................................408
Using Web Folders ..................................................................................................................................409
Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................409
Using Web Folders ..............................................................................................................................409
About File Names ................................................................................................................................410
Set up a Web Folder in Mac OS X ......................................................................................................410
Set up a Web Folder in Windows ........................................................................................................410
Using the Content Collection ......................................................................................................................412
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................412
Add Content Management Items to a Course ..........................................................................................412
How to Add Content Management Content to a Course .....................................................................412
How to Add a link to a Content Management item from the Text Editor ...........................................413
Permission granted to items added to Courses ....................................................................................413
Sharing a Portfolio ...................................................................................................................................414
How to Share a Portfolio with Users in a Course ................................................................................414
How to Share a Portfolio with External Users .....................................................................................414
How to Share a Portfolio with Courses or Organizations ....................................................................415
How to Share a Portfolio with Institution Roles ..................................................................................415
How to Share a Portfolio with All System Accounts ..........................................................................415
Copy Files to Collection ..........................................................................................................................416
Types of content that may be copied ...................................................................................................416
Types of content that are not copied ....................................................................................................416
Enabling Copy Files to Collection .......................................................................................................417
Using Copy Files to Collection ...........................................................................................................417
Run the tool multiple times .................................................................................................................417
File Structure in Content Management ................................................................................................418
Copying special file attachments .........................................................................................................418
Copying files with the same name .......................................................................................................419
Content Management Items during Export/Import and Archive/Restore ................................................419
Items remain in Content Management .................................................................................................419
Items restored or imported to a Course without Content Management installed .................................419
Course Copy and Content Management Items ........................................................................................420
Automatic permission updates to Content Management items ............................................................420
Item permissions in Content Management ..........................................................................................420
Using Library Content .................................................................................................................................421
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Library ................................................................................................................................421
In this section.......................................................................................................................................421
Library Areas ...........................................................................................................................................421
About Library Areas ............................................................................................................................421
Library Content ...................................................................................................................................421
eReserves .............................................................................................................................................421
eReserve Folders .....................................................................................................................................422
Generating course folders in eReserves ...............................................................................................422
Course availability and eReserves .......................................................................................................422
Course removal and eReserves ............................................................................................................422
Add Library Content to Courses ..............................................................................................................422
How to Add Content from the Library to a Course .............................................................................422
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Blackboard Learn Instructor
Guide
The Blackboard Learn Instructor Guide provides detailed information about creating and
managing Courses. The community engagement capabilities of Blackboard Learn offer the same
set of functions and features for managing an Organization.
How the Guide is Organized
The Blackboard Learn Instructor Guide begins by reviewing the teaching and learning
environment for Instructors. The bulk of the guide details the functions available to Instructors
through the Control Panel.
Guide Conventions
To make this Guide easier to use a number of conventions have been put in place.
S ym b o l
Description
Bold type
A button or field name.
Courier font
Text that users should type.
Italics in a title
Additional information in a title that may not be included on the Web page.
[r]
Required field
Using this Guide
This guide is intended as a reference guide. It is not meant to be read from cover to cover.
Guide Updates
This guide is updated periodically. Check the Publication Date to ensure that it is the most recent
copy.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Welcome to Blackboard Learn
Introduction
The following are some things to keep in mind when using Blackboard Learn:
System Administrators have the ability to disable certain tools within the application.
If you encounter tools that you are unable to access contact your System
Administrator.
The openness of Blackboard Learn allows Instructors and Administrators to be very
creative. The names for items in Blackboard Learn may differ from those in the
documentation.
Building Blocks allows Institutions to integrate external applications, tools, content,
and services into Blackboard Learn.
The Blackboard Environment
The Blackboard environment includes:
A page header that displays information about the current screen
A control frame that allows quick access to common areas
An action bar to manage the contents of a screen
A menu area containing options that can interact with the screen
A view toggle that allows specific users to edit the screen
Page Header
The page header displays information about the current screen. Its purpose is to orient the user.
Control Frame
The Control Frame contains navigation elements that allow the user to access the Institution
home page, My Places, Help, and Logout.
Action Bar
The Action Bar provides actions such as Copy, Move, Delete and any functions relating to the
screen. The Action Bar does not appear on Portal or Tab pages.
Menu Area
The Menu Area contains navigation elements that allow the user to access specific areas of a
course or other parts of Blackboard Learn. The Menu Area changes depending upon where the
user is in Blackboard Learn.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Edit Mode ON/OFF
The Edit Mode toggle allows a user to change the way they are viewing the content on screen.
Switching the Edit Mode to ON allows users with certain Roles in the system to add, delete, and
edit content and tools in the Course. Switching the Edit Mode to OFF displays the Course as
students would see it. The Edit Mode toggle will only appear to those users who have permission
to use it.
Tabs
Blackboard Learnand Blackboard Learn–Basic Edition include two common tabs for users:
Tab
Description
My
Institution
The My Institution tab contains tools and information specific to each user‘s
preferences. Tools and information are contained in modules. Users can add
and delete modules from their My Institution tab. The System Administrator
may restrict access to or require specific modules.
Courses
Users click a link from the Courses tab to access a Course. and the Course
Catalog.
Users also have access to the following tabs with the Blackboard Learn - Community
Engagement:
Tab
Description
Community
The Community tab lists Organizations specific to each user, the Organization
Catalog for the Institution, and Institution Discussion Boards. Users click a link
from the Community tab to access an Organization.
Services
The Services tab contains links to other institutional offerings outside of the
Blackboard Learn. The links are set by the System Administrator.
In addition, Blackboard Learn - Community Engagement enables the Institution to create custom
tabs and present different tabs to users based on Institution Roles.
See Also
Blackboard Learn Components
Courses
Menu Area
Course Map
Control Panel
Course Roles
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Groups
Blackboard Learn Components
The Blackboard Learn user interface is made up of components that allow users to easily
navigate, enter data, edit items, and change options within Blackboard Learn.
Blackboard Learn Components
Blackboard Learn
Component
Description
Menu Area
The Menu Area contains navigation
elements that allow the user to
access specific areas of a course or
other parts of Blackboard Learn. The
Menu Area changes depending upon
where the user is in Blackboard
Learn.
Page Header
The page header displays
information about the current screen.
Its purpose is to orient the user.
Edit Mode
The Edit Mode toggle allows a user
to change the way they are viewing
the content on screen. Only certain
Roles have access to this feature,
such as Instructors and System
Administrators.
Action Bar
The Action Bar provides actions such
as Copy, Move, Delete and any
functions relating to the screen.
Search
Helps to locate data in the system.
Selecting Dates
Explains the rules governing the
selection of dates within Blackboard
Learn.
Paging Options
Paging Options appear on Inventory
Lists when there are more items that
are viewed on a single screen. These
options can be edited.
Data Collection
The Data Collection screen collects
data from the user. Fields are
grouped together according to
relevance and are presented in
procedural order.
Content List
The Content List displays a list of
content for presentation in the
Course.
Inventory List
The Inventory List Screen displays
individual items, such as Students or
Courses.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Blackboard Learn
Component
Description
Content Module
The Content Module is a window that
displays related data and/or links to
other content within Blackboard
Learn.
Contextual Menu
The Contextual Menu is denoted by
a double "v" icon that links to flyout
or drop-down list selection for options
for a particular item within
Blackboard Learn.
Courses
Courses contain content and tools for teaching and learning. The Instructor assigned to a Course
oversees the Course through the Course Menu and Control Panel. While the Instructor has
control over the Course, the Administrator can set overrides that restrict or require Course areas
and tools.
A a Course consists of the Course Menu and a content frame. The Course Menu links users to
content and tools. The content frame displays content and tools.
Organization Web Sites
Organization Web sites function in the same way as Courses. The Organization Manager uses
the same Control Panel that appears in Courses to provide an online environment for the
Organization. Organizations are only available with Blackboard Learn - Community Engagement.
Functions
The table below includes information on the components of a Course that are added using the
Course Menu. The names of the areas changed by the Instructor or the System Administrator.
Area
Description
Content
Area
Content Areas can contain a wide-range of content items including: Tests,
Assignments, Learning Modules, and multimedia files.
Tool Link
A Tool Link is added anywhere in the Course allowing access to a specific tool
such as Blogs, Email, the Course Calendar, Announcements and more.
Course
Link
Link to Course Objectives, Content Management, and Library e-Reserves .
External
Links
External Links connect users to learning materials outside of the Blackboard
Learn.
Module
Page
Module pages are customizable pages that contain any number of interactive
elements. These elements are tools such as a dictionary or calculator, or can
report and display user specific information such as grades, alerts, and tasks.
Subheader
Adds a dividing line with text to the elements on the Course Menu that is
dragged and dropped into place.
Divider
Adds a dividing line to the Course Menu that is dragged and dropped between
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Area
Description
elements
Course Menu
About the Course Menu
The Course Menu appears on the left side of a Course and contains links to materials and tools
within the Course. The Instructor can customize the appearance of the Course Menu and the
content and tools available to users.
Two views may be made available to users; if both views are available users may toggle between
them:
Quick View – Displays top-level of Course materials. Links may be displayed as
buttons or text.
Detail View – Displays Course materials as seen in the Map. This view expands to
show the hierarchy of Course navigation.
A Tools Panel appears as part of the Course Menu. This box may contain links to the Map,
Communication tools and/or Course Tools. Links to tools may also be added to the main part of
the Course Menu so they appear in the Detail View or the Map.
The size of the Course Menu frame may be adjusted. Hold the mouse over the border that marks
the right side of the Course Menu, an arrow pointer appears. Use the mouse to drag this border
and expand or contract the frame.
Information about when the Course Menu was last refreshed is also available in the Course
Menu. Hold the mouse over the Refresh icon to view the date and time the menu was last
refreshed. In the Detail View the date and time information appears at the bottom.
View new Content
When content is added to the Course Menu or the Map it takes 20 minutes for it to cache; this
means that new content in the Course Menu and Map does not appear for 20 minutes. To view
content within the first 20 minutes it has been added click Refresh.
Set up Menu display options
The Instructor can make the Quick View and/or the Detail View available within a Course. Follow
the steps below to change the view:
1.
Select Course Style on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage on the Course Style page.
3.
Select a default view for the Course Menu.
Administrators control the default of the Course Menu for the entire system. This does not limit
the Instructors ability to make changes within their Courses; it only dictates the appearance of the
default Course Menu.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note: The Map may appear with a different color scheme when accessed from Quick View. When
Quick View uses text links (not buttons) the color of the links may be edited. If the color is edited,
the color of items in the Map will appear the same as the text links.
Set up Tool box display
The Tools Panel may be set to display links to Course Tools, Communication tools, and/or the
Map. The display of the Tools Panel is managed separately for the Detail View and the Quick
View. This allows Instructors to set up the Tools Panel differently in the two separate views.
Follow the steps below to set up the Tools Panel display for the Quick View:
1.
Select Course Style on the Control Panel
2.
Select Manage Tool Panel on the Course Style page.
3.
Select Quick View Tool Panel Options or Detail View Tool Panel Options on the
Manage Tool Panel page.
4.
Select which links to display in the box and enter a name to appear in the header. If no
options are selected, the Tools Panel does not appear in the Course Menu. If Header
Name is left blank, no header appears in the Tools panel. The background and text color
for the header may also be selected.
Map
About the Map
The Map is a collapsible tree directory that is used for navigation within a Course. The Map may
be viewed from the Course Menu, Collaboration Sessions, the Performance Dashboard and as a
selection window. Information about when the Map was last refreshed is also available at the
bottom of the map.
View the Map from the Course Menu
The Map may be opened from the Display View and the Quick View of the Course Menu. Select
Map in the Tools Panel on the Course Menu to open the Map. All available content and tools
appear within the Map.
When the Map is viewed from the Course Menu, the Instructor views the Course content as a
user. For example, if an item is made available to a group through an Adaptive Release rule, and
the Instructor is not part of the Group, the item will not be visible to the Instructor through the
Map.
View the Map from the Performance Dashboard
When the Map is viewed from the Performance Dashboard, the availability of items, tools, and
Review Status for the specific user is displayed.
Select the icon in the Adaptive Release column to view the Map for a specific user. The
availability of each item and the Review Status for the user selected is indicated.
This following table includes a description of the icons used in the Performance Dashboard:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
A d a p t i ve R e l e a s e a n d R e vi e w S t a t u s i c o n s :
Visible – this item is visible to that Course user.
Invisible – this item is not visible to that Course user.
Reviewed – this item has been marked as Reviewed by the Course user.
Not Reviewed – this item is displayed as Not Reviewed to the Course user.
View the Content Map from a Virtual Classroom
The Content Map is similar to the Map, except the tree directory only displays available Content
Areas; it does not allow users to navigate to other Course areas, such as tools. To open the
Content Map, select Content Map in the Classroom Tool box of a Virtual Classroom.
Use the Map as a selection window
Course areas and items may be linked to from different pages within a Course, such as the Add
Announcement page and Add Course Link page. This selection process uses the Map, accessed
by selecting the Browse button. The Map, accessed from these pages, displays all content items
within a Course. Click a link in the Map to select an item or tool.
Control Panel
All Course administration is done through the Control Panel. This area is only available to users
with one of the following defined Course Roles:
Instructor
Teaching Assistant
Grader
System Administrator
Find the Control Panel
1.
Open a Course.
2.
The Control Panel is underneath the Course Menu.
Functions
The Control Panel is comprised of the following areas:
Area
Function
Course Tools
Contains all the available tools that are added to a Course. Once
added, these tools are administered from the Control Panel.
Course Links
When made available, provide links to other parts of the system such as
Course Objectives and Content Management.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Area
Function
Evaluation
Provides tools for creating Tests, Recording grades, and tracking user
performance and activity.
Users and
Groups
List , enroll, edit, and delete users from the Course. Create and
administer formal groups of students to collaborate on work.
Customization
Change the properties of the Course such as its name and availability,
Guest and Observer status, tool availability, and the appearance of the
Course.
Packages and
Utilities
Import, Export and Archive the Course, Copy all or part of the Course,
copy selected files to Content Management when available.
Help
Offers support contacts and online documentation.
Course Roles
Course Roles control access to the content and tools within a Course. Each user is assigned a
role for each Course in which they participate. For example, a User with a role of Teaching
Assistant in one Course can have a role of Student in another Course.
The Course Role is set when a User is enrolled. It can also be edited after enrollment from the
Control Panel.
Course Roles include:
Course Builder
Grader
Guest
Instructor
Student
Teaching Assistant
Note: Administrators may edit the names, capabilities, and privileges associated with existing
Course Roles as well as create new Course Roles. Therefore, some of the information listed here
may not accurately reflect your available Course Roles.
Course Builder
The Course Builder role has access to most areas of the Control Panel. This role is appropriate
for a user to manage the Course without having access to Student grades. a Course Builder can
still access the Course if the Course is unavailable to Students. a Course Builder cannot delete
Instructor from a Course.
Course Builders have access to the areas of the Control Panel listed below. The tools and
functions within each area can vary depending on the settings the System Administrator has put
into place, including enforcing a course template and customizing the role of Course Builder. The
Instructor can also limit the availability of certain tools and functions.
Course Tools
Course Links
Users and Groups
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Customization
Packages and Utilities
Help
Grader
a Grader assists the Instructor in the creation, management, delivery, and grading of Tests. a
Grader also assists the Instructor with managing the Grade Center. a Grader cannot access a
Course if it is unavailable to Students.
Graders have access to the areas of the Control Panel listed below. The tools and functions
within each area can vary depending on the settings the System Administrator has put into place,
including enforcing a course template and customizing the role of Grader. The Instructor can also
limit the availability of certain tools and functions.
Course Tools
Course Links
Evaluation
Help
Guest
Guests have no access to the Control Panel. Areas within the Course are made available to
Guests. Visitors such as prospective Students, alumni or parents may be given the role of Guest.
Instructor
Instructors have access to all areas in the Control Panel. This role is generally given to those
developing, teaching or facilitating the class. Instructors may access a Course that is unavailable
to Students.
Administrators may limit Instructor access to the following features of the Control Panel:
List / Edit Users
Create User
Batch Create Users
Delete Users
Enroll Users
Settings
Import
Export
Archive
Student
Student is the default Course Role. Students have no access to the Control Panel.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Teaching Assistant
The Teaching Assistant role is that of a co-teacher. Teaching Assistants are able to administer all
areas of a course. Their only limitations are those imposed by the Instructor or System
Administrator. A Teaching Assistant cannot delete an Instructor from a Course.
Teaching Assistants have access to most all tools and features in the Control Panel. If the
Course is unavailable to Students, Teaching Assistants still have access to the Course. Teaching
Assistants are not listed in the Course Catalog listing for the Course.
About Course Groups
The Course Groups feature allows Instructors and students to create groups of students within a
Course. These Course Groups have their own area on Blackboard Learn to collaborate on
Course work. These spaces are equipped with tools that can assist in this collaborative process:
Blogs, Journals, file sharing and Group Assignments.
Course Group Tools
The following tools are made available to a Course Group:
Course Group Tool
Description
Group Blog
Users within the group can post to
the Blog and add comments.
Instructors can enable the Blog tool
for use only within the Course Group,
or can grant the public access to the
Blog.
Collaboration
Users within the group can
participate in real-time lessons and
discussions.
Group Discussion Board
The Group Discussion Board is an
area where Course Group members
can post messages and
repliesInstructors can use this tool to
encourage discussions of course
material outside of the classroom.
This Discussion Board is available
only to Course Group members, not
to the entire course.
File Exchange
Students and Instructors can use this
tool to upload documents to the
Course Group area and organize
them through the creation of folders
in which their items are stored.
Students can access this material in
the course. Instructors have access
to all folders in their course.
Send Email
All members of a Course Group can
send email messages to selected
members or the entire group. These
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Group Tool
Description
messages are internal to the Course
Group, they are not available to
anyone outside the group.
Group Journal
Instructors can assign a private
Journal to each user in a group to
allow private communication between
the Instructor and the User.
Group Tasks
The Group Tasks page organizes
projects or activities (referred to as
tasks) by defining task priority and
tracking task status.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Working in Blackboard Learn
This section discusses how to navigate, customize, enter text, and work with other kinds of
content in Blackboard Learn.
In this section
This section includes the following topics:
Topic
Description
Notifications
Dashboard
Describes the Notification Dashboard that contains customizable
notification modules with links to Course items or Course information
that have been changed, submitted, created, or that have impending
due dates.
Rules for the
Notifications
Dashboard
Describes the rules governing the display and removal of
notifications.
Using the
Notifications
Dashboard
Instructors can navigate to specific areas to take action on
notifications and can control the appearance of the Notifications
Dashboard.
Control the Settings
for the Notifications
Dashboard
Outlines how the System Administrator can control how notifications
appear, which will generate email messages, and how long they will
be kept in the system.
Navigation
Describes the key navigational tools that comprise a page.
About the Menu Area
The Menu Area contains navigation elements that allow the user to
access specific areas of a course or other parts of Blackboard Learn.
About Contextual
Menus
Throughout Blackboard Learn, items that are acted upon by a user
have a Contextual Menu associated with them. The Contextual Menu
appears as a set of arrows pointing down. Clicking this icon displays
options that are available to the user for that item
Editing the Paging
Options
Paging Options are edited to specify how many items appear on a
page.
Language Packs
Language Packs present Blackboard Learn using language and
cultural norms matched to different audiences.
Edit Mode
The Edit Mode allows Instructors to make changes to content in the
Course view instead of navigating through the Control Panel.
Searching for Users
in a Course
There are several areas in Blackboard Learn where users can search
for other users.
Working with Text
The Blackboard Learn offers many different options for entering and
editing text.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About The Notifications Dashboard
The Notifications Dashboard contains four basic modules that give information to users based on
their enrollment and their role in the system. Which modules are available and what type of
notifications are delivered is set up by the system administrator. Users with multiple enrollments
will receive information in modules for all their classes and organizations. Users with multiple
roles will receive information in modules for all their roles. Users can navigate to individual items
to take action.
For all users, each Course contains a Notification Dashboard specific to that Course. For
Blackboard Learn Community Engagement users, this information may be part of a tab on the
MyBlackboard page, or modules in the MyBlackboard area and contain information for all
Courses in which the user is enrolled.
Instructors can customize the notifications that appear on this page, as well as opt to have email
notifications sent to their account.
The page displays these modules:
Needs Attention - Displays all items in a course that require some type of interaction.
Instructors, TAs, and Graders see assignments, tests, and surveys that have been
submitted.
Alerts - Displays past due and early warning notifications for all courses. Instructors,
TAs, and Graders see the users in each course that have past due items and who have
generated early warning messages. Links are provided to email students and view early
warning system rules. Students see any assignments, tests, or other items that are past
due and any early warning messages received.
What's New - Displays a list of new items in all relevant courses and organizations.
Instructors, TAs, and Graders see any new assignments that have been submitted, tests
that have been submitted, new discussion board posts. Students see new discussion
board posts, new grades posted, new content that is available.
To Do - Displays the status (Past Due/Due) of relevant course work and tasks. Students
see any grade items that have listed due dates in two categories, what is past due and
what is due in the future. Links to relevant course items are provided.
Where Is It?
For Blackboard Learn users, by default, the Notifications Dashboard displays as the homepage
for a Course. The user may be able to manage this setting. It only displays information for that
Course.
For Blackboard Learn Community Engagement licensed users, the Notification Dashboard can
also be accessed through a tab in the MyBlackboard page or as modules in the MyBlackboard
page. The user may be able to manage this setting. The page displays information and items for
all Courses.
Who Can Use It?
The System Administrator controls the ability for users to view the Notifications Dashboard, to
configure the notifications that display in the page, and to receive email notifications. In addition,
the System Administrator can allow or disallow Users to control any or all notifications or email
notifications.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Turn It On
The Notifications Dashboard is On for the system by default. If it is turned Off by the System
Administrator, then it is not possible for the Instructor to turn it On.
To turn Off the Notification Dashboard, navigate to the Settings page for the Notifications
Dashboard. For more information, see the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
Email Notifications
Users can select to receive email notifications for updated, impending, or created items. For more
information on emails and configuring this view, see Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
See Also
For more information on the rules for items to display as notifications, or for the removal of
notifications, see Display and Remove Notifications for the Notifications Dashboard.
For more information on interacting with the notifications and the page, see Using the
Notifications Dashboard page.
For more information on the information that displays in the Notifications Dashboard page, see
Notifications Dashboard page display.
For more information on deciding the notification and email notification settings, the due date
reminders, notification durations, see the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Rules for the Display or Removal of Notifications in the
Notifications Dashboard
Rules for Items to Display as Notifications
Items must follow these rules to be viewed in the Notifications Dashboard area for the user views:
A notification for that item is set to On in the Notifications Dashboard Settings area.
The item or Discussion Board Forum is made Available.
The Start Date for the item has passed.
The Adaptive Release criteria are met by a Student.
An Early Warning System rule is broken by a Student.
For an Assessment, Assignment, Survey, or grade item to display in the Alerts area for
Instructors, or the To Do area for Students, there must be a Due Date.
Rules for the Removal of Notifications
A notification will be deleted from the Notifications Dashboard area because of one of the
following actions:
The item is deleted by the user.
The item is made Unavailable.
The item's End Date is reached.
The Adaptive Release rules are no longer met by the user.
The Early Warning System Rules are no longer broken by the user.
The item has passed its duration as determined in Notifications Dashboard Settings
page. For more information, see Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
Rules for the Removal of Specific Items as Notifications
The following table clarifies the information for removal of specific items as notifications:
Notification
Module
A c t i o n t o A u t o m a t i c a l l y R e m o ve
New Student Group
created
What's
New
The Notifications Dashboard duration setting for
notifications will delete this notification. To
configure this setting, navigate to the Notifications
Dashboard settings page. For more information,
see the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
Discussion Board posts,
Blog entries, Journal
entries
What's
New
The unread posts or entries are viewed.
Course information
What's
New
If the items contains a Review Status, when it is
marked as reviewed, it will be deleted.
Assessment,
Assignment,
What's
New
The Notifications Dashboard's duration setting for
notifications will delete this notification. To
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Notification
Module
Announcement, Survey,
Group or Content
Available
A c t i o n t o A u t o m a t i c a l l y R e m o ve
configure this setting, navigate to the Notifications
Dashboard settings page. For more information,
see the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
Assessment, Survey, or
Assignment
Alerts
Student submits the item.
Assessment, Survey, or
Assignment
Needs
Attention
The Instructor grades the item.
See Also
For more information on using the Notifications Dashboard area, including taking action on an
item, removing it, or navigating to a course, see Using the Notifications Dashboard.
For more information on controlling the setting for a notification's duration or the settings for the
Notifications Dashboard, see Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Using the Notifications Dashboard
Instructors can navigate to specific areas to take action on notifications and can control the
appearance of the Notifications Dashboard. Blackboard Learn Community Engagement users
can also navigate to Courses within the modules.
Notifications in a Module
Notifications appear in modules where they are viewed, deleted and acted upon. Click the
Actions contextual menu to:
Expand All - Displays all the items in the module.
Collapse All - Collapses all the items in the module.
Dismiss All - Removes all the notifications in the module.
To look at each item in a module, click the item. This will expand the notification list. Each
notification in the list will have its own contextual menu. Use this menu to take action on a specific
notification. Actions available for notifications may include:
View Details- Navigate to the course area such as the Early Warning System,
Discussion Board, or the Grade Center to see the details of the notification.
Refresh- Refresh an Early Warning System Rule.
Email - Send email to students.
Note: Removing the notification only deletes the notification, and does not delete the item from
the Course. For more information on the removal of a notification, see Rules for the Notifications
Dashboard area.
Control the Appearance of the Dashboard
To...
Do...
Collapse modules
Click the minimize icon (-).
Open module in a
new window
Click the new window icon.
Move modules
Move the mouse pointer over the module until the crosshair mouse
pointer appears. Click, hold and drag the module.
Add modules
Click Add Module
Edit module settings
click the Manage Module Settings icon.
change the color
theme
Click Personalize.
See Also
For more information on the modules, categories, and notifications that display in the Notifications
Dashboard area, see the Notifications Dashboard Display.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
For more information on controlling the notifications that display on the Notifications Dashboard
area, see Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
For more information on configuring items to display or be deleted as notifications, see Rules for
Notifications in the Notifications Dashboard.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Notifications Dashboard
The Notifications Dashboard displays notifications for changes to items. These notifications are
displayed in three different modules. The following items can generate different notifications:
Content item
Course information
Assignments
Tests
Blog entries
Surveys
Journal entries
Discussion Board posts
Grade changes
Early Warning System rules
Group information
Announcements
For Blackboard Learn - Typeprise license users, the Notifications Dashboard area displays in
each course, and only displays notifications for that Course.
For Blackboard Learn Community Engagement users, the Notifications Dashboard modules also
display in the MyBlackboard area or My Institution tab and display notifications for all Courses.
Display Modules
Notifications for these items are categorized in three modules.
The following table explains each module, its information and layout:
Module
Information and Appearance
Needs
Attention
Any submitted item by a user for review or grading by the Instructor.
Categories of the possible notification types:
Grade Tests - the tests and the corresponding users who have submitted
the tests.
Grade Assignments - the Assignments and the corresponding users who
have submitted the Assignments.
Alerts
What's New
Grade Surveys - The Surveys and the corresponding users who have
submitted the Surveys.
The Past Due area displays any Assessment, Assignment, or Survey that has
past its Due Date with no submission by the user.
The Early Warning System area displays any rule and the list of users who
have violated that rule.
The Communication area displays the number of unread Discussion Board
posts for each forum, the unread Blog entries, and the unread Journal entries.
The Materials area displays any updated, submitted, or created Content,
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Module
Information and Appearance
Tests, Assignments, and Surveys.
Student Display
The notifications are categorized in two modules.
The following table explains each module, its notifications and layout.
Module
Information and Appearance
To Do
The What's Past Due area displays any Assessment, Assignment, or Survey that
has past its Due Date with no submission by the user.
The What's Due displays information about any Assessment, Assignment, or
Survey that contains a Due Date.
What's
New
The Communication area displays the number of unread Discussion Board posts
for each forum, the unread Blog entries, and the unread Journal entries.
The Materials area displays any updated, submitted, or created items, such as,
Tests, Assignments, Announcements, Surveys, and so on.
Alerts
The Past Due area displays any Assessment, Assignment, or Survey that has
past its Due Date with no submission by the student
The Early Warning System area displays any rule the student has violated.
Specific Feature or Item Notification Behavior
The following table clarifies the information that displays for specific feature or item notifications:
Item
Important Informa tion
Group
For any Group, submissions by the Group will be viewed by the
Instructor as a Group submission, and not as notifications of
submissions by each individual user in the Group.
Discussion Board
The number of unread posts for a Course is displayed. Clicking on
the number will navigate the user to the Discussion Boards main
page.
Blog
The number of unread Blog entries for a Blog is displayed. Clicking
on the number will navigate the user to the Blog.
Journal
The number of unread Journal entries for a Journal is displayed.
Clicking on the number will navigate the user to the Journal.
Tests or Assignments
with Multiple Attempts
The most recent attempt information and link will display.
See Also
For more information on controlling the notifications that display on the Notifications Dashboard
area, see Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
For more information on configuring items to display or be deleted as notifications, or Student and
Observer display, see Rules for Notifications in the Notifications Dashboard.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Control the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard
Warning: If the System Administrator has defined the settings for notifications, email
notifications, the duration of a notification, or due date reminders, then that will take precedence
over the user setting.
If allowed by the System Administrator, the user can decide:
Which notifications appear on the dashboard
Which notifications will generate email messages
Which type of email format notifications will be sent, individual or daily digest
The number of days before the removal of a notification
To create Due Date reminders for notifications
Access the Edit Notifications Settings Page
Click My Places then Edit Notifications Settings to locate the Edit Notifications Settings page.
This page displays General Notification Settings.
Edit General Settings - Defines the general notification settings such as email format,
deletion schedule, and reminder schedule for courses and organizations.
Edit Individual Course Settings - Displays the current notification settings for courses
in which a user is enrolled. Changes to the notification settings for a specific course can
be made.
Bulk Edit Notification Settings - Select a set of courses or organizations to update and
change the notification settings for them in one step.
Edit Individual Organization Settings - Displays the current notification settings for
organizations in which a user is enrolled. Changes to the notification settings for a
specific organization can be made.
Choose Email Notification Type
A user may elect to receive an email message for each notification, or may elect to receive a daily
Digest email that contains information on all of the Notifications for that day. The user will set the
time for the daily Digest.
Individual - Email messages are sent for each notification. For Early Warning System
details, unread Discussion Board messages, unread Blog Posts, and unread Journal
Entries, however, the Digest selection is necessary.
Daily Digest - All notifications are collected and sent in a daily digest to that user. Set
the time to Send Daily Email Digest.
Create Duration for Notifications
Set the number of days until a notification is automatically deleted.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create Due Date Reminders
The user can set Due Date reminders for notifications. This reminder will be emailed to the user.
Set the number of days before the Due Date to send an email.
The email will be sent as a digest email or as individual emails depending upon the option
selected by the user. For more information on selecting email type, see Choose Email Notification
Type in the Settings for the Notifications Dashboard.
Decide Upon Notifications and Email Notifications
It is possible to decide the notification types and emails to receive.
All Notification Types, by default, are turned On; these notifications are displayed in the
Notifications Dashboard modules.
All Email Notification types, by default, are turned Off, an email will be sent out corresponding to
that notification. Though for the following items, email notifications can only be sent out if Daily
Digest email is selected:
Early Warning System Rule details
Unread Discussion Board Messages
Unread Blog posts
Unread Journal entries
After choosing the appropriate settings, click Submit to save these settings.
If in a Course's Edit Notification Settings page, it is possible to Save to All, so that the settings
will affect all of the user's Courses.
See Also
For more information on the display of the Notifications Dashboard area, see the Notifications
Dashboard Display.
For more information on configuring items to display or be deleted as notifications, see Rules for
Notifications in the Notifications Dashboard.
Navigation
Only the material in the content frame changes when moving to a new area or page. The tabs
and header frame are always available for quick access to those navigation features.
N a vi g a t i o n
Tool
Description
Tab
Click a tab to open it.
Button
Click a button to navigate to a page within Blackboard Learn. Some buttons
also lead to areas outside of Blackboard Learn. Buttons also execute
functions.
Link
Click a hypertext link to access another Web page within Blackboard Learn.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
N a vi g a t i o n
Tool
Description
Links can also open Web sites outside of Blackboard Learn.
Breadcrumb
clicke of the hypertext links that appear in the navigation path to access that
page. Breadcrumbs appear at the top of pages to go back to the previous
pages that led to the current page.
Linking to a Course
To link to a Course, copy the URL from the address bar in the browser. Links to Courses are
posted inside or outside Blackboard Learn. Users will be prompted for authorization before
accessing the Course.
About the Menu Area
The Menu Area contains navigation elements that allow the user to access specific areas of a
course or other parts of Blackboard Learn. The Menu Area changes depending upon where the
user is in Blackboard Learn.
Menu Area Components
M e n u Ar e a C o m p o n e n t
Description
Plus Button
Click to add items to the Menu Area;
available only after clicking Edit Mode.
List View
Click to display the Menu Area items in
a list.
Folder View
Click to display the Menu Area items in
a tree view.
Display Course Menu in a
Window
Click to display the Menu Area in a
separate window.
Refresh
Click to refresh the contents of the
Menu Area.
Keyboard Accessible
Reordering
Click to reorder the Menu Area items
by using the keyboard; available only
after clicking Edit Mode.
Editing the Menu Area
Edit Mode is ON to display Add button and the Keyboard Accessible Reordering button. Use
these to add new items to the Menu Area and to reorder those items.
Other ways to edit the Menu Area:
Reorder the Menu Area items by clicking the icon beside the item and dragging and
dropping the item to the desired location or by clicking the Keyboard Accessible
Reordering button.
Click the contextual menu beside any Menu Area items to edit its settings.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
See Also
Blackboard Learn Components
About Contextual Menus
Throughout Blackboard Learn, items that are acted upon by a user have a Contextual Menu
associated with them. The Contextual Menu appears as a set of arrows pointing down. Clicking
this icon displays options that are available to the user for that item.
Common Contextual Menu Options
The following options are common to many items in Blackboard Learn.
Open
Edit
Copy
Remove
Other Contextual Menu Options
These options will vary depending upon the type of item and the role of the user.
Adaptive Release options
Change User Password
Email
Show Icons Only
Show Text Only
Editing the Paging Options
Paging Options are edited to specify how many items appear on a page.
Prerequisites and Warnings
Here are some guidelines for Paging Options:
The default is 25 items displayed per page.
Clicking Show All displays of all items and makes the other controls disappear.
Only numerals are allowed in the Items per page field.
If the number entered in the Items per page field is greater than the total number of
items then all items are displayed.
If the number entered in the Items per page field is less than one then no items are
displayed.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Edit Paging Options
1.
Click Edit Paging...
2.
Type the Items per page.
3.
Click OK.
Language Packs
About Language Packs
Language Packs present Blackboard Learn using language and cultural norms matched to
different audiences. Language Pack preferences are defined at the system level, the Course or
Organization level, and finally at the user level.
At the system level, the Administrator defines one language pack as the system default. This is
the language pack that appears when no other language pack is specified at the Course level or
at the user level.
At the Course level, the Instructor can set a language pack and enforce it. Enforcing a language
pack means that all users will view the language pack. If the language pack is not enforced, and a
user has a preferred language pack associated with their account, the user‘s language pack will
override the Course language pack.
At the user level, individuals may select their preferred language pack.
Note: The default names in the system are translated and appear differently in each language
pack.Customized names, such as changing the name of a tool, are not changed with the
language pack. These values stay the same through all language packs.
Set a Language Pack
Follow these steps to set a locale for a Course.
1.
Click Customization on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Properties.
3.
Select a language pack from the Language Pack drop-down list.
4.
Click Enforce Language Pack to always display this Course in the selected language
pack.
5.
Click Submit.
If a language pack is not chosen for a Course, the Course will display in the user‘s preferred
language pack or, if the user has not set a preferred language pack, the system default language
pack.
Course Areas not Impacted by Language Pack Selections
For the most part, the Control Panel appears in the selected language pack of a Course. It does
not appear in the language pack selected for the user. In a few spots within a Course, the page
will display using the system default or the user‘s preferred language pack rather than the Course
language pack. The following pages will not display in the selected Course language pack:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Control Panel > Course Information > Edit Item, Copy Item, Add Item, Delete Item
Control Panel > Copy Files to Content Management
Control Panel > Discussion Board > Add Forum
Control Panel > Announcements > Confirmation receipt.
Edit Mode
Edit Mode allows Instructors to make changes to content in the Course view instead of navigating
through the Control Panel. The Edit Mode toggles On and Off. The toggle appears in the
navigation bar in each Course area and any subfolders. System Administrators may disable this
feature.
Note: The Edit Mode toggle is displayed to users with a role of Instructor, TA, Course Builder, or
System Administrator. Due to the size of the content editing pages, this method of editing is not
recommended with an 800x600 screen resolution.
Functions
To edit content, toggle Edit Mode to On. To view course content as a student would see it, toggle
Edit Mode to Off.
Searching for Users in a Course
There are several areas in Blackboard Learn where users can search for other users.
User Search Options
The table below details the available user search options. All options are not available in all
search boxes.
To . . .
then . . .
search for a user by First Name, Last
Name, Email, or Username
Select Users and Groups on the
Control Panel.
Select Users.
Select either a First Name, Last Name,
Email, or Username.
Select either Contains, Equal to, or
Starts with.
Type either a First Name, Last Name,
Email, or Username.
Click Go. All matching entries are
displayed.
search using a value found in the user‘s
name
Select Users and Groups on the
Control Panel.
Select Users.
Type a value in the search field.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
then . . .
Select Users and Groups on the
Control Panel.
Select Users.
Click Go.
list all users
Working with Text
The Blackboard Learn offers many different options for entering and editing text.
See Also
See these topics for more information on working with text:
Topic
Description
Entering Text
Describes how to input information.
Text Editor
Outlines the controls for entering and formatting text, equations,
and multimedia files
About Spell Check
Describes the Spell Check feature.
Using Spell Check
Explains how to use the Spell Check feature.
HTML Tips
Provides some basic HTML codes and tips for adding simple
formatting to a Course.
Math and Science
Notation Tool
Describes the Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ Editor.
Adding and Editing
Equations
Explains how to add and edit equations on the Math and
Science Notation Tool.
Entering Text
By default, Blackboard Learn will format text to 12-point, left-justified Arial. Any other formatting
must be done with HTML tags or using the Text Editor.
Text boxes may appear using the Text Editor or with the options shown below. For more
information about the Text Editor, please see Text Editor.
Text Box Options
The following options are available in most text entry boxes in Blackboard Learn:
Format
Option
B e h a vi o r
Smart
Automatically recognizes a link entered in the text box. Smart text recognizes the
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Format
Option
B e h a vi o r
Text
ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts HTML tags as well. Smart Text will
also prompt to load images if an image source tag appears.
Web addresses entered as URLs are converted to links. The URL must begin
with "http://" and there must be a space before the "http://" to distinguish it from
the previous word.
If an image tag, <IMG>, is entered in Smart Text, Blackboard Learn will
automatically prompt you to upload the image.
Plain
Text
Displays text as it is written in the text area. Plain text does not render HTML
code. HTML code will appear as text.
HTML
Displays text as coded by the user using Hypertext Mark-up Language (HTML)
tags.
Note: The Smart Text and Plain Text options are only available if the Administrator has turned off
the Text Editor or if the user does not have a Windows Operating System and Internet Explorer
Version 5.x or a later.
It is not possible to display a file in a content item and add a Smart Text or Plain Text description.
Add the description as a separate content item and then add display the file in the next content
item.
Smart Text, Plain text, or HTML may be used in the Text Editor. Options at the bottom of the box
allow the user to switch format at anytime.
Smart text should be used if the intent is to display the text in the exact way that it is typed. Line
breaks, tabbing, and other keyboard formatting will be retained with Smart text.
Plain text strips any formatting from the text, except for line breaks. The result is completely
unformatted text. This may be useful if the user needs to do a lot of copy and pasting of the
content, or if the intent is to display code information. For example, if the user wants to show how
to write something in HTML, Plain text should be used to retain the HTML tags in the content.
Plain text does not work with MathML or the equation editor. Changing a text box that includes a
mathematical formula to Plain text will make the formula unreadable.
The HTML option should be used if the user knows HTML and opts to type HTML tags into the
Text Editor. The result will be content formatted by the HTML tags used.
File Names
Blackboard allows the use of all characters in file names. However, the user's operating system
and browser may limit the types characters accepted. For example, some browsers do not accept
multi byte characters.
Missing Image Detection in the Text Editors
Missing Image Detection is available when a user:
Pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Editor and selects the HTML option.
Pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Editor selects the Smart Text option
Missing image detection does not apply when a user:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Editor and selects the Plain text
option.
Links to an HTML file in Content Management with a broken image (either using the
third row of the Text Editor or as a URL in the Text Editor).
Note: Images are stored in HTML using the following syntax: <img scr="http://image_path">. The
source location must be inside double or single quotations.
Text Editor
About the Text Editor
The Text Editor presents controls for entering and formatting text, equations, and multimedia files.
When it is enabled, it appears throughout the system as the default editor when adding text
through a text box.
If the Text Editor does not appear, first check the list of browsers below to ensure that the current
browser is compatible. If it is, check that the Text Editor is enabled through Personal Settings. If
the Text Editor still does not appear, it has most likely been disabled by the System Administrator.
Users who access the system through assistive technologies should use standard text entry
options instead of the Text Editor. See Typeing Text for more information.
Compatible Browsers
The Text Editor is compatible with all the supported browsers for Blackboard Learn.
Firefox does not permit users to access their computer's clipboard.
To cut, use CTRL-X, the contextual menu or the Edit menu in the browser's toolbar.
To copy, use CTRL-C, the contextual menu or the Edit menu in the browser's toolbar.
To paste, use CTRL-V the contextual menu or the Edit menu in the browser's toolbar.
Macintosh users can use right-click paste on Firefox no matter where the clipboard content
originates. Macintosh users may find that this does not fully resolve the problem, particularly
because Firefox does not permit pasting text from Microsoft Office files on Mac. To accomplish
this task, paste the text into a basic text editor, such as TextEdit or Notepad and then paste the
text into the Text Editor.
Safari does not permit users to access their computer's clipboard.
To cut, use CTRL-X, the contextual menu or the Edit menu in the browser's toolbar.
To copy, use CTRL-C, the contextual menu or the Edit menu in the browser's toolbar.
To paste, use CTRL-V the contextual menu or the Edit menu in the browser's toolbar.
Text Editor Features
The Text Editor has three collapsible rows of buttons. The tables below define the functions of
each button and identifies if the button is available in the Lite Version that runs on the Safari
browser.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
First row basic actions
Button
Description
Lite
Version?
Text Style
Select a style for the text. The options correspond to
standard HTML Style types.
Text Size
Select the size of the text.
Font Face
Select the font face for the text.
Y
Bold
Make selected text bold.
Y
Italics
Make selected text italics.
Y
Underline
Underline the selected text.
Y
Strikethrough
Display text with a horizontal line through the characters.
This font style is not supported by all browsers.
Subscript
Display text on the same line but slightly below the current
text.
Superscript
Display text on the same line but slightly above the current
text.
Align left
Align text to the left.
Y
Align Center
Align text in the center.
Y
Align Right
Align text to the right.
Y
Ordered list
Create a numbered list or add a numbered list item.
Unordered list
Create a bulleted list or add a bullet list item.
Decrease
Indent
Move text left.
Increase
Indent
Move text right.
S e c o n d R o w Ad d i t i o n a l B a s i c A c t i o n s
Button
Description
Lite
Version?
Spell Check
Select the ABC check mark to open Spell Check.
Y
Cut
Cut the selected items.
Copy
Copy the selected items.
Paste
Paste copied or cut content.
Clear
Formatting
Deletes formatting tags that are shown in the Pathfinder at the
bottom of the text box. select the formatting tag to delete in the
Pathfinder and then click Clear Formatting to delete. This is
useful when copying and pasting text from another application
yields discrepancies in formatting.
Undo
Select the circular arrow pointing to the left to undo the
previous action.
Y
Redo
Select the circular arrow pointing to the right to redo the
Y
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
S e c o n d R o w Ad d i t i o n a l B a s i c A c t i o n s
previous action.
Hyperlink
Add a hyperlink. Types include: file, ftp, gopher, http, https,
mailto, news, telnet, and wais. Please keep in mind that when
creating a hyperlink, the text that appears on the page is
separate from the information about the link. Information on
where the link points are stored in a tag that surrounds the
text. Therefore, it is possible to change the link without
changing the text that is displayed to users. Please be careful
when constructing links to ensure that the text is consistent
with where users will be taken when they click the link.
Create Table
Add a table.
Horizontal
Line
Add a line.
Background
Color
Add a select color to the selected text.
Y
Text Color
Specify the color of the text.
Y
WebEQ
Editor
Open the WebEQ Equation Editor icon (√x) to add an
equation. Equations cannot be added to a cell in a table.
Instead, create the equation outside the table and then cut and
paste the equation into the cell.
MathML
Editor
Open the MathML Equation Editor icon to add an equation.
Preview
Preview the content as it will be seen by end users.
HTML View
Toggle to view the source code that is generated by the Text
Editor. Users may also edit the source code in this view. Click
HTML View again to toggle back to the standard view.
Markup
Validation
Opens a new window that reports on the validation of the
source coding. Validation of source code is run against XHTML
1.0 Strict rules. Not all reported errors will cause pages to
malfunction, however errors can affect the way a page
displays, how style sheets are employed, and accessibility.
Poorly formed HTML will be selected and can be corrected.
Y
The following table includes a description of some options specific to each type of file attachment.
This row will only appear where it is possible to attach a file or link to a file in the Blackboard
Learn - Content Management.
Third row file attachment actions and special options
Button
Description
Attach file
Add a file to the text area. The Insert Link to File page
will appear.
Browse: select a file from the local machine
Link to Content Management: select an
item or folder from Content Management, if
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Lite
Version?
Third row file attachment actions and special options
Content Management integration is allowed.
Specify Source URL: provide a URL where
the item is located.
Name of link to file: provide a descriptive
name of the content is helpful for the user.
This allows the user to read the link in
context, rather than simply read the name of
the file being linked to.
Launch in New Window: Select whether to
open the file in the current window or open a
new browser window to display the file.
Attach image
Add an image to the text area. The Insert Image page
appears.
Attach MPEG/AVI
Add MPEG/AVI media content to the text area. The
Insert MPEG file page appears.
Add Quick Time
Add Apple QuickTime media to the text area. The Insert
QuickTime File page appears.
Add audio
Add an audio file, such as .mp3, .midi or .wav to the text
area. The Insert Audio File page appears.
Add
Flash/Shockwave
Add Adobe Flash or Shockwave media to the text area.
The Insert SWF File page appears.
Attaching Files in the Text Editor
Users have the option of attaching different types of files to the Text Editor. Do not copy and
paste a file from one text box to another; this will cause errors. More information about the
available options when adding a multimedia file is found in the topic, Insert Multimedia File.
The table below explains which button in the Third Row of the Text Editor is used to add different
file types.
F i l e a t t a c h m e n t t yp e s
Attach file
.doc, .exe, .html, .htm, .pdf, .ppt, .pps, .txt, .wpd, .xls, .zip
Attach image
.gif, .jif, .jpg, .jpeg, .tiff, .wmf
Attach MPEG/AVI
.avi, .mpg, .mpeg
Add Quick Time
.qt
Add audio
.aiff, .asf, .moov, .mov, .mp, .wav, .wma, .wmv
Add Flash/Shockwave
.swa, .swf
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Text Editor
The Text Editor supports the keyboard shortcuts listed in the table below. Please note that
Macintosh users should use the CMD key instead of the CTRL key.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note: If the shortcut keys that move selected items one character left, right, up, or down are
used, the object being moved will be absolutely positioned. An absolutely positioned element is
determined by pixels, so moving it up once will move it up one pixel.
K e yb o a r d S h o r t c u t s
Movement
RIGHT ARROW
Move one character to the right.
LEFT ARROW
Move one character to the left.
DOWN ARROW
Move down one line.
UP ARROW
Move up one line.
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
MAC: CMD+RGT ARROW
Move right one word.
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
MAC: CMD+LFT ARROW
Move left one word.
END
Move to the end of the line.
HOME
Move to the start of the line.
CTRL+DOWN ARROW
MAC: CMD+DWN ARROW
Move down one paragraph.
CTRL+UP ARROW
MAC: CMD+UP ARROW
Move up one paragraph.
PAGE DOWN
Move down one page.
PAGE UP
Move up one page.
CTRL+HOME
MAC: CMD+HOME
Move to the beginning of the text.
CTRL+END
MAC: CMD+END
Move to the end of the text.
Selection
SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
Extend the selection one character to the right.
SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Extend the selection one character to the left.
CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT
ARROW
MAC: CMD+SHIFT+RIGHT
ARROW
Extend the selection right one word.
CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
MAC: CMD+SHIFT+LEFT
ARROW
Extend the selection left one word.
SHIFT+UP ARROW
Extend the selection up one line.
SHIFT+DOWN ARROW
Extend the selection down one line.
SHIFT+END
Extend the selection to the end of the current line.
SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the start of the current line.
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend the selection down one page.
SHIFT+PAGE UP
Extend the selection up one page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
K e yb o a r d S h o r t c u t s
CTRL+SHIFT+END
Extend the selection to the end of the document.
CTRL+SHIFT+HOME
MAC: CMD+SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the beginning of the document.
CTRL+A
MAC: CMD+A
Select all elements in the document.
Editing
BACKSPACE
Delete the selection. Or, if there is no selection, delete the
character to the left of the mouse pointer.
CTRL+BACKSPACE
MAC: CMD+BACKSPACE
Delete all of a word to the left of the mouse pointer.
CTRL+C
MAC: CMD+C
Copy the selection.
CTRL+V
MAC: CMD+V
Paste cut contents or copied contents.
CTRL+X
MAC: CMD+X
Cut the selection.
DELETE
Delete the selection.
INSERT
Toggle between inserting and overwriting text.
CTRL+Z
MAC: CMD+Z
Undo the most recent formatting command.
CTRL+Y
MAC: CMD+Y
Re-do the most recent undone command.
CTRL+F
MAC: CMD+F
Find text.
SHIFT+F10
Display the context menu. This is the same as a right-click.
Formatting
CTRL+B
MAC: CMD+B
Toggle bold formatting.
CTRL+I
MAC: CMD+I
Toggle italic formatting.
CTRL+U
MAC: CMD+U
Toggle underlining.
Missing Image Detection in the Text Editors
Missing Image Detection functionality is available when a user:
Pastes HTML with a broken image into the HTML view of the Text Editor.
Missing image detection functionality does not apply when a user:
Pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Editor.
Uploads an HTML file with a broken image from the third row of the Text Editor.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Links to an HTML file in Content Management with a broken image (either using the
third row of the Text Editor or as a URL in the Text Editor).
Note: Images are stored in HTML using the following syntax: <img scr="http://image_path">. The
source location should be inside double of single quotations.
Differences Between Text Editor and Text Editor
The Text Editor and Text Editor both allow the entry of formatted text in Blackboard Learn.
The Text Editor allows Plain Text, Smart Text and HTML formatting. The Text Editor allows users
to edit content in an interface resembling a word processor, and perform basic HTML functions
without knowledge of any HTML. These features include creating tables, bulleted lists, hyperlinks,
horizontal lines, and more. Users may also format text and paragraphs, and upload multimedia
files in the Text Editor. Both editors may include WebEQ, MathML and SpellCheck features.
Selecting Dates
Availability of the Course and individual content items, including Tests and Learning Modules, is
controlled by date. Content may only be available within a certain range, available from a certain
date until the end of the Course, or available from the date created until a specified end date.
Setting Availability by Date
Dates are set using drop-down lists to select the day, month, year, and in some cases, time.
There is also a calendar interface that is used to select the date.
To set availability to a set range, select both a start date and an end date.
To set availability from the current time until a certain date, only set an end date.
To set availability from a date until the end of the Course, only set a start date.
HTML Formatting
This section provides some basic HTML coding to add simple formatting to Course Content.
Additional resources for learning more about HTML may be found at the end of this section.
What is HTML?
HTML is the set of codes used to format (or "mark up") Web pages. A single piece of HTML code
is called a "tag." HTML tags are surrounded by pointed brackets ("<" and ">"). Tags usually come
in pairs.
For example the pair of HTML tags to create bold text looks like this:
<b>This text will be bold. </b>
The <b> tag means "start bold here." The end tag, </b>, means "end bold here." End tags always
include the forward slash ("/").
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Paragraph Formatting
In HTML, a paragraph break is used to put a single blank line between paragraphs. A hard return
inserts no blank line. The tag is used alone at the end of a paragraph, or as a pair. If used as a
pair, the "align=left|center|right" modifier may be included in the beginning tag to control
placement.
For example, the following tag would create a right-aligned paragraph:
<P align=right>Fourscore and seven years ago, our founding father set forth
upon this continent a new nation.</P>
Text Formatting
The following tags are used for basic text formatting:
Bold text tag: <b> text </b>
Italic text tag: <i> text </i>
Underlined text tag: <u> text </u>
Font format tags: <font> text </font> (Font formats include face=fontstyle color=fontcolor
size=fontsize)
The font tag requires at least one of the modifiers (face, color, or size).
The face modifier is set to any font, but the person viewing the page must also have that font
installed on their computer. For that reason, it is best to stick to common fonts like Times New
Roman, Arial, or Courier New.
The color modifier will recognize basic colors, including black, white, gray, red, blue, yellow,
green, purple, orange, cyan, magenta, and so forth.
The size modifier does not refer to typical font point sizes. In HTML fonts are sizes 1 through 7.
The default font size is 3.
Note: Since each user may set the default font point at which their browser will display text, these
font sizes are relative. For example, one user might have their browser's default font set to 10point Times while another has their browser's default font set to 12-point Times. The HTML tag
would create 10-point Times text on the first computer, and 12-point on the latter, since 3 is the
default size.
Users may use plus or minus signs to indicate sizes relative to the default. For example, the
following HTML would create text that is two steps larger than the default font size:
<FONT size=+2>Bigger, Better, Faster!</FONT>
Creating Links with HTML
Links are created using the ‗anchor‘ tag.
<A href="URL">Clickable text</A>
In the following example, the words ‗Blackboard Inc.‘ will turn into a link that directs the user to
the Blackboard home page.
<A href="http://www.blackboard.com/">Blackboard Inc.</A>
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating HTML with Other Tools
Course developers do not have to learn everything about HTML. They may also use Web
authoring tools to generate HTML. There are many applications that may be used for this. Some
examples are:
Word processors- Microsoft© Word™, Corel© WordPerfect™, Apple©
AppleWorks™, Sun© StarOffice™, and almost every other contemporary word
processor contains the ability to convert word processing documents to a Web page
coded in HTML. However, the conversion from a word processing document to an
HTML Web page is often not perfect, especially for documents with complex
formatting.
WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Web-authoring tools- These tools
provide an environment similar to a word processor for developing Web pages and
entire Web sites. There are many products to choose from, including, Adobe©
Dreamweaver™, Adobe© GoLive™, NetObjects© Fusion, and Microsoft©
FrontPage™.
HTML Editors- Applications like BareBones© Software's BBEdit™ provide an editing
environment for HTML documents. While they are not WYSIWYG, HTML editors
usually have a "preview" mode that allows users to switch between viewing the raw
HTML codes and previewing how those codes will look in the browser. These
products help write HTML faster and easier, but they presume the user is already
knowledgeable about HTML.
Incorporating HTML Generated with Other Applications
Instructors may decide to incorporate HTML generated content with other applications into their
Course. There are two options for including this content:
Save the content as an HTML file and upload the HTML file itself into Blackboard Learn. In the
Course area, next to the Special Action field, select Create a link to this file. Blackboard
Learnwill automatically detect images in an HTML file and prompt the user to upload the images
as well.
Copy and paste the HTML code into a text box.
To copy and paste HTML code, follow the steps below:
1.
View the HTML code. Most of the tools discussed above will have a mechanism (usually
part of a View menu) to allow the user to see the ‗HTML source‘.
2.
Copy all the HTML tags between but not including the <BODY> and </BODY> tags.
Blackboard Learndynamically generates the HTML above and below the BODY tags, so
this portion of the HTML source must not be copied.
3.
Paste the copied HTML into the text box.
4.
Choose the HTML text-formatting option.
5.
Submit the form.
6.
If there are <IMG> tags in the HTML, Blackboard Learnwill automatically detect them
when the page is submitted. Users will receive a second page prompting them to upload
the appropriate images.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Troubleshooting
Blackboard recommends that users do not use the following in a Course:
Do not use multiple frames.
Do not use <applet> tags inside the text box. These tags may cause errors in the
content.
Use the Markup Validation tool in the Text Editor to validate and correct badly formed
code.
Other HTML Resources
There are many online resources for additional information about HTML. One that users may
want to go to is The World Wide Web Consortium located at http://www.w3.org.
Link to File
Users may include a link to a file from the Text Editor.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add External Link page:
Field
Description
Insert Link to File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify
URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system. For example,
from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Link to File Options
Name of
Link to File
Type the name of the link that users click to access the attached file.
Launch in
new
window
Select Yes to have the file open in a new separate window. Select No to have
the file open in the content frame.
Alt Text
Type text that will be used display if the image does not load. Alternate text is
important for accessibility.
Insert Multimedia File
Users may add the following multimedia files when authoring content in the Text Editor.
Image - Image files come in a variety of formats. Formats that are compatible with the Web are
.jpg. .gif, and .png.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
MPEG or AVI - MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Groups) files are audio-visual files in a digital
compressed format. AVI (Audio Video Interleave) is Microsoft‘s file format for storing audio and
video data.
Quicktime - QuickTime is a video and animation system that supports most formats, including
JPG and MPEG. Users with a PC will require a QuickTime driver to view QuickTime files.
Macintosh users do not require this driver.
Audio - Audio files come in a variety of formats and will spawn a compatible player based on the
user's computer system. These files have the following extensions: .aiff, .asf, .moov, .mov, .mp,
.wav, .wma, .wmv
Flash or Shockwave - Adobe Flash and Shockwave files support audio, animation and video;
they are also browser independent. Browsers require specific plug-ins to run Flash and
Shockwave files.
The options to control how a multimedia file displays, such as should it loop, should the controls
display, will not be available after the file has been inserted. To edit these options, use the HTML
view and edit the options directly.
Image Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Image page:
Field
Description
Select Image
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify
Source URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
Image Options
Set Width
Type the width of the image in pixels.
Set Height
Type the height of the image in pixels.
Image
Target URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system. For example,
from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Launch in a
new window
Choose whether or not to display the image in a new window.
Border
Choose a border for the image. If ‗None‘ is chosen there will be no border
around the image.
Alt Text
Type text that will be used display if the image does not load. Alternate text is
important for accessibility.
MPEG or AVI Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert MPEG File page:
Field
Description
Insert MPEG File
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify
Source URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
MPEG File Options
Set Width
Type the width of the video in pixels.
Set Height
Type the height of the video in pixels.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to let
users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select the size of controls to appear to users. Controls must be
available if users are to start the video manually.
Alt Text
Type text that will be used display if the image does not load. Alternate
text is important for accessibility.
QuickTime Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert QuickTime File page:
Field
Description
Insert QuickTime File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify
Source URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
QuickTime File Options
Set Width
Type the width of the video.
Set Height
Type the height of the video.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to let
users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select to display controls.
Alt Text
Type text that will be used display if the image does not load. Alternate
text is important for accessibility.
Audio Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Audio File page:
Field
Description
Insert Audio File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
OR Specify
Source URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system. For
example, from a central sound repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/sounds/sound1.wav.
Audio File Options
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to let users
start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select to display controls.
Alt Text
Type text that will be used display if the sound does not play or cannot be
heard. Alternate text is important for accessibility.
Flash or Shockwave Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Flash/Shockwave File page:
Field
Description
Insert SWF File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify
Source URL
Type a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
SWF File Options
Set Width
Type the width of the video.
Set Height
Type the height of the video.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to let
users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Set Quality
Select the quality of the images that will appear to users. Please note that
the better the quality of an image the larger the file. Larger files take
longer to open.
Alt Text
Type text that will be used display if the image does not load. Alternate
text is important for accessibility.
About Spell Check
The Spell Check feature supports a full English dictionary, a supplemental word list configured by
the System Administrator, and custom word lists that are stored as a cookie on a user‘s local
machine. The spell check feature is available wherever users can enter blocks of text. It is also
available as a module with Blackboard Learn - Community Engagement.
Word Lists
Misspelled words are determined by the following three sources:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Spell Check Dictionary: A full English dictionary that includes words that will not be
flagged for correction. The dictionary is also the only source for suggestions. This
dictionary cannot be edited.
Supplemental Word List: A list of additional terms added by the System
Administrator that do not appear in the default dictionary.
Personal Word List: This word list is stored as a cookie on each user‘s local
machine. Words are added to this list using the Learn function. The words in the
personal word list are not flagged for correction. These words are not included as
suggestions for misspelled words. Extensive personal word lists may slow
performance of the Spell Check tool.
Personal Word List and Cookies
The personal word list is stored as a cookie on the user‘s local machine. The cookie is not user or
installation specific. Therefore, a user‘s word list will be available to them whenever they are
using Spell Check as long as they are on the same local machine. Also, if another user logs onto
the same machine, that user will have the personal word list stored on that machine applied to
Spell Check. For example, if a user creates a personal word list on a computer in the computer
lab, this word list will be available to all users who use this computer in the lab. The user may not
take this word list with them to a different computer.
Using Spell Check
When Spell Check is launched it will review the text block and sequentially bring up any words it
does not recognize for review.
Functions
The table below details the functions available with Spell Check.
To . . .
then . . .
replace the occurrence of
a word with a correction
or suggestion
enter a correction in the Replace With field or select a
suggestion from the list. Click Replace to change the word in the
text to the word in the Replace With field. If the misspelled word
appears later in the text block it will be flagged again for
correction.
replace every occurrence
of a word in the text with
a correction or
suggestion
enter a correction in the Replace With field or select a
suggestion from the list. Click Replace All to change every
occurrence of the word in the text with the word in the Replace
With field.
ignore the word and not
make a correction
click Ignore. The word will not be changed. If the word appears
again in the text block it will be flagged for correction.
ignore every occurrence
of the word in the text
block
click Ignore All. The word will not be changed and Spell Check
will not flag it for correction again in the text.
teach Spell Check to
recognize the word as
correct
click Learn. The word will be added to the personal word list.
Whenever Spell Check is run on the local machine the word will
be recognized and not flagged.
close the spell check
click Finish.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
then . . .
without finishing
Recognized Errors
Note how Spell Check handles the following circumstances:
Double words are recognized as errors.
Irregular capitalization is not recognized as an error.
Initial capitalization at the beginning of sentences is not checked.
Words in ALL CAPS are checked for spelling errors.
Words that contain numbers are recognized as errors.
A word that appears in the supplemental or personal word list must be entered as a
correction during a spell check (these words do not appear as suggestions). The
Spell Check tool must be run again to verify that the word is spelled correctly.
Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ Equation
Editor
The Math and Science Notation Tool (WebEQ Equation Editor) is a general purpose equation
editor. The Math and Science Notation Tool enables users to use mathematical and scientific
notation. Users can add equations, edit existing equations, and move equations within the
Equation Editor. All of the Equation Editor symbols are based on MathML, a markup language for
math on the Web. MathML is a subset of XML.
Users may receive a pop-up box when launching WebEQ that asks the user to trust an applet
provided by Design Science, the maker of WebEQ. If users click Always, the pop-up will no
longer appear on that computer when launching WebEQ.
For best performance on a Windows® operating system use Internet Explorer 6.0.
For best performance on a Macintosh®:
Mac OS X v 10.2 or later
Install the MRJ Plug-in. http://homepage.mac.com/pcbeard/MRJPlugin/
MathML Equation Editor
The MathML Equation Editor functions in the same way at the Math and Science Notation Tool.
Instead of opening with the symbol buttons, a blank text box will appear where users can enter
XML.
Functions
The table below details how to access the Equation Editors.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
click . . .
access the WebEQ Equation Editor
the Math and Science Notation Tool icon.
insert XML
the MathML Equation Editor icon.
Adding and Editing Equations
Once an equation has been created it is copied and used again or copied and edited using the
WebEQ Equation Editor features.
Functions
The table below describes the functions available in the Math and Science Notation Tool.
To . . .
then . . .
create a name for
the equation
enter a name in the Equation Name: field. To accept the default
name do not make any changes.
create an equation
use the equation symbols available on the keyboard or in the toolbar
to create equations.
edit an existing
equation
select the equation from the Edit Equation: drop-down list. The
equation will appear in the Editor. Click Edit to save the changes.
submit the equation
and its name
click Add.
Tip
If an equation is more then one line or uses a large font size, the equation may be cut off when it
appears in a Course. Add an empty line after the final line in the equation to prevent this error.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Content
The Content of a Course is made up of the folders, files, text, images, media, links, Tests, and
interactive tools assembled and organized by Course Builders and Instructors. Content is added,
deleted, edited and organized using the Course Menu and Control Panel. There are many
different ways to create and organize content for a course. This section of the Instructor Manual
describes the various types of content and how to add them to the course.
This section includes information on the following topics:
Adaptive Release and Reporting
Course Files
Mashups
Learning Modules
Content Areas
Course Content
Manage Course Menu
Creating Content Items
Copy and Move Content
Content Folders
Content Modules
Adding Textbook Information
Syllabus
About Lesson Plans
Adding Multimedia Files
Creating a Blank Page
Adding a URL
Course Links
About File Attachments
Creating Assessments
Test and Survey Options
Creating Assignments
Tools Area
Tools Linking
Using Add Files to Create Rich HTML Content
Content Metadata
The Open Standards Content Player
Add SCORM, IMS, and NLN Content
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adaptive Release and Reporting
The following topics describe the functions and implementation of the Adaptive Release Tool.
Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release Functions
Adaptive Release Criteria
Review Status
User Progress
About the Performance Dashboard
Statistics Tracking
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release of Content provides controls to release content to users based on a set of rules
provided by the Instructor. The rules may be related to availability, date and time, individual users
and user groups (such as Course Groups), scores or attempts on any Grade Center item, or
review status of another item in the Course.
Sophisticated combinations of release rules on items are created by combining rules into
Advanced Rules. Basic rules are used to release content to specific users or groups and/or to
allow users to view content based on their performance on an assignment.
The following options are available:
Adaptive Release – Create basic rules for an item. Only one rule per item may be
created, but the rule may have multiple criteria, all of which must be met.
Adaptive Release Advanced – Add multiple rules to a single content item. Users
must meet the criteria of a single rule to gain access.
User Progress – View the details on an item for all users in a Course. This page
includes information on whether the item is visible to the user and whether the user
has marked the item as reviewed.
Adaptive Release Rules and Criteria
An Adaptive Release rule consists of a set of criteria that defines the visibility of a content item to
users. Criteria are the parts that make up the rule. For example, date and membership are two
different types of criteria. Each content item may have multiple rules, and each rule may consist
of multiple criteria. To view an item, a user must meet all of the requirements of the rule. This
means that if a rule has multiple criteria, the user must meet all criteria before the item is
available.
For example, the Instructor may add an Assignment to a Course. One rule for this assignment
may allow all users in Group A to view the assignment after a specific date. This rule would
consist of Membership criteria and Date criteria. Another rule for this assignment may allow all
users in Group B to view the assignment once they had completed Homework #1. This rule would
consist of Membership criteria and Grade Center criteria.
Note: Only one Membership criteria and one Date criteria may be created for each rule. Multiple
Grade Center criteria and Review Status criteria may be added to each rule.
Adaptive Release Rules During Course Copy, Archive, and Export
Adaptive Release rules and user progress information are only included during a full Course
Copy with users and during archive and restore operations. Rules and user progress information
are not saved during a copy of Course materials into a new Course or during a copy of Course
materials into an existing Course. They are also not saved during export and import operations.
Enable and Disable the Adaptive Release Feature
The System Administrator controls the availability of the Adaptive Release feature. If this feature
is made available, Course developers may add either basic or advanced Adaptive Release Rule.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
If the Adaptive Release tool is disabled by the Administrator, all rules that have been created will
disappear. Also, Adaptive Release related links on the Manage page will no longer appear. If the
tool is later re-enabled, the links on the Manage page will reappear and any data associated with
Adaptive Release (such as the rules) will be saved. Any Adaptive Release rules that had
previously been set also re-appear.
Visibility of Items with Adaptive Release Rules
Once any Adaptive Release rules have been established for an item, visibility of that item is
restricted to those users who meet the criteria of those rules.
For example, the Instructor creates a content item called "Introduction" and makes the item
available in Course Documents. At this point, all Course users would be able to see Introduction.
The Instructor then creates a rule restricting the item to Group A users. Now, only members of
Group A can see Introduction—all other Course users (who are not a member of Group A) do not
see Introduction. The Instructor then adds other criteria to this rule, restricting it to Group A
members who have received at least an 80 on Test #1. Now, only members of Group A who have
also received an 80 or greater on the Test #1 will see Introduction. All other Course users,
including Group A members who scored less than an 80 on the Pre-Test, will not see
Introduction.
If no Adaptive Release Rules have been created, the item is available to all users in the Course
depending on the item availability and date / time availability set on the Add Item page.
View Availability of an Item on User Progress Page
Instructors may create one or more Adaptive Release rules which narrow the availability of a
content item. It may be difficult to remember which users in a Course may access each piece of
content. The User progress page displays details on the visibility of a content item and the
Adaptive Release rules pertaining to it. For example, this page lists the visibility of an item on a
user-by-user basis. If Review Status is enabled for the item, an icon is displayed to show if the
user has reviewed the item along with a date and time stamp for when the review was registered
for that user.
If no Adaptive Release rules have been created for that item, the visibility column is based simply
on availability of the item itself. For example, if the item is available, the Visible icon is displayed
for all users.
Differences Between Basic Adaptive Release and Advanced Adaptive Release
Advanced Adaptive Release allows Instructors to create multiple rules per item. If an Instructor
wants to create different criteria for different users on the same item, the user will need to create
more than one rule. For example, if different rules apply for different Groups in a Course,
Advanced Adaptive Release is used. The Instructor may set up a rule for Group A that enabled all
users in the Group to view an item once they receive an 85 on a Test. The Instructor may set up
a separate rule for Group B that enables them to see the same content item after they receive an
80 on the Test.
Unavailable Items and Adaptive Release Rules
Item availability set on the Add Item page supersedes all Adaptive Release rules. If the item is
unavailable, it is unavailable to all users regardless of any rules established. This allows Course
developers to build out their rules and only make items available when they are finished with rule
creation.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
View Content with Rules Through the Course
If Instructors view Content Areas through the Course as a student would (Edit Mode is OFF), their
view is based on item availability and Adaptive Release rules. For example, if Adaptive Release
is used to make an item available to a Group, and they are not a member of the Group, they will
not see the item if they access it through the Course Menu. The same is true for unavailable
items. If an item is added to a Course, but is not made available, the Instructor will not see it
when they access the Content Area through the Course Menu.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adaptive Release Functions
How to Add a Basic Adaptive Release Rule
The Basic Adaptive Release rule allows the Instructor to add and edit one rule for a single piece
of content. This single rule may have multiple criteria. For example, the rule may require the user
to meet both date criteria and review status criteria before the content is available. Advanced
Adaptive Release rules can also be used to add multiple rules to a single piece of content.
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Adaptive Release on the contextual menu for the item.
4.
Complete one or more sections of the Adaptive Release page , Date, Membership,
Grade, Review Status.
5.
Click Submit.
How to Add an Advanced Adaptive Release Rule
Advanced Adaptive Release allows Instructors to add multiple rules to a single content item. If
multiple rules are created, the content is visible to the user if any of the rules are met. Each rule
may have multiple criteria. For example, one rule may allow users in Group A with a score above
an 85 on a Test to view the content item. Another rule for the same item may allow users in
Group B to view the same content item only after a specific date.
Rules that cannot be satisfied by any user will be noted because they will not provide any access
to the specified content item.
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON
3.
Click Adaptive Release: Advanced on the contextual menu for the item.
4.
Click Create Rule. The Add Rule page appears.
5.
Type a name for the rule and click Submit.
6.
Click Create Criteria and select Date, Grade or Membership and fill in the criteria. Click
Submit when the rule is complete.
7.
Click Review Status to add this type of criteria the Advanced Adaptive Release Rule.
Select the content item for Review.
8.
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to add multiple criteria to an item.
How to Copy an Adaptive Release Rule
Instructors may find it beneficial to copy an Adaptive Release rule, rather than creating a new one
from scratch. Once the rule is copied the name may be changed and the rule edited. Rules may
only be copied within a single content item; a rule from one content item may not be copied to
another content item.
Follow the steps below to copy an Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Adaptive Release: Advanced on the contextual menu for the item. The Adaptive
Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click the check box next to the rule you would like to copy and select Copy in the Action
Bar.
5.
An exact replica of the rule appears at the bottom of the list. It has the same name as the
original rule with ‗Copy of‘ in the beginning.
6.
Click Edit next to the new rule to make changes to the name or criteria.
How to Edit an Adaptive Release Rule
Rules are managed and edited from the Adaptive Release page. The criteria of a rule and the
name of a rule are managed separately.
Follow the steps below to change the name of a rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Adaptive Release: Advanced on the contextual menu for the item.
4.
Select Manage from the contextual menu for the Rule that needs to be edited. The
Manage Rule page appears.
5.
Edit the Rule Name and select Submit.
Follow the steps below to edit the criteria of an advanced rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Adaptive Release: Advanced on the contextual menu for the item. The Adaptive
Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Edit Criteria next to the Rule that needs to be updated. The Manage Criteria page
appears. Criteria may be added, edited, and deleted. Select OK when the changes are
complete.
5.
Repeat Step 4 to change any additional criteria related to the content item.
Follow the steps below to edit a basic Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Adaptive Release on the contextual menu for the item.
4.
Make any necessary changes and select Submit.
Note: These steps may also be used to edit a rule with one criteria created on the Advanced
Adaptive Release page.
How to Delete an Adaptive Release Rule
Basic Adaptive Release rules can also be deleted from the Adaptive Release: Advanced page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Adaptive Release: Advanced on the contextual menu for the item.
4.
Select the rule to delete. Multiple rules may be selected. Click Delete.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adaptive Release Criteria
About Adaptive Release Criteria
Criteria are the parts that define an Adaptive Release rule. Instructors have the option of applying
one or more criteria to each rule. For example, one rule may make content available after a
specific date, while another rule, with multiple criteria, may make content available to a Course
Group after a specific date. There are a number of different types of criteria available to
Instructors.
The following is a brief description of each available criterion:
Criteria
Description
Date / Time
Display content based on a date or time. Options include:
After a specific date
Until a specific date
Username
Within a time frame
Display content to one or more users.
Course Groups
Display content to members of one or more Groups in a Course.
Grade Center
Column
Display the content item to all users until a Grade Center criteria is
created. Possible points on a Grade Center column are listed in
brackets beside the name. The score entered must be numeric.
Grade Center: Item
with at least one
attempt
Display content based on a recorded attempt by the user. For
example, the user has completed the Test or a grade has been
entered for an Assignment.
Grade Center: Item
with a specific score
Display content based on a required score. Options include:
Less than or equal to
Greater than or equal to
Grade Center: Item
with a score
between X and Y
Review Status an
item
Equal to
Display content based on a range of scores. For example, if a Student
scores between 85 and 100 on an exam.
Display content to the user only after an associated item has been
marked Reviewed by the user.
About Date Criteria
Date criteria enable content to be displayed according to date and time. Content may be
displayed after a specific date, until a specific date, or within a time frame. For example, the
Instructor may use the date criteria to release lecture notes only after the lecture has occurred or
the date criteria option could be used to give one Group, such as Students with learning
disabilities, more time to access content than another Group would receive.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Dates for availability may be set when the item is created or edited under options or through a
Date criteria rule. The Instructor may decide to use both the date restrictions on the Edit page and
the Date criteria rule. For example, the item is made available on the Edit page from December 1
– December 30. Then the item may be made available to one small group of users from
December 1 – December 15 and another small group of users from December 16 – December
30.
Note: If the date is changed on the item itself, for example on the Edit Item page, and date
criteria already exist, a warning message appears. The same is true if the user attempts to add
date criteria and a date for the item has been set on the Add or Edit page.
Add Date Criteria to a Rule
Date criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release rules
and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in addition
to date criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
Follow the steps below to add date criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced from the contextual menu for the item. The
Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click Create Rule. The Add Rule page appears.
5.
Type a name for the rule and click Submit.
OR
Select Edit from the contextual menu for an existing rule on the Adaptive Release page
to edit its criteria.
6.
Select Date in contextual menu. The Date page appears.
Date Criteria
Setting
Display an item after a
specific date
Click the check box next to Display After. Select a date and time
in the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to users after
this date and time.
Display an item until a
specific date
Click the check box next to Display Until. Select a date and time
in the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to users until
this date and time.
Display an item after a
specific date and until a
specific date
Click the check box next to Display After and Display Until.
Select a date and time in the drop-down lists below. The item will
appear to users between these dates and times.
About Membership Criteria
Membership criteria allow content to be displayed according to username and Course Group. The
Instructor may set up criteria that use one or both of these options. The Instructor may make this
item available to a Course Group, or the Instructor may make this item available to a Course
Group and other specific individuals.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Make Content Available to Specific Users
Membership criteria are useful for making content available to a specific user or set of users. For
example, if a Student requests a way to earn more points for class the Instructor may agree, but
decide to not offer this option to the entire Course. The Instructor creates an extra credit content
item and only releases it to the single Student through the Membership criteria.
Make Content Available to Groups
Membership criteria may be used to manage content for Groups within a Course. For example, a
class is divided into three groups and each group has a different Assignment. They are instructed
to learn the topic and then present the material to the entire class. The Instructor has materials for
each Group. The Instructor loads the material for Group 1 as content items, and releases the
material only to Group 1. Then the Instructor loads the material for Group 2 as content items, and
releases that material only to Group 2. This same process is used for Group 3. When a Group
presents the material to the class, the Instructor may then change the release rule on that
material so it becomes available to the entire class. (Alternatively, if the Instructor knows the date
of presentation ahead of time, the Date criteria may be used to make the content available for the
rest of the class.)
Add Membership Criteria to a Rule
Membership criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release
rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in
addition to Membership criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
Follow the steps below to add Membership criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced from the contextual menu for the item. The
Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click Create Rule. The Add Rule page appears.
5.
Type a name for the rule and click Submit.
OR
Select Edit from the contextual menu for an existing rule on the Adaptive Release page
to edit its criteria.
6.
Select Membership in the contextual menu. The Membership page appears.
Membership
Criteria
Setting
Make content
available to
specific users
In the Username field enter one or more Usernames, separated by
commas or click Browse to search the system. Use the Search for
Course User window to search for and select Usernames to add to the
field. Selected Usernames appear at the bottom of the section.
Make content
available to
Groups
All Groups in the Course appear in Available Course Groups, even
those that are unavailable. Use the arrows to move Groups from the
Available Course Groups field to the SelectedCourse Groups field.
Content is displayed to all of the Groups that appear in the Selected
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Membership
Criteria
Setting
field.
About Grade Center Criteria
Grade Center criteria may be used to release content based on item attempt and score. A
number of different score values may be selected, including the following:
A score greater than a set value
A score less than a set value
A score that equals a specific value
A score that falls within a range of values
Make Content Available Based on Grade Center Attempt
Grade Center criteria are useful for Instructors who want to make content visibility dependent on
attempts made by Students on Tests or Assignments. For example, an Instructor may prepare a
pre-test for Students to prepare for the final. The idea is for the Students to pre-test themselves
before seeing the review materials, to know how much they recall without extra studying. Using
Grade Center criteria the Instructor creates the review materials, but only releases it to Students
who have attempted the pre-testleast once.
Another example of attempt based criteria is end-of-term surveys. Some Institutions require endof-term surveys about the Course before the final exam is taken. In this case, the Instructor can
make the final exam item available only after the survey is attempted at least once.
Make Content Available Based on Grade Center Score
Grade Center criteria may be used to make content available based on the score a Student
receives. Many Courses rely on progression, such as foreign languages, where Students must
learn one topic before moving onto another. If an Instructor is about to teach advanced verb
conjugation, but wants Students to have passed the Assignment on basic verb conjugation, the
Instructor can create a rule that allows only those Students who have received at least a 70 on
the basic verb conjugation Assignment to view the advanced verb conjugation material.
Instructors can also establish a range of values for content release, such as releasing an item
only to users who scored between a 70 and 80 and might need some remediation, but less
remediation than users who received less than a 70. In this case, the Instructor creates two
content items and releases one to users who fall into the 70-80 range and releases the other to
Students who received less than a 70.
Add Grade Center Criteria to a Rule
Grade Center criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive
Release rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a
rule, in addition to Grade Center criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tip: Only one Grade Center item may be selected for each Grade Center criteria. For example,
one criterion may not be used to make an item visible based on the score of two different Grade
Center items. However, multiple Grade Center criteria may be added to a single Advanced
Adaptive Release rule. The Instructor may set up one criterion that makes Project A available
after Test #1 is complete and another criterion in the same rule that makes Project A available
after Test #2 is complete. In this example, only Students who have completed Test #1 and Test
#2 may view Project A.
Follow the steps below to add Grade Center criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced from the contextual menu for the item. The
Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click Create Rule. The Add Rule page appears.
5.
Click Grade in the contextual menu. The Grade page appears.
6.
Select the Grade Center item this criteria is based on in the Select Grade Center
Column drop-down list. Only one item may be selected.
Grade Center Criteria
Setting
Make content available
based on Grade Center
attempt
Select the option User has at least one attemptfor this item.
Make content available
based on less than, greater
than, or equal to score
Use the options in the Score drop-down list to select Less
Than, Greater Than, or Equal To. Type a number in the field
for the score this criteria is based on; this must be an integer.
Make content available for a
score within a range of
values
Select the option Score between _ and _. Type the range of
values in the fields within this option.
About Review Status Criteria
Review Status criteria are used to release content based on the user‘s review of a specific
content item. For example, the Instructor may create criteria that make Assignment #1 available
only after Students have marked Homework #1 reviewed.
Add Review Status Criteria to a Rule
Review Status criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive
Release rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a
rule, in addition to Review Status, to further narrow the availability of an item. Review Status may
be applied to a Learning Module but may not be applied to individual files within a Learning
Module.
Follow the steps below to add Review Status criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced from the contextual menu for the item. The
Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click Create Rule in the Action Bar to add a rule. The Add Rule page appears.
5.
Type a name for the rule and click Submit.
OR
Select Edit from the contextual menu for an existing rule on the Adaptive Release page
to edit its criteria.
6.
Select Review Status in the Action Bar. The Review Status page appears.
7.
Select Browse to open the Course Menu. Click an item in the menu to select it for
Review Status criteria. Review Status will be turned on for this item. Users must mark the
item reviewed before the content including this rule is available.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Review Status
The Review Status tool allows the Instructor to track user review of specific content items. Once
the Instructor enables the tool for an item, each Student tracks their progress. A Mark Reviewed
button appears on the item when the user opens the Content Area. After reviewing the item, the
Student selects this button to mark it Reviewed. The Instructor may check the status of Student
reviews on the User Progress page.
Review Status During Course Copy, Archive and Export
Review Status settings and user status information are only included during a full Course copy
with users and during archive and restore operations. Review Status settings and status
information are not saved during a copy of Course materials into a new Course or during a copy
of Course materials into an existing Course. The same is true for export and import operations.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator must enable the Review Status tool for all Courses.If the Review
Status tool is disabled at the Administrator or Course level, the Review Status links on the
Manage page disappear and the Review / Mark Reviewed buttons on the Course pages are no
longer shown. If the tool is later re-enabled, those links and buttons reappear and any data
associated with Review Status (such as an individual user‘s progress) is restored.
How to Enable Review Status for an Item in a Course
When Review Status is enabled for an item a Mark Reviewed button appears next to the item
when the Content Area is opened by the user. The user must select this button to mark the item
Reviewed.
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click the Contextual Menu for the content item.
4.
Click Set Review Status.
5.
Click Enable.
6.
Click Submit.
How to Disable Review Status for an Item in a Course
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click the Contextual Menu for the content item.
4.
Click Set Review Status.
5.
Click Disable.
6.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Next Steps
Check User Progress
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
User Progress
The User Progress page tracks the availability and review status for a specific content item. The
Instructor may use this page to view all users in the Course, the availability of the item to them,
the Review Status, and the date and time the item was reviewed. If Adaptive Release rules have
been created, a rule summary is also shown.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator must enable the Adaptive Release or Review Status tool.
If the user changes the status of an individual item from Reviewed to Mark Reviewed, all record
of the previous status is erased. The Instructor will not be alerted to the change other than by
seeing the new status in the User Progress page or in the Performance Dashboard.
How to Check User Progress
The User Progress page lists all enrolled users in a Course. A link to each rule at the top of the
page allows the Instructor to view and edit rules for this item.
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to the Contextual Menu for the content item.
4.
Click User Progress.
All columns with unique information in the list may be sorted. Each user‘s first and last name,
username, and role are noted. Additionally, the user‘s visibility for the item is listed. If the item is
visible to the user an open eye appears in the column. If the item is not visible to the user the eye
appears closed. The Review Status also appears on the page, along with the date the item was
reviewed. This column only appears if Review Status is enabled for the item, either through the
Review Status option or through an Adaptive Release Rule.
How to Check User Progress from the Performance Dashboard
The Instructor may check the Review Status for each item that has Review Status Enabled, either
through an Adaptive Release Rule or the Review Status option. OR Click the Adaptive Release
icon to open the Map. The Map displays the Review Status for all items in the Course for that
user.
1.
Select Performance Dashboard under Evaluation on the Control Panel. The
Performance Dashboard is shown.
2.
Click the number under the Review Status column next to the user in question. The
Review Status page for this user is shown.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Performance Dashboard
The Performance Dashboard tool provides a window into all types of user activity in a Course or
Organization. All users enrolled in the Course are listed, with pertinent information about that
user‘s progress and activity in the Course.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator must enable the tool and make it available. When enabled by the
Administrator, the Performance Dashboard will be on by default in all Courses.
View the Performance Dashboard
The Performance Dashboard is accessed through the Evaluation area of the Control Panel. This
page shows the following information
Last Name
First Name
Username
Role
Last Course Access
Days Since Last Course Access
Review Status - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. Displays how many items have
been reviewed; a detailed view of items may be opened in a new window.
Adaptive Release - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. An overview of the Student
path may be opened in a new window.
Discussion Board - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. Provides links to the
Discussion Board comments.
Early Warning System - Shows the number of warnings and the number of total rules
that may trigger a warning. Clicking on the data in this column will open the Early
Warning System. The Early Warning System column will only display if the tool is
turned on in the Course.
View Grades - Only displayed if the Grade Center is enabled. Provides links to the
Grade Center: User grade List page for that user.
Users can click Print to open the page in a new window in a printer-friendly format. All applicable
columns may be sorted.
Understanding the Review Status Indicator
The numbers provided in the Review Status column of the Performance Dashboard indicate the
number of items that the Student has marked as Reviewed.
Using Adaptive Release rules in a Course creates multiple tracks for Students to progress
through. This allows for the possibility that each Student will have a different requirement for
marking certain items in a Course as Reviewed. At any time in a Course, items in a Student‘s
track may or may not be visible to them. The Performance Dashboard provides an at-thismoment view of the item availability and the Student‘s progress on reviewing items.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
The Review Status indicator links to a list of the items that the user sees as Reviewed and Mark
Reviewed in the Course.
The Review Status column is only visible if Review Status has been enabled for the Course.
Link to Adaptive Release
The Adaptive Release indicator in the Performance Dashboard for each user opens the Course
Menu, showing every possible item in the Course. Icons beside each item in the Course Map
indicate the visibility of an item to that Course user, and the review status of any items with a
review requirement, if applicable.
A d a p t i ve R e l e a s e a n d R e vi e w S t a t u s i c o n s :
Visible – this item is visible to that Course user.
Invisible – this item is not visible to that Course user.
Reviewed – this item has been marked as Reviewed by the Course user.
Mark Reviewed – this item is displayed as Mark Reviewed to the Course user.
The Adaptive Release column is only visible if Adaptive Release has been enabled for the
Course.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Statistics Tracking
Statistics Tracking at the content item level allows Instructors to view detailed statistics on content
item usage for all Course users. In addition to the availability and Review Status information
available on the User Progress page, these detailed statistics can help Instructors determine how
many times the particular content item was viewed and exactly when it was accessed.
Before You Begin
Statistics Tracking is separate from Course Statistics accessed from the Control Panel. Course
Statistics provides information about Content Area access versus the item-by-item access
displayed on the Statistics Tracking page for a content item.
Statistics are only stored in the database when Statistics Tracking is enabled. If Statistics
Tracking is turned on after some users have accessed the content item, the record of their access
cannot be recovered. Data will only be displayed for those users who access the content item
after Statistics Tracking was turned on.
If a user is unenrolled, their data will be deleted from all Course Statistics. If statistics are still
expected to be tracked for those users set them as unavailable; do not unenroll them from the
course.
How to Turn Statistics Tracking On and Off
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to the contextual menu for an item.
4.
SelectStatistics Tracking.
5.
Click On or Off.
6.
Click Submit.
How to View Statistics Reports for Content Items
When Statistics Tracking is enabled, the View Statistics link is active on the Statistics Tracking
page. (This link is displayed, but not in an active state, if Statistics Tracking is not enabled for the
content item.)
The report displays three sections of data: Access by Date, Access by Hour of the Day, and
Access by Day of the Week. The Access by Date section displays information for all enrolled
users. Access information for system guests and unenrolled users (previously enrolled users who
were deleted from the Course) is displayed under the Guest user. Observer access to content
items is not tracked.
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to the contextual menu for an item.
4.
Select View Statistics Report.
5.
Fill in the Report Specifications including date range and format (PDF, HTML, Word).
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
6.
Select the appropriate Users filter: All Users or Selected Users. Press CTRL to select
more than one user from the list.
7.
Select Submit to run the report.
Editing, Printing and Exporting a Report
To change the report query (to add more users, delete users, or change the date range) select
Change Filter. Edit the Time Period and/or Users selected as appropriate and select Submit to
run the report.
To send the report to a printer in a printer-friendly format, select Print. The report will be printed
exactly as it is displayed on the screen.
To export the report data for further, off-line data analysis, select Export Data. Save the data
using the File Download pop-up windows that appears. The comma-separated values (CSV) file
can now be opened in any statistical analysis program (such as Microsoft Excel).
Course Files
The following categories describe Course Files and how the repository interacts within
Blackboard Learn.
About Course Files
Working in Course Files
Organizing Files and Folders
Course Files Permissions
Locating Files and Folders
Viewing Files and Folders in Course Files
Linking to Course Files
Downloading Files and Folders
Course Files and Web Folders (WebDAV)
Course Files and the Content Collection
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Course Files
Creating and maintaining a repository of materials is an important part of developing an online
course. With Course Files, instructors have access to all of their files from a central location
inside their course. They can manage, organize, and view those files to suit their needs.
Large amounts of content can be moved quickly from a local drive to Course Files. Once content
is in Course Files, it can be organized in any way using folders and sub-folders. The organization
of content in Course Files is separate from the organization of content presented in a course.
Course Files is relative to the course, and so only content for the course is stored there. Content
is not shared across courses taught by the same instructor. However, content in course files can
be used in multiple places within the course just by linking to it.
Content linked to a course from course files is not deleted when the link in the course is deleted.
The file still remains in course files and can be used again. Links to course content are not broken
when files are modified or moved to another Course Files folder.
About Course Files and the Content Collection
The Content Collection is a separately licensed feature of Blackboard Learn. With it, institutions
have a common content repository where content can be shared. If the Content Collection is
licensed and enabled, content from other courses and from your personal directory can be added
to the course and managed through Course Files.
For those users with Content Collection, Course Files acts as a window into the entire repository.
For those users that do not use Content Collection, Course Files is a repository just for the
current course. Each course has a separate repository, and they are not connected.
Please see the content management section of this guide for information on using the Content
Collection. The instructions in this section will assume that the Content Collection is not in use.
Accessing Course Files
Each course has its own Course Files area available to instructors on the Control Panel. Students
do not have access to Course Files from the course, but they can see Course Files if they have
read permissions on the Files and they go through either the Content Collection or the Content
module.
Files will display on the Files page that opens when you click the link of the course name. Click
on the name of a folder to open it in the main frame.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Working in Course Files
Organize the Course Files environment by making folders and sub-folders. Creating a logical
filing system makes it easy to locate and link to content items. Once a folder structure is in place,
upload content into the various folders.
Remember that the folder structure in Course Files is separate from folders in a Content Area of a
course and has no impact on the presentation of content.
Creating Folders
Editing, Copying, Moving and Deleting Folders
Creating HTML Objects
Uploading Content
Using the Browse function
Using the Drag-and-Drop function
Uploading Zipped Packages
Overwriting a File
How to Create a Folder
1. On the Action Bar, click Create Folder.
2. Type a Folder Name in the text field that appears.
3. Click Submit. The folder appears alphabetically in the directory in Course Files.
Editing, Copying, Moving and Deleting Folders
Access the contextual menu of a folder to edit the folder name. Any folder name can be changed
except the top level folder. Changing the name of a folder will not break any links to content in the
course.
Use the Action Bar or contextual menu to copy or move the folder. Moving a folder will not break
any links to content in the course.
Folders can be deleted using the Action Bar or contextual menu. This action is final and cannot
be undone. All content in a folder will be permanently deleted from Course Files and any links in
the course will be broken. Broken links will display a ―Invalid File‖ statement next to them.
Creating HTML Objects
Within Course Files, new items can be created using the Text Editor. These items are called
HTML Objects.
HTML Objects are created in Course Files using the Create HTML Object function on the Action
Bar. This action bar will appear within a folder as well as the main Files page. The text editor can
also add files, images, and multimedia to an HTML Object. Any files added to the HTML Object
are saved in Course Files in the same folder as the HTML Object. The new HTML Object can be
linked to one or more locations in the course.
Note: The system administrator can disable this function.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
1.
Click the Course Files folder where the HTML Object will be created.
2.
On the Action Bar, click Create HTML Object.
3.
On the Create Reusable Object page, tUploaype a Name. This is the file‘s name in Course
Files.
4.
In the Text Editor, type the content. Use the Text Editor functions to format the text and
add files, images, and multimedia, if desired. Any files added from a local drive as
attachments are automatically uploaded to Course Files.
5.
Click Submit.
Uploading Content
Files can be uploaded in to Course Files in different ways. Files can be located and uploaded by
browsing a local drive. Files can be uploaded using a drag-and-drop function. A single file or
multiple files and folders can be uploaded in one action. There are options for multiple and single
uploads. All supported file types can be saved to Course Files.
Using the Browse Function
When files are uploaded, they are added to the folder currently displayed in the content frame.
Files can be moved to other folders at any time.
1.
Click the Course Files folder where the files will be uploaded.
2.
On the Action Bar, point to Upload to access the drop-down list.
3.
Select Upload Files.
4.
Select Single File to upload one file. Use this option to upload a zip package without
unzipping it.
5.
Select Multiple Files to upload more than one file with the same operation.
6.
Click Browse on the Action Bar.
7.
Open a local drive folder containing the files and folders to upload.
8.
Select the file or files and folders. To select more than one file at a time hold down the
CTRL key while clicking the files and folders to upload.
9.
Click Open in the dialog box.
10.
The files and folders are added to the system upload list. The contents of folders will
display individually in the upload list, but after they are uploaded, they will be contained in
their parent folder in the directory. Open another folder on a local drive and continue to add
files and folders at this time. Attempting to upload a file with the same name as an existing
file will generate a prompt to overwrite the current file.
11.
Click Submit. A status bar will display the progress of your upload.
Using the Drag-and-Drop Function
Use the drag-and-drop function to upload a single file, multiple files, or one or more folders.
1.
Click the Course Files folder where the files will be uploaded.
2.
On the Action Bar, point to Upload to access the drop-down list.
3.
Select Upload Files.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Select Multiple Files.
5.
On a local drive, open the folder containing the files and folders to upload.
6.
Select multiple files and folders at one time by holding down the CTRL key while clicking
the files and folders to upload.
7.
Drag files and folders into the upload box.
8.
Files and folders appear in the upload box. Open another folder on a local drive and
continue to add files and folders at this time, if desired.
9.
Click Submit. A status bar will display the progress of the upload.
Uploading Zipped Packages
Files and folders can be zipped into a package and uploaded into Course Files. Zipped files can
be automatically unzipped, keeping the folder structure and links intact. This is especially useful
for developing a complete Web site or other linked content off line using an authoring tool and
then uploading the entire site. Alternatively, keep the file zipped and use it as an attachment that
can be downloaded and unzipped by users on their local drive.
To upload and automatically unzip a package:
1.
Create a folder in Course Files for the contents of the zipped package.
2.
Click the name of the new folder.
3.
On the Action Bar, point to Upload to access the drop-down list.
4.
Select Upload Package.
5.
Click Browse to locate the file on your local drive.
6.
Click Submit. The zipped package will automatically unzip in the selected folder.
To link the unzipped content to a Content Area so that it will display as a unit, add the first or start
page (for example index.html) as an attachment or file to a content item. Users click the link and
the material will display with all the links, images, and navigation intact.
To upload a zipped package without unzipping:
1.
Click the Course Files folder where the zipped package will be uploaded.
2.
On the Action Bar, point to Upload to access the drop-down list.
3.
Select Upload Files.
4.
Select Single File.
5.
On the Upload Single File page, click Browse to locate the zipped file on a local drive.
6.
Click Submit.
Overwriting a File
Files that are uploaded to Course Files that have the same name as an existing file will generate
a prompt to overwrite the existing file with the new file. Overwriting a file is permanent and cannot
be undone. To keep both versions, change the name of one file or add it to a different folder.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Organizing Files and Folders
In Course Files, file can be moved into folders and folders can be moved into other folders. All
links to the moved content will remain intact in your course.
1.
Select the check boxes of the files and folders to move. Move one or multiple items at a
time.
2.
Click Move on the Action Bar.
3.
Click Browse to select the Destination folder.
4.
Select the Destination folder. Move a file or folder from a subfolder to the main Course
Files folder by selecting Select current directory. NOTE: On the Select Folder page, use
the Create Folder function on the Action Bar to add a folder while moving content.
5.
Click Submit.
6.
On the Move page, click Submit. The files and folders will be moved to their new folders.
Renaming Files and Folders
Any file or folder can be renamed in Course Files. Any links to the renamed content will remain
intact. However, if the file name is displayed in the course, the file name will not be updated in the
course area.
TIP: Changes to file names in Course Files will not affect Link Names added to file attachments in
a course, so consider always adding a Link Name when linking files.
1.
In Course Files, click the Action Link for the file or folder you want to rename.
2.
Select Edit.
3.
On the Edit page, type the new File Name.
4.
Click Submit.
Deleting Files and Folders
Any file or folder can be deleted in Course Files. Deleting items is permanent and cannot be
undone. Links to content in a course will appear broken and display an error message to users.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Files Permissions
When a file is added to Course Files and linked to content in a course, it is automatically assigned
the Read permission for all course users. Other users enrolled in the course, such as a teaching
assistant or course builder, have additional permissions for the files by default. Permissions for
any file or user can be changed in Course Files. For example, to prevent a teaching assistant
from deleting a certain file, change the permissions for that file. To prevent a teaching assistant
from deleting any file, change the permission for the teaching assistant.
Note: Blackboard Learn includes a system-wide module that displays the contents of Course
Files to users if they have read permissions to see the content. This would allow users to see
Course Files content even if it is not visible in the course due to adaptive release rules.
The following table describes the privileges for each type of permission.
T yp e o f P e r m i s s i o n
P r i vi l e g e s
Read
View and download
Write
Edit and overwrite
Add files and folders to a folder
Remove
Download and delete
Manage
Control properties and settings
Determine permissions on the Manage Permissions page
Editing User Permissions
1.
In Course Files, navigate to the folder or file.
2.
Click the icon in the Permissions column next to the file or folder.
3.
On the Manage Permissions page, next to the User or User List, access the contextual
menu.
4.
Select Edit.
5.
On the Edit Permissions page, select or clear the check box next to the Permissions type.
6.
Click Submit.
7.
Click OK to return to Course Files.
Editing Folder Permissions
When items are uploaded to folders, they inherit the same permissions as the parent folder.
When editing permissions on the folder the following options are available:
Edit the existing permissions on the folders and its contents
Overwrite the existing permissions on files and subfolders.
When a file is copied to a different folder, it loses its original permissions and inherits any new
ones associated with its new parent folder. However, if a file is moved to a different folder, it
maintains its original permissions. It does not inherit permissions associated with the parent
folder.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Locating Files and Folders
Search for files and folders within Course Files by clicking the double arrows to expand the
Search field in the Files area of Course Management.
Type a keyword or text string in the Search box and click Go to perform a quick search. Searches
are not case-sensitive. Results will include files and folders within the course.
Alternatively, click Basic Search under the Search box to open the Basic Search page in the
content frame. A Basic Search locates files and folders based on a keyword or single text string.
Select the check box to Search File Contents. File contents are indexed periodically, so new
content may not be found immediately. Searching file contents can increase the search time.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Viewing Files and Folders in Course Files
The default view of the files and folders in Course Files is a list with standard small icons in the
File Type column.
To make it easier to locate items in Course Files, click View Thumbnails at the top of the screen
to switch from List View to Thumbnail View. The system will remember which view you have
chosen and it will remain until you change the view.
In the thumbnails view, each file and folder is represented by a larger icon. Any action performed
on a file or folder in list view can also be performed on a file or folder in thumbnails view.
Use the slider to change the size of the thumbnails. The thumbnails view displays the image of
the item for image file types, such as .png and .jpeg. For all other file types, the standard icon
representing the file type is displayed.
Click an image to preview it. Click the X to close the preview window. Click any icon to view more
information. Click the file‘s name to open the document, such as a PDF or Microsoft®
PowerPoint® presentation. Click a folder‘s icon to view the contents of the folder.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Linking to Course Files
Once files have been added to Course Files, they can be linked to areas in a course, such as
learning modules, calendar events, content items, journal and blog topics and instructor entries,
messages, announcements, tasks, wikis, test descriptions and instructions, and the Discussion
Board.
Wherever attaching files is available, click the Browse Course Files function to attach a file or use
the Attach File function in the text editor. Adding files using the text editor offers more control over
where the file‘s link will display on the page. Some course areas do not allow attaching files from
Course Files, such as when you are creating assignments or individual wiki pages.
1.
In a Content Area, point to Build Content to access the drop-down list.
2.
Select Item in the Create column.
3.
On the Create Item page, type a Name and type information in the Text box.
4.
Under Attachments, click Browse Course Files.
5.
On the Select File or Folder page, select one or more files and folders.
6.
Click the Show List function, represented by the full square, to open the Selected Files
area to view your selections. Remove any file by clicking the X.
7.
Click Submit.
8.
On the Create Item page, type a Link Title for the attached file; otherwise the file name
will be displayed in the Content Area. Choose a name that is meaningful to students.
9.
Select the Options.
10.
Click Submit. The item appears in the Content Area with the selected file linked to Course
Files. The link to the file precedes text typed in the Text Editor.
Reusing HTML Objects
Content items that have been created in a Content Area using the Text Editor and saved as a
Reusable Object are stored in Course Files as a HTML Objects. These objects can be reused in
other Content Areas.
Note: Users not licensing content management capabilities will not have access to the Discover
Content option. In this case you will be able to just reuse HTML Objects by adding a link to the
item from a file in Course Files. Creating and adding content is the same.
1.
From the content area, click Discover Content on the Action Bar.
2.
The Discover Content field expands. From the drop-down list, select the Reusable Object.
3.
Click Go.
4.
Select the Reusable Object from the list.
5.
Click Submit.
6.
The Create Item page appears so you can edit the HTML Object Name. Consider
removing .html from the Name. Use the Text box to edit the item‘s information and add a
file, or remove an existing file attachment.
7.
Click Submit. The new HTML Object appears in the Content Area as a content item. The
content in an HTML Object will display in the Blackboard Learn interface, instead of being
opened separately.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Viewing a File’s Course Links
View information about a file stored in Course Files using the 360 degree View report. This report
provides a list of all the course areas that have been linked to the file. This is critical to
determining where changes to the file will occur in the course, including what links will break if the
file is deleted while still linked to course areas. Other information is provided in this report
including:
File name
File type
File size
Last edited date
User permissions
To see the report, access the contextual menu of a file and select 360 View.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Downloading Files and Folders
Files and folders within Course Files can be saved in zipped package and downloaded to a local
drive. This is helpful for reusing selected files in other courses or editing several files offline.
1.
In Course Files, select the check boxes next to the files and folders to add to the package.
2.
On the Action Bar, click Download Package.
3.
In the pop-up window, select Save and click OK to save the zipped package to a local
drive. The file name for the file is the Course ID with the .zip extension.
Files that have been edited on a local drive and then uploaded back into Course Files will retain
their links as long as the original file names remain. If the name of any file is changed while on
the desktop, a new file is added to Course Files when uploading and the edits made to the file will
not show in the course where it is linked.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Files and Web Folders (WebDAV)
WebDAV is used for sharing files over the Internet and is compatible with most operating
systems. When put into use with Blackboard Learn, WebDAV is a means for users to access
content from Course Files as if it were any other network drive or folder on their personal
computers.
When WebDAV—or a Web Folder—is set up, all course files can be managed from the desktop,
dragging in content from multiple drives and folders and organizing it as needed. Other functions
can be performed on the files and folders in the Course Files Web Folder because the folder
structure is visible and can be navigated. Finally, it is possible to edit a file directly in the Web
Folder, without downloading it, editing it, and uploading it again.
Many users are accustomed to using WebDAV and prefer to continue to use this method for file
management.
Note: The system administrator determines if WebDAV is available.
Web Folder Actions
The following actions can be performed on files and folders using WebDAV with Course Files:
Add files and folders
Browse the contents of folders in Course Files
Open and view files, such as a Microsoft® Word file
Create folders
Move, copy, rename, and remove files and folders
Open and edit files, such as Microsoft® Office® files.
Setting up a Web Folder
1.
In Course Files, click Setup Web Folder on the Action Bar of the top level folder. Starting
from this location will ensure WebDAV access to all folders contained in Course Files. If
you want, you may select any folder inside Course Files; however, the Web Folder path
must be less than 100 characters.
2.
On the Using Web Folders page, copy the URL that appears for Current Web address.
You will paste the address in later steps. Tip: To copy, select the address and right-click;
select Copy.
3.
From the Start Menu in Windows®, select Documents > My Documents. Click My
Network Places in the left frame.
4.
Select Add a network place from the Network Tasks menu.
5.
In the Add Network Place Wizard, select Choose another network location to create a
shortcut.
6.
Paste the URL for the Web Folder you copied earlier and click Next.
7.
Type your Blackboard Learn username and password, if prompted. Type a name for the
network place and click Next. Click Finish to close the wizard. The Web Folder will open
and display in My Network Places. You may be prompted again for a username and
password.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
8.
Access My Network Places and select the Web Folder shortcut you created.
9.
Locate the local folder containing the files and folders you want to transfer.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Files and the Content Collection
Course Files can utilize the features of the Content Collection when it is available, combining the
capacity to easily add content to a course with abilities to share that content among multiple
courses, add commenting, versioning, and tracking.
The Content Collection is part of a set of features that are licensed separately. The first view
opens the file directory for the first. The second view opens the Content Collection, if it is
available.
HTML Objects saved as reusable objects can be added to the Course Files or added to a
Content Collection folder so they can be reused in other courses.
The Course Files panel toggles two views using the icons on the top bar.
Modifying the Default Directory
If you have licensed the content management capabilities, there is an option to choose any folder
as your Course Files directory. If you opt to turn off the /courses directory you will need to pay
attention to this option.
Directory edits are made from the control panel, under customization and properties. There is a
subsection on the properties page for Course Files where you can set the directory.
Uploading Content to Course Files
Uploading Content is done the same when the Content Collection is available. An additional set
of options becomes available. These options include:
Lock File – A file that is locked cannot be changed by anyone regardless of their
permission settings until it is unlocked by the user who locked it.
Share Comments – Comments added to a file can be shared among users who have
permission.
Enable Versioning – All versions of a file are stored and can be accessed instead of
being overwritten.
Enable Tracking – Usage of files is tracked in order to produce report data on the
number of hits, and the day and times of access.
Accessing the Content Collection in a Course
When the Content Collection is available, instructors can access folders and content anywhere
they have permission without leaving the course environment. By expanding the Course Files
panel using the All Content icon, instructors can create folders, build and upload content in the
Content Collection.
Instructors can then return to the any area in their course by using the Course Menu links and
continue building their material.
Linking Course Content to Course Files
Wherever attaching files is available, click the Browse Course Files function to attach a file or
use the Attach File function in the text editor. Files stored in the Content Collection are available
in the selection window.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Reusable Objects
Any content created using the text editor can be saved as a Reusable Object. Select the Save as
Reusable Object check box and then browse for a location to save it. Reusable objects must be
edited in their original location within the course, but changes will be propagated to the Content
Collection and to any links to the object in other locations.
Mashups
The following topics explain how to create and use Mashups within a Course.
About Mashups
Creating a Mashup Item
Creating a Mashup Item using the Text Editor
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Mashups
Mashups allow Instructors to add content to a Course that is from an external Web site. This
content is used in a variety of ways within a Course: a standalone piece of Course Content, part
of a test question, a topic on a Discussion Board, or as part of an assignment. The content
displayed in a course will still reside on the external Web site.
Mashups are added as a Content Item in a folder or added through the Text Editor. Adding a
Mashup as a Content Item makes it a part of the information that you present to users for them to
view. Adding a Mashup using the Text Editor means that you can put Mashups in places where
users can interact with the content, such as in Test Questions, Discussion Boards, and Blogs.
Mashups are displayed in the following ways:
Embed: The Mashup displays directly on the page when a student opens the item.
Thumbnail View with Player: A small picture of the Mashup displays on the page with
controls to launch it.
Text Link with Player: A link to the Mashup is displayed on the page. Students click the
link to launch the Mashup.
Example
To encourage discussion about "Hamlet", the Instructor can create a Mashup that includes a
video of a scene from a production of the play and a link to a newspaper review of that
production.
Default Mashup Types
These are the default Mashups that are included with Blackboard Learn. Other sources are
added as Building Blocks. Blackboard Learn supports adding content from the following sources:
Flickr: a site for viewing and sharing photographic images.
Slideshare: a site for viewing and sharing PowerPoint presentations, Word documents,
or Adobe PDF Portfolios.
YouTube: a site for viewing and sharing online videos.
Next Steps
For more information, see the following topics:
Creating a Mashup Item
Creating a Mashup Item using the Text Editor
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a Mashup Item
Creating a Mashup as a Content Item makes it a part of the information that you present to users
for them to view.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator can disable individual Mashups or all Mashups. If a Mashup is not
available, contact the System Administrator to determine its status. Mashups are often disabled to
comply with institutional rules that govern online teaching and learning.
Mashups are not available with a basic license.
Create a Mashup Item
1.
Navigate to the Content area of your Course.
2.
Select Flickr Photo, Slideshare Presentation, or YouTube Video from the Build
Content drop down list.
3.
Search for content.
4.
Click Preview to examine the items.
5.
Click Select for the appropriate item.
6.
Change the Name of the item. This is a required field.
7.
Type a Description of the Mashup.
8.
Set the Mashup Options.
9.
Attach additional content items to the Mashup by clicking Browse My Computer or
Browse Course Files.
10.
Click Yes to Permit Users to View this Content.
11.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
12.
Use the Display After and Display Until date and time fields to restrict the availability of
the Mashup. Click both the Display After and Display Until check boxes to enable the
date and time settings.
13.
Click Preview to examine the Mashup.
14.
Click Submit.
Result
When finished, the Mashup appears in the folder or Content Area where it was created. If
necessary, use the action link for the Mashup item to set Adaptive Release rules, add metadata,
or track the number of views.
If the Mashup does not appear or displays an error after initially appearing, it is possible that the
URL has changed or the item was deleted from Flickr, Slideshare, or YouTube.
Next Steps
For more information, see the following topics:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Mashups: Learn about the default Mashups that are available with Blackboard
Learn.
Creating a Mashup using the Text Editor: Learn how to create Mashups using the Text
Editor.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a Mashup Item using the Text Editor
Creating a Mashup using the Text Editor means that you can put Mashups in places where users
can interact with the content, such as in Test Questions, Discussion Boards, and Blogs.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator can disable individual Mashups or all Mashups. If a Mashup is not
available, contact the System Administrator to determine its status. Mashups are often disabled to
comply with institutional rules that govern online teaching and learning.
Mashups are not available with a basic license.
Create a Mashup Item using the Text Editor
1.
Navigate to the Course Files area of your Course.
2.
Select a Content Item such as Discussion Topic from the Build drop down list.
3.
Type a Name for the Content Item.
4.
Click Add Mashup on the bottom row of Text Editor buttons.
5.
Select Flickr Photo, Slideshare Presentation, or YouTube Video.
6.
Search for content.
7.
Click Preview to examine the items.
8.
Click Select for the appropriate item.
9.
Change the Name of the item. This is a required field.
10.
Type a Description of the Mashup.
11.
Set the Mashup Options.
12.
Click Submit.
13.
Select from the following Options: Lock File, Share Comments, Enable Versioning, and
Enable Tracking.
14.
Click Submit.
Result
When finished, the Mashup appears in the folder or Content Area where it was created. If
necessary, use the action link for the Mashup item to set Adaptive Release rules, add metadata,
or track the number of views.
If the Mashup does not appear or displays an error after initially appearing, it is possible that the
URL has changed or the item was deleted from Flickr, Slideshare, or YouTube.
Next Steps
For more information, see the following topics:
About Mashups: Learn about the default Mashups that are available with Blackboard
Learn.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a Mashup Item
Learning Modules
A Learning Module is a set of Content Items with an accompanying structured path for
progressing through the items.
The following topics describe how to create and customize Learning Modules.
About Learning Modules
About the Learning Modules Table of Contents
Adding Folders to a Learning Module
Adding Content to a Learning Module
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Learning Modules
A Learning Module is a set of Content Items with an accompanying structured path for
progressing through the items. The path is set so that students must view content in sequentially
or set to permit students to view the content in any order. All types of content, such as items,
Assignment, and Tests may be included in a Learning Module.
Content within a Learning Module is added and managed just like content in a folder. The
Learning Module is a shell to which other content, such as files, is added. Learning Modules are
edited like any other item within a Content Area. See Adding Content to a Learning Module for
more information.
Instructors can add Folders and Sub-folders to a Learning Module to impose a hierarchical
structure over the content. This hierarchy is an outline view that is displayed in the Table of
Contents. See About the Learning Module Table of Contents for more information.
Sequential Learning Modules
Learning Modules may be viewed sequentially or non-sequentially. If sequential viewing is
enforced, Students view the Learning Module in the order items within it are listed. Students
cannot advance to a page within the unit without having viewed the previous page. If sequential
viewing is not enforced, items in the Learning Module may be viewed in any order from the
Contents page. Sequential viewing is set in the Options for the Learning Module and can be
changed at any time.
How to Create a Learning Module
1.
Select a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to Build Content.
4.
Select Learning Module.
5.
Type the Learning Module Information.
6.
Determine the Availability of the Learning Module.
7.
Click Yes to Enforce Sequential Viewing of the Learning Module.
8.
Click Yes to force the Learning Module to Open in New Window.
9.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
10.
Click Yes to Show Table of Contents to Students.
11.
Select the type of Hierarchy Display from the drop-down list.
12.
Click Submit.
Next Steps
Adding Folders to a Learning Module
About the Learning Module Table of Contents
Adding Content to a Learning Module
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Learning Module Table of Contents
The Table of Contents displays a link for each content item contained in the Learning Module.
Folders and Subfolders are expanded and collapsed to expose or hide the content items
contained within. When a user enters the Learning Module, the first content item within the
Learning Module is displayed.
How to Navigate the Learning Module Using the Table of Contents
Click the arrows next to the Page X of Y heading. This view will only be available if Edit Mode is
Off for you to be able to view how the student will view the pages. This allows the user to scroll
through the items in the Learning Module in a sequential fashion. If the Learning Module is
Sequential, then the user cannot navigate to the next item until the previous item has been
accessed. Although the Table of Contents displays a list of all the content items and folders in the
Learning Module, links only appear for the content items that the user can access.
If the Learning Module is not Sequential, then the user can use the arrows to navigate through
the content or click a link for any content item or folder displayed in the Table of Contents.
How to Customize the Table of Contents
Instructors can customize the Table of Contents by adjusting the Hierarchy Display setting. The
following choices are available:
Letters - A, B, C
Mixed - a combination of Roman Numerals, Numbers, and Letters
Numbers - 1, 2, 3
Roman Numerals - I, II, III
The Mixed hierarchical scheme uses Roman Numerals, Numbers, and Letters when multiple sublevels are used. Each element is alternated as the items are nested. Here is an example of the
Mixed Hierarchy Display:
See Learning Modules for information on the accessing the Hierarchy Display setting.
The Table of Contents is displayed next to the Course Menu and Control Panel by default. The
following are controls that allow you to change the Table of Contents location and appearance:
Close: Click Minimize Table of Contents. The contents of the Table of Contents are
not displayed on the page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Expand or Collapse: Click Maximize Table of Contents or Collapse Table of
Contents. Only five content items are visible when the Table of Contents is minimized.
Change the Position: Click Move to the Left, Move to the Right, Move to the
Bottom. The Language Pack in use determines the positions that the Table of Contents
can occupy on the Learning Module page.
Update the Listing of Content: Click Refresh. Click Refresh to reflect any drag and
drop changes made to the content items.
Note: To view the Table of Contents and Learning Module as a student, turn Edit Mode Off.
Next Steps
Adding Folders to a Learning Module
Adding Content to a Learning Module
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Folders to a Learning Module
Instructors can add Folders and Subfolders to a Learning Module to provide a hierarchical
structure. Folders and Subfolders provide an outline view that is displayed in the Table of
Contents. The Table of Contents allows Instructors to present content in a structured manner. If
the Learning Module is Sequential, a user must access all items within a folder before moving on
to the next item.
Folders and Subfolders within Learning Modules have the same properties as other Folders and
Subfolders found in the Course. You can access the following features from the contextual menu
for the Folder or Subfolder within the Learning Module:
Adaptive Release
Review Status
Metadata
Statistics Tracking
User Progress.
How to Add a Folder or Sub-folder to a Learning Module
1.
Open the Content Area that contains the Learning Module.
2.
Click the name of the Learning Module to open it. Click the name of the Folder or Subfolder if necessary.
3.
Point to Build Content and select Content Folder.
4.
Enter the Content Folder Information.
5.
Select Yes to Permit Users to View this Content.
6.
Select Yes to Track Number of Views.
7.
Choose the date and time restrictions by using the Display After and Display Until date
and time fields. Click both the Display After and Display Until check boxes to enable
the chosen dates and times.
8.
Click Submit.
Next Steps
About the Learning Module Table of Contents
Adding Content to a Learning Module
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Content to a Learning Module
After a Learning Module is added to a Content Area, content needs to be added to it. How the
content is viewed, sequentially or non-sequentially is set in the Options and can be changed at
any time. Content is added to Folders and Sub-folders within the Learning Module.
Content can be added outside Folders and Sub-folders. For example, a file can reside in the
Learning Module by itself and not in a folder.
As you add content to the Learning Module, a link to each content item is displayed in the Table
of Contents. See Adding Folders to Learning Module for more information.
Once content has been added to the Learning Module, set the sequence of the items by dropping
and dragging them into place. Items can also be sequenced using the Keyboard Accessible
Reordering tool located in the Action Bar.
How to Add Content to a Learning Module
1.
Open the Content Area that contains the Learning Module.
2.
Click the name of the Learning Module to open it. Click the name of the Folder or Subfolder if necessary.
3.
Point to Build Content and select one of the following items: Item, File, URL, Offline
Content, Lesson Plan, Syllabus, Course Link, Content Folder, or Tools Area.
4.
Click Submit.
How to Add Tests to a Learning Module
Tests, Surveys, and Assignments can be added to a Learning Module. Instructors can enforce
completion of these items as part of a Sequential Learning Module.
1.
Open the Content Area that contains the Learning Module.
2.
Click the name of the Learning Module to open it.
3.
Point to Create Assessment and select Test, Survey, or Assignment from the dropdown list.
4.
Complete the requirements for the selected item.
5.
Click Submit.
How to Add an Interactive Tool to a Learning Module
Learning Modules are connected to a specific Interactive Tool or to a page where that particular
tool is accessed. In the case of Building Blocks, such as SafeAssign and Self and Peer
Assessment, the link directs the user to the starting page for that particular Building Block.
1.
Open the Content Area that contains the Learning Module.
2.
Click the name of the Learning Module to open it.
3.
Point to Add Interactive Tool and select one of the following options:
Discussion Board
Blog
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Journal
Wiki
Groups
Chat
Virtual Classroom
Echo Content
4.
Select a specific instance of the tool or the page where that tool is accessed for the
Course.
OR
Create a new instance of the tool.
OR
Create a new instance of the Building Block, such as SafeAssign or Self and Peer
Assessment.
5.
Click Next.
6.
Type the Link Information.
7.
Determine the Availability of the tool.
8.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
9.
Determine the Date Restrictions of the tool.
10.
Click Submit.
Content Areas
Course Content Areas are used to organize all Course content materials. A link to each Content
Area creates the first level of the Course Menu tree directory. Course developers create and
manage Content Areas from the Course Menu.
While the Instructor has almost complete control over the Content Areas through the Course
Menu, the Administrator is able to set defaults and overrides that define the names and default
availability of Course areas in each Course.
Adding a Content Area
By default, a specific number of Content Areas appear in a Course. Instructors may decide to
create additional Content Areas or edit existing Content Areas. For example, a Content Area for
Assignments may be added and the name of the area may be changed to Homework.
Follow the steps below to add a Content Area to the Course Menu:
1.
Set Edit Mode to ON.
2.
Point to the Add button (+) on the Course Menu.
3.
Select Create Content Area.
4.
Type a Name for the Content Area.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
5.
Click the Available to Users check box to grant access to Students and other users in
the Course.
6.
Click Submit.
The new Content Area appears on the Course Menu. If the Content Area contains no content, an
icon of a dotted square appears. If the Content Area is unavailable to students, an icon of a
square with a line through it appears.
Edit Content Areas
Use the Contextual Menu to Edit, Delete, Show Icons Only or Show Icons and Text for the
Content Area.
Manage Content Areas
Once Content Areas for the Course have been created, content creation may begin. All content is
added and edited within the Content Areas. Select a Content Area on the Course Menu to open
the main Content Area page. All actions related to managing content are available from this page.
This includes:
Create Item - add any single Content Item
Build - add organizational elements such as folders, tools and links
Evaluate - add tests, surveys and assignments
Collaborate - add group and communication tools such as blogs, discussion boards
and chat sessions
Course Content
A Content Item is any type of file, text, image, or link that displays to users on a Content Area
page. Instructors may add a number of different types of content to Course Content Areas.
All content shares a few similarities. Each piece of content has a name and description. Many
types of Content also allow the Instructor to set options such as availability and date restrictions.
Content Type Descriptions
Different types of Content may be selected from Build Content on the Action Bar and associated
contextual menus to be added to a Content Area page.
C o n t e n t T yp e
Description
Create
Item
A general piece of content such as a file, image, text, or link to which a
description and other items may be attached. See Content Items for more
information.
File
An HTML file that can be used in the Course. These files can be viewed as
a page within the Course or as a separate piece of content in a separate
browser window. See Content Files for more information.
URL
Link to an outside Web site or resource. See URL for more information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
C o n t e n t T yp e
Description
Offline Content
A direct path to a specified file on a drive, usually a CD-ROM. To access
this file, users must have the correct CD-ROM in their computer.
Learning
Module
A set of content that includes a structured path for progressing through the
items. See Learning Modules for more information.
Lesson Plan
A Lesson Plan is special content type that combines information about the
lesson itself with the curriculum resources used to teach it.
Syllabus
Content item that enables an Instructor to build a Course Syllabus by
walking through a series of steps. See Syllabus for more information.
Course Link
Link to another item in a Course or in another part of the system such as
Course Objectives or Content Management. See Course Link for more
information.
New Page
Content Folder
An organizational element that contains Content Items. Folders allow
content to be structured with a hierarchy or categories. See Content
Folders for more information.
Blank Page
Add a Blank page and customize it to fit your Course.
Module Page
A page containing dynamic personalized content modules that help users
keep track of tasks, Tests, assignments, and new content added to the
course. See Creating and Editing Module Pages for more information.
Tools Area
A shortcut to a specific tool in the Course, such as a Discussion Board or
Messages. See Tools Area for more information.
Mashups
Flickr Photo
A Mashup that includes a link to a site for viewing and sharing
photographic images.
Slideshare
Presentation
A Mashup that includes a link to a site for viewing and sharing PowerPoint
presentations, Word documents, or Adobe PDF Portfolios.
YouTube Video
A Mashup that includes a link to a a site for viewing and sharing online
videos.
Content Availability
When a content item is added to a Course it is not automatically available. An availability option
on the Add and Edit pages allows the user to set the content to available or unavailable. This
allows the Instructor to create content and save it in a draft format before it is made available
within a Course. This availability setting is separate from Adaptive Release. If an item is not
available users may not access it regardless of the Adaptive Release rules.
Content Options
When an item is added to a Content Area a number of options are available on the Add page.
The options available depend on the Content Type; not all options are always available. These
options are used to set availability, date restrictions, and tracking. The following is a description of
all of the options that may be available:
C o n t e n t T yp e
Description
Permit users to
Select Yes to make the content available to users. If No is selected this
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
C o n t e n t T yp e
Description
view the
content item
content is unavailable, regardless of Adaptive Release rules.
Open in new
window
Select Yes to open the item in a separate browser window. This is helpful
as users may continue viewing the Content Area along with the item.
Select date and
time restrictions
Select the range of dates that this item will appear. Select the Display After
check box for the item to appear after a specific date. If this option is
checked, select the corresponding date and time. Select the Display Until
check box for the item to appear until a specific date. If this option is
checked, select the corresponding date and time.
Track number
of views
Select Yes to turn on Tracking Reports. This generates usage reports for
the item.
Manage Course Menu
Add and edit Course Content areas, Tool Links, Course Links, URLs, and Module pages to the
Course. The appearance of the Course Menu is changed by adding Subheaders and Dividers to
organize the Menu Area.
Note: Administrators may restrict options to maintain a consistent style for all
Courses. This may include making some areas unavailable or setting permanent
area names.
How to Manage the Course Menu
Open a Course and click Edit Mode ON. The following table details the changes that are made to
the Course Menu.
To . . .
click . . .
add a Course Content area
Add > Content Area. See Add/Edit Content Area for
more information.
add a link to a Tool
Add > Tool Link. See Add New Tool Link.
add a link to another part of the
course for easy access
Add > a Course Link. See Add New Course Link for
more information.
add a link to an external website
Add > External Link. See Add External Link for more
information.
add a Module Page
Add > Module Page. See Creating and Managing
Module Pages for more information.
edit an area on the Course Menu
the contextual menu for that area. Options vary
depending upon the type of area.
delete an area
the contextual menu for that area and select Delete.
The area is added later.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
click . . .
change the order of the items on
the Course Menu
the arrow icon to the left of the area and drag and drop
it to a new position with the mouse.
add a Subheader
Add > Subheader. This creates a Subheader that can
hold additional Course Menu areas.
add a dividing line to separate
Course Menu areas
Add > Divider. This creates a line that is placed
anywhere on the Course Menu.
hide Course Menu areas from
users
the contextual menu for the area and select Change
User Availability.
Creating Content Items
Content Items are general pieces of content added to a Course to which items may be attached.
How to Create an Item in a Content Area
1.
Open a Content Area
2.
Edit Mode is ON
3.
Point to Build Content and click Item.
4.
Complete the Create Item page and click Submit.
How to Create an Item in Course Files
Content Items that are created using the Text Box are automatically saved to Course Files. This
Content Item can be reused across the course.
1.
Open a Course Files folder.
2.
Point to Build Content and click Item.
3.
Type a Name for the item.
4.
Use the Text Editor to create the item.
5.
Click Submit.
Attach a File to an Item
Files added to a Content Item are shown as links under the title text of the Content Item and
before any content or text added using the Text Editor. Multiple files can be added to a Content
Item. Files can originate from a local drive and from Content Management. Files added to a
Content Item are added as a link unless a Special Action is selected from the drop-down list.
Follow the steps below to attach a file to an item from the Create Item page:
1.
Click Browse next to Attach Local file or Link to Content Management. Select the file.
When a local file is selected, the following options are enabled:
Click Browse to choose a location within Content Management to save the
file. This field appears when Local File Storage is turned off.
Click Add Metadata to add metadata to the file.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
2.
Complete the Link Title field. This name appears to users. They will click this link to open
the attached file.
3.
Select an option in the drop-down list in the File Action field if necessary. Special
Actions Include
Create a link to this file - Select this option to attach the file to the item. A link is
automatically inserted below the document title to access the file.
Display media file within the page - Select this option if the linked file is a
media file that will be displayed on the page. Fill in the Embedded Media
Information to set the placement and controls for the media player.
Unpackage this file - Select this action if the linked file is a zipped file. Files will
be unzipped and the user can select an entry point, usually the "index.html" file.
4.
Fill in the Content Options.
Click Yes or No to Permit Users to View the Content Item.
Click Yes or No to Track Number of Views.
Select the Date and Time Restrictions
5.
Click Submit.
Files may also be attached to an item from Content Management. Select Browse next to Link to
Content Management. Select the file on the Content Management window that appears.
Blackboard can recognize additional file types and associated applications if a MIME extension is
added. Contact your System Administrator for more information about adding MIME extensions.
Users who have the third row of the Text Editor available may use the options in the third row to
add items.
How to Embed Image Files
The file will not appear in the Currently Attached Files field after the page is submitted. An image
tag for the file will appear in the Text box.
1.
In the Control Panel, open a Content Area.
2.
Point to Build Content and click Item.
3.
Type a Name for the Item.
4.
Select the color of the Name. Be sure to select a color that will have enough contrast to
the page to be easily read.
5.
Add a description or introduction to the image in the text box.
6.
Click Browse My Computer or Browse Course Files and locate the image.
7.
Type the Link Title.
8.
Select Display media file within the page in the File Action drop-down list.
9.
Select the appropriate options for the item.
10.
Click Submit. The Content Actions page is shown.
11.
Select the position of the image in the Alignment and Placement fields.
12.
In the Set Width and Set Height field enter the width and height of the image in pixels.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
13.
To create a link from the image to a file outside of the local system, enter the URL in
Image Target URL.
14.
Select Yes in Launch in New Window so the image will appear in a separate browser
window. This is especially important if a URL has been entered in Image Target URL.
15.
Use the drop-down list in Border to choose a border for the image. This option
determines the thickness of the border around the image. If ‗None‘ is selected there will
be no border around the image.
16.
Type a description for the image in Alt Text. Alternate text is display if the image is not
loaded. It is important for accessibility.
17.
Click Submit.
Copy and Move Content
About Copy and Move
Any Content Item, including Course Links, External Links, Folders, Learning Units, Off line
Content and Tools are copied from one folder or Course to another folder or Course. Copying
content does not delete the content from the original location unless Delete Item After Copy is
selected. Content that is deleted after a copy is moved to the new location and does not exist in
the original location any longer.
Note: Folders may not be copied from other parts of a Course into a Learning Module.
Copy Content
Instructors can copy Content Items from one of their Courses to another of their Courses, and
from one Folder to another Folder in the same Course.
Follow the steps below to copy Course content:
1.
Open the Content Area containing the piece of content to copy or move.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Copy from the contextual menu for the content item. (If Copy does not appear,
this option in not available). The Copy or Move Item page appears.
4.
Select the Destination Course from the drop-down list. The dfault setting is the current
Course. Only courses where the Instructorhas a role permitting copying content will
appear in the list.
5.
Select the Destination Folder. Use Browse to locate the desired folder.
6.
Slect No for Delete Item After Copy.
Move Content
Instructors can move Content Items from one of their Courses to another of their Courses, and
from one Folder to another Folder in the same Course.
Follow the steps below to move Course content:
1.
Open the Content Area containing the piece of content to copy or move.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Select Copy from the contextual menu for the content item. (If Copy does not appear,
this option in not available). The Copy or Move Item page appears.
4.
Select the Destination Course from the drop-down list. The default setting is the current
Course. Only courses where the Instructorhas a role permitting moving content will
appear in the list.
5.
Select the Destination Folder. Use Browse to locate the desired folder.
6.
Slect Yes for Delete Item After Copy.
Content Folders
Folders are useful for organizing and structuring content in a Content Area. For example,
Instructors may add folders for each week of the Course to a Content Area, or organize the
Content Area by topic, such as separate folder for Assignments, Tests, and Group Projects.
Once a folder is created, content and additional subfolders may be added to it. All of the Content
Types available in Content Areas may be added to a folder.
How to Create a Folder
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON
3.
Point to Build Content.
4.
Click Content Folder.
5.
Type Folder Information and Folder Options.
6.
Click Submit.
Folder Content Availability
Availability of items in a Content Area is established on an item-by-item basis, but the actual
display of items to users is contingent upon the availability of any parent folder on up to the root
of the content area. If any parent folder is unavailable, the items within it are unavailable. For
example, if a folder is set to Unavailable, but items within the folder are set to Available, users
would be unable to view the items within the folder.
This is also true for items with Adaptive Release rules. If a folder has a rule that makes it
unavailable to a Student, all content within that folder is also unavailable to the user.
Content Modules
A Content Module is a window that displays related data and/or links to other content within
Blackboard Learn. They are created at the Course level or within a Course Group. Content
Modules can only be created on Module pages.
The following topics explain creating, editing, and managing Content Modules and Module Pages.
Look and Feel
Module Behavior
Creating Content Modules
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Editing Content Modules
Creating Module Pages
Editing Module Pages
Customizing Module Pages
Look and Feel
The look and feel of a Content Module is determined by the theme of Blackboard Learn, Course
or personal settings.
Module Behavior
Content Modules exhibit the following behaviors:
They are deleted by clicking the Close button.
They are reordered on the page by dragging and dropping the module header with
the mouse.
They are minimized (shrunk down to only display the header area), using the
minimize indicator.
They are opened in a new window by clicking the Open In New Window button.
Creating and Editing Modules
Content Modules are created quickly and managed easily from Module pages.
How to Create Content Modules
1.
Open a Module Page.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Add Course Module.
4.
Select Modules to add by clicking the check boxes.
5.
Click Submit.
How to Edit Content Modules
1.
Open a Module Page.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Move the Modules around the page by dragging and dropping them with the mouse.
4.
Click the Manage Module Settings button to manage the settings for the appropriate
module.
5.
Make any necessary changes and click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating and Editing Module Pages
Module pages are used to display Content Modules.
How to Create Module Pages
1.
Open a course.
2.
Edit Mode is ON..
3.
Point to Add in the Menu Area.
4.
Select Create Module Page.
5.
Type a Name for the Module Page.
6.
Click Available to Users.
7.
Click Submit.
How to Edit Module Pages
1.
Edit Mode is ON.
2.
Point to the contextual menu for the Module Page on the Course Menu.
3.
Select Rename Link to change the name of the Module Page.
4.
Select Show/Hide Link to make the page available or unavailable to users.
5.
Click Delete to delete the page.
How to Customize Module Pages
1.
Edit Mode is ON.
2.
Point to the contextual menu for the Module page.
3.
Click Page Banner.
4.
Type the Page Banner Content in the Text Box.
5.
Click Use Default Banner or Use Custom Page Banner.
6.
Click Submit.
Adding Textbook Information
Information about textbooks used in the course can be included and shown to users.
Textbooks and your Students
When textbook information is added to a course, it is also added to the Course Catalog where
prospective students can access this information prior to enrollment. In some instances, it is
required to inform students of the required textbooks and their associated cost prior to enrollment.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Textbook Search
The Search for Textbook tool looks for textbooks by ISBN, title, author, or subject. Textbook
information can also be entered manually if the textbook you searched for is unavailable.
Before you Begin
The system administrator determines if the Search for Textbook tool is available. When this tool is
disabled, Assign Textbook does not appear on the Action Bar.
How to Add Textbook Information
Textbooks can be added to any content area within a course.
1.
From the action bar, point to Assign Textbook and select Search for Textbook.
2.
Select the category you want to search from the drop-down list: ISBN, Title, Author, or
Subject.
3.
Enter Keywords to search for, such as the author's name or title. Start with the full title to
narrow the search and then use less and less of the words in the title if you do not get any
results.
4.
Select the Type of Textbook you are searching for, Digital, Print, or All.
5.
Select a Currency for the display of the cost of the textbook.
6.
Click Go when you have entered all necessary information. The results are displayed.
7.
Click Select to choose a Textbook to add it to the course.
8.
The Create Textbook page will appear where you can edit some of the textbook
information.
9.
Set the textbook to Required or Recommended. A description and picture are optional,
but can be helpful to users.
10.
Select any of the following Options. Tracking Statistics will record the number of times
the Item is viewed, when it is viewed and by whom. Date and Time Restrictions can be
set to display the textbook on a specific date and time and to stop displaying on a specific
date and time.
11.
Click Submit to add the textbook information as a content item to the course folder.
Manual Entry
If the search does not return the needed result, use the Manual Entry option from the Assign
Textbook drop-down list to add the textbook information.
At the very least, you will need to provide a Title and set the Required or Recommended option
for the textbook. There are options to upload a Textbook Image for the Textbook as well as set
Tracking and Date and Time Restrictions.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Syllabus
A syllabus is an outline of a course of study. It can contain course information, course objectives,
Instructor contact information, assignments, class meeting dates, textbook information, and more.
A syllabus is standardized across a department or course. Like other content, a syllabus is added
to a Content Area.
Instructors can link to an existing document that will serve as a syllabus, attach a file from a local
computer,or link to a file in Content Management if Content Management has been enabled by
the Administrator. Creating a new syllabus using the Syllabus Builder tool allows Instructors use a
customizable template to pre-build lessons as needed, or build lessons one at a time.
Tip: A syllabus is added to a course from a file or built within a course using the Syllabus Builder
tool. A syllabus is added to any Content Area, but adding the course syllabus its own Content
Area on the Course Menu gives users easy access to it.
How to Add a Syllabus
1.
Select a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to Build Content.
4.
Select Syllabus.
5.
Type a Syllabus Name.
6.
Choose Create New Syllabus to use the Syllabus Builder tool. See Create a New
Syllabus with Syllabus Builder for more information.
7.
Choose Use Existing File to browse for and upload a syllabus file. See Use an Existing
File for more information.
8.
Click Submit.
Use an Existing File
A Syllabus is added using an existing file. The file can originate from a local drive or from Content
Management if available. An advantage of attaching a file is that the file can be formatted in any
way. The formatting is not restricted to the Syllabus Builder Templates. Adding a Syllabus that
has been standardized for a department or a course to Content Management and linking to it has
the advantage of maintaining one Syllabus for many courses. Changes made to the Syllabus file
in Content Management need only be made once. The changes will be propagated to every
course section that uses the linked file.
Once an external file has been selected as the syllabus, the Edit Item page opens. From here,
Content Information is added and edited. Additional files can be attached. Availability and tracking
options can be set.
Create a New Syllabus with Syllabus Builder
The first section of the Syllabus Builder provides three text boxes with suggested names for the
content: Description, Learning Objectives, and Required Materials. The titles are editable and any
content may be included or not included in the text boxes.
Select a Design for the Syllabus. The style sets the font, borders and colors for the syllabus.
There are six style choices available. See Designing a Syllabus for more information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Lesson shells, which are placeholders for a set number of lessons the user wishes to add to the
syllabus, may be created by selecting Build Lessons and entering the number of lessons to be
created.
Note: Build Lessons is only available upon creation. Once a syllabus has been created, the user
can create lessons by clicking Add Lesson on the Action bar of the Lessons page. See Syllabus
Lessons for more information.
Clicking Submit takes the user to the next page for creating, editing, ordering and removing
Lessons. See Syllabus Lessons for more information.
Designing a Syllabus
The Syllabus Builder provides six style options: Document image, Notepad, Modern, Classic,
Contemporary, or None. Each style is unique, with a dramatic header font and thin or thick
borders around the content. Some styles allow the user to select from a list of patterns for the
background.
The following table describes the design and optional settings for each style.
S t yl e
Description
Color options
Document
image
Mainly white with an image of a document
faintly visible in the background.
Headers, borders, text
Notepad
Similar to the appearance of a piece of
notebook paper, the background contains
faint blue horizontal lines.
Headers, borders, text
Modern
A thin border surrounds the entire syllabus.
Headers, borders, text,
background (color or
pattern)
Classic
A wider frame around the entire syllabus.
Headers, borders, text,
frame, background (color
or pattern)
Contemporary
A wider frame surrounds the content, but is
separated into two boxes by the Lessons
header.
Headers, borders, text,
frame, background (color
or pattern)
None
The item is styled like other content items
with no borders or frames.
Headers, text
Syllabus Lessons
When Create Specified Number of Lessons is selected and a the number of lesson is entered,
the Syllabus Builder takes the user to the Lessons page. This is also the page that appears when
Edit is selected on the Content Area page once the syllabus has been created.
Lessons are listed below the header information. Lessons may be added, deleted, edited or
reordered from this list. To add a lesson, click Lesson. Lessons may include a date and time, or
use the check boxes to not display a date or time. To delete a Lesson, select the Lesson and
click Delete. To edit a lesson, use the contextual menu and click Edit. To re-order Lessons, drag
and drop them into position or use the Keyboard Accessible Reordering tool.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
The content on the Lessons page is displayed with the design chosen on the Create syllabus
page. The Edit button at the top of the header information directs the user to the Create syllabus
page. Clicking Edit allows the user to change the description and other text at the top of the
syllabus, as well as the style and content options such as date of availability.
About Lesson Plans
A Lesson Plan is special content type that combines information about the lesson itself with the
curriculum resources used to teach it. Default lesson plan sections include the instructional level,
grade level, objectives, and subject area of the lesson. Additional sections can be added to the
Lesson Plan, arranged to display in any order and optionally shown to students.
Curriculum Resources
Any type of content item can be added to the Curriculum Resources Tab.
Adding content is accomplished the same as in Content Areas. Select the type of content to add
from the drop-down list generated from any of the buttons: Build Content, Evaluate, Collaborate,
or Assign Textbook and then fill in the necessary information and options.
The Curriculum Resources appear under the Content Information sections when the Lesson Plan
is displayed.
Enter supporting information using the following guidelines:
Communicating the message or the value to user
Encourage users to learn more
Who, what, where, when, why, how; this can be answered with references, text, with
separate chunks.
Take care not to incorporate too much information--rules, facts, etc. -- refrain from
letting them creep in too much.
Creating Lesson Plans
A Lesson Plan is a container for content similar to a Content Area or folder. Instructors can
present a lesson profile and objectives alongside content items students need to complete the
lesson. Develop Lesson Plans for personal use, or use them to present content to students.
Creating a Lesson Plan
Lesson Plans are added to Content Areas like any other type of content item.
1.
Open a Content Area from the Course Menu.
2.
Click Build Content.
3.
Select Lesson Plan from the drop-down menu. The Create Lesson Plan page opens.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Lesson Pans have two tabs for entering information. The Content Information tab is used to add
data about the Lesson Plan such as instructor, objectives, and subject area. This information will
appear at the top of the Lesson Plan when it is displayed in the Student view, Edit Mode Off. The
Curriculum Resources tab enables instructors to provide links to lesson-related content, just as in
a Content Area, Learning Module, or Folder.
Entering Content Information
1.
Type a Name. This is a required field and appears as the link to the Lesson Plan in the
Content Area.
2.
Provide a description.
3.
Provide other information in the sections provided. Add or delete sections as desired.
Sections can be renamed by clicking within the text and opening an edit form.
4.
Click Save and Exit to save Content Information and return to the Content Area. Click
Save and Continue to save Content Information and move to the Curriculum Resources
tab.
Lesson Plan Sections
By default Lesson Plans have four sections, Instructional Level, Instructor, Subject Area and
Objectives. These sections can be deleted by clicking the ―X‖ icon. They can be moved using the
drag-and drop function or the keyboard reordering function.
Additional Lesson Plan Sections can be added by clicking Add Lesson Section and then selecting
the type of section to add. New sections appear at the bottom of the section page but can be
reordered at any time.
Share some or all of the sections with students by first making the Lesson Plan available under
Options, and then selecting the Share with Students checkbox at the bottom of each section.
Adding Multimedia Files
Pictures, audio, and video content can be added to Courses. The benefit of multimedia content is
that engages learners and different ways and may improve learning.
Before You Begin
Multimedia files can come from a variety of sources. Files can be added from the Web through a
mashup, uploaded from your computer, or found on the system, either in Course Files or the
Content Collection. Note that the Content Collection is a separately licensed feature of
Blackboard Learn, and not all schools use it.
Displaying Image Files
When adding an image file to a course, consider:
Alt Text: For many reasons, a user may not be able to see the image. Adding text that
explains the image and its purpose is standard Web practice and will allow users that
cannot see the image to continue learning without distraction.
Dimensions: For images, the height and width in pixels should match the original
image. If the image is too big, customize the dimensions, but keep the same ratio
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
between height and width. For example, and image at 640 x 800 pixels could be resized
to 320 x 400. Changing the ratio of the dimensions will make the image appear
stretched.
Border: Add a solid black line frame to the picture. The width of the border is measured
in pixels.
Target URL: Make the image a link, clicking on the image will take the user to the
specified URL.
Displaying Audio Files
The audio file appears as a player in the course. The player has options for play, pause, forward,
and rewind. When adding an audio file to a course, consider:
Transcript: For many reasons, a user may not be able to hear the audio file. Including a
text transcript is standard Web practice and allows users that cannot hear the audio to
continue learning without distraction.If the audio file is an MPEG file, you can use the
Include Transcript field to add a SAMI transcript file. Otherwise, add a text file as a
separate file in the same folder.
Autostart: The file will begin playing when the user opens the folder that includes the
audio file.
Loop: The file will play again from the beginning until stopped by the user.
Displaying Video Files
When adding a video file to a course, consider:
Dimensions: For video files, the height and width in pixels should match the original
settings. If the size of the video picture is too big, customize the dimensions, but keep
the same ratio between height and width. For example, and image at 640 x 800 pixels
could be resized to 320 x 400. Changing the ratio of the dimensions will make the
picture appear stretched.
Transcript: For many reasons, a user may not be able to hear the audio file. Including a
text transcript is standard Web practice and allows users that cannot hear the audio to
continue learning without distraction. If the video file is an MPEG file, you can use the
Include Transcript field to add a SAMI transcript file. Otherwise, add a text file as a
separate file in the same folder.
Autostart: The file will begin playing when the user opens the folder that includes the
video file.
Loop: The file will play again from the beginning until stopped by the user.
Quality: The higher the quality, the better the resolution of the image. However, higher
quality videos are much bigger files and can take a long time to load before playing.
Consider the balance between resolution and load time and test it out to find the right
settings for the video.
How to Add a Multimedia File
1.
From a folder in a course, click Build Content.
2.
Select the type of multimedia file to add.
3.
Browse for the file from your computer, from Course Files, or from Mashups.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Set the options. Each file type will have a set of unique options for displaying that type of
content. Multimedia files have the same options for permissions and tracking as other
content items.
5.
Preview the content and click Submit when finished.
Creating a Blank Page
A blank page presents information on a single page. It appears as a link in a folder and clicking
on it will open the content on a new page. You can also use blank pages in the menu.
About Blank Pages
Blank pages use the text editor for creating the content that will appear on the page.
How to Create a Blank Page from a Folder
1.
From a course folder, click Build Content.
2.
Select Blank Page. This appears under the New Page heading.
3.
Build the page using the Text Editor. Files can be attached from your computer or from
Course Files.
4.
Set the Options for permissions and tracking. Blank pages use the same set of Standard
Options as other content items.
5.
Click Submit to finish.
How to Create Blank Page as Part of the Course Menu
1.
In Edit Mode, point to the plus sign above the Course Menu. The Add Menu Item dropdown list appears.
2.
Select Create Blank Page.
3.
Type a Name for the link.
4.
Select the Available to Users check box.
5.
Click Submit. The Edit Blank Page appears in the content frame and the new Blank Page
link appears last on the Course Menu.
Adding a URL
Links to outside Web sites and resources may be added to Content Areas as External Links.
When entering a URL, always enter the full Web address to the link. For example,
type:http://www.blackboard.com.
Add a URL
1.
Open a Course Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to Build Content.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Select URL.
5.
Type a Name. This becomes the link users click to access the content.
6.
Type the full URL including http:// protocol.
7.
Use the Text box to add a description.
8.
Attach any content for the URL.
9.
Fill in the Options.
Click Yes to Permit Users to View this Content.
Click Yes to Open in New Window.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
Select the Date and Time Restrictions
10.
Click Submit.
Course Links
Course Links are shortcuts used to link to items together within a Course. All items that appear in
the Course Menu may be linked to using a Course Link. For example, an Instructor may create a
Discussion Board where users discuss the class readings. A link to this Forum on the Discussion
Board may be placed in the Content Area where the articles are posted. The Course Link may be
viewed as long as it is available to users in the Course.
How to Create a Course Link
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Turn Edit Mode ON.
3.
Point to Build Content.
4.
Select Course Link.
5.
Type a Name and select the color of the link.
6.
Use the Text box to add a description of the link.
7.
Click Browse to open Course Files in a separate window.
8.
Select the item in Course Files.
9.
Set the options for the Course Link.
10.
Click Submit.
About File Attachments
File attachments may be added to different places in a Course, for example, to an Item, an
Assignment, or a File in a Learning Module.
There are two options for adding file attachments to a file from the Build menu in a Course:
Browse My Computer: Select a local file on your machine.
Browse Course Files: Select a file from Course Files.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Users will open the file by clicking a link to the file that appears in the Course. After selecting a file
to attach, users may enter a name for the link to the file. This name will appear to users, instead
of the name of the document. For example, users would see "Biology Syllabus" instead of
syllabus_bio_101.doc.
Accepted Characters in File Names
Blackboard allows the use of all characters in file names. However, the user's operating system
and browser may limit the types characters accepted. For example, some browsers do not accept
multi byte characters.
Recognized Content Attachments
The following file types are recognized by Blackboard Learn. These files are displayed within a
content item.
Note:Blackboard Learn can recognize additional file types and associated applications if a MIME
extension is added. Contact your System Administrator for more information about adding MIME
extensions.
Extension
F i l e T yp e
P r o g r a m s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e F i l e T yp e
.aam
Multimedia
Adobe® Authorware® plug-in
Note that the .aam file is the starting point for a series of files
that must be enclosed in a .ZIP file.
.aiff
Audio
Audio program
.asf
Multimedia
Microsoft® .NET™ Show
.au
Audio
Real Audio Player™
.avi
Video
Video player (not Macintosh® compatible)
.doc
Text
Microsoft Word or other word processor
.exe
Executable
Executable file
.gif
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.html, .htm
Web page
HTML editor or Web browser
.jpg, .jpeg
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.jif
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.mp3
Audio
Audio program
.mpe
Audio/Video
Audio program
.mpg, .mpeg
Audio/Video
Audio program
.moov,movie
Movie
QuickTime® movie
.mov
Video
Movie or media player
.pdf
Text
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®
.png
Image
Portable Network Graphics
.ppt, .pps
Slide show
Microsoft® PowerPoint® and PowerPoint® Player®
.qt
Movie
QuickTime®
.ra
Audio
Real Audio Player™
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Extension
F i l e T yp e
P r o g r a m s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e F i l e T yp e
.ram
Video
Real Audio Movie™
.rm
Audio
Audio program
.rtf
Text
Rich Text Format
.swf
Multimedia
Adobe® Shockwave® plug-in
.tiff, .tif
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.txt
Text
Text or HTML editor, word processor
.wav
Audio
Audio program
.wma
Audio
Audio program
.wmf
Graphic
Microsoft® Windows®
.wmv
Media/Audio
Microsoft® Windows®
.wpd
Text
WordPerfect® or other word processor
.xls
Spreadsheet
Microsoft® Excel®
.zip
Text
WinZip®
Creating Tests
Three different kinds of Tests can be created and added to a Content Area: Test, Surveys, and
Assignments.
Tests and Surveys
Tests and Surveys are on-line Tests that are used to measure a Student‘s understanding of the
Course. Test and Surveys are deployed to students in the Course by adding them to a Content
Area. Once added to a Content Area, Test and Survey properties, such as availability and
presentation options, are managed there. See Creating and Editing a Test or Survey for
information.
After a Test or Survey is added to a Content Area, the Test Options or Survey Options page
appears. See Deploying Tests and Surveys for more information.
Note: Instructors may view and grade Tests submitted by Students in the Grade Center. Tests
and surveys submitted by Students may not be viewed or graded from the Content Area where
they are posted.
Assignments
Assignments allow Instructors to create coursework and manage the grades and feedback for
each Student separately. Instructors may create an assignment that lists the name, point value
and description of the assignment. See Creating Assignments for more information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Deleting a Deployed Test or Survey from a Content Area Before
Attempts are Made
When a Test or Survey is deleted from a Content Area, it is deleted from that Content Area.
However, the assessment itself is not deleted. It is still available on the Tests or Surveys page
and can be edited, redeployed, or deleted from the system. If students have not attempted to take
the assessment, it may be safely deleted from the Content Area without any loss of data.
If the Assessment is deployed again, it is presented as a new Assessment. There is no
connection or shared data between the first and second deployments and the Grade Center will
treat each deployment as separate Grade Center Items.
Deleting a Deployed Test or Survey from a Content Area After
Attempts Have Been Made
If any users have already taken an Assessment be cautious and consider the consequences
before deleting the Assessment. It is recommended that an Assessment first be made
Unavailable before considering the more drastic step of deleting the Assessment.
If one or more users have attempted the Assessment, deleting it from the Content Area has
consequences. A warning will appear with options to consider.
Preserve scores in the Grade Center for this Test, but all attempts for this Test will
be deleted. This option deletes the Assessment from the Content Area. Any grades in
the Grade Center related to this Assessment will remain but the attempt itself will be
deleted. In this instance, the grade stays but the Assessment and any attempts are
deleted. It will not be possible to view any of the Student‘s responses to questions. This
can have serious consequences, for example, if an essay question still needs to be
graded, it will not be possible to do so after deleting the Assessment because the details
of the attempt were deleted.
Remove this content item, the Grade Center item for this Test, all grades for this
Test, and all attempts for this Test. This option deletes the Assessment from the
Content Area and erases any record of the Assessment from the Grade Center. This will
destroy all record of Student performance on the Assessment.
Follow the steps below to delete an Assessment from a Content Area:
1.
Open the Content Area where the Assessment is located.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Delete from the contextual menu for the Assessment.
4.
Click OK on the dialog box.
5.
Select Preserve scores in the Grade Center for this Test, but delete all attempts for
this Test. or Delete this content item, the Grade Center item for this Test, all grades
for this Test, and all attempts for this Test. (See above for definitions.)
6.
Click Submit.
Delete an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager
Tests are deleted by selecting the Delete option from the contextual menu for the Assessment
located in the Tests or Survey Manager pages.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
If a Remove button does not appear for an Assessment in the Test or Survey Manager, follow the
instructions for deleting a deployed Assessment before trying to delete the Assessment from the
Test or Survey Manager.
Removing an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager destroys the Assessment but does
not have any impact on the Grade Center.
Deploying Tests and Surveys
Once a Test or a Survey has been created, the next step is to deploy it to users. This is a two
step process: adding the Test or Survey to a Content area and then making it available.
About Unavailable Tests
There is a difference between unavailable Tests and deleted Tests. Deleted Tests have been
deleted from the Course. Unavailable Tests are added to a Content Area but a link does not
appear to Students. Instructors can access the assessment when Edit Mode is ON and through
the Control Panel under Course Tools > Tests, Surveys, and Pools.
Assessment availability is managed on the Test Options page. Assessment availability is limited
to a specific time period by setting the Display After and Display Until fields. The availability can
also be open ended by setting only a start date or only an end date. If the link to an assessment
is available, but neither date is set, the assessment is immediately and always available.
Before You Begin
Create the Test or Survey. Create new questions or use Find Questions to copy or link existing
questions to the Test or Survey.
How to Add a Test or Survey to a Content Area
1.
Navigate to a Content area of the Course.
2.
Point to the Create Assessment drop-down list and select Test or Survey.
3.
Select a Test or Survey from the Add Test or Add Survey list.
4.
Click Submit. The Test Options page appears.
How to Make a Test or Survey Available
Test and Survey availability is set after the assessment is added to a Content Area. Availability is
managed on the Test Options page.
1.
On the Test Options page, clickYes to Make the Link Available to Users. If this option is
set to No, it will not appear to Students. Instructors may make the link available, then use
the Display After and Display Until fields to limit the amount of time the link appears.
2.
Set the following options for the Test:
Option
Function
Add a New
Announcement for
this Test or Survey
The Announcement will include the date and state "an
Assessment has been made available in [Course area that
includes the link to the Assessment]". This Announcement will
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Option
Function
appear in the Course Announcements.
Multiple Attempts
Click the checkbox and select from the following options:
Select Allow Unlimited Attempts for Students to take the
assessment as many times as they wish.
Force Completion
3.
Select Number of Attempts and enter a number to
indicate a specific number of attempts that is allowed.
Click the Force Completion check box to force users to
complete the Test or Survey once it has been
launched.Students may not exit the assessment and continue
working on it at a later date. The Save button is available for
Students to save the assessment as they work through it, but
they may not exit and re-enter the Assessment.
Set Timer
Click the Set Timer check box to set a time limit for completing
the Test or Survey.
Display After and
Display Until
Use the Display After and Display Until date and time fields to
define the availability of the Test or Survey. Click both the
Display After and Display Until check boxes in order to enable
the date and time selections.
Password
Click the Password check box to require a password to access
the Test or Survey.
Click Submit.
How to Control the Presentation of a Test or Survey
The remaining options control the presentation and feedback for an assessment.
Option
Function
Include this Test in
Grade Center Score
Calculations
Test results can be used in Grade Center calculations by selecting
this option. Test scores do not need to be revealed to Students to be
used in Grade Center calculation. Self-Assessment Tests are
generally not included in Grade Center calculations.
If the test is not included, the score will not affect any Grade Center
calculations. This Test is also excluded from weighting.
Hide Results for this
Test Completely
from Instructor and
Grade Center
If selected, this Test behaves as a Survey. The display in the Grade
Center will read Complete / Incomplete and N/A or zero appears on
the Grade Details page. The Instructor will not be able to see any
student grades, view answers, aggregate results, or download result
details. To protect student privacy, this choice cannot be reversed
later without deleting all attempts.
This is only available for Tests.
Test or Survey
Feedback
Determine the kind of Feedback that is displayed upon completion:
Score - presents the final score to Students. This is only
available for Tests.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Option
Function
Status - presents the completion status to Students.
Submitted Answers - presents the Student‘s answers.
Correct Answers - presents the correct answers to the
questions. This is only available for Tests.
Feedback - presents the question feedback to the Student. This
is only available for Tests.
All at Once - Present the entire assessment on one screen.
Students scroll through all the questions and can move up and
down from question to question. If this is selected, Prohibit
Backtracking cannot be selected.
OR
One at a Time - Displays one question at a time. The screen
includes navigation tools to move between questions. The Submit
button will only appear on the last page of the assessment. Prohibit
Backtracking and Randomize Questions may be selected.
Presentation Mode
Prohibit
Backtracking
Click the check box to prevent Users from going back to questions
they have already answered. If backtracking is prohibited, questions
will be presented one at a time and the buttons <<, <, or >> do not
appear to Users during the Test or Survey.
Randomize
Questions
Click to display questions in a random order each time the Test or
Survey is taken.
Next Steps
About Test/Survey Status
Entering Grades
Changing Grades
Deleting and Reverting Grades
Creating Assignments
Assignments allow Instructors to create coursework and manage the grades and feedback for
each Student separately. Instructors may create an assignment that lists the name, point value
and description of the assignment. Files may be attached the Assignments. After an Assignment
is added to a Content Area, Students may access the assignment, complete it in a separate file,
and send it back to the Instructor. The Instructor may respond to each student separately,
sending comments about their individual assignment and attaching files, if necessary.
Assignments may also be distributed to Course Groups. See Creating Group Assignments for
more information.
Note: Once a student completes and submits an Assignment, the Instructor may access this file
in the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Create an Assignment
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to Create Assessment.
4.
Select Assignment.
5.
Complete the Assignment Information, Assignment Files, Grading, Availability, Due
Dates, and Recipients information.
6.
Click Submit.
Tools Area
Links to Tools are placed anywhere in a Course that content can. Tools such as Discussion
Board Forums and Virtual Classroom sessions can exist in the same Content Area with Learning
Modules, files, and Tests. Adding tools to folders containing related content creates a seamless
experience for users because all materials pertaining to a subject are accessed from the same
location.
Instructors may also explain the context of the Tool when it is added to the Content Area,
including a description of what it is used for, directions and its use and attach any necessary files.
For example, the Instructor may add a link to a Discussion Board, explain that users need to
participate in the Forum during a specific week, and attach an article for discussion.
Tools are added to a Content Area in different ways. They are added one at a time or they are
added as a Tool Area where all of the available tools are accessible.
How to Link a Tool to a Content Area
Collaboration tools are added using the following steps below, or by clicking Collaboration and
selecting the desired tool.
1.
Select a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to Build Content.
4.
Select Tools Area.
5.
Select the desired tool.
6.
Click Next.
7.
Type a Link Name.
8.
Type a description in the Text Box.
9.
Click Yes to make the tool Availableto users.
10.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
11.
Select the Date Restrictions.
12.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tool Linking
Links to Tools are placed anywhere in a Course that content can. Tools such as Discussion
Board Forums and Virtual Classroom sessions can exist in the same Content Area with Learning
Modules, files, and Tests. Adding tools to folders containing related content creates a seamless
experience for users because all materials pertaining to a subject are accessed from the same
location.
Instructors may also explain the context of the Tool when it is added to the Content Area,
including a description of what it is used for, directions and its use and attach any necessary files.
For example, the Instructor may add a link to a Discussion Board, explain that users need to
participate in the Forum during a specific week, and attach an article for discussion.
Tools are added to a Content Area in different ways. They are added one at a time or they are
added as a Tool Area where all of the available tools are accessible.
How to Link a Tool to a Content Area
Collaboration tools are added using the following steps below, or by clicking Collaboration and
selecting the desired tool.
1.
Select a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Point to Build Content.
4.
Select Tools Area.
5.
Select the desired tool.
6.
Click Next.
7.
Type a Link Name.
8.
Type a description in the Text Box.
9.
Click Yes to make the tool Availableto users.
10.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
11.
Select the Date Restrictions.
12.
Click Submit.
Using Add Files to Create Rich HTML Content
Sets of HTML files, similar to a Web site, can be viewed as a page within the Course or as a
separate piece of content in a separate browser window. These HTML files can be created
outside of Blackboard Learn, using an application such as Dreamweaver, and then added to
Course Files.
How to Create a File
1.
Open a Content Area
2.
Edit Mode is ON
3.
Point to Build Content.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Select File.
5.
Click Browse My Computer or Browse Course Files to locate the file.
6.
Type a Name for the file. This is used as the link name for the file and is shown to users.
7.
Select a Color of Name.
8.
Click Yes to force the file to Open in New Window.
9.
Click Yes to Permit Users to View this Content.
10.
Click Yes to Track Number of Views.
11.
Select the Date and Time Restrictions.
12.
Click Submit.
Next Steps
Adding Content Metadata
Adding Content to Learning Modules
Content Metadata
Content Metadata stores information about a piece of content. Metadata allows for IMS
compatibility when content is imported and exported. The information entered in Content
Metadata cannot be tracked or reported on. It can only be viewed on the Content Metadata page
as reference information for the Content Item.
How to Create Course Content Metadata
1.
Open a Content Area.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click the contextual menu for the content item.
4.
Select Metadata.
5.
Select the Metadata options.
6.
Click Submit.
Metadata Options
The table below describes the fields on the Content Metadata page. Select Edit to display the
fields in each section.
Field
Description
General Information
Title
Displays the title of the content item.
Catalog Entries
The catalog and version information in the Source and Entry Fields.
Once a Catalog Entry is made a check box appears next to the
item. Select the check box and click Submit to delete an entry.
Source
The name of the catalog or source of the content.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Entry
The number or version of the catalog.
Language
The language of the content item.
Description
A description of the content item.
Lifecycle Information
Creation Date
Displays the date and time the content item was created.
Contributors
The names of others who contributed to this content item. Once a
Contributor is entered a check box appears next to the item. Select
the check box and click Submit to delete a Contributor.
Person
The name of the author or editor.
Role
The role of the person, such as author, contributor, or editor.
Organization
The name of the Organization associated with the person.
Date
The date the person made these changes or edits.
Technical Information
Resource Format
The type of application this content item uses.
Resource Location
The location of the item displays in this field.
Rights Management Information
Free Resource
Establish if the Content was free or if it was purchased.
Copyright/Restriction
Establish if this Content is copyrighted or if it has any restrictions.
Description
Comment on any conditions of use for this item.
The Open Standards Content Player
The Open Standards Content Player Building Block allows an Instructor to add content to a
Course that conforms to SCORM (Shareable Content Object Reference Model), IMS (IMS Global
Learning Consortium) or NLN (National Learning Network) standards to a Course.
The System Administrator must enable the Open Standards Content Player before SCORM, IMS,
or NLN content can be added to a course. Instructors see SCORM ,IMS, and NLN (depending on
which the Administrator has made available) as additional types of content items, available in the
Action Bar drop down list in Content Areas.
Using the Content Player in a Course
Instructors and users interact with IMS, SCORM, and NLN content just as they would other types
of content. From the users‘ perspective, IMS, SCORM, or NLN content items are accessed in the
same way as any other Course content. IMS, SCORM, or NLN content can even be added to a
Learning Module.
When adding SCORM, IMS, or NLN data, the Instructor can make selections about navigation
and display. If the Instructor wishes to add an item to the Grade Center, this can also be done
from the Add Content page. In addition to giving a grade in the Grade Center, when a user
interacts with the content, the Instructor can view the user‘s progress in the Grade Center
including total viewing time and completion status.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
SCORM, NLN and IMS Packages
The Open Standards Content Player Building Block supports the SCORM standard and the IMS
standard for Web content, as well as NLN Content, which conforms to SCORM and IMS.
The content that is created to meet these specifications is called a package because all the files
are gathered in a zipped format. The Content Player unzips the package and accesses
components as they are needed.
Note: The Instructor does not need to know what type of package is being uploaded. The
Content Player will make this determination in order to play the content correctly.
IMS Content
The Content Player Building Block supports content that conforms to the IMS Content and
Packaging 1.1.2 standard with the Web content attribute. When adding this content type to a
Course, it is useful to note that most of these types of packages do not track User Attempt
Details. Otherwise, no major differences will be seen.
Further information about IMS Content is found at: http://www.imsproject.org
SCORM Content
The Content Player Building Block supports content that conforms to the SCORM 1.2 standard
and the SCORM 2004 standard. The Instructor does not need to determine ahead of time
whether the content is designed as 1.2 or 2004 compliant, as both types can be played.
Further information about SCORM Content is found at: http://www.adlnet.org
NLN Content
The Content Player Building Block supports NLN content, which conforms to SCORM and IMS
standards. The United Kingdom NLN Materials Team is responsible for commissioning and
developing e-learning materials for the NLN, and offers advice on best practices in integrating the
NLN materials into teaching and learning schemes.
Further information about NLN Content can be found at: http://www.nln.ac.uk/
Who Creates the Content?
The Content packages are created to comply with the individual standards. Each Institution may
have a policy on which content it uses and where the content comes from. Some Institutions build
their own SCORM or IMS packages, and several private companies also produce the content.
Some content may also be available for general use.
Note: Once the user begins working with the SCORM, IMS or NLN content, internal navigation
and interaction is determined by the content packages, not the Blackboard Learn.
Managing the Content Types
The availability of the Content Types is controlled on the Manage Tools page from the Control
Panel. The Content Types are controlled on the Content Type Availability page. Depending on
the Administrator‘s settings, one or all of the Content Player Content types may be available for
the Instructor to use.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Attempt Data
When a Grade Center Item is associated with the SCORM, IMS or NLN content item, the
Instructor will be able to view data related to the users‘ interactions with the content. This is called
Attempt Data.
The details may include the total time the user has viewed each learning object, the completion
status, responses to any questions contained in the package, and whether the response was
correct. The purpose of the attempt data is to help the Instructor in determining a score for the
Grade Center item.
To access this information on the Attempt Details page:
1.
Click Grade Center.
2.
click the user attempt, the Edit Grade page loads.
3.
Click View on the Edit grade page, the Attempt Details page loads.
Note: Not all packages are designed to track all data. If the package does not provide the
information to Blackboard Learn, the data will show as N/A.
Adding SCORM, IMS, and NLN Content
Once the System Administrator has enabled the Open Standards Content Player Building Block,
Instructors can add SCORM, IMS, or NLN Content to their courses. See The Open Standards
Content Player for more information on the Building Block.
The steps for adding SCORM (Shareable Content Object Reference Model), IMS (IMS Global
Learning Consortium) or NLN (National Learning Network) are similar. Interaction options for
navigation, Grade Center options, and content options are set at this time.
How to Add SCORM Content
1.
Point to Build Content.
2.
Select Content Package (SCORM).
3.
Enter the information outlined in the following table.
4.
Click Submit.
The table below details the fields on the Add and Edit SCORM Content pages.
Field
Description
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content
Package
Browse to select a SCORM package to add. This option only appears
on the Add SCORM Content page.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. Rename this on the Edit
SCORM Content page.
Text
Add instructions or other text on the Edit SCORM Content page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Interactions Options
Navigation
Control Type
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left navigation
menu does not appear and the viewer must use the Next and Previous
buttons to view content sequentially.
Grade Center Options
Add Grade
Center Item
Select Yes to add a Grade Center Item to the Grade Center for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package and may be
edited and managed from the Grade Center once added.
Points Possible
Type the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the item will
be given 0 points possible. This and other Grade Center item properties
are edited and managed from the Grade Center.
Track Attempt
Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content, such as
total viewing time and question responses. From the Edit grade page,
click the View button to see the Attempt Details.
First Attempt
Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user does
not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will not be
tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last attempt
data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not restrict how often
the content is viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to
make the
Assignment
visible?
Select Yes to make the SCORM content available.
Do you want to
track number of
views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item. Use the
Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
How to Add IMS Content
1.
Point to Build Content.
2.
Select Content Package (IMS).
3.
Enter the information outlined in the following table.
4.
Click Submit.
The table below details the fields on the Add IMS Content and Edit IMS Content pages.
Field
Description
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Add Content
Package
Browse to select an IMS package to add. This option shows on the Add
IMS Content page only.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. You can rename this on the
Edit IMS Content page.
Text
To add instructions or other text, add it on the Edit IMS Content page.
Interactions Options
Navigation
Control Type
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left navigation
menu does not appear and the viewer must use the Next and Previous
buttons to view content sequentially.
Grade Center Options
Add Grade
Center Item
Selecting Yes will add a Grade Center Item to the Grade Center for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package, and is edited
and managed from the Grade Center once added.
Points Possible
Type the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the item will
be given 0 points possible. This and other Grade Center item properties
are edited and managed from the Grade Center.
Track Attempt
Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content, such as
total viewing time and question responses. From the Edit grade page,
click the View button to see the Attempt Details.
First Attempt
Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user does
not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will not be
tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last Attempt
data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not restrict how often
the content is viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to
make the
assignment
visible?
Select Yes to make the IMS content available.
Do you want to
track number of
views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item. Use the
Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability
Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
How to Add NLN Content
1.
Point to Build Content.
2.
Select Content Package (NLN).
3.
Enter the information outlined in the following table.
4.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
The table below details the fields on the Add NLN Content and Edit NLN Content pages.
Field
Description
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content
Package
Browse to select a NLN package to add. This option shows on the Add
NLN Content page only.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. You can rename this on the
Edit NLN Content page.
Text
To add instructions or other text, add it on the Edit NLN Content page.
Interactions Options
Navigation
Control Type
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left navigation
menu does not appear and the viewer must use the Next and Previous
buttons to view content sequentially.
Grade Center Options
Add Grade
Center Item
Selecting Yes will add a Grade Center Item to the Grade Center for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package, and is edited
and managed from the Grade Center once added.
Points Possible
Type the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the item will
be given 0 points possible. This and other Grade Center item properties
are edited and managed from the Grade Center.
Track Attempt
Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content, such as
total viewing time and question responses. From the Edit grade page,
click the View button to see the Attempt Details.
First Attempt
Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user does
not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will not be
tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last Attempt
data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not restrict how often
the content is viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to
make the
assignment
visible?
Select Yes to make the NLN content available.
Do you want to
track number of
views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item. Use the
Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability
Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Tools
Course Tools are communication and collaboration tools that enhance interaction between users.
Note: You may find that your institution has licensed other Tools that are not a part of the default
Blackboard Learn package. In this case you will need to seek information from that tool's
provider.
This section includes information on the following topics:
Course Announcements
Blackboard Scholar
Blogs
Collaboration
Contacts
Course Calendar
Course Portfolios
Discussion Board
Glossary
Journals
Messages
Rubrics
SafeAssign
Self and Peer Assessment
Send Email
Tasks
Tests Surveys, and Pools
Wikis
Announcements
Announcements post timely information critical to Course success. The Instructor can add, edit,
and delete announcements from the Announcements page. This is an ideal place to post timesensitive material including:
When Assignments are due
Changes in the syllabus
Corrections/clarifications of materials
Exam schedules
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
When adding an Announcement, Instructors can also send the Announcement as an email to
Students in the Course. This ensures that Students receive the announcement even if they do not
login to the Course.
Announcements are accessed from the Control Panel under Course Tools.
Creating Announcements
Announcements will appear in the order posted with the most recent Announcements appearing
first.
1.
From the Control Panel under Course Tools, click Announcements.
2.
From the action bar, click Create Announcement.
3.
Provide a Subject and Message.
4.
Set the Duration and Date Restrictions.
5.
There is an option to link to a course area, tool, or item.
6.
Click Submit.
Editing Announcements
Click Edit from the contextual menu of the Announcement you wish to edit. Make your changes
and Submit.
Deleting Announcements
To delete an Announcement, click Delete from the contextual menu of the Announcement.
Confirm the deletion. This action is final and cannot be undone.
About Blackboard Scholar
Blackboard Scholar is built right into Blackboard Learn, for easy integration of relevant, reliable
resources and dynamic streams from Scholar, directly into the course. The Blackboard Scholar
page offers users to register with Blackboard Scholar and to turn external links into Blackboard
Scholar bookmarks.
Find this Page
Click Blackboard Scholar from Course Tools.
How to Register with Blackboard Scholar
1.
Click Register/View Scholar Start Page.
2.
Type Username and Password.
3.
Click Login.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Import External Links into Blackboard Scholar
1.
Click Copy External Links to Blackboard Scholar bookmarks.
2.
Select the links.
3.
Click Submit.
See Also
The Scholar web site: http://www.scholar.com
The Scholar Wiki site: http://wiki.scholar.com
About Blogs
Instructors can release the Blog tool to the group for use in the course, or for public consumption.
Students within the group can post to the Blog and add comments to existing posts. Instructors
can also comment on posts.
Blogs are an effective means of gaining insight into students' activities and provide a way to
share the knowledge and materials collected and created by the group with the rest of the course.
See Also
Creating a Blog
Creating Blog Posts
Creating Blog Comments
Editing and Managing Blogs
Grading Blogs and Journals
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a Blog
Instructors can create a Blog for use by students in their course.
How to Create a Blog
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Edit Mode ON.
3.
Click Course Tools from the Tools area.
4.
Click Blogs.
5.
Click Create Blog.
6.
Type a Name for the Blog.
7.
Type any specific Instructions in the text box.
8.
Click Yes to make the Blog available to users.
9.
Use the Display After and Display Until date and time fields to Limit Availability of the
Blog. Click both the Display After and Display Until check boxes in order to enable the
date and time selections.
10.
Determine the Blog Participation by clicking Individual to All Students or Course .
11.
Click the Allow Anonymous Comments check box.
12.
Choose between Monthly or Weekly index entries.
13.
Click the check box to Allow Users to Edit and Delete Entries.
14.
Click the check box to Allow Users to Delete Comments.
15.
Select the Grade option and enter the number of Points possible.
16.
Click Submit.
See Also
About Blogs
Creating Blog Posts
Creating Blog Comments
Editing and Managing Blogs
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Blog Posts
Instructors and users can create Blog posts that are commented upon. Instructors can use Blog
posts to provide structure for discussions on class topics and other issues.
How to Create a Blog Post
1.
Click Blogs on the Course Tools menu.
2.
Click the appropriate Blog.
3.
Click Create Blog Entry.
4.
Type an Entry Title.
5.
Type the text in the Entry Message text box.
6.
Click Post Message as Anonymous if appropriate.
Note: This option may not be available. The System Administrator or
Instructor can restrict this option.
7.
Click Browse for Local File to attach a file to the entry.
8.
Click Post Entry.
OR
Click Save Entry as Draft to save the entry for later posting.
Viewing Drafts
Blog Entries are saved for later posting by clicking Save Entry as Draft. These drafts are viewed
by clicking View Drafts from the main Blog page.
See Also
About Blogs
Creating a Blog
Creating Blog Comments
Editing Blogs
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Blog Comments
Instructors and users can enter comments on Blog posts if comments are allowed.
How to Comment on a Blog Post
1.
Open a Blog.
2.
Click Comment for the appropriate post.
3.
Type a comment in the Comment field.
4.
Click Comment on Entry as Anonymous if appropriate.
Note: This option may not be available. The System Administrator or
Instructor can restrict this option.
5.
Click Add.
See Also
About Blogs
Creating Blogs
Creating Blog Posts
Editing and Managing Blogs
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Editing and Managing Blogs
Instructors can edit basic properties of the Blog, including the name, instructions, availability,
participation, and user permissions. Instructors can also delete their own blogs.
How to Edit a Blog
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Blogs from the Course Tools menu.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Select Edit from the contextual menu for the Blog.
5.
Make changes.
6.
Click Submit.
How to Delete a Blog
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Blogs from the Course Tools menu.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Select Delete from the contextual menu for the Blog.
5.
Click OK in the confirmation window.
How to Change the Availability of a Blog
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Blogs from the Course Tools menu.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Click the check box next to the appropriate Blog.
5.
Select Make Available or Make Unavailable from the Availability drop-down list.
Troubleshooting Blog Management
If...
Then...
a Blog is deleted while users are posting
the Blog and all comments are deleted
a Blog is made unavailable while users
are posting
the Blog remains visible to the Instructor in Edit
Mode but is not displayed to users
the Allow Users to Edit and Remove
Entries setting is changed
entries remain but users cannot edit them
the Allow Users to Remove Comments
setting is changed
comments remain but users cannot edit them
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
See Also
About Blogs
Creating a Blog
Creating Blog Posts
Creating Blog Comments
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Collaboration Tools
Collaboration Tools allow users and Instructors to engage in synchronous communication.
In this section
This section includes information on the following topics:
Topic
Description
Collaboration Tools
Provides an overview of the Virtual Classroom and Chat
features.
Collaboration Sessions
Explains how instances of each collaboration tool are
organized.
Create/Edit Collaboration
Session
Gives instructions for creating a session.
Virtual Classroom
Provides an overview of the Virtual Classroom.
Menu Bar
Describes the functions available in the Menu Bar of the
Virtual Classroom.
Classroom Tool Box
Describes the functions available in the Virtual Classroom
tool box.
Whiteboard
Explains the Whiteboard function in the Virtual Classroom.
Group Browser
Describes how to view Web sites as a group during a
session.
Content Map
Explains how to access Course content in the Virtual
Classroom.
Ask Question
Describes how users pose a question to the session
moderator.
Question Inbox
Describes how the moderator organizes and answers
questions.
Chat
Explains the Chat tool.
Record Menu
Reviews the functions for Recording a session.
Session Recordings
Explains how users access the Recording of an earlier
session.
Recording Properties
Describes the attributes of a session Recording.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Collaboration Tools
The Collaboration Tools allow users to participate in real-time lessons and discussions.
Examples of these sessions include real-time, online classroom discussions, guest speaker led
sessions, Teaching Assistant sessions, and live question-and-answer sessions. Recordings of
sessions are created and made available for review.
Collaboration Tools
The following Collaboration Tools are available.
Tool
Description
Virtual
Classroom
Users engage in a real-time discussion with other users, access the Web, and
engage in question and answer sessions. Users may also access the
Whiteboard to display text and images.
Chat
Chat is part of the Virtual Classroom. It can also be accessed separately. Chat
allows users to open just the text-based chat function.
Java Plug-in
The Java 2 Run Time Environment is required to use the Collaboration Tools. The plug-in may
be downloaded from the page that appears when a user joins a Collaboration Session, or may be
found at http://java.sun.com/products/plugin/index.html..
Take care to uninstall any existing Java plug-ins before installing a new version.
Find this Page
Follow the steps below to open the Collaboration Sessions page.
1.
Click Collaboration on the Course Menu or from the Control Panel.
Functions
The following table describes the functions available from this page.
To . . .
click . . .
filter the sessions listed
on the page
the arrow next to the drop-down list and select the type of session
to display. Click Filter. The filters include:
Show All – The default filter that displays all of the
Collaboration Sessions.
Available Sessions – Displays all of the sessions that
are in use.
Sessions with Recordings – Displays completed
sessions that have an archive.
Future Sessions – Displays sessions that are
scheduled to take place in the future.
search for a session
the Session Name, Start Date, or End Date option and then
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
click . . .
enter a value in the field. Click Search.
enter a session
Join from the session's contextual menu.
access the Recording
for a session
Recording from the contextual menu.
add a new Collaboration
session
Create Collaboration Session
User Roles
There are two roles available for users in Collaboration Sessions: Passive and Active. The
Session Administrator controls user access and functions during a Collaboration session by
assigning Passive or Active roles. For example, Session Administrators determine which users
can chat, send private messages, or ask questions during a session by assigning specific Access
Rights to the different roles. The Student icon will appear in the Role column next to those
Students who are Active.
Student roles can change throughout the Collaboration Session. Users who are Passive, but
would like Active rights, can signal the Session Administrator by clicking the hand icon. The
Session Administrator then makes the user Active.
Macintosh and the Collaboration Tool
For those users that wish to use Safari, be aware that Pop-Up Window Blocking must disabled.
Accessible Collaboration Tool
An accessible version of the Collaboration Tool is available.
A link to this version appears when Join is selected on the Collaboration Sessions page. This link
will open the Accessible version of the Collaboration Tool. Links to items that appear in the
Virtual Classroom, such as items in the Course Map (Course Menu) and Group Browser, will
appear in this version. Documents created on the Whiteboard may be viewed if the Session
Administrator takes a snapshot. A link will be created to the snapshot for users to view.
The sound of a door opening or closing will be audible to all participants when a user enters or
leaves a session through the accessible version.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Collaboration Sessions
The Collaboration Session page is used to manage the Collaboration Tools available in
Blackboard Learn. From this page the Instructor can access all of the Collaboration Sessions for
the Course, including those that have already taken place and are recorded and those that are
scheduled for the future. Instructors can also schedule new Collaboration Sessions and make
changes to those already scheduled from this page.
Find this Page
Click Collaboration in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
Default Collaboration Sessions
Each Course and Organization begins with two default Collaboration Sessions. The Lecture Hall
is the default Virtual Classroom, and Office Hours is the default Chat. These default sessions can
be deleted. Removing a session is irreversible.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Collaboration Sessions page:
To . . .
click . . .
create a new Collaboration
Session
Create Collaboration Session. The Create Collaboration
Session page will open.
filter the sessions listed on the
page
the arrow next to the drop-down list and select the type of
session to display. Click Filter. The filters include:
Show All – The default filter that displays all
of the Collaboration Sessions.
Available Sessions – Displays all of the
sessions that are currently being used.
Sessions with Recordings – Displays
completed sessions that have a Recording.
Future Sessions – Displays sessions that are
scheduled to take place in the future.
search for a session
the Session Name, Start Date or End Date option and
then enter a value in the field. Click Search.
enter a session
select Join from the contextual menu for the session. The
Virtual Classroom or Chat for that session will open.
access the Recordings for a
session
Recordings next to the session. The Session Recordings
page will appear.
change the name, availability, or
tools used during the session
select Edit from the contextual menu for the session. The
Edit Collaboration Session page will appear.
delete a session
select Delete from the contextual menu for the session.
This action is irreversible.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create/Edit Collaboration Session
Instructors create new Collaboration Sessions using the Virtual Classroom or the Chat from the
Create Collaboration Session page. Instructors can schedule sessions for specific dates and
times. The Create Collaboration Session page and Edit Collaboration Session page function in a
similar manner. The Create Collaboration Session page opens with empty fields while the Edit
Collaboration Session page opens with a session already populated.
Find this Page
Follow the steps below to open the Create Collaboration Session page or the Edit Collaboration
Session page.
1.
Click Collaboration in theCourse Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Collaboration Session on the Collaboration Sessions page or select Edit
from the contextual menu for a Collaboration Session.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create Collaboration Session page.
Field
Description
Session Name
Session Name
Type the name of the new session.
Schedule Availability
Select Dates of
Availability
A Start and End date and time for the Collaboration Session is set but
is not required. If these are not selected then the session is always
open and available for users.
Available
Select Yes to make the session available.
Collaboration Tool
Choose a Tool for
this Session
Select Virtual Classroom or Chat.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Virtual Classroom
Users can ask questions, draw on the whiteboard, and participate in breakout sessions from the
Virtual Classroom. The Session Administrator establishes which tools in the Virtual Classroom
users can access.
Find this Page
Follow the steps below to open the Virtual Classroom.
1.
Click Collaboration on the Course Menu or from the Course Tools area of the Control
Panel.
2.
Click Join from the contextual menu of a Virtual Classroom session.
Virtual Classroom Areas
The table below details the areas of the Virtual Classroom.
Part
Function
Menu Bar
Allows the Session Administrator to control the Virtual Classroom. This
includes managing participation, monitoring breakout sessions, and ending
the session.
Classroom
Tool box
Includes all of the tools used during the Virtual Classroom session. This
includes searching for Web sites, asking and answering questions, utilizing
the Whiteboard, and accessing the Course Map (Course Menu).
Chat
Allows users to compose messages, raise their hands to ask questions, and
activate private messages.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Menu Bar for Virtual Classroom
All users have access to the options on the Menu Bar. The functions available in the Menu Bar
include:
View - Choose an option for viewing Personal Messages in the Virtual Classroom.
Controls - Grants and deletes access rights to tools
Clear - Clears the session display.
End - Ends the session and expels all users.
Breakouts - Creates a breakout room for a group of users.
View
Select Show in-line to view private messages within the chat area. Select Show in separate
frame to view private messages in a separate window.
Controls
Use the check boxes to grant access to tools for Passive and Active Users. Uncheck to delete
access to tools.
Clear
Clear erases the users chat display.
End
Ends the session and expels all users. This action cannot be undone.
Breakouts
Select the check boxes for the users who will participate in the Breakout session. Users may only
join a Breakout session if they are selected by the creator of the Breakout session.
Users who enter a Breakout session are still active in the main Virtual Classroom Session. If a
Breakout session is closed, users are still active in the main session. Breakout sessions default to
the same settings as the main session.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Classroom Tool box
If granted access to these tools by the Session Administrator, users can use the Whiteboard,
access Web sites, and view the Course Map (Content Menu).
The Classroom Tool box appears on the left side of the Virtual Classroom. To begin using items
in the Tool box click the name of the tool.
Tools
The following tools are available in the Classroom Tool box.
Tool
Description
Whiteboard
Enables users to present different types of information as they would on a
whiteboard in a classroom.
Group
Browser
Enables users to collaboratively browse the Web.
Map
Enables users to browse the Course Contents while they are in a Virtual
Classroom.
Ask Question
Enables users to ask questions during the session.
QuestionInbox
Enables users to answer questions submitted by other users during a session.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Whiteboard
The Whiteboard enables users in a Virtual Classroom to present different types of information as
they would on a whiteboard in a classroom. The tools in the Whiteboard Tools palette allow users
to draw images, type text, and present equations. The Session Administrator determines whether
this function is made available to users.
Functions
The table below details the tools available for use on the Whiteboard.
To . . .
click . . .
select an
item
the Arrow tool. Then click an item for selection. The following may be
performed on selected items:
Enlarge: clicke of the small black boxes that surround the item and
drag it to the desired size.
Move: Click the item and move it to the desired location.
Cut: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Cut icon.
Copy: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Copy icon.
Paste: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Paste icon.
Delete: Click the Whiteboard item. click the selected object. Then
click the Delete icon.
Group items: Click the Whiteboard items. Then click the Group
icon.
Ungroup: Click a Whiteboard item in a group. Then click the
Ungroup icon.
Bring front: Click the Whiteboard item. click selected object. Then
click the Bring to front icon.
Bring back: Click the Whiteboard item. click selected object. Then
click the Send to back icon.
draw free
hand
Select all figures on the Whiteboard: Click the Selects all Figures
icon.
the Pen tool. Choose the color of the pen in the Pen Color drop-down list.
Next, select the line width.
enter text
using the
keyboard
the text tool (T) then the Whiteboard area. A Whiteboard Text Input box
appears. Type the text in the box and click Insert. Use the options in the
Tools palette to select color, font, and size.
draw a
straight line
the Line tool.
draw a
rectangle
the Rectangle tool. Choose the color of the square from the Fill Color dropdown list to draw a solid shape. To draw the outline of the shape, select None
for the fill color. The outline of the shape will be the color of the pen tool and
have the selected line width.
draw a oval
the Oval tool. Choose the color of the circle from the Fill Color drop-down list
to draw a solid shape. To draw the outline of the shape, select None for the
fill color. The outline of the shape will be the color of the pen tool and have
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
click . . .
the selected line width.
input an
equation
The Math and Science Equation Editor icon (∑). The Equation Editor will
appear. Input the equation and click Insert Equation.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Group Browser
The Group Browser enables users to collaboratively browse the Web. This tool opens a URL that
is viewable by all users. URLs used in the session will be added to the Recording if one is
created. The Session Administrator will determine whether this function is made available to
users.
Functions
The table below details the available functions in the Group Browser.
To . . .
click . . .
open a Web site
type the URL in the Type Address field.
choose where to
display the Web
site
Display To Users to display the window in the Whiteboard or click
Preview in New Window to open the Web site in a new browser window.
The preview window will only be displayed to the user that opened it.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Map
The Course Map enables users to browse the Course Menu while in a Virtual Classroom. By
default, the Session Administrator has access to operate the Course Map. Users must have
Active privileges to use the Course Map in a Virtual Classroom.
Functions
The table below details the available functions in the Course Map.
To . . .
click . . .
display an element on the
map to all users
the Course area in the Course Map and select Display To
Class in the drop-down list.
display an element on the
map in a separate window
the Course area in the Course Map and select Preview in
New Window in the drop-down list. The new window is only
visible to the User who opens it.
refresh the map during a
Collaboration Session
Refresh Tree in the drop-down list. This will update the
Course Map to match the Course Menu.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Ask Question
Users are able to ask questions during the session. As users submit questions during the session
the Session Administrator can view and respond to them.
Note: Only users who have an Active role can ask questions.
Ask a Question
To ask a question, select Compose in the Ask Question area. Type the question in the text box
and click Send.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Question Inbox
Questions from users are sent to the Question Inbox during the Virtual Classroom session. The
Question Inbox is used to manage and respond to questions during a Collaboration Session.
Function
The table below details the functions available in the Question Inbox Tool.
To . . .
click . . .
respond to a question
the Username in the From list and click the Respond to
Question icon. The Respond to Question pop-up window will
appear.
delete a question
the Username in the From list and click the Delete icon.
view only questions that
have not been answered
the check box next to Show unanswered only.
Respond to Question Fields
The table below details the fields on the Respond to Question pop-up window.
Field
Description
Question
Question that was submitted.
Response
Type the response to the question.
Private
Select this check box to make the response to the question private. If marked
private, the response will only be sent to the person who submitted the
message.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Chat
Chat allows the Course Members to interact with each other using a text-based messaging tool.
Chat is part of the Virtual Classroom. It can also be accessed separately.
Find this Page
Follow the steps below to open a Chat:
1.
Click Tools on the Course Menu or Collaboration from the Course Tools area of the
Control Panel.
2.
Select Collaboration.
3.
Click Join from the contextual menu of the Chat session.
Functions
The table below details the functions available in the Chat.
To . . .
then . . .
enter a message
for others to read
type the message in the Compose field. Click Send or press Type. The
message will appear in the chat area. There is a 1000 character limit for
chat messages.
become an
Active user
click the hand symbol. A hand appears next to the Username. The
Session Administrator clicks on the hand to make the user Active.
view user
information
Select a Username in the Participant list and then click User Info.A popup window displays personal information about the selected user such as
name, email address, and any other information the user has chosen to
add to their profile.
send a private
message to a
user
Select a Username in the Participant list and then click Private Message.
Users can send private messages to each other if the Session
Administrator enables this tool in the Session Controls. Private messages
are not recorded.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Record Menu
Virtual Classroom and Chat sessions are recorded and saved for future playback. Recordings are
started and stopped, as well as paused and restarted by the Instructor during the session. A
session can have more then one recording. If the Instructor selects End to stop a session, then
the recorder will automatically stop recording the session.
Record Menu
The table below details the buttons that appear on the Record menu.
Button
Description
Start
Click Start to begin recording a session. The user will be prompted to name the
Recording.
Pause
Click Pause to pause a Recording once it has started. Click this button again to
restart the recording. Pause and restart will be marked and time stamped in the
Recording.
Stop
Click Stop to end recording the session. When Stop is selected the Recording
is completed and a stop marker and time/date stamp will be included at the end
of the Recording.
Bookmark
Click Bookmark to insert a bookmark anywhere in the Recording of the
session.
Recording the Whiteboard
The Snapshot button (shaped like a camera) on the Whiteboard Tool bar is used to capture the
Whiteboard in the Recording. The Instructor clicks the Snapshot button to capture an image of
the Whiteboard. The image of the Whiteboard in the Recording corresponds with when it was
captured. The Snapshot button cannot be activated unless the session is being recorded.
Session Recordings
The Instructor must make a Recording available before Students can view it. For more
information see Recording Properties.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Session Recordings
Introduction
Session Recordings allow users to review Collaboration Sessions. Sessions are archived by date.
Sessions will not appear in the list of saved recording until the Session Administrator has stopped
recording.
Note: If an Instructor does not stop the Recording and exit the Collaboration
Session, the Recording will not end and no information will be recorded in the
Recording Duration column. Only when the Session Administrator stops recording or
ends the session will the Recording stop and the duration display.
Find this Page
Follow the steps below to access the Session Recordings page.
1.
Click Collaboration in theCourse Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Recordings for a session using the contextual menu.
Functions
The table below describes the functions available on this page.
To . . .
click . . .
search for a Recording in
the Collaboration Session
the Recording Name or Creation Date option in the Search by
field. Type the name of the Recording or the date it was created
in the field and click Search.
open a Recording
the Recording name.
change the name or
availability of a Recording
Edit from the contextual menu. The Recording Properties page
will appear.
delete a Recording
Delete. This action is irreversible.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Recording Properties
Introduction
The Recording Properties page allows the Instructor to change the name and availability of a
Recording Session.
Note: Recordings are available to Students by default
Find this Page
Follow the steps below to open the Recording Properties page.
1.
Click Collaboration in the Course Tools section of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Recordingsfrom the contextual menu of a session.
3.
Click Edit from the contextual menu for a Recording.
Fields
The table below describes the fields available on this page.
Field
Description
Edit Recording Name
Recording Name
Type or edit the name of the Recording.
Availability to Students
Permit Participants to
View Recording
Select Yes and participants will be able to view this Recording.
Select No and this Recording will be unavailable to participants.
Contacts
Contacts is a place where Instructors can add profile information about themselves and other
staff that is distributed to students. This is a good place to add officer hours, phone numbers, and
other links to help students identify people who have a role in the Course.
Contacts are located on the Control Panel under Course Tools.
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
click . . .
add a profile
Create Contact. The Add Contact page will appear.
add a new folder
Create Folder. The Add Folder page will appear.
edit a profile
Edit from the contextual menu. The Edit Contact page will appear.
edit a folder
Edit from the contextual menu. The Edit Folder page will appear.
delete an item or
folder
Delete. A warning appears. Removing a profile or folder is irreversible.
order Contacts
the drag and drop icon and move the contacts or use the Keyboard
Accessible Reordering function.
Add or Edit Contacts and Folders
Contacts may be added or edited through the Create Contact or Edit Contact page. The fields on
the Create Contact page and Edit Contact page are the same. The Create Contact page opens
with empty fields while the Edit Contact page opens with a profile already populated.
Add or Edit a Contact
1.
Click Contacts in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Contact.
OR
To edit a profile, click Edit from the contextual menu.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Contact or Edit Contact page.
Field
Description
Profile Information
Title
Type the person's title. This title will appear before the first name.
First Name
Type a first name.
Last Name
Type a last name.
Email
Type an e-mail address. This is a required field.
Work Phone
Type a work phone number.
Office
Location
Type an office location.
Office Hours
Type office hours.
Notes
Type any additional information about the person.
Options
Make the
Contact
Available
Select Yes or No to make the profile available to Students. If No is
selected, none of the information entered on this page will appear to
Students.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Current Image
The image that currently appears with the Profile.
Profile Image
Type the path to a graphic file with a picture of the staff member or click
Browse to search for a file. This image will be included next to the profile
on the Contacts page.
Personal Link
Type the URL for the person‘s home page. When adding a URL, include
the full address and protocol for example http://www.blackboard.com. This
link appears with the profile on the Contacts page.
Add or Edit a Folder
1.
Click Contacts in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Folder.
3.
Select a Name from the drop-down list or enter a new name.
4.
Select a color for the Name.
5.
Type a description of the Folder in the Text field.
6.
Click Yes to Make the Folder Available.
7.
Click Submit.
Course Calendar
Instructors can use the Course Calendar to list important Course related events. The dates and
events that appear on the Calendar are for all users in the Course.
Some typical items Instructors may include in the Course Calendar are:
Section meetings
Assignment due dates
Exams
Guest speakers
Functions of the Course Calendar include:
Creating an Event
Editing an Event
Deleting an Event
Using the "Jump to" feature
The Course Calendar is accessed from the Control Panel under Course Tools.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create or Edit a Course Calendar Event
Events may be added or edited by accessing the Create Calendar Event page or Edit Course
Event page. The fields on each page are the same.
How to Create a Course Event
1.
Click Course Calendar in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Course Event from the Calendar page.
3.
Type an Event Name.
4.
Type an Event Description. The maximum number of characters is 4000.
5.
Type a date using the mm/dd/yyyy format.
OR
Click the Date Selection Calendar button and use the interface to select a date.
6.
Type an Event Start Time using the hh:mm AM/PM format.
OR
Click the Time Selection Menu button and use the interface to select a time.
7.
Type an Event End Time using the hh:mm AM/PM format.
OR
Click the Time Selection Menu button and use the interface to select a time.
8.
Click Submit.
How to Edit a Course Event
There are a number of ways to edit a Course Event:
From the View By Day and View by Week pages:
1.
Select Edit from the contextual menu for the Course Event.
From the View By Month page:
1.
Click the appropriate Course Event link.
2.
Select Edit from the contextual menu next to the Name.
From the View By Year page:
1.
Click the date on which the Course Event occurs.
2.
Select Edit from the contextual menu for the Course Event.
How to Delete a Course Event
Select Delete from the contextual menu of the appropriate Course Event.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Calendar Jump To
Calendar Jump To allows users to quickly access a month, week, or day in the Calendar.
Calendar Jump To is useful when looking for events planned for months in advance of the current
date.
How to Jump To a specific month, week, or day
1.
ClickCourse Calendar in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Jump to from the Calendar page.
3.
Type a date using the mm/dd/yyyy format.
OR
Click the Date Selection Calendar button and use the interface to select a date.
4.
Choose how the date is displayed by clicking Month, Week, or Day.
5.
Click Submit.
Add Portfolios to a Course
It is easy for Instructors to quickly add Portfolios stored in the Content Collection to their Courses.
These Portfolios may be viewed by all users enrolled in the Course. Portfolios can be shared with
a Course and this process must be complete from the Content Collection tab.
Note: The System Administrator may disable Portfolios or your institution may not license the
Content Collection; if this is the case the option will not be available within you Course if the tool
is disabled.
All Portfolios that have been shared with a Course are located on the Course Portfolios page.
Click Course Portfolios from the Control Panel under Course Tools to access the Portfolios
Homepage.
How to Create a New Personal Portfolio
1.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios Homepage.
2.
Click Add Personal Portfolio.
3.
Click Create new.
4.
Type a Title.
5.
Type a Description.
6.
Click Save and Continue.
7.
Select a Layout.
8.
Select a Background Color and Background Image.
9.
Select the Font Settings.
10.
Select the Menu Style and Menu Font.
11.
Designate a status for the Tab by clicking Mark step as in progress or Mark step as
complete.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
12.
Click Save and Continue.
13.
Build the Portfolio by adding pages and ordering them.
14.
Click Save and Continue.
15.
Click Complete if the Portfolio is finished and ready for display to reviewers.
16.
Click Available.
17.
Click Comments are Private to hide comments from others.
18.
Designate a status for the Tab by clicking Mark step as in progress or Mark step as
complete.
19.
Click Save and Exit.
How to Create a Template-Based Portfolio
1.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios Homepage.
2.
Click Add Personal Portfolio.
3.
Click Select Existing.
4.
Select a Portfolio template.
5.
Click Save and Continue.
6.
Select a Layout.
7.
Select a Background Color and Background Image.
8.
Select the Font Settings.
9.
Select the Menu Style and Menu Font.
10.
Designate a status for the Tab by clicking Mark step as in progress or Mark step as
complete.
11.
Click Save and Continue.
12.
Build the Portfolio by adding pages and ordering them.
13.
Click Save and Continue.
14.
Click Complete if the Portfolio is finished and ready for display to reviewers.
15.
Click Available.
16.
Click Comments are Private to hide comments from others.
17.
Designate a status for the Tab by clicking Mark step as in progress or Mark step as
complete.
18.
Click Save and Exit.
See Also
Sharing Portfolios
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Discussion Board
This section reviews the Discussion Board feature. The Discussion Board tool is also available as
a Group Tool that is used by smaller Groups within a Course.
This section includes the following topics.
Topic
Description
About the Discussion Board
Provides a general overview of the Discussion Board.
View and Organize Discussion
Board
Explains how to open a Forum and view the posts.
Creating and Editing Forums
Describes how to Create and Edit a Discussion Board
Forum
Archiving Discussion Board Threads
Describes how to Archive pieces of the Discussion
Board
Initiate a Thread
Describes how to start a conversation in a Forum.
Respond to a Discussion Board Post
Explains the different methods for posting a reaction
to a message.
Subscriptions
Describes how students can subscribe to a
Discussion Board Forum
Grading Discussion Board
Participation
Provides steps for assigning a grade to a Student for
Discussion Board participation.
Peer Review Through the
Discussion Board
Provides an example of how to use the Discussion
Board for users to respond to the work of other users.
Keeping the Discussion Board
Content Safe
Gives details on the security options for ensuring safe
content.
Delegating Discussion Board
Administration
Explains how to assign administrative roles within the
Discussion Board to other users.
Incorporating Discussion Board
Forums into the Learning Process
Describes how Discussion Boards work within a
Course.
Discussion Board Statistics
Explains how to access statistics on usage.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Discussion Board
The Discussion Board is an outcomes-based learning tool that is applied in a number of ways to
enhance learning and measure performance.
Discussion Board Terms
The table below outlines the terms used to describe Discussion Board features.
Term
Definition
Thread
The initial post and the entire series of replies to that post within a
Discussion Board Forum.
Thread Detail
The page that displays the threaded view of all posts in a thread along with
the selected post.
Post
A Discussion Board entry posted to a thread or used to start a thread. Also
used as a verb to refer to the act of submitting a post.
Forum Role
A role type that is assigned to all members of the Discussion Board for each
Forum and enables specific privileges within the Forum. A user may have
one role per Forum, however, a user‘s role in each Forum may differ.
Blocked
A Forum Role that blocks the user from accessing the Forum.
Reader
A Forum Role that grants the user the rights to read the contents of a
Forum. Users with this role may only view content and cannot add or
respond to posts.
Participant
A Forum Role that grants the user read and write privileges in the Forum.
Grader
A Forum Role that grants the user Participant privileges as well as the
Grading privileges for the Forum.
Moderator
A Forum Role that grants Participant privileges as well as the ability to edit,
delete, and lock posts. If a Moderation Queue is used, the Moderator may
also approve or reject posts in the queue.
Manager
A Forum Role that grants all privileges.
grade Forum
The process of assigning a grade to a user for their performance in a
Forum.
grade Thread
The process of assigning a grade to a user for their performance in a thread.
Rate Post
The process of evaluating a post based on a fixed, 5 point scale.
Collect Posts
The process of selecting one or more posts or threads for inclusion in on a
page that is sorted, filtered, printed, and saved as a document. The
collection is gathered into a format that is sorted, filtered, printed, and saved
as a document that is viewed in a browser.
Flag
A mark used to call attention to the post.
Copy Forum
The process of creating a clone of a Forum or the Forum settings in the
same discussion board or in another discussion board in the same Course
or Organization.
Save Posts
The act of saving a post as a draft.
Published
Post
A post that has been submitted and, if necessary, approved by a moderator.
Post Position
The position of a post in a thread relative to the other posts.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Term
Definition
Draft
A post that has been saved for future editing.
Locked
Thread
A thread that is visible for reading but cannot be edited. Users may not post
to a locked thread.
Unavailable
Thread
A thread that is hidden and inaccessible to all users except Forum
Managers.
Hidden
Thread
A Thread that is locked and not visible by default. Users may view hidden
threads by enabling the Display Hidden Threads feature.
Moderation
Queue
A list of posts that must be approved before they will appear in the
Discussion Board.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
View and Organize Discussion Board Content
Forums can appear throughout a Course, in any area where an Instructor chooses. Each group
may also have a private Discussion Board with Forums available only to those users that are a
part of the group. All Forums that are not a part of a group are accessible from various points in
the Course or by going to the Discussion Board tool. The Discussion Board tool centralizes all of
the Forums in the Course.
When users open the Discussion Board tool they will only see those Forums they can access.
Unavailable Forums can only be viewed by Instructors, Administrators, and other user roles with
similar permissions. The unavailable status of a Forum is displayed on the Discussion Board
page, beneath the name of the Forum.
Searching the Discussion Board
Users can search for a specific text string (phrase, word, or part of a word) in the Discussion
Board. To access the search function, click Search.
1.
Type a search term in the Search field.
2.
Select an area to search in from the drop-down list: Current Discussion Board or All
Forums in Course.
3.
Click Go.
Users can narrow their search by adding a timeframe to the text string.
Note: Click both the Before and After check boxes to enable the selected dates
and times.
1.
Type a search term in the Search field.
2.
Select an area to search in from the drop-down list: Current Discussion Board or All
Forums in Course.
3.
Click the After check box.
4.
Type a specific date in the field or click the Calendar button and select a date.
5.
Type a specific time in the field or click the Clock button and select a time.
6.
Click the Before check box.
7.
Type a specific date in the field or click the Calendar button and select a date.
8.
Type a specific time in the field or click the Clock button and select a date.
9.
Click Go.
Thread Status
The Forum Manager can change the status of a thread to one of the following:
Published: A published thread is available to users.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Locked: Users may read the thread but not edit or add to it. Locking a thread allows
grades to be assigned without users updating or changing posts.
Unlocked: Unlocking a thread allows users to edit and add to the thread.
Hidden: Hidden threads do not display unless the user chooses. Hidden threads may
not be edited. Hiding threads deletes outdated threads and makes relevant content
easier to find.
Unavailable: Unavailable threads are only visible to Forum managers. Even then,
Forum managers must choose to view these threads. Making threads unavailable
means that other users cannot view the thread.
Follow these steps to change the status of a thread:
1.
Open a Forum in the Discussion Board.
2.
Select threads.
3.
Choose a new status for the selected threads using the Thread Actions contextual
menu.
Forum View
The Forum view lists the threads in the Forum and includes several options for displaying and
managing threads. The Forum is viewed in one of two contexts: Tree View or List View. This
choice remains in effect until the user changes it; it is changed at any time. These choices are
available above the Action Bar.
Tree View
The Tree View presents the thread starter messages and their child messages. The child
messages are expanded or collapsed for the entire view by using the Expand All or Collapse All
buttons. Individual threads are expanded and collapsed by using the plus/minus icon next to each
message. Unread threads and messages are displayed in bold type. If a thread starter message
has unread children, then the thread starter message is displayed in bold if it is collapsed.
A search function is available at the top of the page. Other functions are listed below:
Function
Purpose
Create
Thread
Use the Create Thread button to Initiate a new thread.
Grade
Thread
Use the Grade Thread button to grade the thread. This button will only appear
for threads that have been set to grade.
Delete
Delete the selected posts from the Forum. Deleted posts cannot be restored.
Use the unavailable function to completely hide posts from users without
actually deleting the threads.
Collect
Gather selected posts onto one page where they are sorted, filtered, or printed.
Flag
Mark a post for later attention. This is only displayed in the Tree View.
Clear Flag
Delete a flag applied to a post. This is only displayed in the Tree View.
Read
Select messages to be marked as read.
Unread
Select messages to be marked as unread (will appear in bold type).
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
List View
The List View presents the list of threads in a tabular format. The threads are sorted by clicking
the caret at the top of each column.
List View
Column
Description
Checkbox
Allows for individual thread selection. Check the box in the header row to
select all threads.
Flag
Displays an indicator for any thread that contains flagged posts.
Subscription
Displays the user‘s subscription status for each thread. This is available
only if subscriptions are enabled.
Thread
Displays the title of the thread.
Author
Displays the author of the thread.
Date
Displays the date and time the thread was posted.
Status
Displays the status of the thread.
Tags
Displays any tags that have been applied to the thread. This is visible only
if tags have been enabled.
Unread Posts
Displays the number of unread posts in the thread. This number is a link
leads to a Collections page that contains all unread posts.
Total Posts
Displays the total number of posts in the thread.
Posts within the thread are viewed by clicking on the hyperlinked name of the thread in the
Thread column.
Action Bar
The functions at the top of the page include a Display option to show threads of different status
and a search function. Unread threads and posts are displayed in bold type. There is also an
action bar that includes the following functions:
Function
Which
View?
Purpose
Create Thread
Both
Views
Click to add a thread.
Delete
Both
Views
Click to delete any selected threads from the Forum.
Collect
Both
Views
Gather selected threads onto one page where posts
are sorted, filtered, or printed.
Flag
Tree View
Mark a post for later attention.
Clear Flag
Tree View
Delete a flag applied to a post.
Mark Read
Both
Views
Click to mark selected messages as read.
Mark Unread
Both
Views
Click to mark selected messages as unread.
Subscribe/Unsubscribe
Both
Click to subscribe or unsubscribe to the thread.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Function
Which
View?
Purpose
Views
Grade Forum
Both
Views
Click to assign a grade to a particular Forum
(Graders or Managers only).
This appears only if grading is enabled for this
Forum.
Thread Actions
List View
Edit the availability status of the selected threads.
Thread View
Clicking on a thread in a Forum brings up the Thread Detail. The thread view is divided into three
parts. Post viewing and management functions appear at the top of the page. The middle of the
page displays a list of posts, with replies nested underneath the original post. The bottom of the
page displays the current post. Unread posts are displayed in bold type.
The following options are available when viewing a thread:
Feature
Description
Action Bar
Collect
Group posts into an organized filterable and sortable set.
Flag
Set or clear a flag on a post.
Mark
Mark the post as read or unread.
Subscribe/Unsubscribe
Click to receive an email alert when a post is changed or a user
posts a reply.
This only appears if thread subscription is enabled.
Click again to stop receiving email alerts
Message List
Arrange View Buttons
Three buttons at the top corner of the message list provide
different display options:
Swap Up/Down. This option moves the message list up or
down on the Thread Detail page.
Hide/Restore to Minimum. This option hides the message
list or displays a minimum number of messages.
Select Threads
Maximize/Minimize. This option displays all of the
messages in the message list, including their children, or
displays a minimum number of messages.
Select each thread using the check boxes or the select all unselect
all options. Selected Threads are included in Action Bar
operations.
Previous Thread/Next
Click these options to navigate through the threads in the Forum.
Refresh
Click to refresh the thread.
Selection Drop-Down
Use this drop-down list to select all the messages on this page,
unselect all the messages on this page, or switch the previous
selection.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Feature
Description
Expand/Collapse
Messages
Click the plus/minus icon next to each message to expand (plus)
or collapse (minus) the parent message and all of its children.
Current Post
Reply
Generate a response to a post.
Quote
Click to insert the text of the current post into a reply to that post.
This only appears if this option is enabled for the Forum.
Edit
Change the content of the post.
This only appears if this option is enabled in the Forum or the user
is a Forum Manager or Moderator.
Set Flag/Clear Flag
Click to flag or un-flag this post. This changes whether or not the
user has already flagged this post.
Delete
Delete the post. Removing a post also deletes all the replies to
that post.
Previous Post/Next
Post
Click these options to navigate through the posts in the thread.
Overall Rating
Select a score for the post on a 1 to 5 scale. This only appears if
the Rating option has been enabled.
Show Parent Message
Click to display the text of the parent message. This option
remains in effect for the user until it is changed.
Hide Parent Message
Click to hide the text of the parent message. This option remains
in effect for the user until it is changed.
Collections
Collections gather posts into a printable, sortable format. Collections are a good way to organize
posts for quick reading. The following options are available on the Collections page:
Feature
Description
Action Bar
Print
Click to print selected messages.
Mark Read
Click to mark selected messages as read.
Mark Unread
Click to mark selected messages as unread.
Add Tag
Select specific messages from the list, enter a tag in the field and click Go to
add this tag to the messages
This only appears for Managers and only if tags have been enabled for the
Forum.
Filter
Author
Select an author from the drop-down list to display messages created only
by that author.
Status
Select a status from the drop-down list to display only messages that have
that status.
Read Status
Select a Read Status from the drop-down list to display only messages that
correspond to that Read Status.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Feature
Description
Tags
Select a tag from the drop-down list to display only messages that have that
tag.
This only appears if tags have been enabled in the Forum.
Message List
Selection
Drop-Down
Use this drop-down list to select all the messages on this page, unselect all
the messages on this page, or switch the previous selection.
Sort by
Select one of the following options to sort the messages on this page:
Author‘s First Name
Author‘s Last Name
Date
Subject
Thread
In … Order
Overall Rating
Choose between Ascending and Descending sort order from this drop-down
list.
Tags
Displays any tags that are associated with this message.
Mangers can add tags by clicking Add, entering the name of the tag, and
clicking Go.
Delete any tags by clicking the red "X" icon next to the tag.
Reply
Generate a response to a post.
Quote
Click to insert the text of the current post into a reply to that post.
This only appears if this option is enabled for the Forum.
Mark as
Unread
Click to mark the current message unread.
Tagging Messages
Forum managers can create and apply text labels of their own choosing to messages in a Forum;
other Discussion Board users can read, filter, and search messages using the tags, but cannot
create new ones. Tags allow arbitrary message grouping independent of thread or thread status.
Follow these steps to create and apply tags:
1.
Select specific messages and click Collect. The Collection page appears.
2.
Select the messages to tag from the message list using the check boxes or select all of
the messages by choosing Select All. Clicking Go.
3.
Type a new tag name in the Add Tag field.
4.
Click Go to apply the new tag.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tip: For faster Discussion Board page loading, turn tagging off.
If Instructors are experiencing long Discussion Board page loads, they may consider
enabling tagging on a temporary basis at certain times in the Course, tagging
selected messages at that time, and then disabling it during times of anticipated
heavy Forum usage. Re-enabling tagging at the end of the term would restore all of
the previously entered tag data to view in the pages.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating and Editing Forums
Forums are used to organize threads. The fields on the Create Forum page and the Edit Forum
page are the same. The Create Forum page opens with empty fields while the Edit Forum page
opens with a Forum already populated.
Find this Page
Follow these steps to open the Create Forum page:
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Discussions in the Course Menu or Discussion Board from the Course Tools
area of the Control Panel.
3.
Click Create Forum.
Follow these steps to open the Edit Forum page:
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Discussions in the Course Menu or Discussion Board from the Course Tools
area of the Control Panel.
3.
Locate the Forum to edit and click Edit from the contextual menu.
Fields
The table details the fields on the Create and on the EditForum page.
Field
Description
Forum Information
Name
Type the name of the Forum.
Description
Type a description of the Forum in the text box.
Forum Availability
Available
Select Yes to make theForum available.
Date and Time
Restrictions
Use the Display After and the Display Until check boxes and date
and time fields to limit Forum availability to a specific day and time or a
specific date range. The Calendar button is used to browse for a date
and the Clock button is used to browse for a time.
Forum Settings
Allow Anonymous
Posts
Posts are submitted anonymously. If selected, the posts cannot be
graded.
Allow Author to
Delete Own Posts
Authors are permitted to delete their own posts. This is limited to
deleting posts that have no replies so as not to break a thread, or is
unlimited so all posts are deleted.
Allow Author to
Edit Own
Published Posts
Authors are permitted to edit their own published posts. If these posts
will be graded, consider locking the Forum so that posts cannot be
changed after they are graded.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Allow Post Tagging
Tags are bits of meta data added to posts so that they are grouped
together during collection based on a word or phrase. Allowing tagging
can slow down page loading for large activeForum.For faster
Discussion Board page loading, do not allow message tagging.
Allow Users to
Reply with Quote
Users can include the text of the original message in any replies to that
message. This is enabled by default.
Allow File
Attachments
Messages within the Forum are allowed to contain file attachments.
Allow Members to
Create New
Threads
Members are permitted to create new threads in the Forum. This
setting cannot be used when threads are graded.
Allow Members to
Rate Posts
Posts are rated using a five star system to encourage quality posts.
Force Moderation
of Posts
Require that all messages are reviewed and approved or rejected by a
moderator. Messages that are approved are posted and messages that
are rejected are returned to the author.
Subscribe
Do not allow
subscriptions
No subscriptions for this Forum.
Allow members to
subscribe to
threads
Allow subscription to threads only. When a new message in a thread is
posted, members who are subscribed receive an email notice that a
new message is posted.
Allow members to
subscribe to Forum
Allow subscription to the entire Forum. When a new message or thread
is posted, members who are subscribed receive an email notice that
new material is posted.
Grade
No Grading in
Forum
Members will not be graded for individual contributions to the Forum.
Grade Forum
Enable grading at the Forum level. A column in the Grade Center is
created for the Forum
Grade Threads
Enable grading at the thread level. A column in the Grade Center is
created for the thread.
Note: Grading and Rating are Typeprise License options.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Archiving Discussion Board Forums and Threads
Discussion Board archives are created by making threads Hidden or Unavailable. Only users with
the appropriate roles can view these Forums and threads. All other users do not have access to
them.
Archive Discussion Board Threads
1.
Click Discussions in the Course Menu.
2.
click a Forum link.
3.
Select the threads to archive using the check boxes.
4.
Select Hidden or Unavailable from the Thread Actions drop-down list.
5.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create a Thread
Threads are a series of posts related to a similar topic. When creating a Forum, the Instructor has
the option of allowing or not allowing users to start threads. Generally, the purpose of the Forum
will dictate whether or not users can start threads. A moderated, graded Forum used to evaluate
Student performance will usually be tightly controlled and users cannot create threads. Other
Forums are designed for users to share opinions and thoughts on tangential or unrelated topics.
In this case, it is safe to allow users to create threads and spark discussions.
Start a Thread
Follow these steps to create a thread.
1.
Open a Discussion Board Forum.
2.
Click Create Thread. The Create Thread page appears.
3.
Type a Subject and a Message. It is also possible to attach files to the post.
4.
Click Submit to create the thread or click Save Draft to store a draft of the post.
See Also
Respond to a Discussion Board Post
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Respond to a Discussion Board Post
Threads grow as users respond to the initial and subsequent posts. Replies build on one another
to construct a conversation.
Reply to a Post
Follow these steps to reply to a post.
1.
Open a thread in a Forum.
2.
Find a post.
3.
Click Reply for that post.
4.
Type a Subject and a Message. It is also possible to attach files to the post. Only one
file is added using the Attachment function below the text box. When using the Text
Editor, multiple files may be added.
5.
Click Submit to create the thread or click Save Draft to store a draft of the post.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Subscriptions
Users can subscribe to a Discussion Board Forum or a specific thread within a Forum. When a
new post or reply is added to a Forum or thread, the subscriber receives an email message.
Forum Managers can choose from the following subscription options for a Forum: no
subscriptions, subscriptions at the thread level, or subscriptions at the Forum level. If subscription
is enabled, then the Forum manager can choose to have subscription messages contain the
message contents, or a link to the message.
Enable Subscriptions
Follow these steps to enable subscriptions:
1.
Create a new Forum or click Edit next to an existing Forum. The Create Forum or Edit
Forum page appears.
2.
Choose from one of the following options:
Allow members to subscribe to threads. Use this option to restrict
subscription to specific threads within a Forum.
Allow members to subscribe to Forum. Use this option to allow
subscriptions to all threads within a Forum.
3.
Choose from one of the following options:
Include message in the email. Use this option to include the message text
in the email notification and a link to reply to the message.
Include link to a message. Use this option to include a link to the message
in the email notification.
4.
Click Submit.
Disable Subscriptions
Once subscriptions are disabled, subscription alerts are suspended and Subscribe/Unsubscribe
actions are no longer available. Previous subscription settings are not deleted, but email alerts
are no longer sent.
Follow these steps to disable subscriptions:
Click Edit next to an existing Forum. The Edit Forum page appears.
Click Do not allow subscriptions.
Click Submit when finished.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grading Discussion Board Participation
In a classroom setting, Students are often expected to participate in class discussions and that
participation is part of the equation when assessing performance. Within a classroom,
participation performance can be ambiguous. It is sometimes difficult to differentiate the Student
who is active but does not advance the discussion from the Student that speaks less frequently
but with greater impact.
Student interactions with the Discussion Board are a permanent record of participation. The
Instructor has the option to grade Students at the Forum level or at the thread level.
Note: Grading is an Typeprise License option.
Enable Grading
Grading options are enabled when the Forum is created or by editing the Forum. Once Grading
has been enabled, a Grade Center Item is created and all the advanced management features
that are applied to the item should be managed from the Grade Center.
The Grade settings appear at the bottom of the Add Forum Page and the Edit Forum page.
Select Grade Forum and enter a point value to evaluate participants on performance throughout
the Forum. Select Grade Threads to evaluate participants on performance in each thread. When
the Grade Threads option is used, a Points Possiblee option appears each time a thread is
started. Keep in mind that users cannot create new threads if Grade Threads is selected for the
Forum.
Forum Managers can enable thread grading directly from the thread list (in a Forum where thread
grading is enabled). Follow these steps:
1.
Click the Enable button in the Grade column for the appropriate thread.
2.
Type a point value in the Points Possible field.
3.
Click Submit.
Grade User Participation in a Forum
Follow these steps to evaluate performance in a Forum.
1.
Open the Discussion Board. A list of Forums appears. For each Forum that may be
graded, an icon appears in the Grade column.
2.
Click Grade in the contextual menu. The Grade Forum Users page appears.
3.
Click Grade for a user.
4.
A collection of the user‘s posts in the Forum will appear. Evaluate the posts and enter a
point total in the Grade field.
5.
Click Submit to add the grade to the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note: Only users with a Forum Role of Grader or Manager may enter a grade for a
Forum. A Grader may not view his or her own work.
Grade User Participation in a Thread
Follow these steps to evaluate performance within a thread.
1.
Open the Discussion Board. A list of Forums appears.
2.
Open a Forum to see a list of threads.
3.
Click Grade Thread. This button only appears to users with a Forum Role of Grader or
Manager.
4.
Click Grade for a user. A collection of the user‘s posts in the Thread appears.
5.
Evaluate the posts and enter a point total in the Grade field.
6.
Click Submit to add the grade to the Grade Center.
Note: The Grader is alerted to possible loss of grade data if they click any button on
the page that does not submit the grade. Click Submit to save the grade before you
leave the page.
Changing Discussion Board grades
Follow these steps to change Discussion Board grades:
1.
Navigate to the Grade Forum or Grade Threads page.
2.
Click Clear to delete the existing grade.
3.
Type a new grade.
4.
Click Submit.
Disable Grading for a Forum or Thread
Use the Edit Forum feature to change the grading option to select No Grading. If grades have
already been entered for the Forum or its threads, a warning message will appear that changing
the setting will delete the associated Grade Center Items. Click OK to continue or click Cancel to
preserve the Grade Center Items.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Peer Review Through the Discussion Board
A common learning tool in classrooms is providing feedback to other Students on their work.
Students prepare an essay, lab report, or presentation and share it with the class. Other Students
are asked to comment on the work and offer criticisms for improvement. This process helps the
Student improve their Assignment, but is even more valuable to the Students that review the
work. Reviewing the work of another Student enforces classroom learning and helps the reviewer
practice important communication skills and critical thinking.
The Discussion Board is the perfect place in a Course for peer review. Each Student may start a
thread and include their work in the initial post. Other Students then review the work, assign a
rating to the initial post, and include comments in a response. As users respond, the feedback
expands as users reinforce and build on points made by other Students.
Users can respond to a post using a 5-star rating system. To enable this feature, select Allow
members to rate posts when creating the Forum.
Rating a Discussion Board Post
Open a thread and view the posts. Each post has an Overall Rating field with five stars. The
stars show the overall rating that the post has received from users. click the Rate this Post drop
down list and select a rating from 0 to 5 stars. The rating is now included in the Overall Rating
and the individual rating appears in the Rate this Post field. A user may not rate the same post
more than once..
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Controlling Discussion Board Content
Discussion Boards give Students the freedom to share their thoughts and opinions on class
topics with other users. Occasionally, Students may introduce material to the Discussion Board
that is inappropriate for the class discussion. Depending on the maturity and the sensitivity of the
Students in the Course, it may be important to review Student posts for inappropriate content
before sharing posts with the rest of the class.
Instructors can assign Discussion Board users to act as moderators. Moderators review posts
before they are added to a thread and displayed in the Course. The Moderator may be the
Instructor or other responsible participants.
It is also possible to prevent an individual user from posting at all. Assigning a user the role of
Blocked will prevent the user from accessing the Forum. Assigning an individual user the role of
Reader will allow the user to view content in the Discussion Board but prevent the user from
posting content.
Security Settings
The following settings are available when creating a Discussion Board to ensure that content is
appropriate.
Setting
Description
Allow Anonymous
Posts
If this feature is turned off users are identified by their username
whenever they post a reply. Making members accountable for the
content that they post is a deterrent for users that wish to post
inappropriate content.
Be careful when disabling this feature as there are instances where
learning can benefit from anonymous posts, particularly when
discussing sensitive topics. If this feature is enabled, the Forum cannot
be graded.
Allow Authors to
delete Posts and
Allow Author to Edit
Published Posts
Members are deterred from posting inappropriate content if they do not
have control of the content once it is posted.
Allow Members to
Create New
Threads
Preventing members from starting threads helps focus their posts on
the topic.
Force Moderation
of Posts
Moderating posts requires that all posts are reviewed by a responsible
party before the content is in the Course.
Moderate a Forum
Set up a moderator on the Manage Forum Users page. Otherwise, the Forum manager must take
responsibility for approving posts.
Follow these steps to moderate Forum posts.
1.
Open the Forum.
2.
Click Moderate Forum. The Moderate Forum button will appear only those users who
have a Forum Role of Manager or Moderator.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
The Moderation Queue page appears with a list of posts that are awaiting approval. The
posts appear in chronological order. Those at the top have been in the queue for longer
than those at the bottom.
4.
Click Moderate for a post. The Moderate Post page appears displaying the message.
5.
Select Publish or Return. Published messages are immediately posted to the thread. If
returning the post, add a message to the author explaining why the post is being returned
and some suggestions for editing the post so it is appropriate for the discussion.
6.
Click Submit. If the post is not approved, it will only appear to the author and the
Moderator in the Forum. The post will be marked returned and the Moderator comments
when returning the post will appear as a reply.
Prevent a User from Posting
There may be instances where a user should not be allowed to post at all because of past history
of inappropriate posts or other reasons. Assign a user the Forum Role of Reader if the user is
allowed to view the Forum but not add content. Assign a user the Forum Role of Blocked to
prevent the user from accessing the Forum at all.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Delegating Discussion Board Administration
Discussion Boards can serve several different purposes in a Course. In some cases, the
Instructor does not wish to be actively involved in the Discussion Board and needs to delegate
some or all of the administration of the Discussion Board to another responsible user. Discussion
Board Forums include roles for each user involved in the Forum. These roles define privileges
within the Forum. The Forum Roles with administrative roles that are assigned to users in a
Forum are:
Manager
Moderator
Grader
Manager
Managers have full control over the Forum. Managers can change the Forum settings, moderate
posts, and assign grades. The role of Manager should only be assigned to the CourseInstructor
or someone with similar responsibilities. Users with a Course role of Instructor or Teaching
Assistant are granted this Forum Role by default.
Moderator
Moderators review posts before they are made available to all users in the Course. Moderators
may also delete and edit all posts in any Forum, even if the Forum does not use the Moderation
Queue. Make sure that Moderators are responsible and understand the criteria for appropriate
posts. Users with a Course role of Course Builder are granted this Forum Role by default.
Grader
Graders review Discussion Board posts and enter grades in the Grade Center. The Grader role
has some access to the Grade Center and should only be assigned to users responsible for
guiding and evaluating learning such as Instructors and Teaching Assistants. Graders do not
have access to the Control Panel as part of their Forum privileges. Users with a Course role of
Grader are granted this Forum Role by default.
Define a User’s Role in a Forum
Follow these steps to assign a user a role in a Forum.
1.
Open the Discussion Board.
2.
Click Manage for a Forum from the contextual menu.
3.
The Manage Forum Users page appears.
4.
Select a role from the appropriate contextual menu. The default value is Participant.
Participants can read and post but have no administrative privileges.
5.
Click OK. The Forum Roles are immediately assigned.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Incorporating Discussion Board Forums into the Learning
Process
Discussion Board Forums are accessed from the Discussion Board tool that lists all the Forums in
the Course. This centralized view is an easy access point, but there are other ways to access
Discussion Board Forums that immerse the user in the learning experience. For example, links to
Discussion Board Forums are placed in any Content Area. So that a Forum may appear following
lecture notes on the same topic. Adaptive Release or date availability restrictions, are used to
limit access to those users who have complete the lesson or after the Instructor has delivered the
lecture in class.
Note: Creating Forums is a separate act from linking them in Content Areas.
Forums need to be created first and then they are added to a Content Area.
Add a Discussion Board Forum to a Content Area
1.
Open the Content Area and folder where the Forum should appear.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Collaborate and select Add Discussion Board.
4.
Select Discussion Board page to link to the main page or select a Discussion Board
Forum.
5.
Click Next.
6.
Type the Link Information.
7.
Click Submit.
Define Requirements for Viewing the Discussion Board Forum
Discussion Board links are subject to date restrictions and adaptive release restrictions. When
restrictions are in place users cannot access the Forum in the Content Area or in the Discussion
Board. The Instructor always has access to every Forum through the Control Panel.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Discussion Board Statistics
The Performance Dashboard keeps track of user activity throughout the Course, including the
Discussion Board. This information can help Instructors quickly identify Students that are outside
the normal range of participation. Instructor can use this information to reward achievement and
assist Students that are struggling with the material.
View Discussion Board Statistics
Follow these steps to view Discussion Board statistics for a user.
1.
Click Evaluation from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Performance Dashboard.
3.
The number of Forums where a user has posted appears as a link in the Discussion
Board column. Click the number to view details.
4.
A page appears that lists the following information:
Total Posts
Date of Last Post
Average Post Length (number of characters)
Minimum Post Length (number of characters)
Maximum Post Length (number of characters)
Average Post Position - This number is a representation of a user's participation
within a thread.
Grade (if the post is not yet graded, the Instructor may click a link to the Grade Center
to add a grade)
About the Glossary
Each Course has its own Glossary of terms. Each entry consists of the term and an
accompanying definition. The Glossary must be enabled by the Instructor before Students can
view it. To turn on the Glossary, simply enable it as a Course Tool and then add it to the Course
Menu.
The Glossary controls all of the entries in the Course Glossary.
The Glossary is accessed from the Control Panel under Course Tools.
Other functions of the Glossary include:
Adding a Glossary term
Uploading a Glossary
Downloading a Glossary
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create Glossary Term
Glossary terms may be added one-by-one using the Add Glossary Term page. On this page, an
Instructor may add a single term and its associated definition. To load a number of terms at once
into the Glossary, use the Upload Glossary feature.
Find this Page
Follow these steps to find the Add Glossary Term page:
1.
Click Course Tools from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Glossary.
3.
Edit Mode is ON.
4.
Click Create Term.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Glossary Term page.
Field
Description
Term
Type a term to add to the Glossary.
Definition
Type a definition for the term. Definitions may include simple HTML to edit text,
but more sophisticated HTML formatting should be avoided. Also, carriage
returns are not recognized when entered in a definition, but HTML code to
denote breaks in text will work.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Upload Glossary
Uploading a Glossary is a quick method of adding many terms to the Glossary. Uploading a
Glossary can either replace the existing Glossary or supplement it by adding the terms in the file
to the existing Glossary.
Find this Page
Follow these steps to find the Upload Glossary page:
1.
Click Course Tools from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Glossary.
4.
Click Upload/Download.
5.
Select Upload Glossary.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Upload Glossary page.
Field
Description
Specify Upload File
File
Click Browse to locate the file from a local computer. The Glossary
file must be a comma delimited data file (.CSV).
Upload File Options
Add the Terms in
this File to the
Glossary
Select this option to supplement the existing Glossary with a list of
new terms. If a term appears in both the existing Glossary and the file,
the definition in the file will replace the definition in the existing
Glossary. If the same term appears two or more times in the file, the
last definition for the term will appear in the Glossary.
Delete all Glossary
Terms and Replace
with the Terms in
this File
Select this option to delete the existing Glossary and replace it with
the terms in the upload file.
Glossary File Format
Within the CSV file, each entry is separated by a hard return and the term and the definition are
separated by a comma. For example:
"Apple","A red fruit."
"Onion", "A vegetable."
Although it is not always necessary to enclose the term and the definition in quotation marks,
Blackboard strongly recommends this practice to avoid processing errors.
Example:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
"Apple","A delicious fruit, usually <b>red</b> in color. Apples are
grown all over the world and are an important religious and mythical
symbol to several cultures. The Pacific Northwest region of the United
States, particularly Washington state, is famous for its
apples.<br><br> However, most refined apple lovers agree that the best
apples come from the Hudson River valley area of New York. Perhaps this
is why New York City is nicknamed, ""The Big Apple."""
"Onion","Onions are a tasty vegetable with green stalks and a white,
yellow, or red bulb. For the best-tasting Onions, visit the \"Onion
Capital of the World\" Pine Island, New York."
Quotation marks that appear in a definition or a term must be escaped. This means that the
quotation mark must be identified as part of the definition or the mark will be read as the end of
the definition. Quotation marks may be escaped using a backslash (\") or another set of quotation
marks ("").
Batch Files
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the system. Each
batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The following batch file
standards are universal.
Each file must be one of the supported file types: .txt or .csv. Note: Microsoft Excel
versions 2003 and 2007 automatically insert double quotes in every field if the
worksheet is saved as a .csv file.
Each file must be in DOS format. Files in MAC or UNIX format must be converted to
DOS.
Each field must be enclosed in double quotation marks. For example: "ENG_201"
If quotation marks appear in a field, use an escape character to indicate that the next
character does not mark the end of the field. The escape character is a backslash (\).
For example: "\"ENG_201\""
Each field must be separated with one of the following delimiters: comma, colon, or tab.
When selecting AUTO, only one type of delimiter may be used in each batch file. For
example: "ENG_201","English Literature" or " "ENG_201":"English Literature"
Each record must be on a separate line. For example:
"ENG_201","English Literature"
"ENG_201","English Literature"
Do not include blank lines between records. The blank line will be processed and return
an error.
Blackboard recommends that each batch file not exceed 500 records because of timeout
restrictions associated with most browsers.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Download Glossary
Downloading a Glossary creates a comma delimited data file (.CSV) of the Glossary. Each entry
is separated by a hard return and within each entry the term and the definition are separated by a
comma.
Downloading a Glossary is useful for adding terms to another Course. The Glossary is edited
offline and then uploaded to another Course.
Find this Page
Follow these steps to find the Download Glossary page:
1.
Click Course Tools from the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Glossary
4.
Click Upload/Download
5.
Select Download Glossary.
Download a Glossary
To download a Glossary, simply click Download. The Glossary may be edited in a spreadsheet
program such as Excel or in a text editor like Notepad and then uploaded to the Glossary. Make
sure to keep the formatting of the file intact to ensure a smooth upload.
About Journals
Instructors can assign a journal to each user in a group that is accessible by only them and the
user in order to communicate privately with the Instructor about the group experience. Users can
post messages to the Instructor and the Instructor, in turn, can comment.
See Also
Creating a Journal
Creating Journal Entries
Creating Journal Comments
Editing and Managing Journals
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a Journal
Instructors can create and assign Journals to each student in a group in order to communicate
privately regarding course issues.
How to Create a Journal
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Journals from the Course Tools area.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Click Create Journal.
5.
Type a Name and Instructions for the Journal.
6.
Click Yes to make the Journal available.
7.
Use the Display After and Display Until date and time fields to Limit Availability of the
Journal. Click both the Display After and Display Until check boxes in order to enable
the date and time selections.
8.
Choose between Monthly or Weekly index entries.
9.
Click the check box to Allow Users to Edit and Remove Entries.
10.
Click the check box to Allow Users to Remove Comments.
11.
Click the check box to Permit Course Users to View Journal.
12.
Select the Grade option and enter the number of Points possible.
13.
Click Submit.
See Also
About Journals
Creating Journal Entries
Creating Journal Comments
Editing and Managing Journals
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Journal Entries
Instructors and users can create and post Journal Entries or save them in draft form for later
posting.
How to Create a Journal Entry
1.
Open a Journal.
2.
Click Create Journal Entry.
3.
Type an Entry Title.
4.
Type the text in the Entry Message Text Box.
5.
Click Browse for Local File or Browse for Content Management item to attach a file
to the Journal entry.
6.
Click Post Entry to post the Journal entry.
OR
Click Save Entry as Draft to post the entry later.
Note: Draft Journal Entries are viewed by clicking View Drafts on the main Journal page.
See Also
About Journals
Creating a Journal
Creating Journal Comments
Editing and Managing Journals
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Journal Comments
Instructors and users can create comments to Journal Entries if commenting is allowed.
How to Comment on a Journal Entry
1.
Open a Journal.
2.
Click Comment for the appropriate entry.
3.
Type a comment in the Comment field.
4.
Click Add.
See Also
About Journals
Creating a Journal
Creating Journal Entries
Editing and Managing Journals
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Editing and Managing Journals
Instructors can edit basic properties of the Journal, including the name, instructions, availability,
participation, and user permissions. Instructors can also delete their own Journals.
How to Edit a Journal
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Journals from the Course Tools menu.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Select Edit from the contextual menu for the Journal.
5.
Make changes.
6.
Click Submit.
How to Delete a Journal
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Journals from the Course Tools menu.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Select Delete from the contextual menu for the Journal.
How to Change the Availability of a Journal
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Journals from the Course Tools menu.
3.
Click Edit Mode ON.
4.
Click the check box next to the appropriate Journal.
5.
Select Make Available or Make Unavailable from the Availability drop-down list.
Troubleshooting Journal Management
If...
Then...
a Journal is deleted while users are
posting
the Journal and all comments are deleted
a Journal is made unavailable while
users are posting
the Journal remains visible to the Instructor in Edit
Mode but is not displayed to users
the Allow Users to Edit and Remove
Entries setting is changed
entries remain but users cannot edit them
the Allow Users to Remove
Comments setting is changed
comments remain but users cannot edit them
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
See Also
About Journals
Creating a Journal
Creating Journal Entries
Creating Journal Comments
Messages
Messages are private and secure text-based communication that occurs within a Course and
among Course members. Although similar to email, users must be logged into the Course to read
and send Messages. Messages are organized in Folders, marked as Read or Unread, moved to
other Folders or deleted. The Messages Area has two Folders, Inbox and Sent that cannot be
deleted or renamed. To read Messages, click a Folder, locate the desired Message, and click the
Subject link.
Messages may be accessed through the Course Menu or Instructors may access Messages from
the Control Panel.
How to Send a Message
1.
Click Create New Message.
2.
Select the Recipients using the To, Cc, and Bcc buttons.
3.
Type the Subject.
4.
Type the Body.
5.
Click Submit.
Rubrics
A Rubric is a tool that lists evaluation criteria for an assignment. Rubrics can help students
organize their efforts to meet the requirements of an assignment. Instructors can use Rubrics to
explain their evaluations to students.
About Rubrics
Rubrics are made up of rows and columns. The rows correspond to the various criteria of an
assignment. The columns correspond to the level of achievement expressed for each criterion. A
description and point value for each cell in the rubric defines the evaluation and score of an
assignment. There is no limit to the number of Rubrics that can be created.
The following actions are available when working with Rubrics:
Creating a Rubric
Editing the Rubric Grid
Copying a Rubric
Applying a Rubric in the Grade Center
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create Rubric
New rubrics default to three rows and three columns.
1.
Type a Name for the Rubric. The name is the title text that identifies the rubric.
2.
Enter a description of the rubric to make it easier to associate it to relevant assignments.
Editing the Rubric Grid
Edit the Rubric Grid so it corresponds to the type of feedback and scoring desired.
1.
Click Add Row to add a new criterion at the bottom of the grid.
2.
Click Add Column to add a new level of achievement to the grid.
3.
Select Show Points to enter a single point value for each Level of Achievement.
4.
Select Show Point Range to enter a high and low value to create a point range for each
Level of Achievement. Only one option can be selected.
5.
Click Edit from the contextual menu of the labels identifying rows and columns to change
their names.
6.
Enter a point value or range of values for each cell.
7.
Enter a description defining the criteria and the associated Level of Achievement.
Note: There is a 1000 character limit for each cell. Rows and columns can be reordered by
clicking the reordering icon.
Copying and Editing a Rubric
Copying a Rubric is helpful best practice if you have similar assignments for your students that
will follow the same criteria. This will allow you to keep the settings and simply re-name the
Rubric.
Rubrics can be duplicated by selecting the Copy option from the contextual menu. A copy will
automatically be created with the name of the rubric in parentheses followed by the number one.
Example: "Introductory Speech" will be copied to create "(Introductory Speech)(1)".
The Rubric name can then be edited to a new name by selecting Edit from the contextual menu.
The Edit Rubric page will allow you to edit all the settings for the Rubric.
Applying a Rubric in the Grade Center
From the Grade Center, Rubrics can be associated to any column. Rubrics can be viewed from
the Grade Center during the grading process.
Rubrics can also be viewed from the Grade Details page within the Grade Center.
Rubrics are not displayed to students and as an Instructor, your interaction is limited to a Read
Only copy when viewing the Rubric in the Grade Center or within a grading widget for Blogs,
Journals, Wikis, and Discussion Boards.
How to Apply a Rubric in the Grade Center
1.
Access the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
2.
Find the column you would like to associate your Rubric with. From the contextual menu of
that column, select View and Add Rubrics. A pop-up will open.
3.
Click Add Rubric.
4.
Select the Rubric you want to add.
5.
Click Submit. You will be returned to the pop-up page. There are two icons under the
Actions column, View Rubric or Remove Rubric Association. When you click View
Rubric, the Rubric will open in a new window for you to view while you are grading your
student's assignments.
How to View a Rubric while Grading
A Rubric will need to be added to the assignment in the Grade Center prior to grading within the
course tool. You will only be able to view the Rubric from this area. Adding Rubrics is only
available through the Grade Center.
1.
Access the Blog, Wiki, Journal, or Discussion Board that you need to grade.
2.
Click Edit Grade on the right hand side of the page. Note: Grading must be enabled for
the assignment for this option to appear.
3.
Click View Rubric to view any associated Rubrics with that assignment. The associated
Rubrics will open in a pop-up window for you to select.
4.
Provide a grade in the Current Grade Value text box.
5.
Provide any Feedback to the Student or any Grading Notes for the Instructor.
6.
Click Save Grade when you are finished.
About SafeAssign
SafeAssign compares submitted assignments against a set of academic papers to identify areas
of overlap between the submitted assignment and existing works. Safe Assign is used to prevent
plagiarism and to create opportunities to help students identify how to properly attribute sources
rather than paraphrase. SafeAssign is effective as both a deterrent and an educational tool.
How SafeAssignments Work
SafeAssign is based on a unique text matching algorithm capable of detecting exact and inexact
matching between a paper and source material. SafeAssignments are compared against several
different databases, including:
Internet – comprehensive index of documents available for public access on the Internet
ProQuest ABI/Inform database – more than 1,100 publication titles and about 2.6 million
articles from 1990's to present time, updated weekly (exclusive access)
Institutional document archives – contains all papers submitted to SafeAssign by users
in their respective institutions
Global Reference Database – contains papers that were volunteered by students from
Blackboard client institutions to help prevent cross-institutional plagiarism
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Global Reference Database
Blackboard‘s Global Reference Database is a separate database where students voluntarily
donate copies of their papers to help prevent plagiarism. It is separated from each institution‘s
internal database, where all papers are stored by each corresponding institution, and students
are free to select the option to check their papers without submitting them to the Global
Reference Database. Students submit their papers to the database voluntarily and agree not to
delete papers in the future. Submissions to the Global Reference Database are extra copies that
are given voluntarily for the purpose of helping with plagiarism prevention. Blackboard does not
claim ownership of submitted papers.
SafeAssign Originality Reports
After a paper has been processed, a report will be available detailing the percentage of text in the
submitted paper that matches existing sources. It also shows the suspected sources of each
section of the submitted paper that returns a match. Instructors can delete matching sources from
the report and process it again. This may be useful if the paper is a continuation of a previously
submitted work by the same student.
Because SafeAssign identifies all matching blocks of text, it is important to read the report
carefully and investigate whether or not the block of text is properly attributed.
Interpreting SafeAssign Scores
Sentence matching scores represent the percentage probability that two phrases have the same
meaning. This number can also be interpreted as the reciprocal to the probability that these two
phrases are similar by chance. For example, a score of 90 percent means that there is a 90
percent probability that these two phrases are the same and a 10 percent probability that they are
similar by chance and not because the submitted paper includes content from the existing source
(whether or not it is appropriately attributed).
Overall score is an indicator of what percentage of the submitted paper matches existing sources.
This score is a warning indicator only and papers should be reviewed to see if the matches are
properly attributed.
Scores below 15 percent: These papers typical include some quotes and few common
phrases or blocks of text that match other documents. These papers typically do not
require further analysis, as there is no evidence of the possibility of plagiarism in these
papers.
Scores between 15 percent and 40 percent: These papers include extensive quoted or
paraphrased material or they may include plagiarism. These papers should be reviewed
to determine if the matching content is properly attributed.
Scores over 40 percent: There is a very high probability that text in this paper was
copied from other sources. These papers include quoted or paraphrased text in excess
and should be reviewed for plagiarism.
Grade Center Integration
SafeAssignments are created with associated Grade Center items. The score is then recorded in
the Grade Center. For more information about the Grade Center, refer to the Blackboard Learn
Instructor Manual.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Create a SafeAssignment
SafeAssignments appear in courses as a new content type and are added to any course content
area. Please note that SafeAssignments are different from Assignments and there is no
connection between the content types. It is not possible to make an existing Assignment a
SafeAssignment without starting from the beginning. Like regular Assignments, however,
SafeAssignments are integrated with the Grade Center.
Create a SafeAssignment
Follow these steps to create a SafeAssignment.
From a content area within a course, select the SafeAssignment content type from the
Select drop-down list and click Go.
The Add SafeAssignment page will appear.
Complete the page using the table below as a guide and click Submit.
Add Safe Assignment Fields
The Add Safe Assignment page includes the following fields.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Title
Type a title for the SafeAssignment.
Points Possible
Type the points possible for the SafeAssignment. This value will be
shared with the Grade Center Item created for the Safe Assignment.
Text
Type instructions for completing the SafeAssignment.
Available
Select whether or not the SafeAssignment should be visible to Students.
Availability Dates
Use these controls to set the date range when Students can interact with
the SafeAssignment. It is possible to set only a Start date or only an End
date.
Drafts
Allows Students to validate their paper without submitting it to the
institutional database. Useful as an instructive tool to help Students
learn how to attribute papers properly.
Students
Viewable
Determines whether or not Students can see the report generated when
their papers are submitted.
Urgent Checking
Sets papers to a high priority in the queue.
Optional
Announcement
Create
Select Yes to create an Announcement about the SafeAssignment.
Subject
Type a subject for the Announcement.
Message
Type a message for the Announcement.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Direct Submit
Direct Submit generates SafeAssign reports on papers submitted outside of a SafeAssignment
and it may also be used to add papers to the institutional database. Because Quick Submit is not
integrated with the Grade Center, Instructors should use SafeAssignments to collect submissions
whenever possible.
Direct submit allows Instructors to submit papers one at a time or several at once by including
them in a .ZIP file. Note that .ZIP packages should contain no more than 100 papers and
submitting more than 300 papers in a session is not recommended.
As well, papers with over 5000 phrases or that are more than 10 MB in size cannot be submitted.
Submit Papers through Quick Submit
Follow these steps to submit papers through Quick Submit.
1.
From the Control Panel, click SafeAssign under Course Tools.
2.
Click the Direct Submit tab.
3.
A list of folders and papers will appear. This list includes papers already uploaded
through Quick Submit. It is not recommended that files be deleted from Quick Submit, as
this will delete them from the institutional database of existing materials.
4.
Navigate to a folder where the paper or papers will be uploaded.
5.
Click Submit Papers.
6.
Select Upload File and browse for the file. Individual papers as well as papers that are
grouped in a .ZIP package are accepted. Alternatively, select Copy/Paste Document and
add the document text in the field.
7.
Select the upload options:
Submit as Draft: A SafeAssign report will be generated however the paper will not
be added to the institutional database and will not be used to check other papers.
Skip Plagiarism Checking: Adds the papers to the institutional database without
checking for content copied from other sources. This is useful if an Instructor
wants to upload papers from an earlier course to ensure that current students are
not reusing work.
8.
Click Submit.
Shared Folders and Private Folders
Direct Submit Shared Folders are viewable by anyone with access to the Direct Submit tool
through the course. Multiple Instructors and Teaching Assistants can view submissions related to
a course in Shared Folders Private folders can be used to manage papers for an individual
instructors. These folders follow the instructor and are available in any course where that user
has Instructor level privileges.
Supported file types
Direct Submit supports the following file types:
Microsoft Word document: .doc
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Rich Text Format: .rtf
HTML: .htm or .html
Text: .txt
Zip compressed: .ZIP used to upload multiple files.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Managing Submissions
Student submissions and the Safe Assign reports associated with submissions are viewed from
the SafeAssign link on the Control Panel, found under the Course Tools heading. The
SafeAssign area lists the SafeAssignments in the course. click a SafeAssignment to view and
grade submissions.
View Submissions
Follow these steps to view a Student submission.
1.
From the Control Panel, click SafeAssign under Course Tools.
2.
Locate the specific SafeAssignment in the list and click View.
3.
A list of Student submissions will appear.
4.
The following columns appear for each SafeAssignment:
Text: Select this option to view the Student‘s paper and any comments from the
Student.
File: Select this option to download the Student Submission.
Matching: The percentage listed is the percentage of the paper that matches
other sources. Please read the full report to determine if the matching is properly
attributed.
SA Report: Select this option to view the full Safe Assignment report.
Clear Attempt: Select this option to delete the submission from the database, for
example, if the Student uploaded the wrong file.
Grade a Submission
SafeAssignments are integrated into the Grade Center and may be accessed and graded directly
from the Grade Center like other Assignments. SafeAssignments are not automatically graded;
like existing manually graded Assignments they will display with a ‗!‘ indicating action required by
the instructor.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
SafeAssign Originality Reports
SafeAssign Originality Reports provide detailed information about the matches found between a
submitted paper and existing sources. The SafeAssign report identifies all matching blocks of
text. It is the responsibility of the instructor and student to investigate whether the matching text is
properly referenced or not. Detailing every match prevents detection errors due to differences in
citing standards.
Report layout
SafeAssign reports are divided into three sections:
Report Information: This section lists data about the paper, such as the author, percent
Matching, and when it was submitted. This section also includes options for downloading
the report, emailing the report, or viewing a printable version. Note that the printable
version may be the most effective view of the report for those users that rely on assistive
technologies to access Blackboard Learn.
Suspected Sources: This section lists the sources that have text that matches the text of
the submitted paper. Users may select sources, exclude them from the review, and
process the paper again. This is useful if a source is a previous work from the same
student for the same assignment, or if there is some reason that lengthy sections of a
particular source appear in the paper. Processing the paper again will generate a new
value for the percent matching without using the excluded sources.
Manuscript Text: This section shows the submitted paper. All matching blocks of text are
identified. Clicking a matching block of text will display information about the original
source and the probability that the block or sentence was copied from the source.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Self and Peer Assessment Building Block
The Self and Peer Assessment Building Block allows an Instructor to create an exercise,
composed of one or more Questions, each with one or more Criteria, to be presented to their
Students for completion and evaluation. These Tests, along with their Questions and Criteria, are
exported and then imported for later use.
Questions provide structure and content to the Assessment. They are simple ("What is 2 plus
2?") or complex ("Describe the main reason for the fall of the Roman Empire.").
The Criteria that accompany each Question provide the means to evaluate the responses to
those Questions. The number or Criteria can also range from one ("Did the answer = 4?") to
many:
Does the response place the issue within the broader context of the subject?
Is the response well organized and clearly laid out?
Was the response proofread carefully? Was it free of significant grammatical, spelling,
or typographical errors?
The Self and Peer Assessment Building Block is a tool designed to facilitate the objective,
analytical, and learning comprehension skills of students. Reviewing the work of fellow students
through criteria-based reference evaluation allows constructive feedback. The constructive
feedback that students give to and receive from their peers can enhance their comprehension of
the subject material and provide valuable insights into their own efforts.
The following topics outline the features and functions of the Self and Peer Assessment Building
Block:
Creating a New Assessment
Importing an Assessment
Exporting an Assessment
Adding a Question to an Assessment
Adding a Default Question
Adding Criteria to a Question
Adding Default Criteria
Adding a Question from the Library
Previewing the Assessment
Completing an Assessment
Evaluating an Assessment
Managing an Assessment
Rules for Editing an Assessment
Editing an Assessment
Monitoring the Submissions
Monitoring the Evaluations
Viewing the Results
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Features and Functions
The Self and Peer Assessment Building Block is a tool designed to enhance the reflective
learning skills of students. Reviewing the work of colleagues through criterion-based reference
evaluation promotes constructive feedback. The constructive feedback that students receive from
their peers can provide valuable insights into their own efforts.
Large classes can benefit from the Self and Peer Assessment Building Block by distributing the
administrative workload; quality feedback is provided from several different individuals, instead of
relying upon a single Instructor.
Tests are precisely scheduled to allow the proper time for the submission and evaluation process
to be completed; including the time to access any content items associated with the assessment.
Instructors have the option of using Self and Anonymous evaluations. These options may provide
a comfort level that can result in more candid Tests and evaluations. They may also impact the
integrity of the assessment process; care must be exercised in their use.
Enable the Self and Peer Assessment Building Block
The Self and Peer building block is included in the Blackboard Learning System. By default, it is
turned on and available for use immediately.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a New Assessment
The Self and Peer Assessment process begins by creating a new Assessment. Tests are created
from any of the content areas within a Course.
Note: Use the Instructions field to provide clear instructions and other information
that may be helpful in completing the Assessment.
Date Ranges
There are three date ranges that are necessary to the successful creation and deployment of an
Assessment: Display After/Until, Submission Start/End and Evaluation Start/End. They are
described in the following table.
Date Range
Description
Display
After/Until
The date range which the Assessment is available to Students.
Submission
Start/End
The date range which Students can submit answers to an Assessment.
Evaluation
Start/End
The date range which Students can submit evaluations of their peers' work
on the Assessment as well as their own (if Self Evaluations are enabled).
Follow these steps
To create a new Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click Control Panel within a Course.
2.
Click any of the links within the Content Areas section.
3.
Select Self and Peer from the Select drop-down list.
4.
Click Go.
5.
Type a name for the Assessment in the Name field.
Note: At this point, a new column in the Grade Center is created with the
same name.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
6.
Type instructions for the Assessment in the Instructions Text Editor.
Note: Beneath the Text Editor there is an option to save these Instructions
as a Reusable Object. If selected, these Instructions will be available to
Content Management Users. The Content Management must be installed as
a requirement for this option. For more information on Reusable Objects,
see the Content Management User's Guide.
7.
Use the Text Editor to reference any Content Management files. Optional.
8.
Set the Submission Start Date and Submission End Date by using the date and time
fields.
9.
Set the Start Date and End Date for the peer evaluations by using the date and time
fields.
10.
Allow Anonymous Evaluations by clicking the Yes radio button. Click No to disallow.
11.
Allow Self Evaluations by clicking the Yes radio button. Click No to disallow.
12.
Allow Submitters to view their own Evaluation Results by clicking the Yes radio button
next to Show Evaluation Results to Submitter. Click No to disallow.
13.
Define how many of their peers' Tests each student is expected to evaluate in the
Number of Submissions to Evaluate field.
Note: The number entered in the Number of Submissions to Evaluate
field does not include the creator of the Assessment. Type zero (0) in this
field if Self Evaluations are the only kind desired for an Assessment.
14.
Make the Assessment available by clicking the Yes radio button. Click No to make it
unavailable.
15.
Track the number of views by clicking the Yes radio button. Click No to disable tracking.
16.
Click the Display After and/or Display Until check boxes to control when the content is
available.
17.
Set the date and time restrictions for the attached content by using the date and time
fields under Display After or Display Until.
18.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Importing an Assessment
Tests are saved outside of the Blackboard Learning System by exporting them. These Tests can
then be imported for later use. Tests are imported from a variety of locations: Course Documents,
the Content Management, or from a local hard drive.
Note: If the Start Date of the imported Assessment is in the past then the system
resets it to 24 hours from the time it is imported. All other dates are adjusted forward
in time while maintaining the same relationships that were established in the original
Assessment.
Follow these steps
To import an Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click Control Panel within a Course.
2.
Click any of the links within the Content Areas section.
3.
Select Self and Peer from the Select drop-down list.
4.
Click Go.
5.
Click the Import radio button.
6.
Click Go.
7.
Click Browse… to locate the Assessment File.
8.
Type a Name for the imported Assessment. If this field is left blank, the imported
Assessment name is used.
9.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Exporting an Assessment
Tests are exported to a network or local drive so they are imported at a later time. The
Assessment file is packaged in a ZIP file so it is easily accessed by the Blackboard Learning
System. Only the Assessment (with its Questions and Criteria) is exported, none of the
Submissions are.
Follow these steps
To export an Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate Assessment.
2.
Click Export Assessment.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding a Question to an Assessment
Questions are the basic component of any Assessment. Questions provide both the structure and
content of the Assessment. Questions are simple or complex:
What year did Queen Elizabeth I die?
What is the square root of 144?
Explain why Napoleon's armies were defeated at the battle of Waterloo.
There are two important options that must be considered when creating Questions:
Content Management items are added by using their Permanent URLs.
A Model Response, an example of a correct response to a Question, is provided. The
Model Response allows Evaluators to compare submitted answers to an example. It
is not displayed to students taking the Assessment, only to the Evaluators after the
Assessment has been submitted.
Note: Beneath the Question and Model Response Text Editors there is an option
to save this Question or Model Response as a Reusable Object. If selected, the
question or answer will be available to Content Management Users. The Content
Management must be installed to use this option. For more information on Reusable
Objects, see the Content Management User's Guide.
Follow these steps
To add a question to an Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate Assessment.
2.
Click Assessment Canvas.
3.
Click Add Question.
4.
Type the question in the Question Text Editor.
5.
Type a Model Response in the Text Editor.
6.
Click Yes to make the Model Response Available.
7.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding a Default Question
Adding a Default Question is a quick and easy way to construct an effective Assessment. The
Self and Peer Assessment Building Block comes with a set of Default Questions that Instructors
can use to build their Tests.
Follow these steps
To add a Default Question, follow these steps:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate Assessment.
2.
Click Assessment Canvas.
3.
Type search text in the Search for Question field and click Go. Or leave the field blank
and click Go to display a list of all Default Questions.
4.
Click Expand next to the appropriate Question to view all the details.
5.
Click the check box next to the Questions to add.
6.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Criteria to a Question
The Criteria that accompany each Question provide the means to evaluate the responses to
those Questions. The number or Criteria can also range from one ("Did the answer =4") to many:
Does the response place the issue within the broader context of the subject?
Is the response well organized and clearly laid out?
Was the response proofread carefully? Was it free of significant grammatical, spelling,
or typographical errors?
In general, essay questions may require many criteria per question while shorter questions may
only require one or two criteria.
Follow these steps
To add criteria to a question, follow these steps:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate Assessment.
2.
Click Assessment Canvas.
3.
Click Criteria next to the appropriate question.
4.
Click Add Criteria.
5.
Type criteria text in the Criteria Text Editor.
Note: Beneath the Text Editor there is an option to save this criterion as a
Reusable Object. If selected the criterion will be available to Content
Management Users. The Content Management must be installed to use this
option. For more information on Reusable Objects, see the Content
Management User's Guide.
6.
Type the number of points possible for this question in the Points Possible field.
7.
Click All or Nothing or Partial Credit to decide how to Assign Points.
8.
Click Yes or No to decide whether or not to Allow Feedback to User.
9.
Click Submit.
Adding Word Count Criteria
If an Instructor wants to evaluate the length of an answer, it is possible to add a Word Count
Criteria to a question. An Instructor may specify that an answer should be around 200 words. The
Word Count Criteria enables points to be awarded based on the length of an answer (for
example, points awarded if the answer is within 20 words of the 200 word maximum).
To add a Word Count Criteria, follow these steps:
1.
Select Edit next to the created Self and Peer Assessment.
2.
Click Assessment Canvas.
3.
Click Criteria next to the desired Question.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Click Add Word Count Criteria.
5.
Type the number of Points Possible.
6.
Type the Maximum Word Count.
7.
Type the Allowed Variation.
8.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Default Criteria
Adding Default Criteria is a quick and easy way to construct an effective Assessment. The Self
and Peer Assessment Building Block comes with a set of Default Criteria that Instructors can use
to build their Tests.
Follow these steps
To add Default Criteria:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate assessment.
2.
Click Assessment Canvas.
3.
Click Criteria next to the appropriate Question.
4.
Type search text in the Search for Criteria field and click Go. This field is left blank to
display a list of all stored Criteria.
5.
Click Expand next to the appropriate Criteria to view all the details.
6.
Click the check box next to the Criteria to add.
7.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding a Question from the Library
Questions and Criteria are stored and reused in other Tests. Adding Questions from the Library is
a quick and easy way to construct an effective assessment. Reusing Questions and Criteria also
insures consistency across courses and departments. Once an assessment has been created,
Questions and Criteria are added from a central location.
Follow these steps
To add a Question from the library:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate assessment.
2.
Click Assessment Canvas.
3.
Type search text in the Search for Question field and click Go. This field is left blank to
display a list of all stored Questions.
4.
Click Expand next to the appropriate Question to view all the details.
5.
Click the check box next to the Question to add.
6.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Previewing the Assessment
There are two ways to preview the Assessment once it has been created, by Submission and
Evaluation. These options provide the Instructor a chance to see the Tests as their Students will.
Instructors can use these preview options to fine tune the Assessment.
The Preview option is available from the Assessment Canvas for the appropriate Assessment.
Select either Submission or Evaluation from the drop-down list and click Go.
Submission Preview page
This page offers a complete view of the Assessment. Each question is previewed in turn by
clicking its name. These pages are read only.
Evaluation Preview page
This page offers a view of all of the evaluations, regardless of their status. The features of this
page are described in the following table:
Function
Description
Evaluator
links
Click the Evaluator user name to display their Evaluation page. Each question
is displayed in a grouping of tabs. Navigate through the tabs to display the
submitted response for that question.
Click Model Response to display the Model Response for that question in a
separate window. This is only available if the Question contains a Model
Response and was made available.
Status
Displays the status of the evaluation. In Preview Mode the status is always
Not Started.
Points
Allocated
Displays the number of points given out of how many points are possible. In
Preview Mode it is displayed as 0 / xxx.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Completing an Assessment
Completing an Assessment allows the Student to interact with their Instructor by providing
answers to a series of Questions. These answers are evaluated by their fellow Students; their
feedback can assist in their overall comprehension of the material.
Students who have an Assessment assigned to them can access them in appropriate Course
Content area. The Submission and Evaluation date ranges are visible under the Assessment
listing. In addition to submitting answers directly on the question page, Students can also submit
a local file or copy an item from Content Management to support their answer.
Follow these steps
To complete an Assessment:
1.
Click the >>View/Complete Assessment link to begin the Assessment.
2.
Click a question link.
3.
Type a response in the Response Text Editor.
Note: Beneath the Text Editor there is an option to save this response as a
Reusable Object. If selected, the response will be available to Content
Management Users. The Content Management must be installed to use this
option. For more information on Reusable Objects, see the Content
Management User's Guide.
4.
Click Browse… to Attach local file.
OR
Click Browse… to Copy file from Content Management.
Note: Only one file is attached to an Assessment. If a second file is attached
the first one is deleted. To attach multiple files, use the Text Editor.
5.
Type a Name of Link to File to give a name to the attachment link.
6.
Click Submit.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Repeat the preceding steps as necessary until all of the questions have been answered.
9.
Click OK when the Assessment is complete.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Evaluating an Assessment
Evaluating an Assessment allows Students to provide their peers valuable feedback on the
answers they have submitted. This feedback can provide improved comprehension of the
material.
Users can access the Assessment using the same link they used to complete it and begin the
evaluation. The Evaluation Overview page lists the number of submissions the Student needs to
evaluate (including their own), with the Evaluators own name at the top of the list.
If Anonymous evaluations are enabled, the evaluator does not see the name of the Student
whose Assessment they are evaluating.
Warning: Do not enroll or un-enroll Students after the evaluation Start Date.
Note: Tests can only be evaluated during the evaluation period designated during
the Assessment creation.
Follow these steps
To evaluate an Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click the >>View/Complete Assessment link to begin the evaluation.
2.
Click the appropriate Evaluator name link.
3.
Review the text in the Submission field.
4.
Type the number of points to award that submission in the Points possible field.
5.
Type text in the Feedback field (if requested).
6.
Click the Allocate Points check box.
7.
Click Save and Next to move to the next criteria.
8.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Managing an Assessment
The Self and Peer Assessment Building Block provides many tools to assist the management of
an Assessment. These include three Adaptive Release options, Review Status, Statistics
Tracking and Metadata.
Follow these steps
To manage an Assessment:
1.
Click Manage next to the appropriate Assessment.
2.
Click any of the following links:
Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release: Advanced
Review Status
Adaptive Release and Review Status: User Progress
Statistics Tracking
Metadata
Adaptive Release
Use the Adaptive Release tool to create and edit basic Adaptive Release rules for this
Assessment. To create an Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Set the Display After and Display Until dates using the check boxes and date and time
fields.
2.
Type the username of any specific user to assign Membership to this Assessment in the
Username field.
3.
Click Browse… to select specific users.
4.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to assign Membership to specific Course Groups.
5.
Use the Select a Grade Center Column drop-down list to assign a Grade Center column
for this Assessment.
6.
clicke of the Select Condition radio buttons:
User has at least one attempt for this item.
Choose between Score Less than or equal to, Greater than or equal to, or
Equal to and then enter a number in the field.
Define a scoring range by entering numbers in the fields after Score
Between.
7.
Click Browse… and select the Assessment to enable Review Status. Click the Clear
button to delete the previous entry.
8.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adaptive Release: Advanced
Use the Adaptive Release: Advanced tool to create and edit rules that determine the visibility of
this Assessment to users. See the Blackboard Content Management User's Guide for more
information on the use of Advanced Adaptive Release rules.
Review Status
Use the Review Status tool to provide users the ability to mark the Assessment as Reviewed. To
enable Review Status:
1.
Click the Enable radio button.
2.
Click Submit.
Adaptive Release and Review Status: User Progress
Use the User Progress tool to view the availability and Review Status of this Assessment for all
users. To view this information:
1.
Click Adaptive Release and Review Status: User Progress.
2.
View the information described in the following table:
3.
Function
Description
Rule
Click the Rule link to display the Criteria information for the
Adaptive Release rule that governs this Assessment.
Last Name
Displays the last name of the user.
First Name
Displays the first name of the user.
Username
Displays the username.
Course Role
Displays the Course Role of the user.
Visibility
Displays an icon indicating whether or not the Assessment is visible
to the user.
Navigation
Links
Click the number links, Next, or Previous to navigate through the
user information.
Click OK when finished.
Statistics Tracking
Use the Statistics Tracking tool to enable or disable tracking and to view system tracking
information for this Assessment.
To enable or disable tracking:
1.
Click Enable/Disable Tracking.
2.
Click the Enable or Disable radio button.
3.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To view system tracking statistics:
1.
Click View Statistics.
2.
Use the Start Date and End Date check boxes and the date and time fields to define the
Time Period for the statistics report.
3.
Click the All Users radio button to include the statistics for all users.
OR
4.
Click the Selected Users radio button and select the statistics of a specific student or
students by using holding down the CTRL key and clicking each username with the
mouse.
5.
Click Submit.
Metadata
Use the Metadata tool to apply metadata information for this Assessment. See the Content
Management User's Guide for information on using Metadata.
To view and apply Metadata to this Assessment:
1.
Click Metadata.
2.
Click Edit next to the appropriate Metadata.
3.
Type the appropriate information in the appropriate fields.
4.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Rules for Editing Tests
Once an Assessment has been created, it is edited in a number of ways. However, there are
specific rules that govern what is edited and when that modification can take place.
These rules are presented to help prevent problems such as this: Setting the dates incorrectly
and rendering the assessment unusable. This occurs when the assessment is saved with the
Submission End Date in the past or the Submission Start and End Dates matching each other. In
this case, the only remedy is to export the assessment, import it, fix the dates, and then delete
the original assessment. All submissions for the original are lost in this process.
Assessment Timeline
An Assessment is defined by the following timeline:
Timeline
Period
Description
Create &
Deploy
Before any participant has submitted anything, even after the submission
start date.
Submit
After the submission start date and something has been submitted and
before the submission end date.
Complete
After the submission end date but before the evaluation start date.
Evaluate
After the evaluation start date and before the evaluation end date.
Results
After the evaluation end date.
Assessment Rules
The rules that govern the modification of Assessment elements are defined in the following table.
These changes are made without system warnings, except when noted.
Timeline
Period
W h a t C a n b e E d i t e d ( S ys t e m
Warning)
Create &
Deploy
Any element can be changed with no restrictions or warnings.
Submit
Name
Instructions (Users who have
already submitted this assessment
might not come back to see
instructions changes.)
Submission End Date
Evaluation Start/End Date
Anonymous Evaluation
Self Evaluation
# of Peers
Available Flag
Tracking
Date Restrictions
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
What Cannot Be Modified
Delete Questions
Order of Questions
Submission Start Date
Timeline
Period
W h a t C a n b e E d i t e d ( S ys t e m
Warning)
What Cannot Be Modified
Add Questions (Users who have
already submitted this assessment
might not come back to see question
changes.)
Add/Edit/Delete/Re-order Criteria
Edit Question text (Users who have
already submitted this assessment
might not come back to see question
changes.)
Edit Model Response
Complete
Name
Instructions (The submission
process for this assessment has
ended.)
Add/Edit/Delete/Reorder Questions
Submission Start Date
Evaluation Start/End Date
Anonymous Evaluation
Self Evaluation
# of Peers
Available Flag
Tracking
Date Restrictions
Add/Edit/Delete/Re-order Criteria
Edit Model Response
Evaluate
Name
Instructions (The submission
process for this assessment has
ended.)
Evaluation End Date
Available Flag
Tracking
Date Restrictions
Add Criteria (Users who have
already completed the evaluation
might not come back to see criteria
changes.)
Edit Criteria text (Users who have
already completed the evaluation
might not come back to see criteria
changes.)
# of peers
Add/Edit/Delete/Reorder Questions
Anonymous Evaluation
Delete/Re-order Criteria
Edit Criteria Points
Possible, Assign Points
Evaluation Start Date
Self Evaluation
Submission End Date
Submission Start Date
Edit Criteria Allow feedback to
user(Users who have already
completed the evaluation might not
come back to see criteria changes.)
Edit Model Response (Users who
have already completed the
evaluation might not come back to
see criteria changes.)
Results
Name
Instructions (The submission
process for this assessment has
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
# of Peers
Add Criteria
Allow Feedback
Timeline
Period
W h a t C a n b e E d i t e d ( S ys t e m
Warning)
ended.)
Evaluation End Date
Available Flag
Tracking
Date Restrictions
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
What Cannot Be Modified
Anonymous Evaluation
Delete/Re-order Criteria
Edit Criteria
Edit Criteria Points
Possible, Assign Points
Edit Criteria text
Edit Model Response
Evaluation Start Date
Add/Edit/Delete/Reorder questions
Self Evaluation
Submission End Date
Submission Start Date
Editing an Assessment
From the Edit Assessment page, Instructors can access the Assessment Canvas to change
Questions or Criteria, change the Properties of an Assessment or Export it for later use. See
Rules for Editing Tests for detailed information on what can and cannot be edited.
Follow these steps
To edit an Assessment:
1.
Click Edit next to the appropriate Assessment.
2.
Click any of the following links:
Assessment Canvas
Properties
Export Assessment
Assessment Canvas
Instructors can use the Assessment Canvas to add Questions and Criteria and reorder them. See
Adding a Question to an Assessment for information on adding Questions. See Adding Criteria to
a Question for information on adding Criteria.
To reorder Questions:
1.
Click the number drop down list next to the appropriate Question and select a new
number for that Question. The Questions are reordered automatically.
2.
Click OK when finished.
To reorder Criteria:
1.
Click Criteria next to the appropriate Question.
2.
Click the number drop down list next to the appropriate Criteria and select a new number
for the Criteria. The Criteria are reordered automatically.
3.
Click OK when finished.
Properties
Clicking the Properties link displays the Properties page for the Assessment. See Creating a New
Assessment for details on the fields and functions of the Properties page.
Note: Fields that cannot be edited are grayed out.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note: The Update Grade Center Column Name check box appears beside the
Assessment Name if the user has permission to update the Grade Center. If this is
checked and a change is made to the Assessment Name then the name of the
Grade Center column is also changed. If this is not checked, or if the user does not
have Grade Center permissions, then the name of the Assessment can still be
changed but the change is not reflected in the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Monitoring the Submissions
Assessment Submissions are monitored and reviewed during the Assessment process.
Submissions are downloaded as a collection or on an individual basis so they can be reviewed
later. The Submissions are bundled in a .zip file that contains an HTML file for each Submission.
The Submissions are opened and read in any web browser.
Follow these steps
To monitor the submissions for an Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Control Panel menu item within the Course.
2.
Click the Self and Peer Assessment link under Course Tools.
3.
Click the name of the appropriate Assessment.
4.
Click Submissions.
Features and Functions
The Submissions page contains the following features and functions:
Feature
Description
Assessment
Displays the name of the Assessment.
Submission
Dates
Displays the submission date range.
Evaluation Dates
Displays the evaluation date range.
Download All
Click to download all submissions as a .zip file.
Filter by:
Select an option to filter the submission list and click Go to apply the
filter.
Completed
Displays an icon showing whether or not a submission is complete.
Name
Displays the name of the Student.
Username
Displays the username of the Student.
Question
Responses
Displays the number of question responses that have been recorded so
far and the total number of questions.
Submission
View
Click to view a specific submission.
Download
Click to download a specific submission as a .zip file.
Submission Page
The Submission page is displayed by clicking View next to a Submission on the Submissions
page. The page contains the following features:
Feature
Description
Assessment Name
Displays the name of the Assessment.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Feature
Description
Questions
Displays the number of Questions in this Assessment.
Instructions
Displays the Instructions for this Assessment.
Evaluations to Complete
Displays the number of Evaluations that need to be completed.
Submission End Date
Displays the Submission End Date.
Last Submitted Date
Displays the date that the last Submission was received.
Question 1:
Displays the Question text.
Submission
Displays the Submission text for the Question.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Monitoring the Evaluations
Assessment Evaluations are monitored and reviewed during the Assessment process.
Evaluations are downloaded as a collection or on an individual basis so they can be reviewed
later. The Evaluations are bundled in a .zip file that contains an HTML file for each Evaluation.
The Evaluations are opened and read in any web browser.
Follow these steps
To monitor the evaluations for an Assessment, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Control Panel menu item within the Course.
2.
Click the Self and Peer Assessment link under Course Tools.
3.
Click the name of the appropriate Assessment.
4.
Click Evaluations.
Features and Functions
The Evaluations page contains the following features and functions:
Feature
Description
Assessment
Displays the name of the Assessment.
Submission Dates
Displays the submission date range.
Evaluation Dates
Displays the evaluation date range.
Download All
ClicktodownloadallevaluationsasatabdelimitedfileCSV
Filter by:
Select an option to filter the submission list and click Go to apply the
filter.
Completed
Displays an icon showing whether or not an evaluation is complete.
Evaluator:
Displays the name of the Evaluator.
Evaluator
Username
Displays the username of the Evaluator.
Submissions
Evaluated
Displays the names of Students whose submissions have been
assigned to this Evaluator.
Percentages
Displays the points given to this Student in a percentage format.
Points
Displays the points allocated by a specific Evaluator.
Average
Displays the average of all the percentages that have been submitted.
Evaluated Self
Displays an icon showing whether or not a self-evaluation has been
submitted.
Evaluation
View
Click to view a specific Evaluation.
Download
Click to download a specific evaluation as a .zip file.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
View Evaluation
The View Evaluation page is displayed by clicking View next to an Evaluation on the Evaluations
page. The page contains the following features:
Feature
Description
Assessment Name
Displays the name of the Assessment.
Questions
Displays the number of Questions for this Assessment.
Instructions
Displays the Instructions for this Assessment.
Evaluations to
Complete
Displays the number of Evaluations that need to be completed.
Evaluation End Date
Displays the Evaluation End Date.
Current Time
Displays the time this page was accessed.
Evaluator Header
Displays the Name of the Evaluator.
Submission:
Displays the Name of a Submitter (their username appears in
parentheses).
Criteria
Question Header
Displays the Question text.
Points Allocated
Displays the number of points allocated for this criteria.
Points Possible
Displays the number of points that are possible for the criteria.
Feedback to User
Displays any Feedback text that the Submitter has entered.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Viewing the Results
Assessment Results are monitored and reviewed once the submission phase has ended. Results
are downloaded as a collection or on an individual basis.
Follow these steps
To monitor the results for an assessment:
1.
Click the Control Panel menu item within the course.
2.
Click the Self and Peer Assessment link under Course Tools.
3.
Click the name of the appropriate assessment.
4.
Click Results.
Features and Functions
The Results page contains the following features and functions.
Feature
Description
Assessment
Displays the name of the assessment.
Submission End Date
Displays the submission end date.
Evaluation End Date
Displays the evaluation end date.
Download
Click to download all evaluations as a tab-delimited file
(.CSV).
Update column total in
GradeCenter when updating
grades
Check this box to update the Grade Center with the results
from this assessment.
Send to Grade Center
Click to send the Results to the Grade Center.
Evaluated
Displays an icon showing whether or not a user has
completed an evaluation.
Name
Displays the name of the Student.
Username
Displays the username of the Student.
Average Percentage
Displays the average of all points the Evaluators of this
student gave for the student's submission as a percentage
of total points possible.
Average Score
Displays the average of all points the Evaluators of this
student gave for the student's submission.
Results Sent
Indicates whether or not the results for this Student have
been sent to the Grade Center.
Evaluated Self
Displays an icon showing whether or not a self-evaluation
has been submitted.
Peer Markers
Displays how many peers have completed the evaluation
of this Student.
View
Click to view a specific submission.
Download
Click to download a specific submission as a .ZIP file.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Send Email
Instructors can send email to individuals who participate in the Course from the Send Email page.
Emails are sent to individual users or to groups of users within the Course, such as all Teaching
Assistants. A copy of this email is sent to the sender by default.
Instructors cannot send email to others using the Internet with the Send Email function.
Find this Page
Click Send Email in theCourse Tools are of the Control Panel to open the Send E-mail page.
How to Send Email
1.
clicke of the following options listed on the Send email page:
Function
Description
All Users
Sends email to all users in a specified Course.
All Student Users
Sends an email to all Students in the Course.
All Groups
Sends email to all of the groups in a specified Course.
All Teaching Assistants
Sends email to all of the Teaching Assistants in the Course.
All Instructors
Sends email to all of the Instructors in the Course.
All Observers
Sends email to all of the Observers for a specified Course
Select Users
Sends email to a single user or select users in the Course.
Select Groups
Send email to a single group or select groups in the Course.
Single / Select
Observers
Send email to a single Observer or select Observers in the
Course.
2.
Type a Subject.
3.
Type a Message.
4.
Click Attach a file to attach a file to the email.
5.
Click Submit.
Tasks
The Tasks page organizes projects or activities (referred to as tasks) by defining task priority and
tracking task status. A user can create tasks and post them to the Tasks page. Each user can
post personal tasks to their page. Instructors can post tasks to users participating in their
Courses, and System Administrators can post tasks to all users‘ Tasks pages. Task information is
arranged in columns that display the priority, task name, status, and due date.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tasks are also available as a Course Group Tool for tasks that are specific to a smaller group
within a Course.
Tasks can be accessed from the Control Panel under Course Tools.
The following are functions that can be completed from the Tasks page.
Create a Course Task
Edit a Course Task
Delete a Course Task
Change the status of a Course Task
Create or Edit Course Tasks
Tasks may be created or edited by accessing the Create Course Task page or Edit Course
Task page. The fields on the Create Course Task page and Edit Course Task page are the
same. The Create Course Task page opens with empty fields where as the Edit Course Task
page opens with a task already populated.
How to Create a Course Task
1.
Click Tasks in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Course Task from the Tasks page.
3.
Type the task information in the appropriate fields.
4.
Click Submit.
How to Edit a Course Task
1.
Click Tasks in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Edit from the contextual menu for the appropriate task.
4.
Edit the task information.
5.
Click Submit.
How to Delete a Course Task
1.
Click Tasks in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Select Delete from the contextual menu for the appropriate task.
4.
Click OK to confirm.
How to Change the Status of a Course Task
Tasks have three statuses that can be changed at any time to reflect progress. Tasks are Not
Started, In Progress, or Completed.
1.
Click Tasks in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Status.
4.
Select a new status from the list.
The table below details the fields on the Create Course Task or Edit Course Task page.
Field
Description
Task Information
Task Name
Type the title of the task.
Description
Type a description of the task.
Due Date
Select the date the task is due from the drop-down list or click the icon to
select a date from the calendar interface.
Task Options
Priority
Select a priority. The options are:
Low (task appears with a blue arrow pointed down)
Normal
High (task appears with a red arrow pointed up)
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Instructors use Tests and Surveys to assess knowledge, measure progress, and gather
information from Students.
Tests are created to check the knowledge and skill level of users enrolled in the Course. The
Instructor can assign point values to each question on exams or quizzes. When a Student
completes a Test it is automatically graded and the results are recorded in the Grade Center.
Questions that require manual grading are marked in the Grade Center and can be graded later.
The following topics are available regarding Tests:
About Tests
Creating or Editing a Test
Test Options
Test Canvas
Importing Tests
Deploying Tests
About Test Status
Surveys are useful for polling, evaluations, and random checks of knowledge. They function in
the same way as Tests and offer most of the same options. Survey questions are not assigned a
point value and are not graded.
The following topics are available regarding Surveys:
Survey Manager
Survey Canvas
Creating or Editing a Survey
Importing a Survey
Deploying a Survey
About Survey Status
Questions are grouped in Pools to be used in other tests and surveys. The Find Questions page
allows Instructors to search for and add questions to tests and surveys.
The following topics are available regarding Pools:
Pool Manager
Creating or Editing Pools
Importing a Pool
The following topics are available regarding managing your questions.
Reusing Questions
Finding Questions
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating and Editing a Random Block
Creating Question Sets
About Question Settings
About Question Metadata
Uploading Questions
The following topics are available about the types of questions you can add to your Tests or
Surveys.
Calculated Formula Questions
Calculated Numeric Answer Questions
Either/ Or Questions
Essay Questions
File Response Questions
Fill in Multiple Blanks Questions
Fill in the Blank Questions
Hot Spot Questions
Jumbled Sentence Questions
Matching Questions
Multiple Answer Questions
Multiple Choice Questions
Opinion Scale/ Likert Questions
Ordering Questions
Quiz Bowl Questions
Short Answer Questions
True/ False Questions
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Tests
Instructors use Tests to test Student knowledge, measure Student progress, and gather
information from Students.
Before You Begin
When creating a Test there are a number of things the Instructor should consider:
Are special instructions needed for this Test?
How many questions?
What type of questions?
What is the point value associated with each question?
Will partial credit be acceptable for some or all questions?
Are some questions very difficult and may count as extra credit?
Creating Tests and Surveys
Tests and Surveys can be created by authoring new questions, using the various built-in question
types, reusing existing questions from tests and pools, uploading questions, or importing pools.
Deploying Tests and Surveys
Once Tests and Surveys are created, they are deployed by adding them to a Content Area and
then making them available to students. See Deploying Tests and Surveys for more information.
Grading Tests
Grading Tests within Blackboard is automated, but subjective test questions, such as Essays,
must be graded manually. There are a number of options within the Grade Center that provide
flexibility in grading tests:
Multiple attempts allow an Instructor to customize grading with Test Creation settings.
The final grade for an assessment can be the first attempt, last attempt, or an average of
all attempts.
The Clear Attempts option allows Instructors to erase a grade from the Grade Center.
Attempts can be cleared one at a time or all at once. For example, if there is a technical
failure at the Institution, all attempts for the Assessment taken on that date may be
deleted.
The Override option allows the Instructor to enter a grade that replaces the existing
grade in the Grade Center. For example, in the case of extenuating circumstances, the
Instructor could use Override to make a Student's grade higher or lower. This score is
used when calculating the grade.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Test and Survey Options
Test and Survey Options allow the Instructor to edit the name and description of a Test or Survey,
(commonly referred to as Tests). Options control the availability, presentation, and feedback for
an assessment. These options are only available once an assessment is added to a Content
Area. Tests added to a Content Area are said to be deployed.
After a Test or Survey is deployed, the Test Options or Survey Options page appears. To edit an
existing assessment, select Edit the Test Options or Edit the Survey Options from the
contextual menu.
Edit Test or Survey Availability
Test and Survey availability is set after the assessment is added to a Content Area. Availability is
managed on the options page. When an assessment is unavailable, it is deployed to a Content
Area but a link does not appear to Students. Unavailable Tests are seen when the Edit Mode is
ON.
The following are descriptions of the Test and Survey Availability options:
Option
Description
Make the Link
Available
Select Yes to make a link to the Assessment appear to Students. If
this option is set to No, it will not appear to Students. Instructors may
make the link available, then use the Display After and Display Until
fields to limit the amount of time the link appears.
Add a New
Announcement for
this Test/Survey
Select Yes to create an Announcement for the Test or Survey. The
Announcement will include the date and state "an Assessment has
been made available in [Course area that includes the link to the
Assessment]". This Announcement will appear in the Course
Announcements.
Multiple Attempts
This option allows Students to take the assessment multiple times.
The status of multiple attempts is displayed to Students at the top of
the assessment. Select Allow Unlimited Attempts for Students to
take the assessment as many times as they wish. Select Number of
Attempts and enter a numeral to indicate a specific number of
attempts that is allowed.
Force Completion
Students must complete the assessment the first time it is launched if
Force Completion is selected. Students may not exit the assessment
and continue working on it at a later date. The Save button is
available for Students to save the assessment as they work through
it, but they may not exit and re-enter the Assessment.
If the Force Completion option is enabled, it is noted and explained to
Students at the top of the assessment.
If Force Completion is not enabled, Students may save their progress
and complete the assessment at another time.
Set Timer
Select this check box to set a time limit for finishing the assessment.
If this option is selected, enter the amount of time to allow for the
Test or Survey in the hours and minutes boxes. The time elapsed is
displayed to the Student during the assessment. A one-minute
warning is also displayed as Students approach the time limit.
Display After
Select the date and time when the Test or Survey will become
available to Students. This field is optional; the Instructor may control
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Option
Description
availability through the Make the Link Available option without
setting specific dates.
Display Until
Select the date and time the Test will be made unavailable to
Students. This field may be left blank.
Password
Select this check box to require a password for Students to access
the assessment. If this check box is selected, enter a password in the
field below. Passwords cannot be longer than 15 characters.
Passwords are case sensitive.
Unavailable Tests
There is a difference between unavailable Tests and deleted Tests. Deleted Tests have been
deleted from the Course. Unavailable Tests are deployed to a Content Area but a link does not
appear to Students. Instructors can access the assessment when Edit Mode is ON and through
the Control Panel under Course Tools > Tests, Surveys, and Pools.
Assessment availability is managed on the Test Options page. Assessment availability is limited
to a specific time period by setting the Display After and Display Until fields. The availability can
also be open ended by setting only a start date or only an end date. If the link to an assessment
is available, but neither date is set, the assessment is immediately and always available.
Edit Self-Assessment Options
The following are descriptions of the Self-Assessment options:
Option
Description
Include this Test in Grade
Center Score
Calculations
Select this option to include this test in Grade Center
calculations. If the test is not included, the score will not affect
any Grade Center calculations.
Hide Results for this Test
Completely from
Instructor and the Grade
Center
Select this option to hide this test score from the Instructor and
in the Grade Center. If selected, this item behaves as a survey.
The display in the Grade Center will read Complete /
Incomplete and N/A or zero appears on the grade details
pages.
Edit Test Feedback
When a Test is deployed, four options for Test Feedback appear on the Test Options page. The
Test feedback options determine the type of results users receive after a Test is submitted. One
or more options may be selected.
Feedback Mode
Description
Score
Present the final score to Students.
Submitted Answers
Present the Student‘s answers.
Correct answers
Present the correct answers to the questions.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Feedback Mode
Description
Feedback
Present the question feedback to the Student.
Edit Survey Feedback
When a Survey is deployed, two feedback options appear on the Survey Options page. The
Survey feedback options determine they type of results users receive after a Survey is submitted.
One or both options may be selected.
Feedback Mode
Description
Status
Students see whether the Survey is complete or incomplete.
Submitted Answers
Students see the answers they submitted.
Edit Test Presentation
There are a number of options for presenting questions on Tests and Surveys. The following are
descriptions of each option:
Option
Description
All at Once
Present the entire assessment on one screen. Students scroll through all
the questions and can move up and down from question to question. If this
is selected, Prohibit Backtracking cannot be selected.
One at a Time
Displays one question at a time. The screen includes navigation tools to
move between questions. The Submit button will only appear on the last
page of the assessment. Prohibit Backtracking may be selected.
Randomize Questions may also be selected.
Prohibit
Backtracking
Prevents Students from going back to questions they have already
answered. If backtracking is prohibited, questions will be presented one at
a time and the buttons <<, <, or >> do not appear to Students during the
assessment. These buttons will appear if backtracking is not prohibited.
Randomize
Questions
Display questions in a random order each time the Assessment is taken.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Test and Survey Canvas
A Test or Survey's Canvas page allows Instructors to edit the name and instructions, add and edit
questions, and change question settings. Instructors can use the check boxes to select any or all
questions and then delete them or change the points for them.
With the exception of minor text changes, such as correcting a typographical error, Tests or
Surveys should not be edited if they have already been deployed.
Instructors can create a Random Block, which is a randomly distributed number of questions,
from the Test Canvas. The Instructor determines the questions, the number to display, the order,
and the points per question. See Creating and Editing a Random Block for more information.
Random Blocks are not available in Surveys.
How to Open the Canvas Page for a New Test or Survey
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Tests or Surveys.
3.
Click Build Test.
4.
Complete the Information page and clickSubmit.
How to Open the Canvas page for an Existing Test or Survey
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Tests or Surveys.
3.
Click Edit in the Contextual Menu for an existing Test or Survey.
Next Steps
Here are the tasks that are performed on the Canvas page:
To . . .
Click . . .
add a new question
the Create Question drop-down list in the and select a type of
question.
change the Default
Point Value for
questions in the Test
Question Settings and enter a number in the Default point value
field.
This option is not available for Surveys.
change the name,
description, or
instructions for the Test
or Survey
Edit from the contextual menu next to the first header.
change the order of the
questions
the double arrow upper left corner of the question and drag and
drop the question to the appropriate position.
change the settings for
this Test
Question Settings. The Test Question Settings page appears.
Question Settings enable the Instructor to adjust the default point
value, options for question feedback and the inclusion of images.
copy a question
Copyin the contextual menu of the question header. The
Create/Edit Multiple Choice Question page is displayed, where
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
Click . . .
changes are made to the copied question. Copied questions retain
all of the settings of the original question.
edit a question
Edit in the contextual menu of the question header.
Instructors can edit linked questions from the Canvas. Changes
made to linked question are reflected everywhere there is a link to
that question. Tests that are in progress will not display the
changes to a linked question. See Reusing Questions for more
information.
delete a question
Remove in the contextual menu of the question header. A
confirmation box appears. Removing a question is irreversible.
reuse a question from
another Test or Survey
the Reuse Question drop-down list and select Find Questions.
See About Find Questions for more information.
create a Random Block
the Reuse Question drop-down list and select Create Random
Block. See Creating and Editing a Random Block for more
information.
This option is not available for Surveys.
preview a question in
the Random Block
the preview button next to the question text. The question appears
in a separate window.
This option is not available for Surveys.
show or hide the
questions within the
Random Block
the Questions in the Block link.
This option is not available for Surveys.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating and Editing a Test or Survey
This topic describes how to build and edit a Test or Survey. Once a Test or Survey is built,
questions are created or added from existing questions from Tests, Surveys, and Pools.
About the Warning Page
A warning page appears if any students are in the process of taking the Test or have already
taken the Test when Edit is selected. Certain areas of the Test will not be available to edit if the
Test has already been taken by students.
If the Instructor edits an Test after a Student has submitted it, the Student will view the new,
edited Test when they view their grade and feedback. They will not view their original Test
attempt.
How to Build a Test or Survey and Create New Questions
1.
Click Tests or Surveys on the Tests, Surveys, and Pools area on the Control Panel.
2.
Point to Build Content.
3.
Type a name, description, instructions and click Submit.
4.
Select a question type from the Create Question drop-down button on the Test Canvas.
5.
Type the necessary information to create a question and click Submit.
6.
On the Test Canvas, type the Point Value for the question.
7.
Repeat Step 4 through Step 6 until finished adding questions.
8.
Click Submit.
How to Edit an Existing Test or Survey
1.
Click Tests or Surveyson the Tests, Surveys, and Pools area on the Control Panel.
2.
Point to the Action Link for the Test or Survey to edit.
3.
Click Edit.
4.
Make changes to the Test or Survey.
5.
Click OK.
Next Steps
Reusing Questions
Deploying Tests and Surveys
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Importing Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Instructors may import Tests, Surveys, and Pools. This is an effective way to share Tests,
Surveys, or Pools with other Instructors. Tests, Surveys, and Pools are exported from the system
and then imported by another Instructor for use in their Course. Tests, Surveys, and Pools are
exported from Blackboard Learn and imported as .ZIP packages.
How to Import a Test, Survey, or Pool
1.
Click Tests, Surveys, and Pools from Course Tools.
2.
Click Tests, Surveys, or Pools.
3.
Click Import.
4.
Locate the appropriate file by clicking Browse My Computer or Browse Course Files.
5.
Click Submit.
Troubleshooting
Only Test, Survey, and Pool packages exported from Blackboard Learn may be imported. Tests
and Surveys created by others, at other institutions, or created with older versions of Blackboard
Learn are imported as long as they are in the proper format. See Uploading Questions for
information on formatting the different types of questions that make up Tests, Surveys, and Pools.
Next Steps
Creating or Editing a Test or Survey
Deploying Tests and Surveys
Editing Pools
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Deploying Tests and Surveys
Once a Test or a Survey has been created, the next step is to deploy it to users. This is a two
step process: adding the Test or Survey to a Content area and then making it available.
About Unavailable Tests
There is a difference between unavailable Tests and deleted Tests. Deleted Tests have been
deleted from the Course. Unavailable Tests are added to a Content Area but a link does not
appear to Students. Instructors can access the assessment when Edit Mode is ON and through
the Control Panel under Course Tools > Tests, Surveys, and Pools.
Assessment availability is managed on the Test Options page. Assessment availability is limited
to a specific time period by setting the Display After and Display Until fields. The availability can
also be open ended by setting only a start date or only an end date. If the link to an assessment
is available, but neither date is set, the assessment is immediately and always available.
Before You Begin
Create the Test or Survey. Create new questions or use Find Questions to copy or link existing
questions to the Test or Survey.
How to Add a Test or Survey to a Content Area
1.
Navigate to a Content area of the Course.
2.
Point to the Create Assessment drop-down list and select Test or Survey.
3.
Select a Test or Survey from the Add Test or Add Survey list.
4.
Click Submit. The Test Options page appears.
How to Make a Test or Survey Available
Test and Survey availability is set after the assessment is added to a Content Area. Availability is
managed on the Test Options page.
1.
On the Test Options page, clickYes to Make the Link Available to Users. If this option is
set to No, it will not appear to Students. Instructors may make the link available, then use
the Display After and Display Until fields to limit the amount of time the link appears.
2.
Set the following options for the Test:
Option
Function
Add a New
Announcement for
this Test or Survey
The Announcement will include the date and state "an
Assessment has been made available in [Course area that
includes the link to the Assessment]". This Announcement will
appear in the Course Announcements.
Multiple Attempts
Click the checkbox and select from the following options:
Select Allow Unlimited Attempts for Students to take the
assessment as many times as they wish.
Select Number of Attempts and enter a number to
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Option
Function
Force Completion
3.
indicate a specific number of attempts that is allowed.
Click the Force Completion check box to force users to
complete the Test or Survey once it has been
launched.Students may not exit the assessment and continue
working on it at a later date. The Save button is available for
Students to save the assessment as they work through it, but
they may not exit and re-enter the Assessment.
Set Timer
Click the Set Timer check box to set a time limit for completing
the Test or Survey.
Display After and
Display Until
Use the Display After and Display Until date and time fields to
define the availability of the Test or Survey. Click both the
Display After and Display Until check boxes in order to enable
the date and time selections.
Password
Click the Password check box to require a password to access
the Test or Survey.
Click Submit.
How to Control the Presentation of a Test or Survey
The remaining options control the presentation and feedback for an assessment.
Option
Function
Include this Test in
Grade Center Score
Calculations
Test results can be used in Grade Center calculations by selecting
this option. Test scores do not need to be revealed to Students to be
used in Grade Center calculation. Self-Assessment Tests are
generally not included in Grade Center calculations.
If the test is not included, the score will not affect any Grade Center
calculations. This Test is also excluded from weighting.
Hide Results for this
Test Completely
from Instructor and
Grade Center
If selected, this Test behaves as a Survey. The display in the Grade
Center will read Complete / Incomplete and N/A or zero appears on
the Grade Details page. The Instructor will not be able to see any
student grades, view answers, aggregate results, or download result
details. To protect student privacy, this choice cannot be reversed
later without deleting all attempts.
This is only available for Tests.
Test or Survey
Feedback
Determine the kind of Feedback that is displayed upon completion:
Score - presents the final score to Students. This is only
available for Tests.
Status - presents the completion status to Students.
Submitted Answers - presents the Student‘s answers.
Correct Answers - presents the correct answers to the
questions. This is only available for Tests.
Feedback - presents the question feedback to the Student. This
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Option
Function
is only available for Tests.
All at Once - Present the entire assessment on one screen.
Students scroll through all the questions and can move up and
down from question to question. If this is selected, Prohibit
Backtracking cannot be selected.
OR
One at a Time - Displays one question at a time. The screen
includes navigation tools to move between questions. The Submit
button will only appear on the last page of the assessment. Prohibit
Backtracking and Randomize Questions may be selected.
Presentation Mode
Prohibit
Backtracking
Click the check box to prevent Users from going back to questions
they have already answered. If backtracking is prohibited, questions
will be presented one at a time and the buttons <<, <, or >> do not
appear to Users during the Test or Survey.
Randomize
Questions
Click to display questions in a random order each time the Test or
Survey is taken.
Next Steps
About Test/Survey Status
Entering Grades
Changing Grades
Deleting and Reverting Grades
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Test and Survey Status
The Test/Survey Status Indicator is a tool to provide users with a quick up-to-date look at their
progress (complete or incomplete questions) in an assessment at all times.
The Save Answer button next to each question provides a visual reminder to Students to save
their work periodically.
Completion status of assessment questions is displayed at the top of the page when a Student is
taking an assessment. The status of which questions have been answered is displayed at the top
of the page, just below the Instructions box. The Test/Survey Status indicator remains at the top
of the page while the user scrolls down through the assessment.
When the user answers a question and moves on to the next question in a question-by-question
assessment, the status box is updated to show that the previous question was answered. If the
user does not answer a question and moves on to the next question, the status box shows that
the previous question was not answered. The user can navigate between questions by clicking on
the question number in the status indicator. This is applicable only to Tests deployed all at once
or question by question where backtracking is permitted.
While taking an all-at-once assessment, the user will be able to use a Save button to the right of
each question to save this specific question without scrolling to the bottom of the page to save.
Saving either a single question or all of the questions that have been answered (with the Save
button at the bottom of the page) changes the status indicator to show which questions have
been completed.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Surveys
The Survey Manager lists all existing surveys, where they are deployed, and the date they were
last edited. From this page, surveys are built, edited, imported, exported, copied, and deleted.
Surveys differ from Tests in the following ways:
Questions on Surveys cannot be assigned points
Surveys cannot include Random Blocks of questions
Feedback cannot be included with questions
Surveys cannot be graded
Survey questions cannot be categorized
Questions that are uploaded may not include correct and incorrect answers.
How to Build a Survey
1.
Click Tests, Surveys, and Pools from Course Tools.
2.
Click Surveys.
3.
Click Build Survey. The Survey Information page appears.
How to Import a Survey
1.
Click Tests, Surveys, and Pools from Course Tools.
2.
Click Surveys.
3.
Click Import Survey. The Survey Import page appears. Surveys may be imported from a
local file or from Content Management. Surveys must be imported from files that were
exported from Blackboard Learn.
Contextual Menu Options
Option
Function
Edit
The Survey Canvas page appears.
Export
The Open Export file box appears. Surveys may be exported to the local computer
or to Content Management.
Copy
The Survey is automatically copied and appears in the list on the page. The copied
Survey has the same name as the original with a number added. Example:
(filename)(1).
Delete
A confirmation box appears. Removing a Survey is irreversible. This option does
not appear for tests that have been deployed.
Next Steps
Creating or Editing a Test or Survey
Deploying Tests and Surveys
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Pool Manager
The Pool Manager allows Instructors to store questions for repeated use.
The Pool Manager functions in the same way as the Tests page and offers similar options for
creating and managing Pools. The difference between Pools and Tests is that Tests are added to
Content areas for users to view and complete. Pools are question repositories. Pool questions
cannot be presented to Students unless they are included in a Test.
Pools also differ from Tests in the following ways:
Random Blocks cannot be added to Pools.
Pool questions do not have point values associated with them. When a Pool question
is added to a Test the Instructor can assign a point value.
Warning Page
A warning appears when Edit is selected for a Pool if any Students are in the process of taking a
Test or have already taken a Test that includes questions from that Pool. Certain areas of the
questions will not be available for modification if the Test has already been taken by Students.
When questions are selected from a Pool to be included in a Test links are created between the
Test and the Pool for those questions. Instructors should not make changes to Pool questions
that have been deployed in a Test once Students have begun taking the Test. If the Instructor
edits a Pool question after a Student has submitted a Test it was included on, the Student will
view the new, modified question when they view their grade and feedback. They will not view the
original question.
How to Build a Pool
1.
Click Tests, Surveys, and Pools from Course Tools.
2.
Click Pools.
3.
Click Build Pool. See About the Pool Canvas for more information.
How to Import a Pool
1.
Click Tests, Surveys, and Pools from Course Tools.
2.
Click Pools.
3.
Click Import Pool.
4.
Click Browse My Computer or Browse Course Files to locate the file.
5.
Click Submit. See Importing Tests, Surveys, and Pools for more information.
Contextual Menu Options
Option
Function
Edit
The Pool Canvas page appears.
Export
The Open Export file box appears. Pools may be exported to the local computer or
to Content Management.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Option
Function
Copy
The Pool is automatically copied and appears in the list on the page. The copied
Pool has the same name as the original with a number added. Example:
(filename)(1).
Delete
A confirmation box appears. Removing a Pool is irreversible. This option does not
appear for Pools that have questions present in deployed Tests or Surveys.
Next Steps
About the Pool Canvas
Importing Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Creating or Editing a Test or Survey
Creating or Editing a Random Block
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating and Editing Pools
The Pool Canvas page presents an inventory of questions. Instructors can edit the Pool name
and instructions, create or edit questions, and upload questions. Instructors can use the check
boxes to select any or all questions and then delete them or change the point values.
WhenInstructors are creating Pool questions that are intended for use in Surveys, correct
answers must be added during question creation. These answers will be ignored once the
question is added to a Survey. This function enables the questions to be used in Tests as well as
Surveys at a later time.
How to Build a Pool
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Pools.
3.
Click Build Pool.
4.
Complete the Pool Information page and select Submit.
5.
Add questions to the pool.
6.
Click OK when finished.
How to Edit Existing Pools
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Pools.
3.
Click Edit in the Contextual Menu for an existing Pool.
4.
Add or delete questions.
5.
Click OK when finished.
Next Steps
Here are the tasks that are performed on the Pool Canvas page:
To . . .
click . . .
create a new question
the Create Question drop-down list in the and select a type of
question.
change the Default
Point Value for
questions in the Pool
the appropriate field in the Default Points column and type a new
point value. Press Type or click the check mark icon.
change the name,
description, or
instructions for the
Pool
Edit from the contextual menu next to the first header.
change the order of
the questions
the double arrow in the upper left corner of the question and drag
and drop the question to the appropriate position.
change the settings for
this Pool
Question Settings. Question Settings enable the Instructor to
adjust the default point value, options for question feedback and the
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To . . .
click . . .
inclusion of images. See Question Settings for more information.
copy a question
Copyin the contextual menu of the question header. The
Create/Edit Multiple Choice Question page is displayed, where
changes are made to the copied question. Copied questions retain
all of the settings of the original question.
edit a question
Edit in the contextual menu of the question header.
Instructors can edit linked questions from the Pool Canvas.
Changes made to linked question are reflected everywhere there is
a link to that question. Tests that are in progress will not display the
changes to a linked question.
preview a question
Previewin the contextual menu of the question header. The
question appears in a separate window.
delete a question
Delete in the contextual menu of the question header. A
confirmation box appears. Removing a question is irreversible.
reuse a question
Find Questions. See Reusing Questions for more information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Find Questions
Instructors can use the Find Questions page to filter and select questions when adding individual
questions or a Random Block to a test. The page is comprised of the Active Filter and the
Shopping List. The Active Filter is a dynamic list that changes automatically as criteria are
selected or deselected. The Shopping List displays all of the selected questions in one place,
eliminating the need to scroll up and down long lists of questions.
How to Browse Criteria
1.
Point to Reuse Question and select Find Questions.
2.
Click the criteria links to display all the questions associated with that criteria.
3.
Select questions from the criteria.
4.
Click Submit.
As criteria are selected from the Browse Criteria section, the relevant questions are displayed in
the Active Filter. The selected criteria are displayed above the Active Filter as a reference. Use
the following criteria links to search for questions:
Pools - All the pools that the Instructor can access.
Tests - All the tests that the Instructor can access.
Question types - All of the questions that are created through the Test Canvas.
Categories - All of the categories that Instructors create.
Topics - All of the topics thatInstructors create.
Levels of Difficulty - All the Levels of Difficulty thatInstructors create.
Keywords - All the Keywords that Instructorscreate.
Questions that are selected through this process are displayed in the Shopping List at the bottom
of the page. Click Show List to view all the questions that have been selected. Click Hide List to
minimize the list. Questions are deleted from the Shopping List by clicking the red X link next to
the question. This action does not delete the question.
Next Steps
Creating and Editing a Test or a Survey
Finding Questions
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Reusing Questions
Instructors can reuse questions by using the Find Questions page, which contains every question
from all existing tests, surveys, and pools in the Course.
Copying and Linking to Questions
When using the Find Questions page, Instructors can choose to Copy a Question from an
existing test to a new test, or Link to the original question in the new test. The difference is that
if a linked question is changed, those changes are reflected everywhere a link to that question
occurs. Questions that are linked display an icon that indicates they are used in other tests.
Alternatively, when the question is copied, changes made to one instance of the question are not
reflected in the other instances. Copy is the default selection.
Selected Questions
Questions that are selected through this process are displayed at the bottom of the page. Click
Show List to view all the questions that have been selected. Click Hide List to minimize the
Selected Questions. Questions are deleted from the Selected Questions list by clicking the red X
link next to the question. This action does not delete the question.
How to Find Existing Questions and Add them to a Test or Survey
1.
Point to theReuse Question drop-down list and select Find Questions. The Find
Questions pop-up window appears.
2.
Choose a method for adding questions, Copying or Linking. The difference between the
two, is that if a linked question is changed, those changes are reflected in every test and
survey where that question appears. Once you have selected a question, you can
change this option before adding the question to a test or survey. Note: The option to
change the method is located above the table of questions. Select the correct option
before you add the questions to the test.
3.
Expand one or all of the following criteria: Pools, Tests, Question Types, Categories,
Topics, Levels of Difficulty, or Keywords.
4.
Use the Search Current Results field to narrow the search.
5.
Select the questions to add using the check boxes.
6.
Click Submit. The Question will be added to your Test or Survey as a Copy or a Link.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating and Editing a Random Block
Random Blocks are groups of questions that can be presented in a random fashion determined
by the Instructor. Random Blocks are created by finding and selecting questions, deciding on the
number of points per question, and then determining the number of questions to display to the
user.
Questions that are selected through this process are displayed in the Shopping List at the bottom
of the window. Click Show List to view all the questions that have been selected. Click Hide List
to minimize the Shopping List. Questions are deleted from the Shopping List by clicking the red X
link next to the question. This action does not delete the question.
Before You Begin
Here are some things to keep in mind when creating a Random Block:
If the number of questions to display are less than the list of questions, 3 of the 50 used,
the questions are randomly distributed, so each student may be looking at a different set
of 3 questions.
The Instructor can choose to have the same number of questions to display as there are
selected, 50 of the 50, in which the Students all view the same questions.
It is not possible to add a Random Block of questions from another Test or Survey.
Random Blocks cannot be included in a Survey or a Pool.
How to Create a Random Block of Questions for a Test
1.
Select Create Random Block from the Reuse Question drop-down list.
2.
Expand one or all of the following criteria: Pools, Tests, Question Types, Categories,
Topics, and Levels of Difficulty.
3.
Use the Search Current Results field to narrow the search.
4.
Select the questions to add using the check boxes.
5.
Click Submit.
How to Edit a Random Block of Questions
Random Blocks are edited from the Test Canvas once they have been added to a test.
To...
Click...
delete the Random Block
Delete from the Contextual Menu for the Random Block
heading. This action does not delete the questions
themselves.
show or hide the questions
within the Random Block
the Questions in the Block link.
delete questions from the
Random Block
the check box for the question and click Remove Question.
add questions to the Random
Block
Add Questions. Select questions from the Create
Random Block page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To...
Click...
preview a question in the
Random Block
the preview button next to the question text. The question
appears in a separate window.
change the number of
questions to display in the
Random Block
the number next to Number of Questions to display. Type
a number in the Questions to display in the block field
and click Submit.
change the point value of the
questions in the Random
Block
the number next to Points per question. Type a number in
the Update points field and click Submit.
Next Steps
About Question Settings
Creating and Editing a Test or Survey
Deploying a Test or Survey
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Question Sets
A Question Set is a collection of questions retrieved from selected Tests and Pools. From this set,
you specify how many questions to display. The specific questions displayed are randomly
chosen for each time the test is taken.
For each question set, you can specify:
The pools and tests from which it will be drawn
The type of questions to be drawn
The number of questions to be drawn
If the number of questions to be displayed is less than the list of questions (example: 3 out of 50),
then the questions are randomly distributed so that each user may be viewing a different set of
three questions. The Instructor can choose to display the same questions to all users by selecting
all the questions listed.
Creating Question Sets
1.
Create or access the test.
2.
On the Test Canvas page, point to Reuse Question.
3.
Select Create Question Set.
4.
On the Create Question Set page, search for questions using the Browse Criteria.
5.
Select the questions to include in the test. Select the checkbox in the header row to select
all questions.
6.
Review your selected questions.
7.
Click Submit.
Adding More Questions
To add more questions after the initial submission, expand the Questions in the Set and click Add
Questions.
More Information
Enter the total number of questions to display to students. To ensure students are presented with
a question set each time, enter a number less than the total number of questions.
Enter a point value per question. The point value you enter will be assigned to every question in
the set. You cannot assign separate point values for individual questions in the same question
set.
Note: When you add questions to a test using the Question Set feature, each question is linked.
The questions do not exist in the test. Therefore, if you change an original question, the revised
version of the question will be displayed. Once the test with the linked question is deployed, the
questions will no longer reflect revisions made to the original.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Question Settings
The Question Settings page allows Instructors to adjust settings for a Test, Survey or Pool. The
Specify default point values for questions option is not available for Pools or Surveys and the Add
Categories to questions option is not available for Surveys.
Default Point Value
Instructors must set the Default Point Value before creating questions for it to be effective. If the
default point value is changed, only questions created after the change will have the new point
value. Questions created before the modification will have the old point value.
How to Change Question Settings
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Tests or Surveys, or Pools.
3.
Select an existing Test, Survey, or Pool.
4.
Click Question Settings.
5.
Make changes to the following fields:
Field
Description
Provide feedback for
individual answers
Select this check box to include the option to enter
feedback for individual answers rather then just one set
of feedback for correct or incorrect answers.
Individual feedback cannot be provided for answers in
True/False questions, Multiple Answer questions,
Ordering and Matching questions.
Add images, files, and
external links to
questions
Select this check box to include the option to attach
images, files, and URLs to questions.
Add images, files, and
external links to answers
Select this check box to include the option to attach
images and files to answers.
Add categories, topics,
levels of difficulty,
keywords and instructor
notes to questions
Select this check box to include the option to create
categories for questions.
This option also enables Instructors to add keywords to
questions. When searching for questions from a
Question Pool or other Tests, Instructors may search
for questions by category and keyword.
This option is not available for Surveys.
Specify default points
when creating questions
Select this option and all questions will automatically
have the same point value. Type the point value in the
Default point value field. This only sets a default.
This is not available for Surveys or Pools.
Specify partial credit
options for answers
Select this option to make partial credit available for
questions included in this Assessment. If selected, an
option to give partial credit appears when questions
are created.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
6.
Field
Description
Provide option to assign
questions as extra credit
Select this option to make extra credit available for
questions included in this Assessment.
If selected, an extra credit option appears when each
question is created. If this option is selected points are
added to the score if the question is answered
correctly; no points are taken away if the questions are
answered incorrectly.
Specify random ordering
of answers
Select this option to include the option for display
answers in random order.
Specify the horizontal or
vertical display of
answers
Select this option to include the option to display
answers horizontally or vertically.
Specify numbering
options for answers
Select this option to include the option for numbering
the answers.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Question Metadata
Instructors can create Metadata values for questions to help organize them for future use. The
Metadata values created in one question can be used when creating other questions in the same
Course. These Metadata values are used to help search for questions to reuse on the Find
Questions page. Questions can have the following metadata values added to them:
Categories
Topics
Levels of Difficulty
Keywords
Before You Begin
The Question Metadata options are only available if Add categories, topics, levels of
difficulty,and keywords to questions are selected in Question Settings.
Example
An Instructor creates the following True/False question: The capital of Slovenia is Ljubljana.
The following metadata can be applied to the question:
Category: Geography
Topic: Former Yugoslavia
Levels of Difficulty: Low
Keywords: World Capitals
This question appears in the Active Filter on the Find Questions page when Geography, Former
Yugoslavia, or Low is selected. See About Find Questions for more information.
How to Add Metadata to a Question
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Create a new Test or select Edit from the contextual menu for an existing Test.
3.
Create a new question by using the Create Questiondrop-down list or select Edit next to
an existing question.
4.
In section 5, click Add.
5.
Type a new category, topic, level of difficulty, or keyword in the field and click OK.
6.
Click Choose from Existing to select an existing category, topic, level of difficulty, or
keyword.
7.
Click Submit when finished.
How to Manage Question Metadata
1.
Select Tests, Surveys, and Pools in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Create a new Test or select Edit from the contextual menu for an existing Test.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Select a new question from the Create Question drop-down list, or select Edit from the
contextual menu for an existing question.
4.
To delete a category, topic, level of difficulty, or keyword, click the X icon next to the
metadata element.
5.
To add another category, topic, level of difficulty, or keyword, click Add. Type a new
category, topic, level of difficulty, or keyword in the field and click OK.
6.
Click Submit when finished.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Uploading Questions
Instructors may upload files containing questions into a Test, Survey, or Pool.
Before You Begin
The following information is important to note when uploading questions:
Once uploaded, questions are manipulated like other questions created within the
Assessment.
Questions that contain an error will fail to upload. Questions without errors will upload
successfully.
The system does not check for duplicate questions. It is up to the Instructor to
manage this aspect of the Assessment questions.
The questions in the uploaded file must match the file structure explained in this topic. The file
may include Essay, Ordering, Matching, Fill in the Blank, Multiple Choice, Multiple Answer, and
True/False questions.
Note: This feature is not available in Blackboard Learn– Basic Edition.
Point Value
When questions are uploaded they automatically default to the point value they were assigned
when exported. If a default value has not been chosen in Question Settings questions will
automatically have a point value of ‗0‘ and Instructors must then enter a point value for each
question.
How to Upload Questions
1.
Click Upload Questions on the Test Canvas or Survey Canvas page.
2.
Click Browse and locate the file.
3.
Type a number in the Points per question field.
4.
Click Submit.
File Structure
Questions in the file must conform to a specific structure to be uploaded to an Assessment
successfully. Each field in the file is separated by a tab and each row is a separate question.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note:When uploaded to a Survey, the correct/incorrect answer Assignment is
ignored, but the file must follow the same format as described for Tests and Pools.
Question
T yp e
Structure
Multiple Choice
‗MC‘ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB ‗correct‘ or ‗incorrect‘)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the
Multiple Choice question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
Multiple
Answer
‗MA‘ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB ‗correct‘ or ‗incorrect‘)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the
Multiple Answer question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
True/False
‗TF‘ TAB question text TAB ‗true‘ or ‗false‘
Essay
‗ESS‘ TAB question text TAB [example]
Text within [ ] is optional. The Instructor may choose to add a sample essay
question or leave this blank.
Ordering
‗ORD‘ TAB question text (TAB answer text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the
Ordering question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
The order entered in the file is the correct order. The system will randomly
order the answers.
Matching
‗MAT‘ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB matching text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the
Matching question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
The system will randomly order the answers and their question.
When uploading a matching question, there must be a one-to-one
relationship between questions and answers. If not, correct answers may
be marked incorrect if more than one answer has the same value.
Fill in the Blank
‗FIB‘ TAB question text (TAB answer text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the
Fill in the Blank question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
File Response
'FIL' TAB question
Numeric
Response
'NUM' TAB question TAB answer TAB [optional]tolerance
Short
Response
'SR' TAB question TAB sample_answer
Opinion/Likert
Scale
OP TAB question
Multiple Fill-inthe-Blank
FIB_PLUS TAB question TAB variable1 TAB answer1 TAB answer2 TAB
variable2 TAB answer3
The format consists of a list of variable-answers where each variableanswer
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Question
T yp e
Structure
is composed of the variable name and a list of correct answers for that
variable. variable-answers are delimited by an empty field.
Jumbled
Sentence
JUMBLED_SENTENCE TAB question TAB choice1 TAB variable1 TAB
choice2 TAB TAB choice3 TAB variable2
The format consists of a list of choices-answers where each choice-answer
consists of the choice followed by the list of variables for which that choice
is the correct answer. An empty field indicates the end of a choice answer.
A choice immediately followed by an empty field indicates that choice is not
the correct answer for any variable.
Quiz Bowl
QUIZ_BOWL TAB question TAB question_word1 TAB question_word2
TAB phrase1 TAB phrase2
The format consists of a list of valid question words followed by an empty
field and a list of valid answer phrases.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Calculated Formula Questions
A Calculated Formula question contains a formula, the variables of which are set to change for
each user. The variable range is created by specifying a minimum value and a maximum value
for each variable. Answer sets are randomly generated. The correct answer is a specific value or
a range of values. Partial credit may be granted for answers falling within a range.
Before You Begin
Adding a calculated question to an Assessment is a three step process:
Create the question and formula
Define the values for the variables
Confirm the variables and answers.
Since this question allows the Instructor to randomize the value of variables in an equation it may
be useful when creating math drills to when giving a test when Students are seated close
together.
How to Create the Question and Formula
The question is the information presented to Students. The formula is the mathematical
expression used to find the answer. Remember to enclose variables in square brackets.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Calculated Formula from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the information that will display to Students in the Question Text box. Surround any
variables with square brackets, for example, [x]. The value for this variable will be
populated based on the formula. In the example [x] + [y] = z, [x] and [y] will be replaced
by values when shown to Students. Students would be asked to define z.Variables
should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and hyphens
(-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should be
preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Define the formula used to answer the question in the Answer Formula box. For
example, x + y. Operations are chosen from the buttons across the top of the Answer
Formula box.
5.
Set the Answer Range. This defines which submitted answers will be marked correct. If
the exact value must be entered, enter 0 and select Numeric from the drop-down list. If
the answer can vary, enter a value and select Numeric or Percent. Numeric will mark
every answer as correct that falls within a range of plus or minus the Answer Range
from the exact answer. Percent will mark every answer as correct that falls within a
percentage of plus or minus the Answer Range from the exact answer.
6.
Click the Allow Partial Credit check box to allow partial credit for answers that fall
outside the correct Answer Range.
7.
Set the range for partial credit by entering a value and selecting Numeric or Percent for
the Partial Credit Range. Answers falling within this range will receive a portion of the
total points possible for the question equal to the Partial Credit Points Percentage.
8.
Type a value for the Partial Credit Points Percentage.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
9.
Click the Units Required check box to require that correct answers must include the
correct unit of measurement, for example, Seconds or Grams.
10.
Type the correct unit of measurement in the Answer Units field.
11.
Click the Units Case Sensitive check box to require that correct answers are case
sensitive. The answer may still receive partial credit if the unit of measurement is not
correct.
12.
Type a percentage in Unit Points Percentage. The unit of measurement will account for
that percentage of the total credit.
13.
When finished with the question, click Next to proceed.
How to Define the Variables
The next page in the three step process defines the variables in the formula.
1.
Type a Minimum Value and a Maximum Value for each variable.
2.
Select a decimal place using the Decimal Places drop-down list.
3.
Under Answer Set Options, select the Decimal places for answer from the drop-down
list. Users must provide the correct answer to this decimal place.
4.
Type the Number of Answer Sets. The Answer Sets will be randomized so that different
Students will be presented with a different set of variables.
5.
Click Calculate to reset the variables after making a change or click Go Back to return to
the previous page.
How to Confirm the Variables and Answers
The last step in the process displays the Answer Sets in a table. Advanced features for questions,
such as Feedback and Categories and Keywords are defined by the Creation Settings of the
Test.
1.
Edit or delete any unwanted answer sets and click Calculate.
2.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer and
the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is allowed,
answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect answer.
3.
Add Question Metadata in the Categories and Keywords section.
4.
Click Submit to add the question to the test.
Example
Here is an example of a Calculated Formula question as it appears to students:
If a small glass contains 8 ounces of water, and a large glass contains 12 ounces of water,
what is the total number of ounces in 4 large and 3 small glasses of water?
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Calculated Numeric Answer Questions
A Calculated Numeric question asks the user to submit a numeric answer to a question. It
resembles a fill-in-the-blank question where the correct answer is a number. The correct answer
is a specific number or within a range of numbers. Please note that the answer must be numeric,
not alphanumeric.
How to Create a Calculated Numeric Response Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Calculated Numeric from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Type the Correct Answer. This value must be a number.
5.
Type the Answer Range. If the answer must be exact for Students to receive credit,
enter 0. Any value that is less than or more than the Correct Answer by less than the
Answer Range value will be marked as correct.
6.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
7.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Calculated Numeric question as it appears to students:
If the average human body temperature under normal conditions ranges between 35.5 and
36.5 degrees Celsius, what is the average human body temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit?
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Either/Or Questions
Users are presented with a statement and asked to respond using a selection of pre-defined twochoice answers, such as:
Yes/No
Agree/Disagree
Right/Wrong
This question type is very useful in Surveys to gauge user's opinions. It is a slight variation on the
True/False question type, except more descriptive and meaningful answers may be used.
How to Create an Either/Or Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Either/Or from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select a pair of Answer Choices from the drop-down list.
5.
Select the Correct Answer.
6.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
7.
Click Submit .
Example
Here is an example of an Either/Or Question:
Hamlet's famous monologue, "To be or not to be...", is a meditation on suicide.
Agree/Disagree
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
File Response Questions
Users upload a file from the local drive or from Content Management as the answer to the
question. This type of question is graded manually. This question type enables Students to work
on something before a test and submit it with a test, particularly if it requires a large amount of
text. Submitting the answer this way allows the Instructor to read and grade the question without
worrying that the browser will time out.
Short Answer and Essay questions may also be used for questions that may require a shorter
answer from a Student. These questions types must also be manually graded. Other Question
types that allow user input are Fill in the Blank and Fill in Multiple Blank.
How to Create a File Response Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select File Response from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
5.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a File Response question:
Create a diagram of a simple relational database. Upload this file in JPEG format.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
File Response Questions
Users upload a file from the local drive or from Content Management as the answer to the
question. This type of question is graded manually. This question type enables Students to work
on something before a test and submit it with a test, particularly if it requires a large amount of
text. Submitting the answer this way allows the Instructor to read and grade the question without
worrying that the browser will time out.
Short Answer and Essay questions may also be used for questions that may require a shorter
answer from a Student. These questions types must also be manually graded. Other Question
types that allow user input are Fill in the Blank and Fill in Multiple Blank.
How to Create a File Response Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select File Response from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
5.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a File Response question:
Create a diagram of a simple relational database. Upload this file in JPEG format.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Fill In Multiple Blanks Questions
This question type builds on fill-in-the-blank questions with multiple fill in the blank responses that
are inserted into a sentence or paragraph. Separate sets of answers are defined for each blank.
This question type may be used if there are multiple variables, such as "What color is the Italian
flag?" This question type is also useful in foreign language classes. In this case the identifier and
adjective may be left blank in a sentence, so as not to give away the gender of an object.
How to Create a Multiple Fill-in-the-Blanks Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Fill In Multiple Blanks from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text. Type each blank as a variable surrounded by square brackets.
For example, William [blank_1] wrote Romeo and [blank_2].Variables should be
composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and hyphens (-). All
other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should be preceded by
the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot be reused.
4.
Click Next.
5.
Select the Number of Answers for each variable.
6.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
9.
Add Question Metadata in the Categories and Keywords section.
10.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Fill in Multiple Blanks question:
In first aid, the mnemonic ABC stands for _____, _____, and _____.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Fill in the Blank Questions
Fill in the Blank answers are evaluated based on an exact text match. Accordingly, it is important
to keep the answers simple and limited to as few words as possible. Answers are not case
sensitive, but are evaluated based on spelling. Consider the following tips when creating Fill in
the Blank questions and answers:
Provide answers that allow for common spelling errors.
Provide answers that allow for abbreusingtions or partial answers.
Create the question that indicates to Students the best way to answer the question.
Phrase the question so there is only one answer
Try to keep answers limited to one word to avoid mismatched answers due to extra spaces or
order of answer terms. If the answer may be more then one word, list all possibilities as answers.
For example, if Benjamin Franklin is the answer, include Benjamin Franklin, Franklin, and Ben
Franklin as correct answers.
Note: Use the Fill in Multiple Blanks question type to create a question with multiple
answers.
How to Create a Fill in the Blank Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Fill in the Blank from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select a Number of Answers from the drop-down list.
5.
Type an answer for each Answer field.
6.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
7.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Fill in the Blank question:
_____ is the silicate mineral with the lowest melting temperature and the greatest
resistance to weathering, and as a result, it makes up the great bulk of sand-sized
particles.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Hot Spot Questions
Users indicate the answer by marking a specific point on an image. A range of pixel coordinates
is used to define the correct answer. Hot Spot refers to the area of an image that, when selected,
yields a correct answer.
The following are some examples of uses for this type of question:
Anatomy - to locate different parts of the body
Geography - to locate areas on a map
Foreign Language - to select different articles of clothing
How to Create a Hot Spot Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Hot Spot from the Create Question drop-down.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Click Browse My Computeror Browse Course Files under the Upload Image heading
and select the image file. Make sure to upload the image in the correct field. Remember
that Creation Settings allows uploading a file as part of the Question Text.
5.
Click Next. The uploaded image will appear.
6.
Click the mouse and drag it to create a rectangle over the correct answer. When
Students select a point within the rectangle they will receive credit for a correct answer.
The area of the hot spot is defined by pixels.
7.
Click Clear to delete the hot spot and define a new hot spot.
8.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
9.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Hot Spot question:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Jumbled Sentence Questions
Users are shown a sentence with parts of the sentence as variables. The user selects the proper
answer for each variable from drop-down lists to assemble the sentence. Only one set of answers
is used for all of the drop-down lists. For example, this type of question may be useful when
teaching about proper grammatical order in a sentence, such as the location of a noun, verb, or
adjective,
How to Create a Jumbled Sentence Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Jumbled Sentence from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text. Type each blank as a variable surrounded by square brackets.
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and
cannot be reused.
4.
Select the Number of Answers and enter a value for each. These values will appear in a
drop-down list for each variable when users view the question. Type the answers in the
order they should display to Students in the drop-down.
5.
Click Next.
6.
The question will appear with the drop-down lists in place of the variables. Select the
correct answers.
7.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
8.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Jumbled Sentence question:
An essential tenet of first aid, is that when you find an unconscious person, you first
_____, then _____, and finally _____.
make them aware of your presence by shaking their hand
ensure their airway is clear
check their breathing
move the person so that their head is sitting on their knees
check their circulation
check for awareness by asking their name and today's date
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Matching Questions
Matching questions allow Students to pair items in one column to items in another column.
Instructors may include a different numbers of questions and answers in a Matching question. For
example, the question may include a list of animals and a list of food they eat (herbivore,
carnivore, omnivore). The users would match each animal with their diet.
Students are granted partial credit for matching questions if they answer part of the question
correctly. For example, if the question is worth eight points and the Student gives the correct
answers for half of the matches, they will receive four points.
How to Create a Matching Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Matching from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select options for question layout and partial credit.
5.
Select the Number of Questions and enter the text for each question. The number of
questions and answers may be uneven. For example, the Instructor may include extra
answers to make the question more difficult.
6.
Select the Number of Answers and enter the text for each answer.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Match each Question with the correct Answer.
9.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
10.
Add Question Metadata in the Categories and Keywords section.
11.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Matching question:
Match each term with its definition.
Deposition
Erosion
Lithification
Weathering
A.
The chemical alteration and breakdown of rock
B.
The conversion of sediment to rock
C.
The dropping of sediment into a long-term reservoir
D.
The picking up and carrying away of sediment
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Multiple Answer Questions
Multiple answer questions allow users to choose more than one answer. The number of answer
choices is limited to 20. This type of question may be used when more then one answer is
correct. For example, in the medical field, this type of question may be used to select symptoms
associated with a medical condition.
How to Create a Multiple Answer Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Multiple Answer from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select the Number of Answers from the drop-down list.
5.
Complete the Answer text box for each answer.
6.
Select the correct answers by clicking the Correct check box for each answer.
7.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
8.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Multiple Answer question:
Which of the following are viable methods for traveling from London to Paris?
a.
flying
b.
ferry
c.
walking
d.
rail
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Multiple Choice Questions
Multiple-choice questions allow the users a multitude of choices with only one correct answer. In
multiple-choice questions, users indicate the correct answer by selecting a radio button. The
number of answer choices is limited to 20.
Note: Use the Multiple Answer question type to create multiple choice questions
with more than one answer.
How to Create a Multiple Choice Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a Test.
2.
Select Multiple Choice from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select the Number of Answers from the drop-down list.
5.
Type an Answer in each field.
6.
Select the Correct answer by clicking the appropriate option. Only one correct answer is
selected.
7.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
8.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Multiple Choice question:
Which ocean basin is a remnant of the universal ocean Panthalassa?
a.
Arctic
b.
Atlantic
c.
Indian
d.
Pacific
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Opinion Scale/Likert Questions
This question type is based on a rating scale designed to measure attitudes or reactions. It is
popular to use in surveys in order to get a comparable scale of opinion. Users indicate the
multiple choice answer that represents their attitude or reaction. When the Instructor creates an
opinion scale question, six answer fields are pre-populated with the following answers, which can
be modified:
Strongly Agree
Agree
Neither Agree nor Disagree
Disagree
Strongly Disagree
Not Applicable
How to Create an Opinion Scale/Likert Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Opinion Scale/Likert from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select the Number of Answers from the drop-down list. The number six is selected by
default. The Answer fields are pre-populated with six values on a Likert scale.
5.
Type an Answer in each field in order to change the default answers.
6.
Select a Correct answer by clicking the appropriate radio button.
7.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer. In a Survey, the correct answer is ignored.
8.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of an Opinion Scale/Likert question:
How concerned are you about the need for first aid on the water?
1.
Very Concerned
2.
Concerned
3.
Neither Concerned or Unconcerned
4.
Not really concerned
5.
Not concerned at all
6.
Not applicable
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Ordering Questions
Ordering questions require users to provide an answer by selecting the correct order of a series
of items. For example, an Instructor may give users a list of historical events and ask them to
place these events in chronological order.
Users will be granted partial credit for ordering questions if they answer part of the question
correctly. For example, if the question is worth eight points and the Student gives the correct
order for half of the items, they will receive four points.
How to Create an Ordering Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Ordering from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select the Number of Answers from the drop-down list.
5.
Type an Answer in each field.
6.
Click Next.
7.
Drag and drop the answers in the Display Order column to determine how they are
displayed.
8.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
9.
Add Question Metadata in the Categories and Keywords section.
10.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of an Ordering question:
Order the four oceans in size, with the largest first.
Pacific
Indian
Atlantic
Arctic
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Quiz Bowl Questions
Quiz Bowl questions are a way to add fun and creativity to tests, such as self Tests or in-class
contests. The user is shown the answer and responds by entering the correct question into a text
box. An answer must include a phrase and a question word, such as whom, what, or where, to be
marked as correct. For example, the question may be "The person who invented the cotton gin",
with the answer being "Who is Eli Whitney?" Partial credit may be given if the question word is
not included in the answer.
How to Create a Quiz Bowl Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Quiz Bowl from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Select the Number of Interrogatives.
5.
Type each acceptable Interrogative word. One of these words must appear in the
response for the Student to receive full credit.
6.
Select the Number of Answer Phrases.
7.
Type each Answer Phrase. One of these phrases must appear in the response for the
Student to receive any credit.
8.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
9.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Quiz Bowl question:
It is the only country that is a continent.
Your answer must be in the form of a question, such as What is _____ ?
Use a question mark at the end of your question.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Short Answer Questions
Short Answer questions are similar to essay questions. The length of the answer is limited to a
specified number of rows in the text box. Essay questions and Short Answer questions must be
graded manually.
The number of rows is meant as a guideline when entering an answer, it does not impose an
absolute limit on answer length.
How to Create a Short Answer Question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select Short Answer from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text.
4.
Determine the Number of Rows to Display in the Answer Field by selecting a number
from the drop-down list.
5.
Type an example of a correct answer in the Answer Text field.
6.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a Short Answer question:
Explain what CCD (carbonate compensation depth) is, and how it governs the distribution
of calcium carbonate on the sea floor.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
True/False Questions
True/False questions allow the user to choose either true or false. True and False answer options
are limited to the words True and False.
How to Create a True/False question
1.
Open the Test Canvas for a test.
2.
Select True/False from the Create Question drop-down list.
3.
Type the Question Text. This should be in the form of a statement that users will mark
either True or False.
4.
Select the correct Answer by clicking True or False.
5.
Type the Correct Response Feedback that appears in response to a correct answer
and the Incorrect Response Feedback for an incorrect answer. If partial credit is
allowed, answers that are partially correct will receive the feedback for an incorrect
answer.
6.
Click Submit.
Example
Here is an example of a True/False question:
Oceanic crust is made out of basalt and gabbro.
True
False
About Wikis
Wikis are used to create a collaborative space within the Course where all students can view,
contribute, and edit content. Wikis can also be used as a resources for students to view
information and content relevant to their Courses.
Course Wikis
Course Wikis are created by the Instructor and any course member can add pages, unless the
Instructor intends to be the sole author and use the Wiki as course content.
Group Wikis
Group Wikis are enabled by the Instructor and can be read by all course members, but a user
must be a member of the Group to edit a page or make a comment on a Group Wiki page. The
Instructor can change the default setting to allow only Group members to view a Group Wiki.
The following options are available when working with Wikis.
Create Wiki
Create Wiki Page
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Edit Wiki Content
Link to other Wiki Pages
Comments
Participation Summary
Grading
Create Wiki
1.
Click Create Wiki from the Action Bar on the Wikis page.
2.
Type a Name for the Wiki.
3.
Type Instructions for the Wiki. This information is optional, but can help users understand
expectations and any associated rules or requirements.
4.
Set the Wiki Availability. Users will not see the Wiki or be able to add pages unless the
Wiki Availability is set to Yes.
5.
Set the Date and Time Restrictions. Wikis can be set to display on a specific date and
time and to stop displaying on a specific date and time. Select the Display After and
Display Until check boxes in order to enable the date and time selections. Display
restrictions do not affect the content in the Wiki, only the appearance of the Wiki.
6.
Select the Student Access option. Student Access can be changed at any time.
Closed to Editing: Select this option when the Instructor will be the only one
contributing pages or to disallow further page editing by students, such as when
the Wiki pages are set to be graded.
Open to Editing: Allows students to modify any Wiki page. In a Group Wiki a
user must be a member of the Group to edit a Wiki page.
7.
Select the option for Grading the Wiki and provide the number of Points Possible. Note:
Once a Wiki is set to be graded, a column will be created for it in the Grade Center. It is
permanently gradable and cannot be set to No grading.
Create Wiki Page
1.
Access the Wiki from either the Course or from the Group page.
2.
Click Create Wiki Page.
3.
Provide a name and enter content in the text editor.
4.
Click Submit to finish your work.
Edit Wiki Content
1.
Access the Wiki you would like to edit.
2.
Click Edit Wiki Content.
3.
Make your edits in the text editor.
4.
Click Submit to save your work.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Link to other Wiki Pages
Links to other Wiki pages can only be created when at least two pages exist. The link icon
appears in the text editor of the page you are working on.
1.
Select the icon from the text editor.
2.
Select the Wiki page you want to link to.
3.
Renaming the link is optional.
4.
Click Submit.
Comments
Opening the Comments box provides you with space to enter your comment. Click Add when you
are finished. To view all the comments, expand the Comments link.
Participation Summary
Page Versions: Select a user's name to view information about the Wiki pages. The
Page Version column displays all pages created and edited by the user. A new version
is created each time a page is edited. When versions are compared, the difference
between any version and its previous version are shown on the Page Comparison page.
Words Modified: Words Modified are any words added, deleted, or edited.
Page Saves: A Page Save refers to any time Submit is clicked on the Edit Wiki page
regardless of whether or not content has been changed.
Grading
If a Course Wiki can be graded, a grade entered for an individual member is only applied to that
individual.
1.
Select the user in the View Contribution By section.
2.
Click Edit Grade.
3.
Type a Grade in the Current Grade Value text box.
4.
Type Feedback that is available to the individual.
5.
Type Grading Notes that are available only to the Instructor.
6.
Click Save Grade.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Customization
Customization allows Instructors to control how they present their Courses in Blackboard Learn.
This section includes information on the following topics:
Enrollment Options
Guest and Observer Access
Properties
Style
Tool Availability
Enrollment Options
Enrollment Options control how Students enroll in the Course.
Find this Page
1.
Turn Edit Mode ON.
2.
On the Control Panel under Customization, select Enrollment Options.
Select Enrollment Options
Instructor/ System Administrator: This option enables the Instructor or System
Administrator to control the enrollment process. Select the checkbox to create a link for
Students to email an enrollment request to the Instructor. This link appears in the
Course Catalog.
Self Enrollment: This option allows Students to enroll themselves in the Course. Use the
date fields to set a Start Date, an End Date, or both to control the time frame that
Students can self-enroll. If no dates are selected, Student may continuously self-enroll
unless the Course is made unavailable or the Course Duration dates have passed. An
Access Code can be used to verify the self-enrollment process.
Guest and Observer Access
Instructors can control whether or not Guests and Observers have access to the Course.
Guests in a Course can include Guest Lecturers or other users that are not directly participating
in the Course.
A person with an Observer role is assigned to follow specific users in Blackboard Learn without
interacting with the system. Observers are able to view the Course and track Student progress.
Also, the Instructor can communicate Early Warning System notifications to Observers as well as
the Student, or just to the Observers of the Student.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Find this Page
1.
Turn Edit Mode ON.
2.
On the Control Panel under Customization, select Guest and Observer Access.
Allow Guest Access
Select Yes or No to allow Guests to view the Course.
Allow Observer Access
Select Yes in the Allow Observers: field to allow Observers to access the Course.
When set to Yes, Observers can access content in the Course. Observers cannot access Tests
or Assignments. Observers are restricted from viewing content or tools on an individual basis.
Properties
Properties control the functional settings of the Course.
Find this Page
1.
Turn Edit Mode ON.
2.
On the Control Panel under Customization, select Properties.
Name and Description
Instructors can change the name and description of the Course. This name appears as the
Course Name throughout Blackboard Learn. The description will appear in the Course Catalog.
Classification
These fields can be safely ignored. Course Classification is not part of or related to Course
Categorization for the Course Catalog. A default Classification value is listed when each Course
is created. These fields were used in previous versions but exist now only to ensure backward
compatibility with Building Blocks or other plugins.
Set Availability
Instructors can set Courses to be available or unavailable. If the Course is available, all users
participating in the Course will have access. If the Course is unavailable, access is determined by
Course role. Instructors, Course Builders, Teaching Assistants, and Graders can see and access
unavailable Courses from My Courses and the Course List, but they are marked as unavailable.
Students may not access unavailable Courses regardless of the Course Duration.Unavailable
Courses do not appear in the Course Catalog.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Set Course Duration
Course Duration defines the time in which Students may interact with the Course.
Continuous: The Course is always available.
Select Dates: The Course is available according to specific dates. Courses may have a
start date, but no end date. After the end date, Courses are not available to students, but
are otherwise unchanged.
Days from the Date of Enrollment: Use this option to place a time limit on Courses
calculated from the date a student enrolls. This is the best option for self-paced Courses.
Categorize Course
Instructors can add their Course to one or more Categories. Courses added to a Category are
listed in the Course Catalog under that Category.
Select a catalog category and use the arrow buttons to move the category to the Selected Items
box. More than one category may be selected. Repeat the process to add another category. The
Course appears under the selected categories. Invert Selection will highlight any Categories that
are not highlighted and unselect any Categories that are highlighted. This is a useful way to
exclude one or two Categories without having to click on all the other Categories.
Select Language Pack
Language Packs change the language of buttons, titles, and other text supplied by the system.
Language Pack preferences are defined at the system, Course, and user level.
At the system level, the Administrator defines one Language Pack as the system default. This is
the Language Pack that appears when no other Language Pack is specified at the Course level
or at the User level.
At the Course level, Instructors can set a Language Pack that is different from the default to make
all users in the Course view the same Language Pack. If the Language Pack is not enforced,
users can set a preferred Language Pack that is different from the Course Language Pack by
changing the setting in Tools > Personal Information > Set Language Pack. Enforcing the
Language Pack will override individual users' language choices.
Note: Customized names for Content Areas and Tools are not changed with the Language Pack.
These values stay the same through all Language Packs. The default names in the system are
translated and appear differently in each Language Pack.
For more information about Language Packs, see Language Packs .
Course Files
The Course Files properties are available only if your institution licenses the content management
capabilities.
Course Files Default Directory: Type or browse for the directoryto contain the Course
Files for this course. This is the default location where files are saved for the course and
does not conflict with the Content System Home Page setting.
Display: Each item in the Content Collection has a contextual menu that provides
access to the available actions. When working in the Course Files area on the Control
Panel, the selected option configures the menu to display all of the Content Collection
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
options that are available when working on the Content Collection tab or only the
course-specific options.
Course Style
Instructors manage the style of the Course Menu and other page elements from the Style page.
On the Control Panel, under Customization, select Style.
Style Options
Select Menu Style: Select text or buttons for Menu Items and select the color
customization options available .
Course Menu Display: Select the default view of the Course Menu. Options include
Folder View, List View, or Permit Both Views.
Default Content View: Select how you want your content to appear within the course.
Options include Icon Only, Text Only, or Icon and Text.
Select Course Entry Point: Select the first page users see when entering the Course
from the list below. If the Course Entry Point is changed, the Instructor must refresh the
browser to view the change. Note: Setting a new Course entry point takes effect
immediately. However, the user that sets the new Course entry point will not see the
effect of the change until the user logs out of Blackboard Learn and logs back in.
Select Banner: The banner appears at the top of the course's entry point page. Browse
for a file to attach.
Managing Tools
Instructors can control the availability of Tools and also decide which tools Guests and Observers
may access.
On the Control Panel, under Customization, select Tool Availability . Select or clear the
checkboxes of the tools you want to use in your course and which users will have access to these
tools.
Functions
Available tools are listed alphabetically on the Tool Availability page.
Available: The tool is available throughout the Course and open to all users that have a
role permitting the use of the tool.
Visible to Guests: The tool is visible (read-only), but not usable to Guests when Guests
are permitted in the Course.
Visible to Observers: The tool is visible (read-only), but not usable to Observers when
Observers are permitted in the Course.
Available in Content Areas: The Instructor can place a link to a tool in one or more
Content Areas of the Course.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tools with a grayed checkbox in a column have been turned off by the system administrator.
Tools with a dash ( - ) in a column do not have availability settings in the system that can be
changed.
If tools are made unavailable after a period of being available, either at the Course level by the
Instructor or at the system level by the system administrator, no content is deleted from the
system. If the tools are made available again, the existing content remains and becomes
accessible.
Filter Display
Click Filter on the action bar to sort the table based on availability status for the tool and for the
role users have in a Course. Filtering makes it easier to see which tools are available and visible,
and change settings based on those criteria.
Building Blocks
If your Institution has licensed any Building Blocks they will appear in the list of Tools on the Tool
Availability page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Packages and Utilities
Packages and Utilities includes tools to copy a Course, archive or recycle the Course, and import
content.
This section contains information on the following topics:
Bulk Delete
Check Course Links
Course Copy
Export/ Archive Course
Import Course Cartridge
Import Package/ View Logs
Move Files to Course Files
Chalk Titles
Bulk Delete
The Bulk Delete page is a useful tool for Instructors to use at the end of a Course. It allows
Instructors to select information to be deleted from a Course and keeps the rest of the Course
areas for use in the future. For example, delete Students and grades but keep the content.
Bulk Delete deletes all users with a role of Student from the Course. Teaching Assistants,
Graders, and Course Builders will not be deleted.
Note: Consider archiving the Course first so that it can be restored to its exact state before a bulk
delete.
On the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities, click Bulk Delete.
There are three sections on the Bulk Delete page:
Select Content Materials to Delete: Select the check boxes for Content Materials
within the Course that will be deleted. For example, if Staff Information is selected all of
the data within Staff Information will be deleted.
Select Other Materials to Delete: Select the check boxes for content found in other
areas within the Course that will be deleted. For example, if Discussion Board is
selected all of the Discussion Boards in the Course will be deleted.
Confirmation: Type "Delete" in the Type 'Delete' to complete this request field to
confirm the Bulk Delete.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Check Course Links
Check Course Links allows Instructors to check the links to Course Files that have been added to
a Course. For example, if an item in Course Files is deleted after the Instructor has created a link
to the item in a Course, Check Course Links detects this and makes the Instructor aware of the
broken link. Depending on the situation, some broken links may be repaired; while others may
not.
When a link to a Course Files item is added to a Course, All Course Users are given Read
permission to this item in Course Files. When the Check Course Links is run, the only permission
that is checked is Read permission for All Course Users.
Enabling Check Course Links
Instructors have the option of enabling or disabling Check Course Links for each of their Courses.
The tool is disabled by default when a Course is created. The following steps explain how to
enable Check Course Links:
1.
On the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities, click Check Course Links.
2.
On the Check Course Links page, click OK to start the tool.
3.
Select the check boxes for the repairable items and click Repair from the action bar.
When the links have been repaired, you will return to the Check Course Links page.
Note: The System Administrator may disable Check Course Links for the entire system. This tool
will not be available within Courses if it is disabled by the Administrator.
Course areas checked by Check Course Links
Items may be added to Courses through the Add Course Files option available in Content Areas,
or through the third row action buttons available in the Text Editor. The Course Link Checker will
detect any broken links that appear for content added through the Add Course Files option.
The Course Link Checker will detect any broken links added to the following areas through the
Text Editor:
Content Areas (for example, Course Documents, Course Information, and
Assignments)
Announcements, Calendar Events and Tasks
Learning Modules
Discussion Boards
Note: Links to Course Files items added to Tests (including Tests, Surveys and Question Pools)
are not checked by Check Course Links.
When to use Check Course Links
If links to Course Files items are added to a Course, it is important that Check Course Links is run
on a periodic basis. This is especially true after a Course is copied, restored or imported. Users
with access to the items in Course Files may move and delete items, or edit the permissions on
an item. These actions may impact the validity of a link to the item in a Course.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
For example, when a link to a Course Files item is added to a Course, all Course users are
automatically granted Read permission to the item in Course Files. If this permission is later
deleted by a user who has Manage permission to the item, selecting the link within the Course
will result in an error message.
Steps to use Check Course Links
Running Check Course Links is a very simple operation.
1.
On the Control panel under Packages and Utilities, click Check Course Links.
2.
Click OK on the Check Course Links page. This operation may take a few minutes to run;
the length of the process depends on the number of links within a Course.
3.
Read the results and repair broken links.
4.
After the Check Course Links is run, a results page will appear, explaining the status of
each link to a Course Files item. Some broken links may be fixed by the Instructor, while
others may not.
Legend
Description and Resolution
Valid Link. These items are linked successfully and do not require any further
action.
Repairable permissions error. All Course Users do not have Read permission to
these Content Management items. When a user attempts to access this link in a
Course, a ‗File Not Found‘ error will appear. The Instructor has Manage permission
to the items and can therefore repair these links. Select the check boxes next to
these items and click Repair. The system will grant Read permission to these
items to All Course Users.
Path not found. The items have been moved, deleted or renamed within Content
Management. The links are broken and the Instructor should delete them from the
Course. If the new locations or names of the items are known, new links may be
created.
Permissions error. The links to the items are valid but All Course Users do not
have Read permission to these Content Management items. The Instructor does
not have Manage permission to the items and cannot repair these links. The
Instructor should delete these links from the Course or contact a user with Manage
permissions to these items to add the appropriate permission.
Course Copy
Course Copy can make an exact copy of the Course. Course Copy can also make a copy of
some of the materials and create a new Course or add the materials to an existing Course. You
must have Manage Permissions on these files in order to make copies of them.
On the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities, click Course Copy.
Select Copy Type
There are three options to chose from on the Course Copy page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Copy Course Materials into a New Course:Copying Course materials into a new
Course creates a Course in the system and populates it with content from a Course
already on the system. The Menu specified in the source Course will replace the
default Menu in the new Course.
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course: Copying Course Materials into an
Existing Course will add content to a Course, but it will not remove existing content.
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy): This is the only Copy option that copies
user records, such as Grades and Discussion Board posts, to the new Course. This
option copies everything in the Course to the new Course exactly as it appears in the
existing Course. This option is useful if a Course is split into multiple sections. The
Instructor may perform an exact copy and then un-enroll specific Students to create
two sections of the same Course.
Note: A user can only copy materials into a Course where the user has a role of Instructor,
Teaching Assistant, or Course Builder.
Select Copy Options
1.
Destination Course ID: Type a Course ID for the new Course that will be created and
populated with content from the current Course. Please make sure that the new Course ID
matches the naming convention used at the Institution. Also, the Course ID should not
have any spaces or characters other than numbers and letters (A-Z), dash (-), underscore
(_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and remain static. It cannot be edited.
2.
If you have selected Copy Course Materials into a New Course or Copy Materials into
an Existing Course Course Materials will be available for you to select to copy over to the
new course. If you have selected Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) you will only
need to provide a Destination Course ID.
3.
Select the Course Materials that you wan to copy over to the new or existing course.
Note:a Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does not select at least
one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information or Settings. If none of these options
is selected a warning will appear.
4.
Select the option to Copy links to Course Files or Include all Course Files. Note: There are
permissions constraints. You will need Manage permissions on an item to include copies
of those files. If you do not have this permission, you may be missing some files after the
copy.
5.
Select the Folder for Content Collection Files (if applicable).
6.
If Enrollments are selected, the list of users in the Course will be copied. User records,
such as discussion board posts, grades, and assessment attempts will not be copied. User
records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) option is selected.
7.
Click Submit.
Behavior of Copied Materials
Content: Course materials, including uploaded files, Learning Modules, and links are
copied. Course Information, Course documents, Assignments and URLs are optional.
Note: Assignments created inside Lesson Plans will not copy properly. Be sure to copy
your assignments separately to ensure that everything is correct.
Announcements: All Announcements are copied.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools: All Assessments and Surveys, including questions and
options for deploying them are copied. All Pools are copied.
Calendar: All Calendar items are copied to the new Course.
Discussion Board: Discussion Board Forums, including the initial message in the
forum, are copied.
Grade Center Items and Settings: Items in the Grade Center, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are copied.
Group Settings: Settings include the names of the Groups, the settings for tool
availability, and the Discussion Board Forum names.
Contacts: All Contacts are copied.
Course Settings: When Settings is selected, the following settings are copied:

Course Name

Course Description

Course Entry Point

Course Design

Course Banner

Blackboard Tools

Building Block Tools

Content Tools

Course ID

Course Availability

Guest Access

Observer Access

Course Duration

Enrollment Options
Links: Links to parts of a Course that are not included in the copy will break when the
links appear in the destination Course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a
Course area and Assessments are not copied, the link to the test will break.
Course Cartridge Materials: The Course Cartridge Materials option is only successful if
the source Course includes Copy Protected cartridge content and the destination
Course does not have a Cartridge ID.
Content Areas: Content from Course Menu content areas that have the same name in
each course will be added in the same content area. Nothing will be removed from the
destination course and replaced with content from the source course.
Enrollments: If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the Course will be copied.
User records, such as discussion board posts, grades, and assessment attempts will not
be copied. Note: User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact
Copy) option is selected.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Resolving Course Items
When copying content and tools from one Course to an existing Course, the Course Menu must
resolve itself in the destination Course. The table below describes the how Course Menu items
are resolved.
If . . .
then . . .
a Course area in the source Course does
not exist in the destination Course
the area will be added to the Course Menu in the
destination Course.
the Course area in the source Course and
the Course area in the destination Course
have the same name and are of the same
type (for example, External Links, Staff
Information, or content)
the content from the source Course will be
added, but will not replace, the content in the
area within the destination Course.
the Course area in the source Course and
the Course area in the destination Course
have the same name but are of different
types
the Course area from the source Course will be
added to the destination Course under a
different name. The new name will append an
incremental numeral to the name (for example,
Course Materials will become Course
Materials1.
Course Cartridge Content
Copy Protected Cartridge content is only copied if the Course Cartridge Materials option is
selected. This option only appears if there is Copy Protected Cartridge content in the Course.
The destination Course maintains the availability settings for the source Course.
If the destination Course already has a Cartridge ID (meaning it already includes Copy Protected
cartridge content), neither the cartridge content nor the Cartridge ID may be copied from the
source Course to the destination Course. If the Course Cartridge Materials option is selected,
the copy operation will be successful, but a note in the receipt states that the Course Cartridge
Materials will not be copied.
If the source Course and the destination Course have the same Cartridge ID, the content may be
copied successfully.
Export/ Archive Course
The Export/ Archive Course page organizes all export and archive packages that are created
from the Course. When the Course is exported or archived, a link to the package appears on this
page. The Instructor may download the package to a local computer, and then use it in the future
for import or restore operations.
When a package is exported or archived, it does not appear on this page immediately. An email
is sent to the user once the system has created the package; the user may then open this page to
find the package and download it.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note: It is recommended that packages be deleted from this page once they are downloaded.
Each package counts against the Course quota; so keeping packages on this page may result in
limited space to add additional content to the Course.
On the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities, click Export/ ArchiveCourse.
Export a Course
The Export Course feature creates a package of the Course content that can later be imported
and used to teach another Course with the same content. It is important to note that, unlike the
Archive Course feature, Export Course does not include any user interactions with the Course—it
only includes the content and the tools.
Export packages are downloaded as compressed .ZIP files and are imported in the same format.
Do not unzip an Export package or delete files from the package, otherwise the package will not
be imported correctly.
Archive a Course
Archive Course creates a permanent record of a Course including all the content and user
interactions. Archived Courses are saved as .zip files. Archiving a Course does not delete it from
the system.
When archiving a course, choose to Include the Grade Center History and to Copy links to
Course Files or Copy links and copies of the content.
Download the Course Package
After the Archive Course page is submitted the system creates the Course package. When the
package is complete, the Instructor who initiated the operation receives an email. After the email
is received, the Instructors may open the Export / Archive page in the Blackboard application and
download the Course package to the local computer.
View Basic or Detailed Log
These options are available from the contextual menu of the Archived Course.
Import Course Cartridge
Course Cartridges are pre-made materials produced by professional authors, editors, and
publishers that can be downloaded and added to a Course.
Course Cartridges enable Instructors to gain access to complete sets of teaching tools provided
by academic publishers. In one central location, Instructors can find relevant, publisher-created
materials. Once the materials are downloaded to a Blackboard Learn Course, Instructors are free
to customize the content by adding and deleting materials as needed to correlate with specific
topics covered in the classroom.
Course Cartridges can serve as supplements to existing online Courses, or provide an excellent
start for faculty who are just beginning to develop online teaching strategies. Instructors will
benefit from the ease of use, variety, and professional quality of the materials available on Course
Cartridges.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Instructors download Course Cartridges from the Course Cartridge Repository and install
cartridges into Courses.
How to Import a Course Cartridge
1.
On the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities, click Import Course Cartridge .
2.
Type the Course Cartridge Download Key in the field provided. Course Cartridge content
will be added to Course materials.
3.
Click Submit.
Note: The Download Key is obtained from the publisher. Without a Download Key, it is not
possible to add Course Cartridge content.
Copy Protection
Cartridges may be designated as Copy Protected or Open Access. Content in Copy Protected
Cartridges is not included in a Course Copy or Export. Only one Copy Protected cartridge may
exist in a Course. Multiple Open Access cartridges may be added to a Course, including a
Course that already contains a Copy Protected cartridge.
Open Access cartridge content added to a Course may be included in Course Copy, Export and
Import.
Download a Course Cartridge
Follow the steps below to download a Course Cartridge.
1.
Select a textbook with a companion Course Cartridge by browsing the Course Cartridge
Catalog, located at http://cartridgecatalog.blackboard.com/catalog/
2.
Obtain the Instructor Download Key from the textbook publisher.
3.
Begin the Course creation process.
4.
During the Course creation process, enter the Instructor Download Key obtained in Step
2.
5.
Click Submit to create the Course.
6.
An email will arrive when the Course Cartridge has finished loading into your new
Course.
How Students access Course Cartridges
Students must follow the steps below to access the Course Cartridge materials.
1.
Enroll Students in the Course.
2.
Instruct Students to purchase required textbook or other publisher provided materials that
contain the Access Key.
3.
When first accessing the Course content, Students will be required to enter an Access
Key. Once validated, Students will no longer need the Access Key.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Cartridge functionality
There are no restrictions on Open Access cartridge content during import, export, archive, restore
or copy operations. This content is treated like other content in the Course
Copy Protected cartridge content functions in the following ways:
Archive: When a Course is archived all cartridge content in the Course is saved with
the archive.
Restore: When an archived Course is restored by the System Administrator, the
cartridge content is included in the restored Course.
Export: When a Course is exported, cartridge content is not included.
Import: The only time cartridge content is included during a Course import is if the
package was created as an archive. Cartridge content is not included in exported
packages.
Copy: Cartridge content is always included in a Course Copy with Users (exact copy)
operation. The user has the option to include cartridge content as part of a Copy
Course Materials into a New Course operation or a Copy Course Materials into an
Existing Course operation.
Note: Content from only one Copy Protected cartridge may be copied into a Course.
Import Package and View Logs
An Import package is a .ZIP file of exported Course content. Importing a package into an existing
Course copies the content of the package into the existing Course. Import packages do not
include user enrollments or records, such as discussion board posts and assessment attempts.
Note: Never upload an Exported Course package that has been edited since it was created and
downloaded. Opening the .ZIP file and changing any of the files in the Exported Course package
will result in unstable and unpredictable behavior when the Course is imported.
How to Import a Package
1.
From the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities, click Import Package.
2.
Click Import Package.
3.
Enter the path to the Course package or Browse to search for the package.
4.
Select the option for the Course Materials to include.
5.
Click Submit.
Content Areas
Content from Menu Content Areas that have the same name in the package as in the existing
Course will be added in the same Content Area. Nothing will be removed from the Course and
replaced with Content from the package. Imported Content is appended to existing content in the
same Content Area.
Discussion Boards
Forums are copied, but only the initial thread in each forum is included.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Links
Links to parts of a Course that are not imported will break when the links appear in the destination
Course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a Content Area and Assessments are not
imported, the link to the Test is broken.
View Logs
To view the log of an imported package, click the package link in the Import Log Name column.
Options to Email and Download the log are available. You can also expand each log detail to
view more information.
Move Files to Course Files
Existing content can be moved from a local course directory to Course Files for a specific course.
When files are moved from local file storage to Course Files the resulting folder structure will
reflect the Course Menu structure. The folder structure can be changed after the file is moved. If a
file with the same name exists in the folder the name of the moved file will be incremented. For
example, Course_Assignment.doc becomes Course_Assignment(1).doc. Administrators can
make this tool available to Instructors through the Course Tool page located within Course
Settings.
1.
Access this page from the Control Panel under Packages and Utilities.
2.
The Source Course ID displayed is for the Course you are in. If you select the checkbox
below all the content in the course will be moved to Course Files.
3.
Select the Destination. Enter the destination for the items or Browse to search for a
destination. A folder will be created in this location
4.
Click Submit.
About Chalk Titles
Chalk Titles are Course Cartridges that are integrated with external applications and content from
publishers. Chalk Titles include both content and tools. Tools included in a Chalk Title connect to
an outside source to run each tool.
Chalk Titles are installed in the same way as other Course Cartridges. Like other Course
Cartridges, Chalk Titles require a download key and Student access keys.
Important features in Chalk Titles include:
Integration with the Course: Chalk Titles link Courses to applications running on the
publisher's servers. These applications are often popular tools that are familiar to
Instructors. Please contact the publisher for more information about the applications
included with a Chalk Title.
Single Sign-on: Users that are logged into the Course are logged into the publisher
applications linked to the Course. Users pass between the Course and the publisher
application seamlessly.
Roster synchronization: Users enrolled in the Course are automatically enrolled in
the publisher application.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
grade passing:grades from the publisher application are passed to the Course.
Chalk Title tools appear in the Tools area of the Control Panel after a Chalk Title is added to a
Course. Instructors can restrict availability to Chalk Title tools in the same way that they can
restrict availability to other tools.
The System Administrator may restrict the availability of Chalk Title tools in all Courses. By
default, Instructors can use Chalk Title tools in Courses.
Chalk Title Tools can synch with the Grade Center in a Course to report Student performance.
Note that Student attempts are stored on the server that runs the tool, not within the Course.
Therefore, Student attempts are not included when the Course is archived. The reported grade is
the only recorded information about a Student attempt.
Chalk Title tools will not work if a Course that contains Chalk Title tools is exported or archived
and later added to system that does not support Chalk Titles.
Troubleshooting
It is important to remember when reporting problems with a Chalk Title that Chalk Title tools and
content are linked to outside servers hosted by publishers. In many cases, the problem may be
with the publisher server. Make sure to let the System Administrator know that a problem is
related to Chalk Title tool.
Privacy Settings
To fully use links added to a Course by a Chalk Title, the user's browser settings must be set to
Accept All Cookies or to be set to accept cookies from Chalk provider‘s server.
If the browser privacy settings are set on Medium or High, cookies from third party content,
including Chalk applications, are silently blocked. Users will receive an error message when
attempting to access some of the links for a Chalk Title.
The privacy settings are maintained at Medium or High if the user specifically sets the browser to
accept cookies from the Chalk provider‘s server. Contact the Chalk Title publisher for additional
information.
Manage Chalk Titles
It is important to consider user privacy when making a Chalk Title available to Students. Outside
servers use personal information, such as name and email address to provide the tool and link
the tool with the Grade Center.
The Manage Chalk Title page presents options for controlling access to personal information.
Instructors can require Students to fill out an authorization form before accessing a Chalk Title.
Instructors receive a privacy notice when they first access a Chalk Title. This message is set to
display each time an Instructor accesses a Chalk Title. It is a good idea to display this message
each time if more than one user is responsible for teaching a Course.
Find this Page
Click Manage Chalk Title from the Packages and Utilities page.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Fields
The following fields appear on the Manage Chalk Title page.
Field
Description
Student Authorization
Does each Student need to provide online
authorization before that Student's personal
information can be displayed to the Publisher?
Select Yes to require authorization from
Students to release their personal
information to the publisher's server.
Instructor Notice
Show privacy notice to Instructors each time
they request a Publisher Resource?
Select Yes to display the privacy notice
each time an Instructor accesses a
Chalk Title tool.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Users and Groups
Instructors can manage the users in their Courses. For example, Instructors may:
add and drop individuals or groups of Students to and from a Course
create new users
create groups of users within in a Course
Some options for managing users may be turned off by the System Administrator.
Users
The Users page includes information on the ways you can enroll and edit your users.
Groups
Creating Groups
Editing Groups and Group Settings
Group Tools
Users Page
The Users page lists all users in a Course and allows the Instructor to manage their setting in the
Course. The Users page enables Instructors to change a user‘s role within a Course and edit
user Contacts. Instructors can also send email to a user.
Access the Users page from the Control Panel under Users and Groups.
Enroll Users
There are three ways to Enroll a User. These options are available from the Enroll User dropdown menu or the Batch Enroll button on the action bar.
Create a User: Users created in a Course are automatically enrolled in that Course.
Find Users to Enroll: Users that have an existing account in the system can be enrolled
in the Course.
Batch Enroll: Batch Enroll Users will add users to the Course and assign them a
Course role.
Other Functions
The following functions are accessed from the contextual menu next to a user's name.
Edit: Personal Information about a user can be updated from this page.
Change User's Password: The User will receive an email notification after the
password is changed.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Change User's Role or Availability: Select the role and availability. These options will
only affect the course in which you are teaching. Availability is displayed in the far right
column on the Users page. The column will state either Yes or No depending on the
availability.
Remove User: Select this option and confirm the removal.
Note: Deleting users from a course deletes all of the information associated with the users, such
as Grade Center information, Assessment and Assignment information and Course Statistics.
Discussion Board posts and received messages and email are not deleted. Deleted users and
their corresponding information cannot be restored to the course. However, it is possible to reenroll the user into the course without any associated data.
Create a User
Provide the required information and any other personal information you find relevant. Select a
Role and Availability for the user and click Submit.
For institutions with multiple information systems, creating users may occur in a different
information system accessed by a link at the top of this page.
Information about users is stored in a User Profile. The System Administrator determines which
the fields of data in the User Profile are displayed to users and which are editable by users.
Find Users to Enroll
Click Browse to search for users. Only users that are not already enrolled in the Course will be
identified in a search for users.
Located Users
The results of a search will display up to 25 names on a page. Searches that result in more than
25 users will display users on multiple pages. It is not possible to enroll multiple users who
appear on different pages. Instead, select users to enroll from a single page and click Submit.
Redo the search to select additional users to enroll.
Availability
Users who have been made Unavailable by the System Administrator cannot be enrolled in a
Course.
Users who have been enrolled in a Course but made Unavailable by the Instructor will not see the
Course in My Courses and do not have access to the Course. These users must be made
Available by the Instructor in order to see that they are enrolled in the Course.
Batch Enroll
Batch Enroll Users will add users to the Course and assign them a Course role. Users that do not
exist in the system will be created in the system and added to the Course. User data is defined in
a batch file that must be created outside the system. Common creation tools are text editors and
Microsoft Excel. Browse or enter the path to a batch file, select the Delimiter, and click Submit to
process the batch file and enroll users.
Information on Batch Files
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the system. Each
batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The following batch file
standards are universal.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Each file must be one of the supported file types: .txt or .csv. Note: Microsoft Excel
versions 2003 and 2007 automatically insert double quotes in every field if the
worksheet is saved as a .csv file.
Each file must be in DOS format. Files in MAC or UNIX format must be converted to
DOS.
Each field must be enclosed in double quotation marks. For example: "John"
If quotation marks appear in a field, use an escape character to indicate that the next
character does not mark the end of the field. The escape character is a backslash (). For
example: "\"NICKNAME\""
Each field must be separated with one of the following delimiters: comma, colon, or tab.
When selecting AUTO, only one type of delimiter may be used in each batch file. For
example: "John","Smith" or " "John":"Smith"
Each record must be on a separate line. For example:
"John","Smith"
"Samantha","Baker"
Do not include blank lines between records. The blank line will be processed and return
an error.
Blackboard recommends that each batch file not exceed 500 records because of timeout
restrictions associated with most browsers.
Creating Groups
Create formal groups of students to collaborate on work. Groups can be created one at a time or
in sets.
Groups are created from the Groups page accessed from the Control Panel under Users and
Groups.
There are two Create options available:
Create Single Group
Create Group Set
About Self-Enroll
Groups can be designated as Self-Enroll which allow students to join the Group themselves by
adding their name to a sign-up sheet. Adaptive release rules are applied to the content page link
which would provide the ability to limit the availability of the sign-up sheet.
About Manual Enroll
Manual Enroll involves the Instructor assigning each student in the Course to a Group.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Random Enroll
Random Enroll is available for Group Sets and distributes membership into Groups based on the
desired number of students per group, or the desired number of Groups. Random distribution
applies only to students who are currently enrolled in the course. Additional students may be
enrolled manually.
When naming a Set of Groups, the name of each group has a number added to it when they are
first created. For example, a Set of Groups named "Intro to Biology" results in groups named
"Intro to Biology 1", "Intro to Biology 2", "Intro to Biology 3", depending upon the number of
groups in the set. The group names are edited after they are created.
How to Create a Single Group
1.
From the Control Panel, click Groupsunder Users and Groups.
2.
From the Create Single Group drop-down list, choose Self-Enroll or Manual Enroll.
3.
Type the Group Name.
4.
Provide a Description of the Group.
5.
Select Yes to make the Group Available.
6.
Select the Tools available to the Group by selecting the appropriate check boxes.
7.
Type a number in the Points Possible field if the Grade option is selected for Blogs,
Journals, and Wikis.
8.
Select Allow Personalization to allow individual group members to personalize group
space modules.
9.
Choose the Sign-up Options for Self-Enroll. Select the Maximum Number of
Members. Select any other Sign-up options you want to include.
OR
Choose Membership options for Manual Enroll. Select the students from the Items to
Select box and use the arrow buttons to move them to the Selected Items box.
10.
Click Submit.
How to Create a Group Set
1.
From the Control Panel, click Groupsunder Users and Groups..
2.
From the Create Group Set drop-down list, select Self-Enroll, Manual Enroll or
Random Enroll.
3.
Type the Group Name.
4.
Type a Description of the Group.
5.
Select Yes to make the Group Available or select Sign-up Sheet Only.
6.
Select the Tools available to the Group by selecting the appropriate check boxes.
7.
Type a number in the Points Possible field if the Grade option is selected for Blogs,
Journals, and Wikis.
8.
Select Allow Personalization if you want to include the option for your students to
personalize their space.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
9.
Choose the Sign-up Options for Self-Enroll. Select the Maximum Number of
Members. Select any other Sign-up options you want to include.
OR
Enter Group Set Options for Manual Enroll. Enter the Number of Groups your want to
create.
OR
Choose Membership options for Random Enroll. Enter the number of students per
group you want to create or the number of total groups. Select an option to determine
how to enroll any remaining members in the groups.
10.
Click Submit.
Editing Groups
Edit a Group by selecting one of the following options from the contextual menu next to the Group
name.
Open: Opening a Group will take you to the Group homepage. From here you can add
Course or Group Modules and Customize the color theme of the page. If you have
selected allow personalization, the students will also have access to these options.
Edit: This option opens the Edit Group page. You can edit any of the initial options you
chose when the Group was created.
Email: Select this option to send an email to the entire group or selected members.
Delete: Select this option and confirm the deletion.
Group Settings
Group Settings are accessed from the action bar on the Groups page.
Group Settings provide the Instructor with the options of allowing students to create their own
Self-Enrollment Group from the Groups page and allowing students to edit the name, description,
and maximum number of students able to join the Group.
About Course Group Tools
All Group Tools are used the same as if the tool was being used in a Course. The only difference
is that the tool is only available to that specific group and the Instructor can set the Availability of
the tools they want the students to use.
For information about using the tools, please see Course Tools.
Available Group Tools include the following:
Blogs: Users within the group can post to the Blog and add comments. Instructors can
enable the Blog tool for use only within the Course Group, or can grant the public access
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
to the Blog. Blogs are graded for individuals or all the members of Course Group. See
Grading Blogs and Journals for more information.
Collaboration: Users within the group can participate in real-time lessons and
discussions.
Discussion Board: The Group Discussion Board is an area where Course Group
members can post messages and repliesInstructors can use this tool to encourage
discussions of course material outside of the classroom. This Discussion Board is
available only to Course Group members, not to the entire course.
Email: All members of a Course Group can send email messages to selected members
or the entire group. These messages are internal to the Course Group, they are not
available to anyone outside the group.
File Exchange: Students and Instructors can use this tool to upload documents to the
Course Group area and organize them through the creation of folders in which their
items are stored. Students can access this material in the course. Instructors have
access to all folders in their course.
Journals: Instructors can assign a private Journal to each user in a group to allow
private communication between the Instructor and the User. Journals are graded for
individuals or all the members of Course Group. See Grading Blogs and Journals for
more information.
Tasks: The Group Tasks page organizes projects or activities (referred to as tasks) by
defining task priority and tracking task status.
Wikis: Users within the Group can create Wikis and add comments. Instructors can
enable the Wiki tool for use only within the Group. For more information see Grading
Group Wikis.
Course Group
Tool
Description
Group Blog
Users within the group can post to the Blog and add comments. Instructors
can enable the Blog tool for use only within the Course Group, or can grant
the public access to the Blog.
Blogs are graded for individuals or all the members of Course Group. See
Grading Blogs and Journals for information.
Collaboration
Users within the group can participate in real-time lessons and discussions.
Group
Discussion
Board
The Group Discussion Board is an area where Course Group members
can post messages and repliesInstructors can use this tool to encourage
discussions of course material outside of the classroom. This Discussion
Board is available only to Course Group members, not to the entire course.
File Exchange
Students and Instructors can use this tool to upload documents to the
Course Group area and organize them through the creation of folders in
which their items are stored. Students can access this material in the
course. Instructors have access to all folders in their course.
Send Email
All members of a Course Group can send email messages to selected
members or the entire group. These messages are internal to the Course
Group, they are not available to anyone outside the group.
Group Journal
Instructors can assign a private Journal to each user in a group to allow
private communication between the Instructor and the User.
Journals are graded for individuals or all the members of Course Group.
See Grading Blogs and Journals for information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Group
Tool
Description
Group Tasks
The Group Tasks page organizes projects or activities (referred to as
tasks) by defining task priority and tracking task status.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grade Center
The Grade Center provides flexibility to meet the needs of basic and advanced users, institutional
requirements, and a diverse student population. Instructors can easily and efficiently perform
most Grade Center activities from a central view.
The Grade Center includes features to communicate and share assessment data directly with
students, parents, and institutional administrators. A reporting feature can assist Instructors and
other key stakeholders to understand student progress and make informed decisions to improve
performance.
The Grade Center is organized around a main page that resembles a spreadsheet. Each row is
populated by a user in the Course and each column is made up of assignments, tests, and other
items that can be graded. Columns can also be used for calculating grades. Grades are entered
directly on the Grade Center main page, the Grade Details page (where more information can be
entered), or the Grade Questions page which allows Instructors to enter grades anonymously.
Grade Center data can be downloaded and worked outside of the system. This data can then be
uploaded to the Grade Center at the convenience of the Instructor. Reports can be generated
from the Grade Center so students, parents, and other stakeholders can examine the
performance of any particular student or the entire Course.
This section is organized around the basic tasks that are performed in the Grade Center.
Features and Navigation
Setting up the Grade Center
Smart Views
Using the Grade Center
Saving and Reusing Grade Center Data and Settings
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grade Center Features and Navigation
The Blackboard Learn Grade Center is more than just a way to record students‘ grades, it is a
dynamic and interactive tool. The Grade Center can record data, monitor student progress,
communicate information to students, parents, administrators and other stakeholders. It is also a
valuable tool to assist in making informed decisions to take action to promote student and
institutional progress.
This section of the Instructor Manual summarizes how the Grade Center interacts with other
Blackboard Learn systems including Observers and Email. An overview of the major features of
the Grade Center is presented with links to more detailed information as well as how to customize
the Grade Center to display data in a variety of views.
The following topics are available in this section:
Features
Exploring the Grade Center
Grade Details
Customizing the Grade Center
Sharing Grade Center Data
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grade Center Features
The Grade Center is a central repository for assessment data, student information, and instructor
notes.
Interaction with other Systems
The Grade Center interacts with many systems in Blackboard Learn. Understanding how and
where these interactions happen provides a comprehensive view of the Grade Center and offers
information to help users take full advantage of the functionality and features of this tool.
The following table explains Grade Center and its interaction with other Blackboard Learn
systems and features:
Area
Interaction
Course Content
Assignments, Tests, Blogs, Journals, Wikis, and Discussion Board
items that are set to be graded automatically generate a Column in the
Grade Center. Items that have a due date are assigned a Grading
Period automatically based on that date.
For more information on adding graded items automatically to the
Grade Center see Adding Columns to the Grade Center.
For more information on Grading Periods see Creating Grading
Periods.
Early Warning
System
The Early Warning System is a rule driven communication feature that
can send email messages to students and their observers when criteria
of the rule are met. For example, a rule is set to send email to any
student who scores below a 60 on an exam. The score entered into the
Grade Center, whether automatically or manually, spawns the
message.
Observers
An Observer can log in and access their Observed Student‘s grades as
recorded and released in the Grade Center. This is enabled through
Course Settings.
View Grades Tool
When Instructors release grades to students for viewing, students can
access the Grade Center using the View Grades tool from the My
Institution tab. A list of courses the students are enrolled in is shown.
When students click the name of the course, they are taken to the
course‘s View Grades page of the Grade Center.
My Grades
Course Tool
When Instructors release grades to students for viewing, students can
click the My Grades tool within their course to access the View Grades
page of the Grade Center.
Report Card
Module
If the System Administrator has made the Report Card Module
available, students can add it to their My Institution tab. The module will
display the instructor's choice of each course‘s grade. This is known as
the External Grade in the Grade Center. A link will take students to the
View Grades page of the Grade Center.
Performance
Dashboard
Instructors and Teacher‘s Assistants can access the Grade Center
through the Performance Dashboard, where grades are viewed and
edited.
Email
Email is sent to selected students, all students, selected observers, or
all observers directly from the Grade Center. The Email link goes to the
Send Email page. For more information on sending email from the
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Area
Interaction
Grade Center.
For more information on email see Sending Email from the Grade
Center.
External data
from other
grading systems
Data is imported and exported to the Grade Center by uploading and
downloading delimited files.
For more information on importing data to and exporting data from the
Grade Center see Uploading External Grade Center Items.
Communication and Informed Decision Making
Instructors can take advantage of the many interactive features in the Grade Center to help them
stay on track and keep students informed of their progress. Grade Center data is used to identify
students and direct them to appropriate instructional activity such as remediation or enrichment.
The communication tools help students become more fully engaged in academic studies and get
needed help by alerting them to areas of poor performance. The reporting features facilitate more
comprehensive student and institutional assessment by displaying student data that is meaningful
to evaluating outcomes.
The following example illustrates how the different features of the Grade Center come together:
An Instructor has scheduled a unit test to be given to the class at a specific day and time. This
test is part of a standard curriculum for the subject matter and has been used in past courses as
a benchmark for evaluating student progress through required material. Students must receive a
score of 70 or better to be successful in subsequent course material.
In this class (section), the instructor has created a group of students who are not native speakers
of the language the class is taught in. The instructor has also created a group of students who
have transferred to the institution and may not have mastered all the prerequisites for the
material. These groups of students have been added to two Smart Views in the Grade Center so
that their data is viewed separately from the entire class.
The instructor has made the unit test, and decided not to immediately display the score to the
students in the course to ensure that the release of scores for the class occurs at a set time. After
the scheduled time for the test has past, the Grade Center signifies to the instructor that the unit
test has been submitted by the students and needs to be graded (this is not a fully automatically
scored online assessment). For each submission, the instructor is able to write comments. Some
comments are released to the students with their grades and some comments remain in the
Grade Center for the instructor‘s use. This is a direct and personal form of feedback that the
students can receive on a specific item.
As the instructor adds grades to the Grade Center for the unit test, students who scored below 70
and their Observers are sent a personalized email in the Grade Center, indicating that they need
to make an appointment to discuss the grade. One student who transferred to the course from
another section had already taken the unit test and was marked Exempt. (Students who are
exempted from a grade do not have that item grade figured into their final grade.)
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
After all grades have been recorded, the instructor opens the Smart Views containing grouped
students in the Grade Center. The information the Smart Views provide is used to recommend
targeted language remediation if necessary for non-native language speakers. It is also used to
gauge the pre-requisite knowledge of transfer students and make recommendations for
remediation or acceleration. This information is written in the comments section of the Grade
Center for future reference and is eventually passed on to the department administration to be
used for additional outcomes Tests.
A week after the unit tests are submitted and scored, the grades are released to students. A
student who received a personally unsatisfactory grade communicated concern to the instructor.
As a result of this conversation, the instructor changed the student‘s grade and several other
students‘ grades as well. The Grade Center recorded the grade changes in the Grade History,
leaving a record that details when and who changed a grade.
Students and Observers who received email notifications of low grades had follow up tasks to
ensure material was mastered and future success in the course.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Exploring the Grade Center
The Grade Center is made up of rows and columns of student information and items. Cells in the
grid contain data specific to corresponding students. All cells and column headings contain
menus for various actions. The user can access information, or navigate to other pages to
interact with the Grade Center.
The appearance of the Grade Center is completely configurable. For more information on
customizing the Grade Center, see Creating Smart Views in the Grade Center and Sorting the
Grade Center.
The Grade Center page contains the following areas:
Action Bar – Row containing a set of tools with their respective options.
Grade Information Bar – Row of dynamically generated information about a selected
Column.
Icon Legend – Information on the meaning of icons that appear in spreadsheet cells,
located on the bottom right corner of the page.
Grade Center Accessibility– Select the screen reader view for a more accessible view
of the Grade Center.
Note: New Courses or Restored Course will contain two created columns: a Total Points column
and a Weighted Grade column. The user must configure the settings of these two columns. For
more information about Calculated Grade columns, see Calculating Grades.
Action Bar
The following icons are located on the Grade Center action bar
Create Column: Used to create a Grade Column in the Grade Center. For more
information on creating Columns, see Adding Grade Columns to the Grade Center.
Create Calculated Column: A drop-down list with options for creating Calculated
Columns in the Grade Center:
Average Column displays the average for any number of quantities
Minimum/Maximum Column displays either the minimum or maximum grade for
a selection of Columns.
Total Column is a grade based on the cumulative points received, related to the
points allowed.
Weighted Column displays the calculated result of quantities and their
respective percentages.
For more information on creating Calculated Columns, see Calculating Grades.
Manage: Displays the Grade Center management options when the action link is
triggered. Selections include options for:
Grading Periods user-defined segments within the Grade Center that are
defined as Terms, Semesters, Quarters, Years, and so on.
Grading Schemas map scored items into a user-facing display.
Categories classifications of Columns of items such as "Test" or "Assignment".
Smart Views custom made views of Grade Center data created by Instructors
and saved for continued use.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Column Organization allows Instructors to change the order and visibility of
Columns as well as assign Columns to Grading Periods and Categories.
Student Visibility allows Instructors to hide or show users in the Grade Center
views.
Send Email displays the Email options when the action link is triggered.
Reports:
Select Create Report to access a page from which Reports for the Course are
created. For more information on Reports, see Creating Reports.
Select View Grade History to access a page where the Grade History of any
selected students is displayed. For more information on Grade History, see
Grade History.
Work Offline: Access features that allow Instructors to work with Grade Center data
outside Blackboard Learn:
Upload data into the Grade Center from an external source file.
Download data from the Grade Center in a delimited file format.
Sort Columns By: A drop-down list that displays possible column sort options:
Layout Position (default)
Categories
Due Date
Date Created
Points Possible
Display Name
See Customizing the Grade Center for more information on sorting columns.
Order: Toggle the data display in Ascending or Descending order.
Move to Top: Select the check box next to a user and click Move to Top to move that
row to the top of the Grade Center.
Email: Select the check boxes next to users in the Grade Center and click Email to
display the Email options.
Edit Rows Displayed: Click to enter the number of rows to display in the Grade Center.
Grade Information Bar
The Grade Information Bar row displays the pertinent information of the selected Grade Column
cell in the Grade Center. Depending upon the pertinent or entered information the Grade
Information Bar displays some or all of the following fields:
The type of grade of a specific cell is one of the following:
Weighted Grade
Total Points
Average Grade
Minimum/Maximum
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Override: If an Override Grade is entered, it will take precedence over all Column types,
and will display in the Grade Information Bar.
Grade: For more information on Grade Types see Adding Grade Columns to the Grade
Center and Calculating Grades.
The points possible for an item
The format of the grade. For more information on Grade Display see Creating Grading
Schemas.
If the Column is shown in the Student View. For more information see Sharing Grade
Center Data.
Icon Legend
Click Icon Legendto display the definition of the icons viewed in the Grade Center cells.
Grade Center Accessibility
In order to make the Grade Center accessible to as many people as possible, the Grade Center
is accessible by a Screen Reader.
The Screen Reader Mode displays the Grade Center data in a simplified grid. There is no inline
editing and no ability to freeze columns, making it easier to navigate by keystroke and to
accommodate screen readers. When the Grade Center is first accessed by users with screen
readers, users are immediately given a choice whether to enter Non-interactive view before
progressing any further.
Both the Screen Reader Mode and the Interactive mode can move the mouse pointer from
Column to Column using the Tab key. Cells within the Grade Center are navigated by using the
up, down, left, and right arrows on a standard keyboard in both views.
The Interactive mode allows columns to be frozen, and has inline editing capabilities.
To manually change the Interactive mode of the Grade Center to the Screen Reader Mode, click
Screen Reader mode in the help text displayed at the top of the Grade Center page. Click
interactive mode to return to the default mode.
This setting is not is not saved across sessions (persistent). It will last only as long as the current
session. Once the browser is closed, the view will default back to the Interactive mode.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grade Details Page
Access the Grade Details Page from the contextual menu for any graded item listed in the Grade
Center.
Note: To view the Grade Details page, a grade must be entered in the cell. If there is no grade,
the option to view Grade Details will not appear.
This page also serves as the main location for users with assistive technology such as Screen
Readers. All of the information associated with an item is viewed on the Grade Details page.
Changes are made where appropriate.
The following features are available from the Grade Details Page:
Navigation
Grading Tests by Question
Current Grade
Edit
Manually Override
View Column Details
Grade History
Icon Legend
Next Steps
Navigation
The current User and Column are displayed at the top of the page. Use the left and right arrow
buttons to scroll through all of the users in the Course or all of the columns in the Grade Center.
Click the Jump to button to use Column and User drop-down lists.
Click Return to Grade Center, located at the bottom of the page, to display the Grade Center
page.
Grading Tests by Question
The User and Column navigation features on the Grade Details page is useful when entering or
changing grades question by question. Instructors can examine and grade all the responses to a
single question for a test using this method.
See Entering Grades and Changing Grades for more information on this method of grading.
Current Grade
Current Grade displays the current score. Click Grade Attempts to edit the current grade or
grade another attempt.
Instructors can access all the attempts associated with this grade by clicking Grade Attempts.
See Entering Grades for more information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Edit Tab
View date submitted or saved, feedback and grading notes.
Use the View Attempt, Clear Attempt, and Edit Grade buttons to change grade and grading
information. Use the Delete drop-down menu to delete attempts.
Manually Override Tab
Use this tab to enter a new grade for the item. Type a new grade in the Override Grade field.
Feedback to User and Grading Notes may also be entered here.
The grade can be exempted from this tab by selecting the Exempt user from this item
checkbox.
View Column Details Tab
This tab presents information about the Grade Center column where this grade resides:
Column Name
Column Description
Primary Display
Show to Users
Included in Calculations
Average Score
Median Score
Grade History Tab
The Grade History tab displays all of the changes that have been made to this item. A message is
displayed if there is no Grade History information available.
Icon Legend
Click Icon Legendto display the definition of the icons viewed in the Grade Center cells.
Next Steps
For more information, see the following topics:
Calculating Grades
Changing Grades
Typing Grades
Grade History
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Customizing the Grade Center
All the Grade Center functions are initiated from the Grade Center page. This view is
customizable, giving Instructors the ability to sort items in ways to maximize efficiency and to view
student information with a minimum of scrolling.
Columns can be selected to be shown or hidden from the Grade Center to reduce scrolling.
Columns are categorized in order to filter or sort them together. Columns can also be assigned a
Grading Period to sort them together. Defining Categories and Grading Periods is discussed in
Setting Up the Grade Center and Planning Assessment.
The Grade Center, by default, lists Students‘ First and Last Names first. Students may be listed
by username or Student ID as well, depending on how the Grade Center has been organized.
Columns for items and calculations of sets of graded items appear across the page. Icons display
in cells to signify the availability of students, the visibility of items to students, and the status of
Gradable Items, providing a current view of the state of the Grade Center.
The ability to configure the Grade Center view, and the ability to manage columns and cells are
available through the Grade Center page, within the Action Link that corresponds to each cell and
column header.
The following customization options are available:
Customizing the Grade Center Workflow
Sorting the Grade Center
Showing and Hiding Users
Organizing the Grade Center
Showing and Hiding Grade Center Columns
Making Columns Visible to All Views of the Grade Center
Freezing and Unfreezing Panes
Editing Column Categories
Editing Grading Periods
Customizing the Grade Center Workflow
The following diagram illustrates a typical workflow an Instructor would undertake to customize
the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Sorting the Grade Center
To facilitate seeing Grade Center data in different ways, Instructors, TAs, and Graders may sort
all visible columns within the Grade Center based on different criteria including:
Categories – User defined categories or default categories to identify the type of item
such a "Test" or "Lab Report".
Due Date – Instructor defined date that a item is due.
Date Created – The date that a item is created in the system.
Points Possible – Instructor defined total number of points an item is worth.
Display Name – Instructor defined name for the gradable item.
Note: Sorting based on the criteria defined here is not saved across sessions (persistent). It will
last only as long as the current session. Once the browser is closed, the view will default back to
its default view.
Showing and Hiding Users
Users are hidden from the Grade Center View, reducing the number of rows in the grid. Hidden
users are not deleted from the Grade Center, and can be shown at any time.
Note: Any information that the user has chosen to remain private, such as their email address, is
not shown in the Grade Center.
To Hide users:
1.
Point Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center.
2.
Select Student Visibility.
3.
Select the users to be hidden.
4.
Click Hide Users.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
5.
Click Submit.
Users that are hidden are disabled on the Users page and do not appear in the Grade Center
View.
To Show Hidden users:
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center.
2.
Select Student Visibility.
3.
Select the users to be shown.
4.
Click Show Users.
5.
Click Submit.
Users that are shown appear in black text on the Users page and appear in the Grade Center
View.
The Grade Center can be modified to show one user at a time:
From the contextual menu next to the Last Name or First Name cell of the user you want to
show select Hide Other Rows. Select Show All Rows to view the full Grade Center.
Organizing the Grade Center
The Column Organization page aids in configuring the Grade Center display. The Grade Center
display can be customized to:
Freeze or unfreeze columns. If a column is frozen, when scrolling through the Grade
Center view, that column will remain stationary.
Hide or show columns.
Edit the Categories of columns.
Edit the Grading Periods of columns.
Some of these changes are implemented through the drag and drop capabilities of the page.
To change the display of the Grade Center, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center.
2.
Select Column Organization.
3.
Select the Grade Center column (displayed on the screen as a row) to be moved.
4.
Drag and Drop the row to the desired location using the arrow icon to the left of the
Column Name.
5.
Click Submit to save changes.
Once the display order of the columns has been changed, all new columns added to the Grade
Center are added at the end of the display order, unless associated to a particular Grading
Period. If a Grading Period is associated to a column, then the column will display in the Grade
Center within the Grading Period range.
If two people are editing the Grade Center Column Organization at the same time the changes
made by the first will be overwritten when the second person saves the changes.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Showing and Hiding Grade Center Columns
Instructors have the ability to hide any columns from displaying within the Grade Center. Hiding a
column from displaying maintains all existing information associated with the column, but
prevents it from being seen within the Grade Center. Hiding columns that are not currently being
used reduces the length of the grid, thus reducing the need for continuous scrolling.
Hide a Column
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the column to be hidden.
2.
Click the Action Link to display the contextual menu.
3.
Select Hide Column.
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization.
2.
Select the check boxes of the Grade Center columns to be hidden.
3.
Point to Show/Hide, select Hide Selected Columns. Hidden columns are disabled in the
Grade Center.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
OR
Instructors are able to show hidden columns along with all the associated data, restoring the
display in the Grade Center.
Show Columns
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization
from the Action Link menu.
2.
Select the check boxes of the Grade Center columns to be shown.
3.
Point to Show/Hide, select Show Selected Columns.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
Making Columns Visible to All Views of the Grade Center
Grade Center Views are customized using different criteria, one of which is Grading Periods (see
Creating Grading Periods for more information about creating Grading Periods). To maintain
consistency among different views of the Grade Center, some columns such as a final grade
column are selected to appear in every view of the Grade Center.
Columns listed under Shown in all Grade Center Views, on the Column Organization page,
appear in all views. To make columns visible in all views, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization
from the Action Link menu.
2.
Select the Grade Center Column, from the Not in a Grading Period table, (displayed on
the screen as a row) to be moved.
3.
Drag and Drop the row into the Shown in all Grade Center Views table.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
To delete columns from the Shown in All Grade Center Views table, follow these steps:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization
from the Action Link menu.
2.
Select the Grade Center column (displayed on the screen as a row) to be moved from the
Shown in all Grade Center Views table by clicking and holding any part of that row.
3.
Drag and Drop the row from the Shown in All Grade Center Views table to a table
below.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
Freezing and Unfreezing Panes
Grade Center columns are frozen in place so they do not move while scrolling through the other
data. The columns containing students‘ first and last names are frozen by default. Frozen
columns remain in position on the left side of the Grade Center while the rest of the columns are
scrolled through. This feature is used for example to easily match up individual students with their
data across the length of the Grade Center. Instructors can freeze and unfreeze any of the
columns on the Column Organization page.
If a user freezes more columns than will fit on the screen, the number of columns is automatically
reduced so at lease one non-frozen column is displayed in the Grade Center page.
To freeze or unfreeze a column in any of the Grade Center views follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization
from the Action Link menu.
2.
To freeze a column drag the bar that states, Everything above this bar is a frozen
column, below the desired row or drag a row above the bar.
3.
To unfreeze columns, drag the bar above the desired row or drag a row below the bar.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
Tip: To help ensure consistent views of the Grade Center, freeze any Weighted Grade Columns
and Total Points Columns.
Editing Column Categories
From the Column Organization page, it is possible to change the Grade Categories of existing
columns. A Grade Center Category is a classification of a Grade Center column for a course. For
instance, "Homework," "Test," or "Quiz" are possible Categories that can have Grade Center
columns associated to them.
To change a Grade Category through the Column Organization page, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization
from the Action Link menu.
2.
Select the desired columns to change.
3.
From the action bar, point to Change Category to, and select the new category from the
drop-down list.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Editing Grading Periods
In the Column Organization page, it is possible to change the Grading Periods to which columns
are associated. Grading Periods are segments that can help manage the Grade Center. Grading
Periods, for example, are defined as Terms, Semesters, Quarters, Years, and so on, and can
have date ranges that further define them. Grading Periods are not created by default. They must
be defined by Instructors, if you want.
To edit the Grading Period of a column, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization
from the Action Link menu.
2.
Select the desired columns to change.
3.
From the Change Grading Period to drop-down list, select the Grading Period for the
column.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Sharing Grade Center Data
Instructors can not only record assessment data through the Grade Center, but they may share
this data and other information with Teaching Assistants (TAs), Graders, Students, Observers,
and other stakeholders. The role of these users will determine what access they have to the
Grade Center and Grade Center data.
In order to share Grade Center data with other users, the other users must first be added to the
Blackboard Learn. In addition to being added to the system, some users will be required to be
added to the course, and some course settings will need to be adjusted. The sections below
provide basic information on how to share Grade Center data with other users.
Sharing the Grade Center with Teaching Assistants and Graders
Once added to a Course, Teaching Assistants (TAs) and Graders have the same access to
features and tools in the Grade Center as Instructors. TAs and Graders can view the Grade
Center data in many ways by sorting and filtering. For more information on editing the way data is
viewed see Customizing the Grade Center.
TAs and Graders can create unlimited Smart Views of their data that are saved and reused. For
more information on creating and saving Smart Views see Creating Smart Views in the Grade
Center.
WARNING! If multiple users are working in the Grade Center at the same time there is a risk that
one user's changes will be over written by another. To help avoid this situation, each user
working in the Grade Center can create and save Smart Views of their students.
Sharing the Grade Center with Students
Instructors control what Grade Center data is released to Students and when it is released. Any
Grade Center column can be shown or not shown to Students. Columns that are available are
displayed in the View Grades tool, the My Grades course tool, and can be displayed individually
in the Report Card module. Columns that are not available will not display in any of these places.
Grade Center statistics can also be made available to users or unavailable to users. If statistics
are available with a column, they will be displayed when the column is displayed.
There are multiple ways to make Grade Center columns available or unavailable to users
depending on the task or workflow the Instructor is engaged in. Follow any of these sets of these
steps below to control the availability of Grade Center columns.
When adding a new Grade Center column:
1.
To Include this Column in Grade Center Calculations, select Yes.
2.
To Show this Column to Students, select Yes to allow students to view the column in My
Grades, or No to make the column unavailable.
3.
To Show Statistics (average and median) for this column to Students in My Grades,
select Yes or No to hide statistics from Students.
4.
Click Submit to save selections.
When viewing the Grade Center page:
1.
Click the Action Link in the desired column header to open the contextual menu.
2.
Select Edit Column Information.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Change the availability Options for the Column.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
Sharing the Grade Center with Observers
In order to share Grade Center data with Observers, Observers must first have user accounts
created on the system with a system role of Observer. Next Observers must be associated with
Students enrolled in the course, and finally be granted access to the course.
Once granted access to the course, Observers can view available Grade Center data from their
associated Students. Grades are viewed by accessing the Observer Dashboard or using
Observer Tools within the course.
WARNING! To protect student privacy and comply with international, national and regional laws
and regulations, such as the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) in the United
States, review institutional policy and guidelines before releasing student information to
Observers or other users.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Setting Up the Grade Center
Instructors invest a great deal of time planning and creating lessons, matching lessons with
learning objectives and then assessing whether those objectives have been met. Assessing
learning objectives is done in many different ways, through exams, projects, papers, participation
and more. Assigning value to those individual Tests and configuring a grading schema to display
grades to students for a marking period or course is unique for every Instructor and for every
course.
Blackboard Learn includes a default Grading Schema with initial installation. The System
Administrator may edit this schema to reflect a general grading schema used at the institution. A
copy of the Institutional grading schema is included in all Course sections of Blackboard Learn.
Instructors can edit the pre-defined Grading Schema and save changes within their Course
sections. Instructors also have the ability to create additional Grading Schemas within their
Course sections.
Individual grades, Grade Columns and Calculated Columns can always be changed within the
Grade Center during an ongoing Course; though by planning out all Tests, attributing value to
them, and using those values to create a Grading Schema beforehand, Instructors can spend
less time editing and reconfiguring individual grades, and Students and other interested people
receive consistent grading information.
This section contains the following topics:
Grading Schemas
Categories
Grading Periods
About Grade Center Columns
Adding Columns to the Grade Center
Editing Columns in the Grade Center
Adding Students to the Grade Center
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grading Schemas
A Grading Schema is a diagram based on percentage ranges that matches scores to specific
grade displays. For example, a student‘s raw numeric score on a quiz that has 100 possible
points is an 88. In a Grading Schema in which a percentage of 87.5 to 89.5 equals a B+, this
score results in a B+. If the grade display Letter option is chosen, the B+ will display to the
Student. Grading Schemas may be edited or added to an ongoing Course and grades will be
edited to reflect the changes.
A copy of the system default grading schema is included in all Course sections. Instructors can
edit the pre-defined grading schema and save changes within their Course sections. Instructors
also have the ability to create additional Grading Schemas within in their Course sections to
reflect the multiple ways in which they may need to grade throughout their Courses.
The following options are available when working with Grading Schemas:
Adding a Grading Schema
Editing a Grading Schema
Copying a Grading Schema
Deleting a Grading Schema
Next Steps
How to Add a Grading Schema
When a Grading Schema is employed, and depending on the grade display option, the Grade
Center will translate the entry according to the Grading Schema and display the corresponding
value. For example, if a column is configured to display Pass for all percentages above 70%,
then, when the Instructor enters 89%, the Grade Center will display Pass. There is no limit to the
number of Grading Schemas an Instructor can create.
Upon creation, a Grading Schema is included as an option in the Primary and Secondary Display
option in creating a Grade Column or Calculated item There are already default grade display
options. For more information on creating a Grade Column or Calculated Column, see Adding
Grade Columns to the Grade Center or Calculating Grades.
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Schemas from
the Action Link menu.
2.
Click Create Grading Schema.
3.
Type a Name for the Grading Schema. The name is shown in the drop-down list for
Primary Display and Secondary Display when adding an item to the Grade Center as well
as on the Manage Grading Schema page.
4.
Type a Description for the Grading Schema. The description is shown on the Manage
Grading Schema page and can assist with identifying the Grading Schema.
5.
Type the Schema Mapping information. By default, any new grading schema will have
two ranges of percentiles from 50% to 100% and from 0% (zero) to less than 50%. For
example, a pass/fail schema might be set up like this:
Grades Scored
Between
Will
Equal
Grades Manuall y
Entered as
Will Calculate
as
50% and 100%
Pass
Pass
75%
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
6.
Grades Scored
Between
Will
Equal
Grades Manuall y
Entered as
Will Calculate
as
0% and less than
50.0%
Fail
Fail
25%
Click the Insert New Row arrow to insert a new row into the schema to enter additional
display values to the schema. Each Display Symbol must be unique in the Grading
Schema. The dash symbol "—" cannot be used as an entry. The dash represents a Null
value.
The percentage range given for each grade value must begin with the lesser value listed
first. The values must also overlap.
For example A = 90 – 100%, B = 80 – 90%, C = 70 – 80% and so on. Ranges must be
set up in this way to avoid gaps that could occur when a score falls in between two
numbers in the range. The range of 80 – 90% includes all grades up to but not including
90%. The top range does include 100%.
Click Delete Row to delete a value range (row) from the schema.
8.
Click Submit to save the Grading Schema.
How to Edit a Grading Schema
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Schemas from
the Action Link menu.
2.
Select the Grading Schema to edit and select Edit from the schema's contextual menu.
3.
Make any changes to Name, Description or Schema Mapping.
4.
Click Submit. Once submitted, all columns using the Grading Schema are edited to
reflect the changes.
How to Copy a Grading Schema
Once created, Grading Schemas can be copied and used again.
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Schemas from
the Action Link menu.
2.
Find the Grading Schema to copy and select Copy from the schema's contextual menu.
The copied Grading Schema appears on the list with a number appended to the name.
Copied Grading Schemas may be edited by using the steps in the section above.
How to Delete a Grading Schema
Instructors may delete the default Grading Schema only if they have made modifications to it.
Instructors may delete any Grading Schemas they created as long as the schemas are not in use.
Grading Schemas currently in use do not have a Delete button. Removing a Grading Schema
cannot be undone.
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Schemas from
the Action Link menu.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
2.
Find the Grading Schema to delete and select Delete from the schema's contextual
menu.
3.
Click OK.
Next Steps
Creating Categories
Creating Grading Periods
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Categories
A Grade Center Category is a classification of a Grade Center column of a Course. For instance,
"Homework," "Test," or "Quiz" are possible Categories that may have Grade Center columns
associated with them.
Categories are helpful in organizing and utilizing the Grade Center. An Instructor may sort the
Grade Center by a specific Category to compare how all the Students scored in the "Homework"
Category, for example. Categories may also be used when creating Smart Views (a saved view
of Grade Center data) comprised of a columns associated to specific Category or Categories.
Categories can integrate with Grade Center columns such as Weighted Grade Column, Total
Points Column, or Average Grade Column. For example, an Average Grade Column is created to
calculate statistics for all Columns that are in the "Homework" category. Gradable items added to
the course that are categorized as "Homework" will automatically be included in the average
calculation. For more information on creating these Grade Center columns, see Calculating
Grades.
Categories can also be used in the creation of a Report. An Instructor may create a printable
Report that displays Statistics of performance for all of the columns in a certain Category. This
information is used by Instructors to make decisions about instruction, planning, and assessment.
For more information on Reports, see Creating Reports.
It is possible to assign columns to Categories through the Column Organization page. For more
information, see Customizing the Grade Center.
Default Grade Center Categories
The Grade Center contains default Categories that are created by the Grade Center columns that
are created through the Blackboard Learning System. The default Categories are:
Assignment
Blog
Discussion
Journal
Self and Peer
Survey
Test
Instructors can create their own Course Categories, such as Labs, Group Work, Quiz, and so on,
through the Categories page.
Creating New Categories
New Categories are created using the Manage Categories page. The Manage Categories page
displays the default Categories and any other Categories that have been created. Each Category
displays the Grade Center columns associated with that particular Category.
To create a new Category, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Categories.
2.
Click Create Category.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Type a Name for the Category.
4.
Type a Description. The Description field can help differentiate Categories and explain a
Category‘s purpose.
5.
Click Submit.
Columns associated with a Category are listed on the Manage Categories page. To associate a
column with a Category, see Adding Grade Columns to the Grade Center.
Tip: Grade Center items that are not assigned a Category upon creation are automatically
assigned to "No Category". To avoid this, create Categories before creating Grade Center Items.
Having Grade Center Items associated with Categories is helpful when creating Smart Views. For
more on Smart Views, see Creating Smart Views in the Grade Center.
Editing a Category
Default Categories cannot be edited. However, any Categories the user creates can be edited. To
edit an existing Category, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Categories.
2.
Select the Category to edit and selectEdit from the contextual menu.
3.
Change the Category Name or Description.
4.
Click Submit.
Deleting a Category
Default Categories cannot be deleted from the Grade Center. Only Categories that have been
created by a user and that are not in use in a course may be deleted. To delete a Category,
follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Categories.
2.
Select the Category to remove and selectDelete from the contextual menu. The Delete
button is shown only for Categories that can be deleted from the Grade Center.
4.
Click OK.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grading Periods
Grading Periods are user created segments that can help manage the Grade Center. Grading
Periods, for example, are defined as Terms, Semesters, Quarters, Years, and so on, and can
have date ranges that further define them. Grading Periods are not created by default. If desired,
they must be defined by Instructors.
Defining Grading Periods and associating Grade Center columns to a Grading Period allows
Instructors to effectively organize and report on Grade Center data. Instructors can filter the
Grade Center by Grading Period to display only the columns in the segment. For example, an
Instructor may configure the Grade Center to display the First Quarter columns, reducing
searching and scrolling.
Grading Periods can also be used to:
View the performance of students in a certain Grading Period
Create a Report that displays the performance for a Grading Period
Calculate a Grade column for a Grading Period
Grading Periods can greatly assist with the organization and management of the following tasks:
Viewing and Editing the Grade Center
Creating Smart Views of the Grade Center
Creating a Report
Adding a Grade Center column
Creating a grade calculation, such as a Weighted Grade or Total Points Grade
The following actions are available when working with Grading Periods.
Creating a Grading Period
Editing a Grading Period
Deleting a Grading Period
Viewing a Grading Period and its Associated Grade Center Columns
Grading Periods and Column Organization
Grading Periods and Grade Calculations
Creating a Grading Period
WARNING! Grade Center items cannot be associated with more than one Grading Period. A
newly created Grading Period with the same or overlapping date range will override the settings
of an existing Grading Period. All items associated with the existing Grading Period will become
associated with the new one.
Create a Grading Period
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Periods.
2.
Click Create Grading Period.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Type a Name for the Grading Period. This is shown on the Manage Grading Periods
page.
4.
Type a Description. Adding a description to the Grading Period helps to identify and
organize different Grading Periods.
5.
Select theGrading Period Dates.
6.
Click Associate Columns to associate all Grade Columns and Calculated Columns that
were previously created with Due Dates to the corresponding Grading Period.
7.
Click Submit.
Editing a Grading Period
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Periods.
2.
Select the Grading Period to change and click Edit from the contextual menu.
3.
Make the changes.
4.
Click Submit.
Deleting a Grading Period
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Grading Periods
2.
Select the Grading Period to change and click Delete from the contextual menu. All
Grade Center Items associated to this Grading Period will be reset to "Not in a Grading
Period."
3.
Click OK.
Viewing a Grading Period and its Associated Grade Center Columns
To view the columns associated with a Grading Period, select the desired Grading Period from
the Current View drop-down list.
To maintain the Grading Period view as the default view, click Set as Default. The default view
can be changed as often as desired, allowing the user to set which view to open first. For
example, an Instructor can change the default view from First Quarter to Second Quarter when
the second quarter begins.
Grading Periods and Column Organization
In the Column Organization page, all Grade Columns and Calculated Columns are displayed in
tables. The top table displays all the columns that are Shown in All Grade Center Views. A
table for each Grading Period appears next. Any Grade Columns and Calculated Columns not
associated with a Grading Period appear in the last table Not in a Grading Period. If there are
no Grading Periods defined, the bottom table is labeled Shown in Selected Views Only.
Columns are associated with Grading Periods from the Column Organization page. To associate
columns to Grading Periods, to move them to other Grading Periods, or to disassociate them
from any Grading Period, follow these steps:
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar of the Grade Center, select Column Organization.
2.
Select the items to be associated or disassociated.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Click Change Grading Period to.
4.
Select the Grading Period to which to associate the column.
5.
Click Submit.
Grading Periods and Grade Calculations
Grading Periods are useful when creating Calculated Columns. For example, to calculate an
average grade for all columns in a Grading Period, create an Average Grade Column. Columns
associated with the Grading Period are automatically included in the average calculation.
1.
Associate Grade Columns with a Grading Period.
2.
Create a Calculated Column that includes all the Grade Columns in that Grading Period.
For example, all homework assignments that occur within a particular date range that are
associated with Term 1.
3.
Create a Calculated Column that uses a Total Point calculation and that includes all
homework in Term 1. As a result, this Total Points column will display the grade based on
a relationship of points possible to points given for all homework assignments in Term 1.
It is not possible to associate a column to more than one Grading Period. For example, a column
cannot be included in Quarter 1 and Semester 1 Grading Periods.
Tip: While it is not possible to associate columns to more than one Grading Period, it is possible
to create a column that calculates a final grade quickly and easily. For instance, if there are two
columns, Quarter 1 and Quarter 2, that display the grades for their respective Grading Periods,
then create a Semester column that uses Quarter 1 and Quarter 2 as columns in its grade
calculation. For more information on creating Grade Center columns for calculating grades see
Calculating Grades.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Grade Center Columns
Items that are added to Course Content such as an assignment or test automatically generate a
column in the Grade Center. Items that are not added from Course Content need to have a
column created manually in Grade Center. Instructors can manually create Tests, Quizzes, and
Class Participation columns, for example. These columns then may be displayed to the Students
and Observers.
Instructors can add items to the Grade Center automatically, manually, or through uploading. For
more information on uploading, see Uploading External Grade Center Items.
Automatically Generated Grade Center Columns
All items created for a Course through Blackboard Learn generate columns automatically in the
Course‘s Grade Center. These columns are eligible for use in all of the Grade Center operations.
The following items automatically generate a column:
Assignments – Assignments are added to Course Content and are graded manually.
Survey – Surveys are automatically scored. Surveys are included or excluded in
summary Grade Center calculations.
Test – Tests are automatically scored online, in which case the grade is automatically
entered in the Grade Center column. Tests may also contain questions that need to be
scored manually, such as an essay question, and require the grade to be entered
manually.
The following items: Blogs, Discussion Boards, Journals, and Wikis do not automatically
generate columns in the Grade Center. They must be set up for grading outside the Grade
Center.
Once created, columns and their parameters are edited by the Instructor. For example, columns
can be renamed, be associated with a different Grading Period or a different Grading Schema.
Instructors also control whether columns are displayed to Students and Observers.
Grade Center Column Functions
The following functions are available from the contextual menu for all Grade Center columns.
Function
Description
Quick Column
Information
Shows the Column Information in a small window.
View and Add
Rubrics
Shows the available Rubrics that provide guidelines for grading this item.
Rubrics can be created from the same window.
Grade
Anonymously
Enter grades for this item without knowing the identity of each user. See
Entering Grades for more information.
Grade Attempts
Enter a grade for an attempt made for this item. See Entering Grades for
more information.
Grade Questions
Enter grades for all of the responses for a specific question at one time.
See Entering Grades for more information.
View All
Attempts
Shows the View All Attempts page for the item. These attempts can be
graded, graded anonymously, or graded by question.
Edit Column
Shows the Edit Column page for this column. See Editing Grade Center
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Function
Description
Information
Columns for more information.
Column
Statistics
Shows the Column Statistics page for this column. The following statistics
are shown: Column Details, Grade Distribution, Status Distribution, and
basic Statistics such as Range, Average, Median, and Variance.
If the Show Statistics setting is not selected for the column, this option is
not shown on the contextual menu.
Set as External
Grade
Choose this option to display this grade in the Observer Dashboard.
Attempts
Statistics
Shows the Statistics page for the item. The following statistics are shown:
Name, Score, Attempts, Graded Attempts, Attempts that Need Grading,
and Instructions. Each question is shown along with its score information.
If the Show Statistics setting is not selected for the column, this option is
not shown on the contextual menu.
Download
Results
Allows the Instructor to download Grade Center data for this column as a
delimited file that is used in other applications such as Spreadsheet
programs or statistical analysis programs. See Downloading Grade
Center Data for more information.
Show/Hide to
Users
Show or Hide this column in the Grade Center. See Customizing the
Grade Center for more information.
Clear Attempts
for All Users
Shows a separate window where Instructors can clear selected attempts
for all users. Attempts can be cleared by Criteria or by a Date Range.
Sort Ascending
Shows the items in the column in an ascending order.
Sort Descending
Shows the items in the column in a descending order.
Hide Column
Hides the column from view in the Grade Center. To show the column,
point to Manage and select Column Organization. See Customizing the
Grade Center for more information.
Next Steps
Creating Columns in the Grade Center
Editing Grade Center Columns
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Columns
Items that are added to Course Content such as an assignment or test automatically generate a
column in the Grade Center. Items that are not added from Course Content need to have a
column created manually. Instructors can manually create Tests, Quizzes, and Class
Participation columns, for example. These columns then may be displayed to the Students and
Observers.
Prerequisites and Warnings
Primary Display: The format chosen is the primary or only (if no Secondary Grade is selected)
format displayed for this Grade Item in the Grade Center. The selections are based on the
Grading Schema, and there are default selections.
Entering a Score for Grade Column that uses the Primary Display of Percentage does not
calculate the Percentage. To calculate a Score‘s Percentage select Score from the Primary
Display drop-down list and select Percentage from the Secondary Display drop-down list.
How to Create a Column
1.
Click Create Column in the Action Bar of the Grade Center.
2.
Type a Column Name. This field accepts only 15 characters.
3.
Type a Grade Center Display Name. This appears as the column header in the Grade
Center. This field accepts only 15 characters in the column header.
4.
Type a Description.
5.
Select a Primary Display option from the drop-down list. The default choice is Score.
6.
Select a Secondary Display from the drop-down list. This selection displays the
secondary format for this Grade Item in the Grade Center.
7.
Select a Category from the drop-down list. This associates the column to a Category.
The default choice is No Category.
8.
Type Points Possible. Denote the number of points assigned to this column. Nonnumeric entries are not accepted.
9.
Set the Due Date. Select from the following:
None – there is no due date for the Grade Item.
Specify a due date for the Grade Item, including month, day, and year.
10.
Set additional Options for the column by selecting Yes or No for the following:
Include Column in Grade Center calculations – the column is included in the
possible selections of items when creating Calculated Columns, such as
Weighted Grades Columns or Total Point Columns.
Show this Column to Students – Grades are shown in My Grades, View
Grades, and the Report Card module when available.
Show Statistics (average and mean)for this column in My Grades –
Includes statistical information with the grade value when shown to students.
11.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
See Also (optional)
Column Types and Functions
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Editing Grade Center Columns
Once created, Grade Center columns are edited to reflect any desired changes. For example,
columns that are added to the Grade Center from an external file are added as text columns with
points possible equaling zero (0). These columns must be edited to be included in Grade Center
calculations.
See Uploading External Grade Center Items for more information.
How to Edit a Grade Center Column
1.
Open the contextual menu of the desired column header.
2.
Click Edit Column Information.
3.
Make desired changes.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
The following table describes all the fields that are used or edited for creating or editing columns.
Field
Description
Column Information
Column Name
Column Name is the formal name for the Item, and is displayed in
the Grade Center page if no Grade Center Display Name is
entered. The Column Name is referred to in all other areas of the
Grade Center, not the Grade Center Display Name. This field will
only display the first 15 characters in the Column header.
Grade Center Display
Name
This appears as the column header in the Grade Center. This field
only displays 15 characters in the column header. The Grade
Center page is the only area where this name is used.
Description
A description of the Grade Center column.
Primary Display
The format chosen is the primary or only (if no Secondary Display is
selected) format displayed for this Weighted Grade Item in the
Grade Center page. The options are based upon the Grading
Schema. They are as follows: Score, Percentage, Text,
Complete/Incomplete, Default Schema (Letter). For more
information, see Creating Grading Schemas.
Secondary Display
A drop-down list for the possible formats of the grade display; it will
display along with the Primary Display, in parentheses. The options
are based upon the Grading Schema. they are as follows: Score,
Percentage, Text, Complete/Incomplete, Default Schema (Letter).
For more information, see Creating Grading Schemas.
Score attempts using
A drop-down list of grading options for the Column. These include:
Grade of Last Attempt, Highest Grade, Lowest Grade, Grade of
First Attempt, or Average of Attempt Grades.
Category
This associates the Grade Item with a Category. A Category must
be created before it is selected. The default Categories include the
following: Assignment, Survey, Discussion, Test.
Points Possible
The maximum number of points possible for this Grade Item; or, the
assigned number of points for this Grade Item; this must be a
numeric entry.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Dates
Grading Period
The Grading Period to which this Grade Item is assigned; this will
not display if no Grading Periods have been created.
Creation Date
The date on which the Grade Center Column was created.
Due Date
None or Due On, including the month, day, and year; this
determines the date the Grade Item is due for those required to
complete the assignment.
Options
Include Column in
Grade Center
calculations
Includes this item in the possible selections of items when creating
Grade Item formulas, such as Weighted Grades or Total Points
Grades
Show this Column to
Students
Selecting this displays the Grade Center column to users.
Show Statistics
(average and
median) for this
column to Students
in My Grades
This displays average and mean statistics to Students and
Observers.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Students to the Grade Center
Students are added to the Grade Center when they are enrolled in a Course or Section.
Depending on the institution, enrollment is done automatically using data from the Student
Information System (SIS), by the Instructor using a batch command or singularly, or by allowing
users to self-enroll.
Note: Any information that the user has chosen to remain private, such as their email address, is
not shown in the Grade Center.
Tasks associated with adding students to the grade center include:
Adding and Removing Users from the Grade Center Automatically
Adding Blackboard Users Manually
Adding Non-Blackboard Users Manually
Adding Multiple Users to a Course
Batch Files
Removing Users from the Grade Center Manually
Add and Remove Users from the Grade Center Automatically
Students are added to and deleted from the Grade Center automatically for institutions that use
their Student Information System to populate Courses and Sections. Depending on when and
how information is updated from the SIS database and passed on to Blackboard, adding and
dropping students from the Grade Center may occur at different intervals. For more information
on integrating SIS data with Blackboard, see the Advanced Integration and Data Management
Manual available from Behind the Blackboard.
Instructors can add students from the Grade Center by manually enrolling them in their Course or
Section. To enroll a student, the student must be a user in the system. Follow the steps below to
manually add a student to the Grade Center.
How to Add Blackboard Users Manually
1.
From the Control Panel, under Users and Groups, click Users.
2.
From the Enroll User drop-down list, select Find Users to Enroll.
3.
Enter one or more Usernames. Click Browse to search.
4.
Select the student to enroll in the course.
5.
Click Submit.
Note: Multiple students that are listed on the page may be added using this method. To add
additional students that are listed on another page, first submit the initial students by clicking
Submit. Next, navigate to the second page and enroll those students. Multiple selections can only
be made on a single page.
How to Add Non-Blackboard Users Manually
1.
From the Control Panel, under Users and Groups, click Users.
2.
From the Enroll User drop-down list, select Create User.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Fill in the mandatory fields.
4.
Select the role of Student.
5.
Select Yes to make the student available in the Course,
6.
Click Submit.
A user that has been added to the system manually from the Course Control Panel will
automatically be enrolled in the Course and appear in the Grade Center.
How to Add Multiple Users to a Course
Users that have been added to the system manually from the Course Control Panel will
automatically be enrolled in the course and appear in the Grade Center.
1.
From the Control Panel, under Users and Groups, click Users.
2.
Click Batch Enroll Users.
3.
Browse to select the delimited file containing user records.
4.
Select the Delimiter Type.
5.
Click Submit.
Batch Files
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the system. Each
batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The following batch file
standards are universal.
Each file must be one of the supported file types: .txt or .csv. Note: Microsoft Excel
versions 2003 and 2007 automatically insert double quotes in every field if the
worksheet is saved as a .csv file.
Each file must be in DOS format. Files in MAC or UNIX format must be converted to
DOS.
Each field must be enclosed in double quotation marks. For example: "John"
If quotation marks appear in a field, use an escape character to indicate that the next
character does not mark the end of the field. The escape character is a backslash (). For
example: "\"NICKNAME\""
Each field must be separated with one of the following delimiters: comma, colon, or tab.
When selecting AUTO, only one type of delimiter may be used in each batch file. For
example: "John","Smith" or " "John":"Smith"
Each record must be on a separate line. For example:
"John","Smith"
"Samantha","Baker"
Do not include blank lines between records. The blank line will be processed and return
an error.
Blackboard recommends that each batch file not exceed 500 records because of timeout
restrictions associated with most browsers.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Remove Users from the Grade Center Manually
Users that are deleted from a Course are also deleted from the Grade Center. To delete users
from a course manually, follow these steps:
1.
From the Control Panel, under Users and Groups, click Users.
2.
Locate the users by searching or listing all users.
3.
Select the users to delete them from the course.
4.
Click Remove Users from Course.
5.
Click OK to confirm the removal.
About Smart Views
Smart Views are views of the Grade Center based on a variety of student criteria. This enables
Instructors to create certain views of the Grade Center—based on performance criteria for items
such as Tests or Assignments—that quickly track Students.
There are four different Types of Smart Views that specify the Student information:
Course Group allows the Instructors to select a Group, which was created in the
course. Groups are subsections created in the User Management Area of the Control
Panel. They are a collection of students selected by the Instructor.
Performance allows the Instructor to select Students based on performance
User allows the Instructor to select individual Students
Category and Status allows the Instructor to select from a full list of Student attributes;
this is a combination of the options of the other three Smart Views.
Custom allows the Instructor to create a query based on user criteria.
Once built and saved, Smart Views become a selectable list item on the Current View drop-down
list of the Grade Center page, enabling easy navigation from one view to another. Any Smart
View is saved as the default view of the Grade Center. The current default view can be changed
at any time.
Tasks associated with Smart Views
Favorites
Creating a Smart View
About the Formula Editor
Editing a Smart View
Deleting a Smart View
Viewing a Smart View as the Main Grade Center View
About Favorites
Any Smart View can be tagged as a Favorite to display in the Course Menu under the Grade
Center heading. Select Favorite when creating a Smart View to make the Smart View a Favorite.
When a Favorite is selected, the title of the Grade Center page includes the name of the Favorite.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Create a Smart View
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar and select Smart Views.
2.
Click Create Smart View.
3.
Type a Name for the Smart View. This is a required field and is shown in the Current
View drop-down list on the Grade Center page. It is also shown as a link to the Smart
View on the Manage Smart Views page.
4.
Type a Description of the Smart View. The description is shown on the Manage Smart
Views page.
5.
Select Add as Favorite to make the Smart View a Favorite.
6.
Select the Type of View.
Course Group: Subsections of students. Course Groups must be created
before they can be used as selection criteria.
Performance: Student performance on a single item such as a mid-term exam.
User: Individual Students.
Category and Status: Create a Smart View based on Categories and Grade
Status.
Custom: A query for selecting students using a combination of attributes.
7.
Select the appropriate Criteria.
Course Group: Select the groups to include in this Smart View.
Performance: Select the user criteria to include in this Smart View.
User: Select the users and columns to include in this Smart View.
Category and Status: Select the category and users to filter by status.
Custom: Select the user and their grade criteria to include in the Smart View.
8.
Click Submit.
Note: See Creating Custom Smart Views for more information.
About the Formula Editor
When building a Smart View using the Investigate type, multiple user criteria can be used. Criteria
are added as AND statements. As each criteria is added, it is assigned a number. This number is
reflected in the Formula Editor, which appears below the criteria. Each criteria that is added can
have a condition such as equal to, greater than, and less than. Each condition requires a value to
compare with the condition.
After all the criteria have been entered, the formula for the query appears. The formula can be
manually edited to change the operators and to insert parentheticals to change the way the
formula is completed.
How to Edit a Smart View
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar and select Smart Views.
2.
Select the Smart View to change and select Edit from the contextual menu.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
3.
Make the desired changes.
4.
Click Submit to save changes.
How to Delete a Smart View
Removing a Smart View does not delete any data from the system.
1.
Point to Manage on the Action Bar and select Smart Views
2.
Select the Smart View to remove and click Delete.
3.
Click OK to delete the Smart View.
How to View a Smart View as the Main Grade Center View
The default setting for the Current View of the Grade Center displays the Full Grade Center.
Smart Views are used to help sort the Grade Center.
1.
Point to Manage on the action bar and select Smart Views.
2.
Click the name of a Smart View to view the Grade Center through that Smart View.
This setting does not persist across sessions and will revert to the default Grade Center view
when the browser is closed or you logout of the system.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating a Custom Smart View
Custom Smart Views of Grade Center data are complex queries of student and column
attributes.These Smart Views are built upon formulas that include Criteria and Conditions. The
following table provides some guidelines for building these formulas.
Criteria
Conditions
Allowed Entries
Availability Status
equal to
Choose from Available; Not Available
Username
begins with; contains; or is
equal to
Text entries
First Name
begins with; contains; or is
equal to
Text Entries
Last Name
begins with; contains; or is
equal to
Text Entries
Student ID
begins with; contains; or is
equal to
Text Entries
Last Course
Access
equal to; before; after
Date entries
Group Membership
equal to; not equal to
Choose from all created Groups
Grade on Item
(Text)
Equal to; Not Equal to
Null; Exempt; In Progress; Needs
Grading; User defined
Grade on Item
(Complete/Inc)
Equal to; Not Equal to
In Progress; Complete; Incomplete;
Needs Grading
Grade on Item (all
other display types)
Less than; Less than or
equal to; Greater than;
Greater than or equal to;
Equal to; Between
Values in the Primary Display of the
column, such as Scores or
Percentages; numeric entries, or letter
or symbol entries based on Grading
Schema.
How to Create an Category and Status Smart View
1.
Point to Manage in the Action Bar of the Grade Center.
2.
Select Smart Views from the Action Link menu.
3.
Click Create Smart View.
4.
Type a Name for the Smart View. This is a required field and is shown in the Current
View drop-down list on the Grade Center page. It is also shown as a link to the Smart
View on the Manage Smart Views page.
5.
Type a Description of the Smart View. The description is shown on the Manage Smart
Views page.
6.
Click the Favorite check box to make the Smart View a Favorite.
7.
Select Custom.
8.
Select User Criteria from the drop-down list. For example, "Grade on Midterm" A full set
of available criteria is listed below.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
9.
Select a Condition from the drop-down list. The possible selections differ with each type
of item.
For Names, the condition must be set to either Begins with or Contains.
For Dates, the condition must be set as either Before or After.
For scores or percentages, the condition must be one of a number of options,
such as Equal to, Less than, Greater than, and others.
10.
Type a Value for the condition. A Value entry specifies the Student Criteria for the Smart
View; its entry depends upon the criterion selected:
Date criteria require specific Date values
Name entries require specific letter or name entries
For example, entering "60" as a value for a Midterm test would pull all students who
scored 60 or less on the Midterm test. For more information on manually entering and
editing queries, see Manually Editing Search Criteria Formula.
11.
To add a second Student Criterion, click Add User Criteria, and make additional
selections. Criteria are always added as AND statements. The formula for the query is
displayed in the Formula Preview box. To edit the formula manually, click Manually Edit
and enter a new formula.
12.
Select the Filter Results by selecting one of the following options from the drop-down
list:
Columns to Displa y
Description
All Columns
Select all Grade Center columns.
None
Do not select any Grade Center columns.
All columns shown to
users
Select all columns that are shown to users. Columns that
have been hidden are not shown.
All columns hidden
from users
Select all columns that have been hidden from users.
Selected Columns
Only
Select the desired columns from the selection list or list of
columns.
Selected Categories
Only
Select the desired Categories from the list of Categories.
Selected Grading
Periods Only
Select desired Grading Periods from the list of Grading
Periods.
13.
Click Include hidden information to include hidden columns in the Smart View.
14.
Click Submit to save the Smart View.
Example of a Custom Smart View Search Criteria
The following example illustrates the creation of Custom Smart Views with multiple search
criteria. Such detailed Smart Views can help Instructors build a comprehensive organization of
Grade Center data and then use that information to improve Student performance.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
An Instructor is teaching a course with two items that account for the major proportion of the
semester‘s grade, a Mid-term Exam, and a Final Exam. In the Course, the Instructor has two
Groups of students, Majors and Non-majors, as well as select Students in a group named At Risk
Students. This translates into five criteria:
Group
Value
Description
1
Mid-term exam grade less than 60 (failure cut off)
2
Final exam grade less than 60 (failure cut off)
3
Major group (Students who have a declared major in the subject the course is
related to.)
4
Non-major group (Students who have a declared major that is not the subject
the course is related to or who have not declared any major.)
5
At Risk Students group (Students who have been identified by student services
as at risk for dropping out of the program.)
The Instructor is interested in seeing which students scored below a 60 on either exam, what
group the Students are in, and if they are at risk. This data gives the Instructor information on
whether there is a difference in the failure rates of Majors, Non-majors and At Risk Students. To
enter a complex formula, the Instructor must manually edit the formula in the Formula Editor text
box.
The first formula the Instructor enters is this:
([1 or 2] and [3 or 4]) and 5
This displays all Students from the At Risk group (5) with scores less than 60 on the Mid-term
exam (1) or Final exam (2) with the group Majors (3) or Non-majors (4).
The second formula the Instructor enters is this:
(1 or 2) and (3 or 4 or 5)
This displays all students with scores less than 60 on the Mid-term exam (1) or the Final exam (2)
and are either in the group Majors (3) or Non-majors (4) or At Risk (5).
Looking at the Smart Views that these formulas generate gives the Instructor information on who
has failed either test, who in each group has failed one of the exams, and who among the
students who failed is at risk. More comparisons are made to see if Majors or Non-majors have a
greater failure rate, and if at risk students fail at the same or a different rate as majors and nonmajors. All of this data may help the Instructor decide that next semester the course should only
be open to Majors and those who have specific pre-requisites. The Instructor can also follow up
with the student services department with information on the at-risk students.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Using the Grade Center
During the span of a Course, different forms of data can be entered into the Grade Center. This
can happen automatically in the case of online tests, exams, and discussion board items, or it can
happen manually when the Instructor, grader, or TA enters grades directly or imports them from
an outside source. Grades are changed and recalculated as assessment data is entered and an
ongoing record of grade changes is kept for historical purposes. Other information about student
progress can be entered as well in the form of comments.
As assessment data is collected, it is formatted into customized printable progress reports.
Assessment data can also be viewed within the Grade Center in the forms of Student Statistics
and Column Statistics, giving Instructors information on Student and Grade Item performance.
The following topics are available in this section:
Entering Grades
Adding Comments to a Grade Entry
About Changing Grades
Grade History
Deleting and Reverting Grades
Exempting Grades
Uploading or Downloading Grade Center Items/ Working Offline
Calculating Grades
Column Types and Functions
Creating Average Grade Columns
Creating Weighted Grade Columns
Creating Total Points Columns
Creating Minimum/ Maximum Columns
Creating Reports
Viewing Grade Center Statistics
Sending Email from the Grade Center
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Entering Grades
Grades are entered into the Grade Center in a variety of ways. Scores from items that have been
added to the content of a course such as online tests, exams, and surveys are automatically
entered into the Grade Center. Grades from an external source, such as a Comma-separated
Value File or an Excel spreadsheet, are uploaded to the Grade Center, eliminating the need for
double entry. Other grades are manually entered into the Grade Center using any of the views of
the Grade Center.
Grading Multiple Attempts
If you are grading multiple attempts, the graded item must have been set to allow multiple
attempts when it was created. If the option for multiple attempts was selected, the option for
grading will appear on the Grade Details page. Grades for all attempts are tracked in the Grade
History.
Automatically Entered Grades
Tests that are added to the content of a Course and are scored online, automatically record the
grade for that assessment in the corresponding Grade Center column. Grades that are
automatically scored can be edited manually.
To edit grades see Changing Grades.
Manually Entered Grades
Tests that are added to the content of a Course can be edited to allow students to have multiple
attempts to take the assessment. These attempts are graded manually in the Grade Center.
There are many ways to manually enter these grades:
From the main Grade Center page
Anonymously from the main Grade Center page
From the Grade Details page
Anonymously from the Grade Details page
Overriding a grade from the Grade Details page
Grading Tests by Question
Instructors can enter grades for certain tools without having to navigate to the Grade Center.
Grading can be done within the tool if the item has been set to be graded. Once these grades
have been entered, they can be changed in the Grade Center.
Uploading Grades from External Sources
To eliminate repeated entry of Grade Center data in several tools, Instructors can work offline and
then upload grades into Grade Center. Instructors can upload grades from external sources such
as a Commas-separated Value or an Excel spreadsheet. Data must be formatted specifically to
upload correctly and be synched with existing Grade Center data. For in depth information on
uploading grades see Working Offline.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Enter Grades from the Grade Center Page
Grades are entered in any cell in the Grade Center or any Smart View of the Grade Center or
from the Grade Detail page.
To enter a grade from the Grade Center, follow these steps:
1.
Click within the cell to be graded.
2.
Type the value.
3.
Press Enter. If Enter is not pressed, and the user attempts to exit the entry cell or Grade
Center, a dialog box asks if the user would like to save the grade entry. Select OK to
save the grade.
How to Enter Grades Anonymously from the Grade Center Page
Instructorscan grade items in the Grade Center without viewing user information. The users will
be displayed in a random order, without any identifying information, to the Instructor for grading.
Anonymous Grading is helpful to reduce bias from the Instructor or TA when grading. This option
is available in the column header contextual menu on the Grade Center page.
1.
From the desired column header click Grade Anonymously.
2.
Type a grade in the text box for each question.
3.
Click Save and Exit to return to the Grade Center page.
OR
Click Save and Next to show the next user.
OR
Click View Previous to show the previous user.
How to Enter an Attempt Grade from the Grade Details Page
1.
From the contextual menu next to a grade, select View Grade Details.
2.
Click Grade Attempts.
3.
Type a grade in the Grade field.
4.
Click Save and Exit to return to the Grade Center page.
OR
Click Save and Next to display the next attempt.
How to Enter an Attempt Grade Anonymously from the Grade Details Page
Instructorscan hide user information from the Grade Details Page. Once an attempt has been
selected, the Instructor can hide the user information before grading the attempt.
1.
From the contextual menu next to a graded item, click the Attempt link.
2.
Click Hide User Names.
3.
Click OK. This action will open a new attempt with all user identification removed. Any
unsaved changes to the current Attempt will be lost.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Type a grade in the Grade field.
5.
Click Save and Exit to return to the Grade Center page.
OR
Click Save and Next to display the next user.
OR
Click View Previous to show the previous user.
How to Override a Grade from the Grade Details Page
The latest or only Override grade takes precedence over all other grade entries, including grades
entered for multiple attempts, and will display in the Grade Center. Any grade entered into the
Grade Center for an automatically generated Grade Column, such as an Assessment,
Assignment or Discussion Board grade, will be considered an Override grade.
1.
From the contextual menu next to a graded item, click View Grade Details.
2.
Click the Manually Override tab.
3.
Type a new grade in the Override Grade text box.
4.
Add any Feedback to User or Grading Notes.
5.
Click Save.
6.
Click Return to Grade Center to go back to the Grade Center page.
How to Grade Tests by Question
Instructors can grade all of the responses for a specific question at one time by using the Grade
Questions option. This procedure is used for entering new grades or changing grades. Grades
can be given anonymously by clicking Hide User Names on the Grade Responses page.
The test remains in Needs Grading status until all of the responses for all of the questions have
been graded.
1.
From the contextual menu of the column header, click Grade Questions. The Grade
Questions page opens. You can select the option to grade responses anonymously.
2.
Click the number in the Responses column to access the question.
3.
Click Edit next to the score for the user.
4.
Type a new grade in the Score field.
5.
Click Submit.
6.
Click Back to Questions to return to the Grade Questions page to select the next
question to grade.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Adding Comments to a Grade Entry
Adding comments to a grade provides a way that Instructors can give additional feedback to
Students on their performance. It is also a way Instructors can expand on grading decisions or
take notes for future reference or to share with other Instructors, TAs, or Graders.
Any grade entry can have comments added to it. Comments are entered either through the Grade
Details page or from the Quick Comments option in the Feedback to User or Grading Notes
fields. Comments entered into the Grading Notes field cannot be accessed by Students or
Observers.
How to Add Comments
1.
From the contextual menu next to a graded item select Quick Comment.
2.
Type comments in the Feedback to User or Grading Notes fields.
3.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About Changing Grades
Any grade recorded in the Grade Center may be changed by the Instructor, TA, or Grader of the
course due to the fluid nature of instruction and the different variables that can influence student
performance on assessment. When grades are changed, the new data is automatically factored
in to existing weighted, total points, or calculated grade columns, updating the information
immediately. Grades that have been edited are denoted in the Grade Center by a triangular icon.
Every time a grade is changed, an entry is made into the Grade History.
Override Grade Versus Edit Attempt
The Override Grade function is designed to ignore the results of all attempts and display the
grade as entered. For automatically graded tests, this is useful in a worst-case scenario, such as
if a Student is caught cheating. The grade is entered to reflect the incident regardless of student
performance on any attempt. This is also why changing an automatically calculated grade on the
page results in an override.
The edit attempt option is useful if a small error occurs. The Instructor mistakenly identified the
correct answer and wants to give Students that took the test before she caught the mistake an
extra 4 points. If multiple attempts are allowed and the Student takes the test again, they can do
so and the change to the previous attempt does not apply.
Override Grade in the Grade Center
Changing grades in the Grade Center was designed with the following scenario in mind:
An attempt is logged each time a Student takes a test. Since the item is automatically graded
each time an attempt occurs, a manual change to an automatic grade is most likely an override.
The Instructor wants the Grade to be X no matter what.
With a manual grade, the only time an attempt is logged is when the Instructor enters the grade.
Take a paper and a rewrite, for example. The Instructor enters a grade in the page for the original
submission. The Instructor thinks a rewrite is appropriate and gives the student a chance to
resubmit the paper. When the Instructor enters that new grade, the modified grade is entered as
an attempt. This creates a history and shows that the user resubmitted, not that the Instructor
gave a different grade to the same attempt.
Grade History
Every time a grade is changed, whether the score is overridden or new comments are added, an
entry is made to the Grade History. The Grade History acts like a log file that keeps track of all
the changes made to each grade entry. Grades that have been edited are denoted in the Grade
Center by a green triangular icon.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Grade History
The Grade History page acts like a log file that records all of the changes that occur to grades
within a Course. The Grade History page displays all the data for grade submissions for the
Course within a set date range. It is possible to manipulate the view and export the information.
The Grade History page is accessed from the Reports drop-down list on the Action Bar. Select
View Grade History to display the page.
The Grade History page displays the following columns:
Column
Description
Date
The date that the Grade Item was graded or had the grade changed.
Column
The type of columns associated with this grade.
Last Edited
By
The name of the last user to edit the grade. When clicked, the name will
display the Username and Role of the person who edited the grade. If the
score is entered from an online assessment, the modifier is listed as
Automatic.
User
The name of the user who is receiving this grade.
Value
The value of the Grade as viewed in the Grade Center as well as the type of
value and entry type, such as Attempt Grade, Override Grade, and others.
Attempt
Submitted
The date and time when the grade was edited.
Comments
Any comments added to the grade.
How to Disable Grade History
The Grade History feature may be disabled, so that no data is kept in the Grade History report.
From the action bar, click Disable Grade History. To enable the Grade History, click Enable
Grade History.
This is a System Administrator setting as well, and may not be made available to Instructors.
How to Change the View of Grade History
The Grade History page is filtered to display entries within a date range. It can also be sorted to
display items by column name, score, or date.
1.
In the Grade Center, on the action bar, point to Reports and select View Grade History.
2.
Select the data parameter from the drop-down list Show Entries from Past, including the
following:
1 Day
7 Days
14 Days
30 Days
6 Months
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
All
4.
Click Go.
5.
Click OK to return to the Grade Center page.
To sort items to display by order of a column, click a column heading. The column will display in
descending alphabetic, score, or date order, depending upon the column chosen.
How to Download the Grade History File
The Grade History is exported as a delimited file and downloaded to local machine.
1.
On the action bar of the Grade History page, click Download.
2.
Select the Delimiter Type for the file, either Comma or Tab.
3.
Select Yes to Include Comments or No to exclude them from the download.
4.
Click Submit.
5.
Click Download the save the file to a local machine.
6.
Click OK to return to the Grade Center page.
How to Clear Grade History
A Grade History is cleared, flushing all the data, by clicking Clear Grade History. This action is
final and cannot be reversed. To ensure that data is not lost, download the Grade History before
clearing it.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Deleting and Reverting Grades
In a course, an Instructor may need to delete a grade or revert a grade back to its previous state,
such as resetting a test to give a student who experienced technical problems another chance.
The Instructor may accomplish these tasks through the Grade Center. Grades that have been
deleted have the Override Grade and associated comments deleted.
How to Delete a Grade from the Grade Center Page
Grades can also be set to null by typing the NULL character in the cell.
1.
Click within the graded cell.
2.
Press DELETE or BACKSPACE to delete the grade.
3.
Press ENTER. If ENTER is not pressed, and the user attempts to exit the entry cell or
Grade Center, a dialog box is shown asking if the user would like to save the grade entry.
If so, in the dialog box, select OK to save the grade.
4.
Click OK to null the Grade Value. Grades that are set to NULL display a dash ( - )
How to Delete a Grade through the Grade Details Page
1.
From the contextual menu next to a graded item, select View Grade Details.
2.
Click Clear Attempt on the Edit tab.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Click Return to the Grade Center.
How to Revert a Grade
Grades that have been overridden are reverted to clear a previously entered override, and then
display the appropriate attempt grade if one exists. To revert a grade, follow these steps:
1.
From the contextual menu next to a graded item, select View Grade Details.
2.
Click Revert. A warning message appears asking the user to confirm the action.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Click Return to the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Exempting Grades
Instructors can Exempt students from any grade item in the Grade Center to take into
consideration students that transfer to a school, add a course late, drop a course, or require other
accommodations. Exempted items are not added into any statistical or total grade calculations.
Existing grades that have been Exempted are not deleted but are ignored in all total and
statistical calculations. No secondary display value is shown for items that are Exempt.
Exemptions entered for system-generated column are saved as the Override grade. Exemptions
entered for manually created columns are saved as the grade for the column when no Override
grade exists.
How to Exempt a Grade from the Grade Center Page
Students are Exempted from a grade from the Grade Center page or the Grade Details page.
When a grade has been Exempted, it will display an Exempted icon in the cell of the exempted
grade. Comments are added to any exempted grade.
From the contextual menu for the item, select Exempt Grade.
How to Exempt a Grade from the Grade Detail Page
1.
From the contextual menu next to the item, select View Grade Details.
2.
Move to the Manually Override tab.
3.
Select Exempt user from this item. Enter any feedback or grading notes.
4.
Click Save.
How to Clear the Exemption
From the contextual menu next to the Exempted item, select Clear Exemption.
How to Add Comments to an Exemption
1.
From the contextual menu next to the Exempted item, select Quick Comment.
2.
Type in the comments in the Feedback to User and Grading Notes fields.
3.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Uploading or Downloading Grade Center Items/ Working Offline
To eliminate double entry of Grade Center data in several tools, Instructors can do off-line
grading, and then import grades into Grade Center. Instructors can upload grades from external
sources such as an Excel spreadsheet or a Comma-separated Value file. Data must be formatted
very specifically to upload correctly and be synched with existing Grade Center data.
How to Upload a File to the Grade Center
How to Download Grades from the Grade Center
How to Download Grade History Data
Formatting External Files for Uploading
To synch external data to Grade Center data, unique identifiers are necessary for each Student
and for each column in the Grade Center. The unique identifier used for each Student is the
Student's User Name. The unique identifier for each column is a Column ID number. Column ID
numbers are generated by the system and should not be changed or deleted. Columns that do
not have Column ID numbers in an uploaded file will create new columns in the Grade Center.
WARNING! Columns that are added to the Grade Center from an external file are added as text
columns with points possible equaling zero (0). Text columns cannot be included in Calculated
Columns such as Weighted Grade, Total Points, Average Grade, and Minimum/Maximum grades
(for more information, see Calculating Grades). Convert text columns to other columns types and
add points possible by editing the column after the upload. For information on editing columns
see Editing Grade Center Columns.
Each data file uploaded to the Grade Center requires a header row with one record per line
subsequently.
The format of the data file uploaded to the Grade Center is determined by the type of delimiter
that is used to parse the data into separate columns. Data files are tab delimited with a file
extension of .xls, or comma delimited with a file extension of .CSV.
Data in each column of comma-delimited files (file extension of .CSV) must be contained within a
quote character, the most common being quotation marks ( " " ). Data in each column of tabdelimited files does not require a quote character.
Tips for Working with External Data
Blackboard recommends using tab-delimited files for uploading onto the Grade Center to avoid
having to use quote characters and because tab-delimited files open directly in Microsoft Excel.
Tab-delimited files will also open directly in Microsoft Excel.
To obtain a file that is formatted correctly for uploading, download the full Grade Center first and
open it in a text editor or spreadsheet application. Existing columns will have Column ID numbers
that must be included in future uploads. For instructions on how to download the Grade Center
see Downloading Grades from the Grade Center.
Batch File Standards
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the system. Each
batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The following batch file
standards are universal.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Each file must be one of the supported file types: .txt or .csv. Note: Microsoft Excel
versions 2003 and 2007 automatically insert double quotes in every field if the
worksheet is saved as a .csv file.
Each file must be in DOS format. Files in MAC or UNIX format must be converted to
DOS.
Each field must be enclosed in double quotation marks. For example: "ENG_201"
If quotation marks appear in a field, use an escape character to indicate that the next
character does not mark the end of the field. The escape character is a backslash (\).
For example: "\"ENG_201\""
Each field must be separated with one of the following delimiters: comma, colon, or tab.
When selecting AUTO, only one type of delimiter may be used in each batch file. For
example: "ENG_201","English Literature" or " "ENG_201":"English Literature"
Each record must be on a separate line. For example:
"ENG_201","English Literature"
"ENG_201","English Literature"
Do not include blank lines between records. The blank line will be processed and return
an error.
Blackboard recommends that each batch file not exceed 500 records because of timeout
restrictions associated with most browsers.
How to Upload a File to the Grade Center
1.
From the action bar of the Grade Center, point to Work Offline and select Upload.
2.
Browse for the file. Files are uploaded from a local computer or if available, from the
Content Management.
3.
Select the Delimiter Type, Comma, Tab, or Auto. Auto will attempt to automatically
detect the delimiter used in the selected file.
4.
Click Submit to upload the selected file.
5.
Review the list of data from the file to be uploaded on the Upload Grades Confirmation
page. Use the check boxes to de-select any data to be excluded from the upload. Using
this method, it is possible to upload only the desired columns of data from the file.
Review the Data Preview Column to ensure the correct data is being uploaded. Data that
appears incorrect can denote an improperly formatted file. The Data Preview will only
show a sample of the data in each column in the file.
6.
Large files take significant time to process and a warning message will be displayed for
any files that need extra time to process. To avoid long processing times, break up large
files into separate uploads.
7.
Click Submit to confirm and upload the file.
Note: Any file uploaded that contains Incomplete for a grade entry will be set to null, with no
grade or text displayed. Any file uploaded that contains Complete for a grade entry will be set to
an Override Grade of the maximum points possible (100% for a Grade Item) in a column that has
the Primary Display of Complete/Incomplete. Any file uploaded that contains a numeric entry will
be a numeric entry.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Download Grades from the Grade Center
1.
From the action bar of the Grade Center, point to Work Offline and select Download.
2.
Select the data to download:
Option
Description
Full Grade
Center
Contains all columns and associated data
Selected
Grading Period
From the drop-down list, select a Grading Period. Grading
Periods must be created before they are chosen. For more
information, see Creating Grading Periods.
Selected
Column
Using the drop-down list, select one column and its data. Check
the box to Include comments for this Column.
User
Information
Only
Columns containing student data such as User Name are
included.
3.
Select the file delimiter, Comma or Tab.
4.
Select whether to Include Hidden Information in the downloaded data. Hidden
information includes columns and students that have been hidden from the view in the
downloaded file.
5.
Select the location for the download. Click Browse to select the folder in Content
Management.
6.
Click Submit to finish the download.
How to Download Grade History Data
1.
Point to Reports in the Action Bar and select View Grade History.
2.
Click Download from the Grade History page.
3.
Select the Delimiter Type for the file.
4.
Select Yes to Include Comments or No to exclude them from the download.
5.
Click Submit.
6.
Click Download to save the file to a local machine.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Calculating Grades
In the Grade Center, an Instructor can calculate grades by combining multiple columns to attain
performance results, such as class averages, final grades that are based on a weighted scale, or
total points. These are called Calculated Columns. These columns, which display performance
results, are displayed to students or remain accessible to only the Instructor, TA, and Grader. The
possible Calculated Columns include the following:
Weighted Grade
Average
Total
Minimum/Maximum
New Courses or Restored Course contain two created columns: a Total Points column and a
Weighted Grade column. The user must configure the settings of these columns.
Next Steps
Creating Average Grade Columns
Creating Weighted Grade Columns
Creating Total Points Columns
Creating Minimum/Maximum Columns
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Column Types and Functions
All items created for a Course through Blackboard Learn automatically generate columns in the
Grade Center. These columns are eligible for use in all Grade Center operations. The following
Content items automatically generate a column:
Assignments – Assignments are added to Course Content and are graded manually.
Survey – Surveys are automatically scored. Surveys are included or excluded in
summary Grade Center calculations.
Test – Tests are automatically scored online, in which case the grade is automatically
entered in the Grade Center column. Tests may also contain questions that need to be
scored manually, such as an essay question, and require the grade to be entered
manually.
The following items: Blogs, Discussion Boards, Journals, and Wikis, do not automatically
generate columns in the Grade Center. They must be set up for grading outside the Grade
Center.
Once created, columns and their parameters are edited by the Instructor. For example, columns
can be renamed, be associated with a different Grading Period or a different Grading Schema.
Instructors also control whether columns are displayed to Students and Observers.
Grade Center Column Functions
The following functions are available from the contextual menu for all Grade Center columns.
Open the contextual menu in the column header on the Grade Center page.
Function
Description
Quick Column
Information
Shows the Column Information in a small window.
View and Add
Rubrics
Shows the available Rubrics that provide guidelines for grading this item.
Rubrics can be created from the same window.
Grade
Anonymously
Enter grades for this item without knowing the identity of each user.
Grade Attempts
Enter a grade for an attempt made for this item.
Grade Questions
Enter grades for all of the responses for a specific question at one time.
View All Attempts
Shows the View All Attempts page for the item. These attempts can be
graded, graded anonymously, or graded by question.
Edit Column
Information
Shows the Edit Column page for this column.
Column Statistics
Shows the Column Statistics page for this column. The following
statistics are shown: Column Details, Grade Distribution, Status
Distribution, and basic Statistics such as Range, Average, Median, and
Variance.
If the Show Statistics setting is not selected for the column, this option is
not shown on the contextual menu.
Set as External
Grade
Choose this option to display this grade in the Observer Dashboard.
Attempts
Statistics
Shows the Statistics page for the item. The following statistics are shown:
Name, Score, Attempts, Graded Attempts, Attempts that Need Grading,
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Function
Description
and Instructions. Each question is shown along with its score information.
If the Show Statistics setting is not selected for the column, this option is
not shown on the contextual menu.
Download
Results
Allows the Instructor to download Grade Center data for this column as a
delimited file that is used in other applications such as Spreadsheet
programs or statistical analysis programs.
Show/Hide to
Users
Show or Hide this column in the Grade Center.
Clear Attempts
for All Users
Shows a separate window where Instructors can clear selected attempts
for all users. Attempts can be cleared by Criteria or by a Date Range.
Sort Ascending
Shows the items in the column in an ascending order.
Sort Descending
Shows the items in the column in a descending order.
Hide Column
Hides the column from view in the Grade Center. To show the column,
point to Manage and select Column Organization.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Average Grade Columns
An Average Grade column displays the average for any number of quantities. An Average Grade
Column can include any the following non-text columns:
All Grade Columns – All individual Grade columns added to the Grade Center.
All Grade Columns in a Grading Period – All Grade columns that have been added to
a Grading Period.
Selected Columns and Categories – Any Grade columns and any or all Categories.
For example, an Instructor can display the average for all Tests, or display the average grade for
each Student for a grading period. Any Columns with Text as the primary display cannot be
averaged.
Any Categories that contain items that are set to No for the Include in Grade Center calculations
setting will ignore those items when figuring the Average Grade.
Creating an Average Grade Column
Tip: To keep a Calculated Column in view, despite the addition of other columns, freeze the
column. For more information on this, see Freezing Columns.
1.
From the action bar, point to Create Calculated Column, select Average Column.
2.
Type a Column Name. The Column Name is the formal name for the Item, and is
displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade Center Display Name is entered. This field
will only display the first 15 characters in the Column header.
3.
Type a Grade Center Display Name. This appears as the column header in the Grade
Center. This field will display 15 characters in the column header. The Grade Center is
the only area where this name is used.
4.
Type a Description. A description will help Instructors and other graders identify the
column.
5.
Select a Primary Display option from the drop-down list. The format chosen is the
primary or only (if no Secondary Display is selected) format displayed for this Average
Grade column in the Grade Center.
6.
Select a Secondary Display from the drop-down list. This selection displays the
secondary format for this Average Grade column in the Grade Center. The Secondary
Display is denoted by parentheses.
7.
Select a Grading Period from the drop-down list. This will designate to what Grading
Period the column is attributed. Note: Grading Period and the drop-down list will not
display unless Grading Periods have previously been created. For more information on
Grading Periods, see Creating Grading Periods.
8.
Select the columns to be included in the Average Grade column. Possible selections
include:
All Grade Columns
All Grade Columns in Grading Period – Select a Grading Period from the
drop-down list; this will only display if a Grading Period has been created.
Selected Columns and Categories – Select the Items from the text box and
click the arrow.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Columns to Select – A list of all Columns in the Grade Center. Select
the Column and click the arrow to add it to the Average Grade column.
Categories to Select – A list of all Categories in the Grade Center.
Select the category and click the arrow to add it to the Average Grade
column.
9.
Configure the following options for any selected Category:
Select a Grading Period for the Category using the drop-down list. Only
columns within the selected Grading Period will be included in the Weighted
Grade.
Select how to weigh columns within the Category Equally or Proportionally.
Choosing Equally applies equal value to all Columns within a Category.
Choosing Proportionally applies the appropriate value to a Grade Item based
on its points compared to other columns in the Category.
Decide whether to Drop Highest or Lowest Grades within the Category or Use
only the Lowest or Highest Value to Calculate in the category.
Note: A Grade Column that is set to "no" for the Include in Grade Center Score
Calculations setting is not shown in the selection list.
10.
Calculate as a running total – Select Yes to calculate the weight as a running total to
include only the Columns that have been graded. Select No to include all items.
11.
Share Average Grade column with users. The following selections are made to share
column information with users:
Include this Column in Grade Center Calculations – Makes the Column
available for use in other calculations.
Show this Column to Students – Shows the column in My Grades.
Show Statistics (average and median) for this column to Students in My
Grades– Shows the Weighted Grade column statistics in My Grades.
12.
Click Submit.
The following table explains all of the fields in the Add or Edit Average Grade column page:
Field
Description
Column Information
Column Name
A required field, Column Name is the formal name for the Item,
and is displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade Center
Display Name is entered. This field will display 15 characters
in the column header.
Grade Center Display
Name
This appears as the column header in the Grade Center. This
field will only display the first 15 characters in the column
header.
Description
A description of the Grade Center Average Grade column.
Primary Display
The primary grade format displayed in the Grade Center.
Based upon the Grading Schema, the display is a Score,
Percentage, Text, Complete/Incomplete, Default Schema
(Letter), or any other defined Grading Schema.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Secondary Display
A parenthetical display of a grade format, next to the primary
display in the Grade Center. The default options are the same
as the Primary Display selections.
Dates
Grading Period
The Grading Period to which this Average Grade Column is
assigned. A Grading Period must have been created for it to
display.
Date Created
The date on which the Grade Center Average Grade column
was created.
Select Columns
Include in Average
The Grade Center columns or Categories to be included in the
Average Grade Column.
All Grade Columns
Includes all of the columns created in the Grade Center.
All Grade Columns in
Grading Period
Includes all of the columns in a particular Grading Period.
Selected Columns and
Categories
Displays the possible columns and Categories to be included
in the Average Grade column.
Columns to Select
All of the possible Grade Center columns to select for the
Average Grade column.
Selected Columns
The Grade Center columns that have been selected for the
Average calculation.
Column Information
Displays the information for the Grade Center column
selected, including the Category of the column, and the Points
Possible.
Categories to Select
All of the possible Categories to be included in the Average
Grade calculation.
Category Information
Displays all of the selected Category‘s Grade columns.
Include this Column in
Grade Center calculations
Selecting this includes the column in other Grade Center
calculations.
Show this Column to
Students
Selecting this displays the Grade Center Average Grade
column to users.
Show Statistics (average
and median) for this
column to Students in My
Grades
Shows the Average Grade column statistics in My Grades.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Weighted Grade Columns
A Weighted Grade is a Calculated Column that displays the calculated result of quantities and
their respective percentages. A Weighted Grade is displayed as a column in the Grade Center.
Instructors control the visibility of the column in the Grade Center as well as controlling the
release of the column to students and other users.
For example, an Instructor may create a Weighted Grade column that calculates a quarterly
grade (grade for one quarter of the year), in which each Category, such as Test, Survey, and
Assignment are given a certain percentage of the final quarter's grade. Alternatively, the
Instructor may create a Weighted Grade that is the final grade for a course, with the quarters and
exams included in the Weighted Grade.
Instructors can create any number of Weighted Grade columns, including Weighted Grade
columns that include other Weighted Grade columns. For example
(Quiz = 20%) + (Homework = 10%) + (Participation = 20%) + (Exam = 50%) = (Quarter Grade)
(Quarter 1 = 25%) + (Quarter 2 = 25%) + (Quarter 3 = 25%) + (Quarter 4 = 25%) = (Year Grade)
Instructors can create a Weighted Grade based on any column, or any Category in the Grade
Center. Any Grade Center columns with text as the primary display cannot be used in the
Weighted Grade calculation.
Simple Weighted Grade Workflow
The following diagram displays the workflow for creating a Weighted Grade column based on four
(4) columns:
Mid-term Exam = 20%
Final Exam = 30%
Assignments Category = 25%
Quizzes Category = 25%
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Weighted Grade for a Grading Period Workflow
The following diagram displays the workflow for creating a Weighted Grade column for a Grading
Period, called "Term 1" based on three (3) columns:
Tests Category = 20%
Assignments Category = 50%
Discussion Category = 30%
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Create a Weighted Grade Column
Tip: To keep a Calculated Column in view, despite the addition of other columns, freeze the
column. For more information on this, see Freezing Columns.
1.
On the action bar, point to Create Calculated Column and select Weighted Column.
2.
Type a Column Name. The Column Name is the formal name for the Item, and is
displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade Center Display Name is entered. This field
will only display the first 15 characters in the column header.
3.
Type a Grade Center Display Name. This appears as the column header in the Grade
Center. This field displays 15 characters in the column header. The Grade Center is the
only area where this name is used.
4.
Type a Description. A description will help Instructors and other graders identify the
Column.
5.
Select a Primary Display option from the drop-down list. The format chosen is the
primary or only (if no Secondary Display is selected) format displayed for this Weighted
Grade Item in the Grade Center.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
6.
Select a Secondary Display from the drop-down list. This selection displays the
secondary format for this Weighted Grade column in the Grade Center. The Secondary
Display is denoted by parentheses.
7.
Select a Grading Period from the drop-down list. This will designate to what Grading
Period the column is associated.
Note: Grading Period and the drop-down list will not display unless Grading Periods have
previously been created. For more information on Grading Periods, see Creating Grading
Periods.
8.
Select the items to be included in the Weighted Grade Column, and enter the
percentages for each column or Category to be included in the Weighted Grade.
Columns to Select – A list of all columns in the Grade Center. Select the
Column and click the arrow to add it to the Weighted Grade column.
Categories to Select – A list of all Categories in the Grade Center. Select the
category and click the arrow to add it to the Weighted Grade column.
9.
Type the percentage for each selection. To delete a selected Grade Item or Category
from consideration, click the red "x". When a Category has been selected, several other
options appear:
Select a Grading Period for the Category using the drop-down list. This will only
appear if a Grading Period has been created. Only columns within the selected
Grading Period will be included in the Weighted Grade.
Select how to weigh columns within the Category Equally or Proportionally.
Choosing Equally applies equal value to all Columns within a Category.
Choosing Proportionally applies the appropriate value to a Grade Item based
on its points compared to other columns in the Category.
Decide whether to Drop Highest or Lowest Grades within the Category or Use
only the Lowest or Highest Value to Calculate in the category. A Grade
column that is set to "no" for the Include in Grade Center Score Calculations
setting will not display in the selection list.
10.
Calculate as a running total – Select Yes to calculate the weight as a running total to
include only the Columns that have been graded. Select No to include all items.
11.
Share Weighted Grade column with users. The following permissions are selected to add
the column to My Grades:
Include this Column in Grade Center Calculations – Makes the Column
available for use in other calculations.
Show this Column to Students – Shows the column in My Grades.
Show Statistics (average and median) for this column to Students in My
Grades– Shows the Weighted Grade column statistics in My Grades.
12.
Click Submit.
The following table explains all of the fields in the Add or Edit Weighted Grade Item page:
Field
Description
Column Information
Column Name
A required field, Column Name is the formal name for the
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Item, and is displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade Center
Display Name is entered. This field will only display the first
15 characters in the column header.
Grade Center Display
Name
This appears as the column header in the Grade Center. This
field will display 15 characters in the column header.
Description
A description of the Grade Center Weighted Item column.
Primary Display
The primary grade format displayed in the Grade Center.
Based upon the Grading Schema, the display is a Score,
Percentage, Text, Complete/Incomplete, Default Schema
(Letter), or any other defined Grading Schema.
Secondary Display
A parenthetical display of a grade format, next to the primary
display in the Grade Center. The default options are the same
as the Primary Display selections.
Dates
Grading Period
The Grading Period to which this Weighted Grade Item is
assigned. A Grading Period must have been created for this
option to be available.
Date Created
The date on which the Grade Center Weighted Item was
created.
Select Columns
Include in Weighted
Grade
The Grade Center Items or Categories to be included in the
Grade Center Weighted Item.
Selected Grade Columns
and Categories
Displays the Columns and Categories to be included in the
Grade Center Weighted Item column.
Columns to Select
All of the possible Grade Center Items and Categories to
select for the Grade Center Weighted Item column.
Column Information
Displays the information for the Grade Center column,
including the Category of the column, and the Points Possible.
Selected Columns
The Grade Center columns that have been selected for the
Grade Center Weighted Item column.
Calculate as Running
Total
A running total will only include items that have been graded.
By not choosing to use a running total, non-graded items will
be included in the calculations with a value of 0.
Categories to Select
All of the possible Categories to be included in the Grade
Center Weighted Item column.
Options
Include this Column in
Grade Center
Calculations
Makes the column available for use in other calculations.
Show Column to Students
Selecting this displays the Grade Center Weighted Item
column to users.
Show Statistics (average
and median) for this
column to Students in My
Grades
Shows the Weighted Grade Column statistics in My Grades.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Total Points Columns
A Grade Center Total Points column is a grade based on the cumulative points received, related
to the points allowed.
The following items are selected to create a Total Points calculation and its column:
All Grade Columns – All individual Grade Columns added to the Grade Center.
Grade Columns in a Grading Period – All Grade Columns that have been added to a
Grading Period.
Selected Gradable Columns and Categories – Any grade Columns and any or all
Categories.
For example, an Instructor may create a column to determine the final grade for the first quarter
by creating a Grade Center Total Points column that includes all of the columns in the first quarter
Grading Period. Alternatively, an Instructor can create a Grade Center Total Points column that
displays the percentages of a particular Grade Center column, or a Category or Categories. Any
Grade Columns with text as the primary display cannot be used in the Total Points calculation.
How to Create a Total Points Column
Tip: To keep a Calculated Column in view, despite the addition of other columns, freeze the
column. For more information on this, see Freezing Columns.
1.
On the action bar, point to Create Calculated Column and select Total Column.
2.
Type a Column Name. The Column Name is the formal name for the Item, and is
displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade Center Display Name is entered. This field
displays 15 characters in the column header.
3.
Type a Grade Center Display Name. This appears as the column header in the Grade
Center. This field will only display the first 15 characters in the column header. The Grade
Center is the only area where this name is used.
4.
Type a Description. A description will help Instructors and other graders identify the
Column.
5.
Select a Primary Display option from the drop-down list. The format chosen is the
primary or only (if no Secondary Display is selected) format displayed for this Total Points
Item in the Grade Center.
6.
Select a Secondary Display from the drop-down list. This selection displays the
secondary format for this Total Points column in the Grade Center. The Secondary
Display is denoted by parentheses.
7.
Select a Grading Period from the drop-down list. This will designate to what Grading
Period the column is associated.
Note: Grading Period and the drop-down list will not display unless Grading Periods have
previously been created. For more information on Grading Periods, see Creating Grading
Periods.
8.
Select the items to be included in the Total Points column. Possible selections include the
following:
All Grade Columns
All Grade Columns in a Grading Period and select a Grading Period from the
drop-down list. This will not display unless a Grading Period has been created.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Selected Columns and Categories Select the Items from the text box and click
the arrow. Select the Categories from the text box and click the arrow. A Column
that is set to "no" for the Include in Grade Center calculations setting will not
display in the selection list. To delete a selected item from consideration, click
the red "x".
9.
10.
Calculate as Running Total – Click Yes to calculate the weight as a running total to
include only the Columns that have been graded. Select No to include all items.
Determine how to share column information with users:
Include this Column in Grade Center Calculations – Makes the Column
available for use in other calculations.
Show this Column to Students – Shows the column in My Grades.
Show Statistics (average and median) for this column to Students in My
Grades– Shows the Weighted Grade column statistics in My Grades.
11.
Click Submit.
The following table explains all of the fields in the Add or Edit Total Points column page:
Field
Description
Column Information
Column Name
A required field, Column Name is the formal name for the Item,
and is displayed in the Grade Center page if no Grade Center
Display Name is entered. This field will only display the first
15 characters in the Column header.
Grade Center Display
Name
This appears as the column header in the Grade Center. This
field will display 15 characters in the column header.
Description
A description of the Grade Center Total Points column
Primary Display
The primary grade format displayed in the Grade Center.
Based upon the Grading Schema, the display can be a Score,
Percentage, Text, Complete/Incomplete, Default Schema
(Letter), or any other defined Grading Schema.
Secondary Display
A parenthetical display of a grade format, next to the primary
display in the Grade Center. The default options are the same
as the Primary Display selections.
Dates
Grading Period
The Grading Period to which this Total Points column is
assigned. A Grading Period must have been created for it to
display.
Date Created
The date on which the Total Item was created; this cannot be
edited.
Select Columns
Include in Total
The Grade Center columns or Categories to be included in the
Total Item.
All Grade Columns
All of the columns created in the Grade Center.
All Grade Columns in
All of the columns in a particular Grading Period.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
Grading Period
Selected Columns and
Categories
Displays the possible columns and Categories to be included
in the Grade Center Total Points column.
Columns to Select
All of the possible Grade Center columns to select for the
Grade Center Total Points column.
Column Information
Displays the information for the Grade Center column
selected, including the Category of the column, and the Points
Possible.
Selected Columns
The Grade Center items that have been selected for the Grade
Center Total Points column.
Categories to Select
All of the possible Categories to be included in the Grade
Center Total Points column.
Category Information
Displays all of the selected Category‘s Grade Center columns.
Calculate as Running
Total
A running total will only include columns that have been
graded. By not choosing to use a running total, non-graded
columns will be included in the calculations with a value of 0.
Include this Column in
Grade Center
Calculations
Makes the column available for use in other calculations.
Show this Column to
Students
Selecting this displays the Grade Center Total Points column
to users.
Show Statistics (average
and median) for this
column to Students in My
Grades
Shows the Total Points column statistics in My Grades.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Creating Minimum/Maximum Columns
A Minimum or Maximum Grade column displays either the minimum or maximum grade for a
selection of Columns. This column is displayed to the Students or just the Instructor.
In creating a Minimum/Maximum Grade column, the Instructor can select from the following:
All Grade Columns – All individual Grade Columns added to the Grade Center.
Grade Columns in a Grading Period – All Grade Columns that have been added to a
Grading Period.
Selected Gradable Columns and Categories – Any Grade Columns and any or all
Categories.
For instance, an Instructor may choose to find the minimum scores of all the Tests from a
Grading Period and display it only to the Instructor. Any Columns with text as the primary display
cannot be displayed as the Minimum or Maximum.
How to Create a Minimum/Maximum Column
Tip: To keep a Calculated Column in view, despite the addition of other columns, freeze the
column. For more information on this, see Freezing Columns.
1.
On the action bar, point to Create Calculated Column and select Minimum/Maximum
Column.
2.
Type a Column Name. The Column Name is the formal name for the Item, and is
displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade Center Display Name is entered. This field
will display 15 characters in the Column header.
3.
Type a Grade Center Display Name. This appears as the column header in the Grade
Center. This field will only display the first 15 characters in the column header. The Grade
Center is the only area where this name is used.
4.
Type a Description. A description will help Instructors and other graders identify the
column.
5.
Select a Primary Display option from the drop-down list. The format chosen is the
primary or only (if no Secondary Display is selected) format displayed for this
Minimum/Maximum Grade in the Grade Center.
6.
Select a Secondary Display from the drop-down list. This selection displays the
secondary format for this Minimum/Maximum Grade column in the Grade Center. The
Secondary Display is denoted by parentheses.
7.
Select a Grading Period from the drop-down list. This will designate to what Grading
Period the column is associated.
Note: Grading Period and the drop-down list will not display unless Grading Periods have
previously been created. For more information on Grading Periods, see Creating Grading
Periods.
8.
Select the Calculation Type Minimum or Maximum.
9.
Select the items to be included in the Minimum/Maximum Grade Column. A column that
is set to "no" for the Include in Grade Center Score Calculations setting will not display in
the selection list. To delete a selected item from consideration, click the red "x". Possible
selections include:
All Grade Columns
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
All Grade Columns in Grading Periodand select a Grading Period from the
drop-down list. This will not display unless a Grading Period has been created.
Selected Columns and Categories Select the Items from the text box and click
the arrow. Select the Categories from the text box and click the arrow.
10.
Calculate as a running total – Select Yes to calculate the weight as a running total to
include only the Columns that have been graded. Select No to include all items.
11.
Share Minimum/Maximum Grade column with users. The following selections are made
to share column information with users:
Include this Column in Grade Center Calculations – Makes the Column
available for use in other calculations.
Show this Column to Students – Shows the column in My Grades.
Show Statistics (average and median) for this column to Students in My
Grades– Shows the Weighted Grade column statistics in My Grades.
12.
Click Submit.
The following table explains all of the fields in the Add or Edit Minimum/Maximum Grade column
page:
Field
Description
Column Information
Column Name
A required field, Column Name is the formal name for the
Item, and is displayed in the Grade Center if no Grade
Center Display Name is entered. This field will only
display the first 15 characters in the column header.
Grade Center Display Name
This appears as the column header in the Grade Center.
This field will only display the first 15 characters in the
column header.
Description
A description of the Grade Center Minimum/Maximum
Item column.
Primary Display
The primary grade format displayed in the Grade Center.
Based upon the Grading Schema, the display is a Score,
Percentage, Text, Complete/Incomplete, Default Schema
(Letter), or any other defined Grading Schema.
Secondary Display
A parenthetical display of a grade format, next to the
primary display in the Grade Center. The default options
are the same as the Primary Display selections.
Dates
Grading Period
The Grading Period to which this Minimum/Maximum
Grade Item is assigned. A Grading Period must have
been created for it to display.
Date Created
The date on which the Minimum/Maximum Item was
created; this cannot be edited.
Select Columns
Calculation Type
The type—either the Minimum or Maximum grade—to
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Field
Description
display in this column.
Include in Minimum/Maximum
The Grade Center columns or Categories to be included
in the Minimum/Maximum Item.
All Grade Columns
Includes all of the columns created in the Grade Center.
All Grade Columns in Grading
Period
Includes all of the columns in a particular Grading Period.
Selected Columns and
Categories
Displays the possible columns and Categories to be
included in the Minimum/Maximum Grade Item column.
Columns to Select
All of the possible Grade Center columns to select for the
Minimum/Maximum Grade column.
Selected Columns
The Grade Center columns that have been selected for
the Minimum/Maximum Item calculation.
Categories to Select
All of the possible Categories to be included in the
Minimum/Maximum Item calculation.
Category Information
Displays all of the selected Category‘s Grade Center
columns.
Calculate as Running Total
A running total will only include items that have been
graded. By not choosing to use a running total, nongraded items will be included in the calculations with a
value of 0.
Include Column in Grade
Center Calculations
Selecting this includes the column in other Grade Center
calculations.
Show this Column to Students
Selecting this displays the Grade Center
Minimum/Maximum Grade column to users.
Show Statistics (average and
median) for this column to
Students in My Grades
Shows the Minimum/Maximum Grade column statistics in
My Grades.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Working with Grade Center Reports
Instructors can create printable Reports for their Courses and Students. An Instructor can create
a Progress Report that contains all of the grades from a particular Grading Period for a defined
group of Students in a class, such as special-needs students or transfer students. This Report
can then be printed, and handed out to each Student, Parent, or Guardian.
Prerequisites and Warnings
Reports can display all or a number of Students, Groups; and Grade Columns or
Calculated Columns, a Grading Period, or all of the columns in a Category.
Reports are customized in a variety of ways, including Report header and footer
information. Reports can also include a signature line, date, Course Information, and so
on.
Reports print one Student per page.
Instructors can only choose students within the section being used to appear in the
Report. If there is more than one section of a course, a separate Report must be run for
each section.
How to Create a Report
1.
Point to Reports in the action bar and select Create Report.
2.
Select information to be included in the Header Information of the Report and type in the
appropriate fields.
3.
Select the Users to be included in the Report:
All Users: This will include all students in the Course on the Report.
All Users in Group: Select a Group to be included in the report. A Group must
be created before it is chosen when creating a Report.
Selected Users: Select one or more students in the course. To choose more
than one student, press and hold the Ctrl key and select the names with the
mouse.
4.
Select the check box if you want to Include Hidden Users in Reports.
5.
Select the User Information to be included in the report.
6.
Select the Columns to be included in the Report:
Column
Description
All Columns
Select to include all of the Grade Center columns in the
Report.
All Columns in
Grading Period
Select to display all of the columns of a particular Grading
Period in the Report.
All Columns in
Category
Select to display all of the columns of a particular Category.
Select a Category to display the Category‘s columns.
Selected Columns
Select the desired columns to be displayed in the Report.
Include Hidden
Columns in Reports
Click this check box to display any column that was hidden
from the Grade Center view.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
7.
Select the Column Information to be included in the Report. The Column Name and
Current Grade will display automatically in the Report, and these cannot be deleted.
Description: Select to display the column‘s description in the Report.
Due Date: Select to display the column‘s Due Date in the Report.
Statistics: Click and then select to display the class Average, Median, or Both
for each Calculated Column of Grade Column included in the Report.
8.
Select the Footer Information to be included in the footer of the report. It includes the
following:
Custom Text: Select and then enter any desired text to be displayed in the
footer section of the Report
Signature Line: Select to display a signature line on the report.
Date: Select to display the Report creation date on the Report. This can be
edited.
Course Information: Select to display the Course Name and Course ID on the
Report.
9.
10.
Click Preview to open the Report in a new browser window, leaving the Report creation
browser open.
Click Submit. This will display the report in a new browser window, but the Report
creation browser window will return to the Grade Center page.
How to Save a Report
1.
Point to File on the browser's menu and select Save As.
2.
Choose the save location. The Report will be saved as an Internet file.
How to Print a Report
1.
Point to File on the browser's menu and select Print.
2.
Select the appropriate options and print the Report.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Viewing Grade Center Statistics
Instructors have the ability to view various statistical information related to a column and any
User. The Column Statistics page displays numerous statistics for a Grade Item, including
average, median, standard deviation, and so on. The User Statistics page displays a User‘s
statistics in the Categories.
Note: The Statistics pages are read-only, and grades or other information cannot be edited from
this area.
How to View User Statistics
How to View Column Statistics
User Statistics
The following Student Details are displayed:
User – First name, Last name, and Username
Student ID – The Student ID number
Contact – Contact information including address, home and work phone numbers, and
email address. This information is generated from the student's User Properties.
Items Completed – The percentage and total number of Items completed in the Course
as of the present time and date.
The following Category Statistics are displayed in a table on the User Statistics page:
Column
Description
Category
All the possible Categories in the Grade Center, both created and default.
Average
The percentage value average of a particular Category.
Graded
The number of graded Items of a particular Category.
In Progress
The number of graded Items that are in progress, or incomplete.
Needs Grading
The number of graded Items that have not been graded.
Exempt
The number of Items that are exempt from grading.
How to View Statistics by User
The User Statistics page displays a User‘s statistics in the various Categories.
Within the Grade Center, open the contextual menu next to the User's first name, last name or
username and select View User Statistics.
How to Change the User Statistics Page
To view another student's data while on the User Statistics page, select the desired Student
Name from the drop-down list, and click Go. Left and right arrow buttons advance alphabetically
to the previous or following student.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
To change the statistics that are viewed on this page, select a view from the Show Statistics For
drop-down list and then click Refresh. By default, the full view of the Grade Center is shown, but
if a particular view is selected, then those statistics are shown. For more information on Smart
Views, see Creating Smart Views in the Grade Center.
How to Email a User in the User Statistics Page
To send an email to the User, click the email address of the User.
Column Statistics
The Column Statistics page displays numerous statistics for a Grade Item, including average,
median, standard deviation, and others that are defined on the following table:
Name
Description
Column
The column in the Grade Center currently being viewed.
Points Possible
The points possible for this column.
Description
The description of the column entered when the column was defined.
Statistics
Count
Number of graded items in the calculations.
Minimum Value
The lowest value of all graded columns in the Grade Center.
Maximum Value
The highest value of all graded columns in the Grade Center.
Range
The numeric range between the highest grade and the lowest grade for
an item.
Average
The statistical average of the Item.
Median
The midpoint score of the Items.
Standard
Deviation
The difference between the values of the item and the average of the
item.
Variance
A statistical measure of the spread or variation of the Items.
Status Distribution
Null
The number of null Student Grade Columns or Calculated Columns.
In Progress
The number of Student items in progress.
Needs Grading
The number of Student items that need grading.
Exempt
The number of Student items that have been exempted.
Grade
Distribution
A table that displays the statistics for the Grading Schema ranges of
the items.
How to View Statistics by Column
Within the Grade Center, open the contextual menu next to the User's first name, last name or
username and select Column Statistics.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Include Unavailable Students in the Column Statistics Page
1.
From the Show Statistics For drop-down list select All Users.
2.
Click Refresh.
How to Change Columns from the Column Statistics Page
From the Column Statistics page, the current column displaying statistics can be changed to any
other Column in the Grade Center. To view another column, select the desired column from the
Column drop-down list, and click Go. Left and right arrow buttons advance to the previous or
following column.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Sending Email from the Grade Center
Instructors can communicate using Email with Students, their Observers, and others in the Grade
Center. This form of direct contact allows Instructors to actively communicate with relevant parties
while engaged in grading in the Grade Center. Such immediate feedback can quickly lead to
intervention if required, promoting positive outcomes for students.
Email is sent from the Grade Center in two different ways, depending on whom the Instructor
would like to contact.
How to Send Email to Multiple Users from the Grade Center Page
1.
From the Grade Center page, select the Students you want to Email.
2.
On the action bar, point to Email and select the type of recipients: Email Selected
Users, Email Selected Users and their Observers, or Email Observers for Selected
Users.
3.
Fill in the Subject and Message fields on the Send Mail page.
4.
Select Include list of recipients to show the names of every user who will receive this
email.
5.
Click Attach a file to include an attachment to the message.
6.
Click Submit.
Note: Although an email is sent to the selected group, each individual recipient is not aware of
any other recipients.
How to Send Email to Individual Users in the Grade Center
1.
From the contextual menu next to a user's first or last name select Email User.
2.
Fill in the Subject and Message fields on the Send Mail page.
3.
Select Include list of recipients to show the names of every user who will receive this
email.
4.
Click Attach a file to include an attachment to the message.
5.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Saving and Reusing Grade Center Data and
Settings
Grade Center settings and data have considerable value for Instructors and institutions, providing
insight into student performance and curriculum analysis. Grade Center data is exported and
used to perform grading tasks in an external tool or to compare with past Grade Center data in
spreadsheets or other statistical applications. Grade Center settings are saved within a course
archive or copied course, ensuring consistency across course sections. Instructors who have
investing time setting up Smart Views and Grade Center Formulas will be able to retain all those
settings in archived and copied courses.
The following topics are available:
Downloading Grade Center Data
Archiving and Copying Courses
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Downloading Grade Center Data
Instructors have the ability to download Grade Center data as a delimited file that is used in other
applications such as Spreadsheet programs or statistical analysis programs. Instructors can
select specific data to download, or download the complete Grade Center data set. Downloaded
files are saved on a local computer drive or in the Content Management if it is available.
Instructors planning on uploading Grade Center data from an external application such as a
grading tool or spreadsheet may wish to download Grade Center data first in order to have a
delimited file that is formatted for uploading. For more information on uploading files to the Grade
Center, see Uploading External Grade Center Items.
How to Download Grade Center Data
1.
Point to Work Offline on the action bar and select Download.
2.
Select the data to download:
3.
Radio Button
Option
Description
Full Grade
Center
Contains all columns and associated data
Selected
Grading Period
From the drop-down list, select a Grading Period. Grading
Periods must be created before they are chosen. For more
information, see Creating Grading Periods.
Selected
Column
Using the drop-down list, select one column and its data. Check
the box to include comments for the column. Select to Include
comments for this Column if you want.
Student
Information
Only
Only columns containing student data such as User Name are
included.
Select the file delimiter, Comma or Tab.
Comma delimited files contain data surrounded by quotation marks (quote character) and
have the file extension .CSV. Comma delimited files will not open directly in Microsoft
Excel.
Tab delimited files do not contain quote characters and have the file extension .xls. Tab
delimited files will open directly in Microsoft Excel.
4.
Select whether or not to Include Hidden Information in the downloaded data. Hidden
information includes columns and students that have been hidden from the view being
downloaded.
5.
Select the location for the download. Files downloaded to My Computer will default to
the Desktop. Files downloaded to the Content Management need to be saved in a folder
in the Content Management. Click Browse to select the folder.
6.
Click Submit to finish the download.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
How to Download from the Grade History Page
The Grade History is exported as a delimited file and downloaded to local machine.
1.
On the action bar, point to Reports, click View Grade History.
2.
Click Download.
3.
Select the Delimiter Type for the file, either Comma or Tab.
4.
Select Yes to Include Comments or No to exclude them from the download.
5.
Click Submit.
6.
Click Download to save the file to a local machine.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Archiving and Copying Courses
Preserving Course material generated over the length of a Course in order to review it, reuse it,
and improve upon it is important for the continued development of quality teaching and learning.
Grade Center settings and data is saved within a Course in various ways depending on the
method of saving the Course.
Preserving Grade Center Settings and Data
Course material is copied with or without users. Copied material is added into a new Course or
into an existing Course. To copy the corresponding Grade Center columns for Assignments,
Discussion Board, Tests, and Surveys, they must be selected along with Grade Center Items and
Settings.
The table below describes the different ways that Course information and data is saved and
reused with respect to Grade Center settings and data.
Function
How Grade Center Data and Settings are Handled
Archive
Archive creates a complete copy of a Course in a zipped file format. All
cumulative grade columns, Student grades and associated settings in the
archived source Course are included in the Course package.
Restore
Restore uses an archived Course to create a new Course. All Calculated
Grade columns, Student grades and associated settings in the selected
archived Course are restored to the destination Course as part of a
Restore operation.
The default Final Total Points and Final Weighted Grade columns in the
new Course are overridden with the cumulative grade columns in the
archived Course package.
Copy Course
Materials into a
New Course
Select material from an existing Course to be copied into a new Course.
Grade Center settings from the original Course are copied into the new
Course.
All Calculated Grade columns and associated settings in the source
Course are copied to the destination Course when the Grade Center is
selected as part of the copy.
The default Final Total Points and Final Weighted Grade Columns in the
new Course are overridden with the cumulative grade columns in the
source Course.
Copy Course
Materials into an
Existing Course
Select material from an existing Course to copy into another existing
Course. Grade Center columns from the copied Course are added to any
existing Columns in the destination Course.
All Calculated Grade columns and associated settings in the source
Course are copied into the destination Course when the Grade Center is
selected as part of the copy.
The source and destination Courses are merged and nothing in the
destination is overridden. The destination Course contains all Calculated
Grade columns from both Courses. This may result in duplication of the
Final Total Points and Final Weighted Grade columns.
Copy Course
Makes an exact duplicate of an existing Course including all users and
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Function
How Grade Center Data and Settings are Handled
with Users (Exact
Copy)
their data.
All Calculated Grade columns, Student grades, and associated settings
in the source Course are copied to the destination Course.
The default Final Total Points and Final Weighted Grade Columns in the
new Course are overridden with the Calculated Grade columns in the
source Course.
Export
Select all or parts of an existing Course to add to a zipped file. Does not
include Student data.
All Calculated Grade columns and associated settings in the source
Course are included in the Course package when the Grade Center is
selected as part of an export.
Import Package
Import Package is used to upload selected Course materials from an
exported zipped file into a Course. The entire zipped file is uploaded or
just selected parts of the zipped file is uploaded.
All Calculated Grade columns and associated settings in the exported
Course package are imported to the destination Course when the Grade
Center is selected as part of an import operation.
The Course package and destination Courses are merged and nothing in
the destination is overridden. The destination Course contains all
Calculated Grade columns from both Courses. This may result in
duplication of the Final Total Points and Final Weighted Grade columns
which is allowed.
How to Archive Courses
An archived Course is an exact copy of all of the content and data in the Course, captured at the
moment the archive is created. Archived Courses are saved as zip files. Archived Courses are
downloaded and saved on a local computer or saved in the Content Management. Archived
Courses are reactivated using the Restore function on the Courses page, accessed from the
System Admin panel. To Archive a Course, follow these steps:
1.
From the Control Panel of the Course, click Export/Archive Course.
2.
Click Archive to create a new zip file.
3.
Check the box Include Grade Center Historyto add this file to the archive. If the Grade
Center History is extensive, the file size of the archive increases as well as the
processing time.
4.
Choose one of the following options to include copies of Content Management items
linked to in the Course: .
Copy links to Course Files: Select this option to copy the only the links.
Copy links and copies of the content: Select this option to copy the links and
the content.
5.
Click the check box to Include all Course Files (linked and nonlinked content).
6.
Click Submit.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About the Early Warning System
The Early Warning System is a tool used to communicate warnings to Students or Observers that
a performance problem is beginning to appear or has become more serious. Warnings are
generated based on graded performance, late or missing course work, or attendance within the
online course. The Instructor can choose to communicate a particular warning to just the Student,
the Student and a parent or advisor that is assigned as an Observer, or just the Student‘s
Observer. In addition, the Instructor has control over the message each time a warning is
communicated. The Instructor can use the default message or edit it to more accurately
communicate the seriousness of the situation.
Important Information about the Early Warning
System
When using the Early Warning System, please keep the following key points in mind:
The Early Warning System does not continuously monitor the course. The Instructor
must check the Early Warning System periodically and click Refresh to discover
incidents of Student performance that trigger an alert. The Early Warning System
consolidates these incidents and allows the Instructor to easily report problems, the
Early Warning System does not automatically detect problems and notify Students and
Observers. Remember to refresh rules manually on a regular basis.
The System Administrator may turn off access to the Early Warning System based on
policies at the institution. If the Early Warning System is on at the system-level, the
Instructor may still turn it off within the course.
The Early Warning System keeps a log of alerts sent to users. The log is searchable and
is used to verify that a Student was alerted to a problem.
Early Warning System and the Grade Center
The Early Warning System is designed to work closely with the Grade Center. Early Warning
System rules use Grade Center results to create rules and create alerts to student performance
based on those rules. In particular, the Early Warning System can trigger an alert based on
grades recorded in the Grade Center. As well, Assignments or Tests that are not completed by
the deadline may also be used to trigger an alert.
Early Warning System and the Performance Dashboard
The Performance Dashboard includes information about Early Warning System alerts. The Early
Warning Column shows the number of warnings and the number of total rules that may trigger a
warning. Clicking on the data in this column will open the Early Warning System. The Early
Warning System column will only display if the tool is turned on in the course.
See Also
Managing Early Warning System Rules
Reviewing Alerts and Notifying Users
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Managing Early Warning System Rules
Rules determine when the Early Warning System flags student performance. It is up to the
Instructor to communicate the warning to the user through the Notification Log. There are three
options for rules:
Grade Rule: Identifies when student performance on an Assignment, Assessment, or
manually graded item is equal to or below a certain level. It is also possible to set a
Grade Rule that identifies when a user exceeds a performance level. This is a useful tool
for positive feedback.
Due Date Rule: Identifies when a Student does not complete course work when it is
due. A Due Date Rule can only be used to track an Assignment or Assessment created
through the Blackboard Learning System. Due Date Rules cannot be created for
manually graded items.
Last Access Rule: Identifies the last time a Student accessed the course online. Please
keep in mind that rules are not constantly running in the background checking for
events. Regularly refresh the Early Warning System to run the rules and check for
events that will trigger a warning.
Add Rule
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
Click Grade Rule, Due Date Rule, or Last Access Rule.
4.
Type a name and availability for the rule and then set the rule criteria.
Edit Rule
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
Select Edit from the contextual menu for a rule from the list.
4.
Change the rule information and criteria.
Note: It is also possible to change the availability of a rule by selecting it, along
with several other rules if you want, from the list on the Early Warning System
page and then clicking Available or Unavailable from the action bar.
Remove Rule
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
Select one or many rules from the list.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Click Remove. Confirm that the selected rules should be deleted.
Refresh Rules
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
Select one or more rules from the list.
4.
Click Refresh from the action bar. The selected rules are run and any events that trigger
the rule creates a warning.
See Also
About the Early Warning System
Reviewing Alerts and Notifying Users
Reviewing Alerts and Notifying Users
The Early Warning System helps Instructors notifies Students and Observers when an alert is
triggered. Instructors can view alerts and send notifications simply by clicking on a rule listed on
the Early Warning System page.
Viewing Alerts
The Review Rule Status page lists all the users in the course and identifies whether or not their
performance meets the criteria for the rule and lists details regarding performance. For example,
if the Instructor set a Grade rule to trigger an alert for all users with a score less than 65, those
users with a score with less than 65 would show Yes in the Meets Criteria column. The page also
shows when the user was last notified regarding their performance. Please keep in mind that
communicating an alert to users does not happen automatically. The Instructor can customize the
message as well as who receives the alert.
Finally, click the Username to see a detailed view of the user‘s performance against all rules.
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
Click the name of a rule in the list.
4.
The Review Rule Status page appears.
Sending Email
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
click the name of a rule in the list.
4.
Select the users to notify from the list.
5.
Select a group of users to notify from the Actions drop-down list. The choices are:
Student User Only: This option will only send the notification message to the
selected Students.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Observer Users Only: This option will only send the notification to those users
assigned as Observers to the selected Students.
Student and Observer Users: This option will send the notification to the
Student and any assigned Observers.
Other: This option allows the sender to enter email addresses for the recipients
of the notification.
6.
Edit the Subject and Message and click Submit to send the notification. The notification
may include attachments. Also, the sender may copy themselves on the message.
Viewing the Notification Log
The Notification Log serves as a record of Early Warning System communications to users. The
log is used to confirm that Students were made aware of performance problems. The Notification
Log lists each notification by individual user. It includes a search function for narrowing the results
to locate a particular notification.
1.
Click Evaluation on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Early Warning System.
3.
Click Notification Log from the action bar.
See Also
About the Early Warning System
Managing Early Warning System Rules
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Organizing and Managing Content
About organizing and managing content
Content Management allows Instructors to store, share, and publish content within personal user
folders, course folders and Institution Folders. This section explains how to organize and manage
content in ways that are beneficial to them and to other users in the system.
In this section
This section includes information on the following topics:
Topic
Description
Organize content in folders
Describes how content is organized within folders.
Organize Folder Permissions
Explains how folder permissions are managed.
Tools for sharing and finding
content
Describes tools available for searching and sharing
content.
Organize Course Folders
Explains how to organize content and permissions for
Courses.
Organize Content in Folders
About Organizing Content
Before adding any content to Content Management, users should plan out how they will manage
their content. This will allow them to organize content in a way which best meets their individual
needs.
Files in Content Management are organized in a tree structure of nested folders up to, and
including, the content area level. This means that each folder may contain other subfolders and
files. The term "items" refers to files and folders.
A folder stores both files and other folders. Folders are automatically available to the user who
added the folder but must be shared if other users are to view the folder and its contents. It is
important to remember that all folders are contained within other folders up to the root (/) folder.
Root folders are folders in which all other folders are placed. Content areas, such as Users,
Courses, Institution, and Library, are simply folders stored under the root folder.
The system does not allow subfolders with the same name in a single parent folder. For example,
two folders named Group Projects may not be created in the top-level of the username folder.
The system also does not allow files with the same name to exist in a folder.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Private content space and Public content space
Creating separate folders for personal content (private space) and folders that are available to
other users (public space) is very helpful. This method allows the user to have certain folders
available only to them, where they can store personal content. For example, one personal folder
may contain papers and projects that are in progress, while another contains professional content
that is not ready to be shared, such as resumes and cover letters for jobs. Additional permissions
for these personal folders are not granted to anyone else.
When a document is ready to be shared, it may be copied or moved to a public folder. For
example, if an Instructor is working on a Course document he or she can create the draft in a
personal folder, and then move it to a shared folder when it is complete. The shared folder is
shared with all users enrolled in the class (public space that is set to be available to only course
members), and allows for collaboration.
Creating a private folder
A private folder is created in the same way as other folders in Content Management, through the
Add Folder option. The permissions granted on the folder determine whether or not it is private.
In the username folder, a private folder is a subfolder that is not shared with any other users. A
user may create a subfolder in his or her username folder and not grant any other users
permissions to it.
In a Course folder, a private folder may be specifically for the Instructor, or it may also be
accessible by users with other Course Roles. For example, a private subfolder may be created
with permissions granted to the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, and Course Builder. This folder
would not be available to any Students enrolled in the Course.
Creating a Public folder
Similar to private folders, public folders are created in the same way as other folders, using the
Add Folder option. The permissions granted on a folder determine whether or not it becomes to
multiple users and groups of users. Any user with Manage Permissions may share the item with a
wider audience.
In a username folder, a public folder may be created and shared with a group of users
collaborating on a project.
In a Course folder, a public folder may be created and shared with all users enrolled in the
Course. This folder would include course information or articles that the whole class needs to
read.
Organize Folder Permissions
Organizing Folders
It is helpful if users organize folders in a way that allows them to manage permissions by folder,
rather than by file. For example, create a folder that contains all files used in a group project. This
way the entire folder may be shared with the group members, rather than trying to manage
permissions on separate items stored in different folders.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Only Read permission should be added to a top-level folder, for example the username folder.
Anytime a Permission is added or changed on the top-level folder, check any subfolders or files
designated as Private and verify that additional permissions have not inadvertently been added
that would expose protected information.
Sharing Folders
When adding folders and files to Content Management, keep in mind which users and user lists
the content will be shared with. Try to create folders in which all items are to be shared with the
same users. When items shared with the same users are spread out among different folders, it
may become very difficult to manage. For example, if the user plans on creating documents that
will be applicable to all users at the Institution, they should create a folder that will be shared with
All System Users, then add the specific items to this folder.
Sharing files
Files are automatically available to the user that added the file but must be shared if other users
are to view the item.
Files inherit permissions from the folder they reside in. This means that if a file is added to a
folder that already has Read and Write permission for certain users or user lists, the those same
users will also have Read and Write permission on the newly added file.
Overwrite Option on Folders
When editing or adding permissions to a parent folder, the user has the option to force all files
and subfolders to inherit these permissions. For example, if the Read and Write permissions are
added to the folder, and an item within the folder has Read, Write, and Remove permissions,
Remove permissions would be deleted from the file. All subfolders and files within the parent
folder would be granted Read and Write permissions.
If this option is not selected, the files and subfolders are automatically granted any additional
permission given to the parent folder, but existing permissions are not deleted. For example, if
Read, Write and Manage permissions are added to the folder, and an item within the folder has
Read, Write, and Remove permissions, the permissions for the file would remain Read, Write and
Remove, and Manage would be added.
After editing permissions on a folder, the user may edit the permissions on an item, but these will
be overwritten the next time permissions on the parent folder are edited. This is one reason
storing items with the same purpose and audience in a single folder makes managing
permissions much easier.
Tools for Sharing and Finding Content
About Tools for sharing and finding content
A number of tools are available to facilitate sharing content and searching for content that has
been shared. These options are dependent on the level of the folder shared, for example granting
permission on a top-level folder versus a subfolder. Remember that when a folder is shared,
permissions are granted to all content in the folder.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Find Folder
The Find Folder option allows users to search for top-level folders they have permissions to, for
example if another user has granted him or her Read permission on a username folder. When a
user is granted permissions to a top-level folder, the Find Folder option allows the user to locate
the folder and add it to his or her Content Management menu, making is easy to access the folder
on a regular basis.
Users may decide to share a top-level folder with another user, and then adjust the permissions
on the content within, limiting the content this user may access. For example, grant the user Read
permission on the username folder. Then open the folder and delete Read permission for the
content this user should not view. The user may still use the Find Folder option, but they will only
view specific content in the folder.
Search
Search allows users to locate all files and folders that have been shared with them. When a
search is performed only those items to which a user has permissions will be returned. If
permissions are granted on a nested folder (and not the top-level folder) the user may search for
the folder and bookmark it; the Find Folder option may not be used on nested folders.
Go To Location
Go to Location allows users to go directly to a specific folder that has been shared with them in
Content Management. This time-saver allows users to enter the path to open a folder and
Bookmark the location at the same time.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks enable quick access to frequently used content a without having to navigate through
several folders. Bookmarks are organized into folders and subfolders as needed by the user. This
tool is helpful when permissions are granted on a nested folder, since the Find Folder tool may
not be used.
Workflow Activities
If a user is expected to take action or respond to an item, it is helpful to send a Workflow Activity
with the item. When a Workflow Activity is created users are selected to share the item with and
permissions are granted. An option may also be selected to send an email to these users stating
that this item has been shared with them and that a Workflow Activity is attached to it.
Passes
Passes may be used to share a file with a user for a specific amount of time. This is especially
useful for sharing files with users who do not have system accounts. When a pass is created, the
user decides whether to grant Read or Read and Write permission to the file with the pass. When
the time allotted for the pass is over, the user will no longer be able to access the file.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Portfolios
Portfolios allow users to collect and organize files into custom Web pages. These Portfolios can
then be presented to individuals and groups of users. It is important that users consider the
permissions granted to files that are linked to in a Portfolio. If another user has permissions (other
than Read) to a file that is linked to a Portfolio, the file may be edited or deleted, resulting in
issues for the Portfolio users.
Organize Course Folders
About course folders
a Course folder for each Course appears by default under Courses. The default roles that have
full permissions (Read, Write, Manage, and Remove) to this folder when the folder is first created
are Instructors, Teaching Assistants and Course Builders. The Administrator may edit this default.
For example, the Administrator may set it so that when a Course folder is first created, only
Instructors and TAs have full permissions. It is very important to understand which permissions
have been granted to the folder before proceeding with setting up subfolders and additional
permissions.
Any user with Manage permission on the course folder can grant additional permissions on that
folder to other users. For example, an Instructor may want to grant Read permission to all
Students in the Course to the course folder, and Read and Write permission to a public folder
created beneath the main course folder.
Storing single Course content
The temporary nature of Courses makes the course folder (tied to the Course ID) useful for
storing content that is specific to a single Course. If a Course is deleted, the folder tied to the
Course ID is no longer accessible. If content that is stored in the course folder does need to be
reused, options for copying and moving items are available.
It may be easier to store content that is used in multiple Courses in the Institution Folder or the
Instructor‘s user folder. This also depends on how the Administrator configures the Institution
Folder and its availability. Keep in mind that if Course-related content is stored in a user folder,
and it has not been shared. This content will be unavailable if the user leaves the Institution and
is deleted from the system.
Folder examples
Subfolders within the course folder may be used to store both private and public content. The
following are some examples of folders that may be created in the course folder:
Private Folder
A folder shared with the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, and other applicable Course Roles that
contain private course information, such as test and survey results. These users all have Read,
Write, Manage and Remove permission on the folder.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Note: The Instructor may decide to retain the course folder as a workspace for the
Course, and not allow users to access any items in the course folder. Instead, the
Instructor may link to Content Management items from the Course. In this scenario,
the entire course folder would be a private folder.
Group Folders
Folders shared with Course groups, which may be used as group collaboration areas. There are
a few options for setting this up:
Grant all Students in the Course Read access on the top-level course folder. Remove Read
permission for Students to all private folders. Add permissions for each group to their respective
Group folder. This option allows Students to use the Find Folder tool to locate the Group folder.
Grant each Course Group permission to their respective Group folder in the Course (do not grant
any permission for Course users to the top-level course folder). The Students may use Search,
Go To Location, and Bookmarks to locate the folder.
Public Folder
Folder shared with all Course users where they may access Course related materials, such as
the syllabus or reading list. There are a few options for setting this up:
Grant all Students in the Course Read access on the top-level course folder. Remove
Read permission for Students to all private folders. Add permissions for all Course
users to the public folder. This option allows Students to use the Find Folder tool to
locate the public folder.
Grant all Course users permissions to the public folder (do not grant any permission
for Course users to the top-level course folder). The Students may use Search, Go To
Location, and Bookmarks to locate the public folder.
Using Web Folders
WebDAV is used for sharing files over the Internet regardless of platform (Microsoft® Windows®
or Apple® Mac OS®). When put into use with Blackboard Learn, WebDAV is a means for users
to access content as if it were in any other network drive or folder on their personal computer.
Most operating systems are WebDAV compatible. All you need to connect is the web address of
the folder and a valid username and password.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator must enable Web Folders for all Courses.
Using Web Folders
Web Folders mount a folder and all its sub-folders and files to the operating system. Files may be
opened and accessed with any appropriate application for viewing and editing.
Note: When the Web Folder is opened, users should not attempt to navigate to other areas in the
directory using the Up button in the Web folder window.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
About File Names
The characters a-z, 0-9, period ‗.‘ and underscore ‗_‘ are acceptable in file names. All standard
ISO 8859 characters (not foreign characters or symbols) are also supported. All spaces will be
converted to underscores ‗_‘ in the name of the uploaded file. Special characters are not
supported in file names. There is a 255 character limit for all file and folder names. The total path
to a file or folder must not exceed 400 characters.
Set up a Web Folder in Mac OS X
1.
Access Course Files.
2.
Click Setup Web Folders from the action bar.
3.
Access the address needed for WebDAV.
After navigating to the folder that you wish to set up as a Web Folder, click Open
Web Folder. An instruction box, ―Using Web Folders,‖ appears containing the
URL needed for connection. Copy the address so you can paste it in later steps.
From the Finder menu, select Go, then select Connect to Server.
In the Connect to Server window, paste the URL you copied into the Server
Address field. Click Connect. Note that by clicking the plus sign next to the
pasted address, it can be added to Favorite Servers and you won't have to copy
the address each time.
If the WebDAV File System Authentication window appears, enter your
Blackboard Learn login username and password; click OK.
Once you are connected to the Web Folder, the Mac network icon will appear on
your desktop. The icon will have the title of the user if connecting to the My
Content folder. Double-click the icon to open the folder.
4.
Add files to the Mac network folder.
After opening the folder on your local computer, locate the file or folder you want
to transfer.
Use the drag-and-drop function to move items between the two folders. Any files
you drag into the Web Folder are copied there and will now appear in Course
Files.
When all files have been copied, close the window and drag the Mac network
icon to the trash to dismount (disconnect from) the Web Folder. If you do not
disconnect, the icon (and server connection) will remain until the computer is shut
down. If you are using a computer others use, they will have access to everything
in your Course Files folder. Note that you may see some files appear after using
the Web Folder, such as duplicate file names that begin with ._ or .DS Store.
Those may be deleted.
Set up a Web Folder in Windows
1.
Access Course Files.
2.
Click Setup Web Folder from the action bar.
3.
Locate the URL of the Web Folder you want to set up as a WebDAV folder.
Copy the URL so you can paste it in later steps.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
4.
Add a network place on your PC. This sets up a shortcut to the web folder.
From the Start Menu, click My Network Places.
Select Add a network place from the Network Tasks menu.
Within the Add Network Place Wizard, opt to "Choose another network location:
to create shortcut. "Paste the URL for your Web Folder you copied earlier and
click Next.
Enter a name for the network place when prompted and click Next.
Click Finish to close the Wizard. The Web Folder will open and will now be listed
in My Network Places. You may be prompted for your user ID and password.
5.
Use the drag and drop function to copy to copy from your computer's folder to the
WebDAV folder.
From the Start Menu in Windows, click My Network Places and select the place
you created earlier.
From the Start Menu in Windows, also open the local folder on your PC you wish
to work with.
With both the My Network Place and your local folder open, you can drag and
drop files between the two. Any files you drag to the My Network Place Web
Folder are copied there (essentially uploaded to the Blackboard server) and will
now appear in Course Files.
When all files have been copied, disconnect from the Web Folder. If you do not
disconnect, the server connection will remain until the computer is shut down. If
you are using a computer others use, they will have access to everything in your
Course Files.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Using the Content Collection
Introduction
Instructors may use items from the Content Collection throughout Courses in Blackboard Learn.
Files and Portfolios may be linked to from different areas in a Course and items from a Course
may be added to a folder in the Content Collection.
This section includes information on the following topics:
Topic
Description
Add Content Collection Items to a
Course
Explains how to add items from the Content
Collection to a Course.
Add Portfolios to a Course
Explains how to add Portfolios to a Course.
Check Collection Links
Describes how to check permissions for Content
Collection items linked to in a Course.
Copy files to Collection
Explains how to copy files from a Course to the
Content Collection.
Content Collection Items during
Export/Import and Archive/Restore
Explains how Content Collection items behave
when a Course package is imported or restored.
Course Copy and Content Collection
Items
Explains how Content Collection items function
during a Course copy.
Add Content Management Items to a Course
It is easy for Instructors to quickly add materials stored in Content Management to their
Blackboard LearnCourses. Content Management items are supported as another type of content,
such as Learning Modules, that is added to a Course.
Instructors have two options for adding items from the Content Management to a Course. Items
may be added through the Add Content Management Content option available in Content Areas,
or through the third row action buttons available in the Text Editor.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Text Editor. The third row action
buttons will not be available if this feature is disabled.
How to Add Content Management Content to a Course
Content Management Content may be added to any Content Area in a Course, such as Course
Information or Course Documents. To add an item from the Content Management to a Content
Area, follow the steps below:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Course Link.
4.
Type a Name for the link.
5.
Type a description in the text box.
6.
Click Browse next to Link to Content Management Item.
7.
Use the Course Map to select the item.
8.
Permit users to view the content item by clicking Yes.
9.
Track the number of views by clicking Yes.
10.
Choose the date and time restrictions by using the Display After and Display Until date
and time fields. Click both the Display After and Display Until check boxes to enable
the chosen dates and times.
11.
Click Submit.
How to Add a link to a Content Management item from the Text Editor
Users may add links to items in the Content Management from the Text Editor. Follow the steps
below to add a link to a Content Management item:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a Course.
2.
Open a Course area meant to hold content where the Text Editor is available, such as an
Announcement or a Discussion Board.
3.
Select an option in the third row of the Text Editor.
The Content Management item to link to is selected on the page that appears. Select Browse
next to the Link from Content Management field. The Content Management will open in a new
window. Locate the Content Management item, select it and click Submit.
It is very important that the Browse field and the Specify URL field are left blank. These fields are
not used for adding items from the Blackboard Content Management.
Depending on the type of item being added, additional options may also be available on this
page. For more information, see the Text Editor topic in this manual.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Text Editor Links. The third row
action buttons will not be available if this feature is disabled.
Permission granted to items added to Courses
When an item from the Content Management is added to a Course, all users in the Course will
automatically be granted Read permission to the item. The Permissions page for the item in the
Content Management will list All Course Users as having Read permission.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Sharing a Portfolio
Once Portfolios have been added to a Course, they may be shared with other course members or
people outside of Blackboard Learn.
How to Share a Portfolio with Users in a Course
Portfolios are made available to users through the Content Collection. Before adding Portfolios to
the Course, the Portfolio must be shared first. Follow the steps below:
1.
Click Portfolios Homepage on the Tools menu.
2.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios page.
3.
Select Edit next to the appropriate Portfolio
4.
Click Share Portfolio.
5.
Click Share with Users.
6.
Click Browse to select users.
7.
Click Send Email to notify the users that a Portfolio has been shared with them.
8.
Edit the Subject text if necessary. There is default text in the field.
9.
Edit the message text in the text box. There is default text in the Text Box.
10.
Click Send copy of message to self if necessary.
11.
Click Use blind carbon copy (Bcc:) if necessary.
12.
Click Submit.
A Course Portfolio area appears in the Course Menu. Users may view Portfolios that have been
shared with the Course in this area.
How to Share a Portfolio with External Users
Portfolios are shared with users outside of the Blackboard Learn.
1.
Click Portfolios Homepage on the Tools menu..
2.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios page.
3.
Select Edit next to the appropriate Portfolio
4.
Click Share Portfolio.
5.
Click Share with External Users.
6.
Type the appropriate email addresses in the Email Recipients field. Use commas when
entering multiple addresses:
[email protected],[email protected],[email protected]
7.
Click Send copy of message to self if necessary.
8.
Click Use blind carbon copy (Bcc:) if necessary.
9.
Click Use password and enter a password to protect the Portfolio.
10.
Click Include password in email if necessary.
11.
Determine the length of time the Portfolio is shared:
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
No expiration
OR
Lifetime: Type a number in the first field and choose a time measurement from the dropdown list.
12.
Click Submit.
How to Share a Portfolio with Courses or Organizations
1.
Click Portfolios Homepage on the Tools menu.
2.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios page.
3.
Select Edit next to the appropriate Portfolio.
4.
Click Share Portfolio.
5.
Select Share with Courses or Share with Organizations from the Other Items dropdown list.
6.
Click Browse to select courses or organizations. Use commas when entering multiple
courses or organizations.
7.
Click Submit.
Note: Once a Portfolio is shared, it must be made available in the Course before
it may be accessed by users.
How to Share a Portfolio with Institution Roles
1.
Click Portfolios Homepage on the Tools menu.
2.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios page.
3.
Select Edit next to the appropriate Portfolio.
4.
Click Share Portfolio.
5.
Select Share with Institution Roles from the Other Items drop-down list.
6.
Select the Roles and use the arrow buttons to move them to the Selected Roles field.
7.
Click Submit.
How to Share a Portfolio with All System Accounts
Allow this Portfolio to be searched by All System Accounts from Portfolio Search.
1.
Click Portfolios Homepage on the Tools menu.
2.
Click My Portfolios on the Portfolios page.
3.
Select Edit next to the appropriate Portfolio.
4.
Click Share Portfolio.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
5.
Select Share with All System Accounts from the Other Items drop-down list.
6.
Click Submit.
Copy Files to Collection
The Copy Files to Collection tool enables Instructors to copy content from their Courses in
Blackboard Learnto a folder in Content Management. This is very helpful for Instructors who have
attached files that exist outside of Content Management to Course Content Areas. Items that are
added through to Content Management may be used in new Courses, shared with other users,
and added to Portfolios.
This tool is meant for adding new content to Content Management; it does not detect Content
Management items that have been added to a Course or make changes to the Course itself.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Copy Files to Collection tool. This tool will not
be available if it is disabled by the Administrator.
Types of content that may be copied
The Copy Files to Collection tool copies files that have been attached to Course Content Areas.
These files are originally added the Course through the File to Attach option available on specific
pages in the application or the third row action buttons in the Text Editor.
The Copy Files to Collection tool copies items attached to the following:
Content folders
Content items
Course Links
Assignments
Instructions
External links
Learning Modules
Note: All attachments associated with unprotected Course Cartridges are copied; protected
cartridge content will not be copied.
Types of content that are not copied
Attachments added to the following areas of a Course are NOT added to Content Management
through the Copy files to CS tool:
Attachments added to any Assessment areas (this includes Tests, Surveys and
Question Pools)
Attachments added to Discussion Board messages, including Group Discussion
Board messages
Files uploaded to the File Exchange by Instructors
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Items added to the grade Assignment page by the Instructor are not copied. These
items include comments for a specific user and are sent when the Assignment is
graded. (Items added to the Add Assignment page by an Instructor are copied)
Student files added to a Course are also not copied, this includes:
Files uploaded to the File Exchange by users
Files uploaded by users to Assignments
Enabling Copy Files to Collection
Instructors have the option of enabling or disabling the Copy Files to Collection tool for each of
their Courses. The tool is disabled by default when a Course is created. Follow the steps below to
enable the Check Collection Links tool:
Open the Control Panel for a Course.
Select Manage Tools under Course Tools.
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
Select the check box under Available for Copy Files to Collection and click
Submit.
Note: The System Administrator may disable the Copy Files to Collection for the entire system.
This tool will not be available within Courses if it is disabled by the Administrator.
Using Copy Files to Collection
Instructors access the Copy Files to Collection tool within the Control Panel of a Course.
Follow the steps below to run the Copy Files to Collection Tool:
1.
Select Copy Files to Collection under Packages and Utilities. The Copy Files to
Collection page appears.
2.
Under Select Areas, use the check boxes for those areas that will be copied. In each
area selected, attached items will be copied to Content Management.
3.
The path in the Destination field defaults to the location of the course folder in Course
Content in Content Management. The path to a different folder may be entered. Note:
Users can only copy content to folders within Content Management to which they have
Write permission.
4.
A receipt page appears after the copy is complete. The receipt states all areas that were
successfully copied and any that have failed.
5.
The copied items will appear in Content Management in a folder named Copied Content.
Run the tool multiple times
The Copy Files to Collection tool may be run on the same Course multiple times. This may be
helpful in the following situations:
Too much or too little content was selected to copy and a clean copy is needed.
If files were copied at the beginning of the term, the process may need to be run at
the end of the term to copy additional files that have been uploaded.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Each time this tool is run, a new set of folders appears in Content Management. If the content is
copied to the same area, for example Course Content, the Copied Content folder is appended
with the number of the copy. For example, the folder created after the tool is run a second time is
named ‗Course ID‘ Copied Content (2).
File Structure in Content Management
All files copied to Content Management are stored in the destination folder selected on the Select
Areas to Copy page. All of the content from the Course is stored in a folder with the following
naming convention: ‗Course ID‘ Copied Content. The structure of files within Copied Content
mimics the structure of the files in the Course. Example
The copy from History100 included Course Documents and Course Information.
Course Documents folder contained:
a Course item with the file Syllabus.doc attached
a Course folder named Chapter One (no items attached to the folder)
In the Chapter One folder - a Course item with the file WeekOne.doc attached
Course Information folder contained:
a Course item with the file CourseOverview.doc attached. The structure of files within Content
Management will be as follows:
>History 100 folder
>History100 Copied Content folder
>Course Documents folder
>Syllabus.doc
>Chapter One folder
>WeekOne.doc
>Course Information folder
>CourseOverview.doc
Copying special file attachments
There are a few cases where copied content receives special treatment in Content Management:
Content uploaded to Blackboard Learn, as package files (for example, zip files) where the user
selected to unpackage this file are copied to the Content Collection in the zip file format with the
unpackaged items under a folder with the following format:
dir_fileattachmentname.fileextension. For example, a file called "unzipme.zip" is unpackaged
at the root of the Course Information folder. The Content Collection will have both the
unpackage.zip file at the root of the Course Information folder and also dir_unzipme.zip that
contains the contents of the original file.
All files uploaded through the Text Editor are copied to individual sub-folders named
embedded(unique#). This is also true for files uploaded through the Text field when the Text
Editor is not available.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
When an HTML file that contains references to images is uploaded, the user is prompted to
upload the images. These are "missing images". Missing images are copied to a folder with the
following format: dir_fileattachmentname.fileextension.
Copying files with the same name
Content Collection does not allow a folder to contain multiple files with the same name; this type
of duplication is permitted within Courses in Blackboard Learn. The same is true of folders with
the same name.
When files and folders with the same name are copied to the same folder in the Content
Collection, the names will be appended with a number. For example, if two files named
Syllabus.doc are copied to the same folder, they will appear as Syllabus.doc and Syllabus1.doc.
Content Management Items during Export/Import and
Archive/Restore
When a Course in Blackboard Learnis exported or archived, links to any Content Management
files are included. If a package is then imported or restored, these links are included in the
content. The behavior of these links depends on the state of the items in Content Management.
Items remain in Content Management
If the items are stored in the same location within Content Management, the links to these items
in the Course will function properly. The Instructor should check the permissions for these items
as they may need to be edited. Permissions for this item should be granted to the Course User
list so all users enrolled in the Course may access the items. If users do not have permissions to
the item, an ‗Access Denied‘ error message appears when they select the link.
Items restored or imported to a Course without Content Management
installed
If a Course package is restored or imported to a Course in Blackboard Learn and Content
Management is not installed, all of the links to Content Management items in the imported or
restored Course will be broken. This is because the Course saves a link to each item, not the
actual files.
The Instructor should delete the links to these items from the Course. If the items are accessible,
they are added to Content Management and linked to again from the Course.
Note: If Content Management is moved or deleted the same behavior described
above will occur. All of the links to Content Management items will be broken.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Course Copy and Content Management Items
Links to Content Management items in a Course are copied during a Course copy operation.
Because links to Content Management items are copied and not physical files, all users must
have permission within Content Management to view these files. Users in the new Course will not
have the appropriate permission. When a user without the appropriate permission to Content
Management item selects a link to the item in the Course, an Access Denied message appears.
The Instructor must add permission for these users to the item in Content Management or the
Administrator may enable the Copy Settings options to automatically edit permissions when a
Course is copied.
Note: The automatic permissions upgrade only applies to Courses that are copied. If
a Course is imported or restored, user permissions to Content Management items
linked to in the Course are not automatically upgraded, the above will occur. All of
the links to Content Management items will be broken.
Automatic permission updates to Content Management items
A Copy Settings option is available for Administrators to manage the permissions of Content
Management items that are copied as part of a Course copy operation. There are two options the
Administrator may enable in the system; one or both may be enabled. If these options are
enabled, the permissions for Content Management items located in almost all Course areas will
be automatically updated.
Update permissions for general links – If this option is selected, all users enrolled
in a copied Course automatically receive Read permission to Content Management
items linked to in the Course.
Update permissions for e-Reserve links - If this option is selected, all users in a
copied Course automatically receive Read permission to e-Reserves items linked to
in the Course.
Note: The one exception to this is Tests. The permissions for Content Management
items linked to in Tests, Surveys, and Questions Pools are not automatically
updated. The Instructor must update the permissions to these items manually
through Content Management.
Item permissions in Content Management
When a Content Management item is copied through Course Copy and the permissions are
automatically updated, the new permissions are visible for the item in Content Management.
When Content Management item is viewed in Content Management, Read permission will appear
for All Course Users.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Using Library Content
About the Library
Instructors can enhance their Courses by adding content from the Library. The Library is used to
post eReserves, electronic manuscripts, and other Institution resources. It allows seamless
integration with Blackboard Learn, making it a powerful way to share and distribute library
materials. This document explains how Instructors can use the library to supplement their Course
offerings.
In this section
This section includes information on the following topics:
Topic
Description
Library Areas
Describes the main areas of the Library.
eReserve Folders
Explains how eReserve Course folders are created and their
availability.
Add Library Content to
Courses
Describes how to add content from the Library to a Course.
Library Areas
About Library Areas
By default, there are two main areas within the Library, Library Content and eReserves.
Additional areas may also be added to the Library to meet specific Institution needs.
Library Content
Library Content may be organized according to the Institution‘s needs. This area is intended for
content that may be shared across the entire Institution.
User access to Library Content
All users have read access to all content within Library Content by default.
Instructor access to Library Content
Instructors may add items from Library Content to Courses within Blackboard Learn.
eReserves
eReserves are automatically organized by Course; each Course in Blackboard Learnhas a
corresponding Course in eReserves. eReserves are only available for Courses; eReserves are
not available for Organizations.
User access to eReserves
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
All users have automatic read access to eReserves for Courses they are enrolled in; eReserve
folders for other Courses do not appear in the file tree.
Instructor access to eReserves
Instructors may add items from eReserves to Courses within Blackboard Learn
Note: eReserves must be enabled by the System Administrator; if the Administrator
does not activate this area it will not appear in the Library.
eReserve Folders
Generating course folders in eReserves
Course folders within eReserves are automatically generated the first time the Instructor,
Teaching Assistant or Course Builder accesses Content Management after the Course is created.
If a Course is added to the Blackboard Learn, the eReserve course folder will appear to Course
users the first time the Instructor accesses Content Management.
Course availability and eReserves
The ability to see the eReserve folder when the Course is made unavailable depends on the
user‘s Course Role. Instructors, Course Builders, and Teaching Assistants can see the folder
whether the Course is available or unavailable. Students can only see the eReserve course folder
when the Course is available.
Course removal and eReserves
If a Course is deleted from the Blackboard Learn, the eReserve folder, and all of its content, is
also deleted.
Add Library Content to Courses
Instructors may add items from the Library to their Course Content Areas. This includes items
that appear in their course folders within eReserves, as well as items from Library Content.
Follow the steps below to add an item from the Library to a Course:
How to Add Content from the Library to a Course
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents.
2.
Edit Mode is ON.
3.
Click Item.
4.
Type a Name for the link.
5.
Type a description in the text box.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
6.
Click Browse next to Link to Content Management Item.
7.
Use the Course Map to select the item from the Library.
8.
Permit users to view the content item by clicking Yes.
9.
Track the number of views by clicking Yes.
10.
Choose the date and time restrictions by using the Display After and Display Until date
and time fields. Click both the Display After and Display Until check boxes to enable
the chosen dates and times.
11.
Click Submit.
Instructors also have the option of adding items in Content Management to Courses through the
Text Editor. The Add Item option in the third row action bar of Text Editor may be used to locate
and add items in Content Management.
Note: Only items within the eReserve course folder that correspond with that Course
may be added to the Course. Content in eReserve course folders for other Courses
you may be teaching may not be added. All items within Library Content are
available to use within a Course.
© 2010 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential. Copyright
U.S. Patent No. 6,988,138. Additional Patents Pending.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement